100% found this document useful (8 votes)

3K views

Inventor Tutorials

The document discusses Autodesk Inventor projects and tutorials related to sketching, parts, assemblies, and drawings. It provides step-by-step instructions for various modeling, assembly, and documentation tasks in Inventor.

Uploaded by

limaonoverao

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (8 votes)

3K views

Inventor Tutorials

Uploaded by

limaonoverao

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 1264

Chapter 1

Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 What are Projects? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 What Else Do Projects Control? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understand Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Examine a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Understand Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Select a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Use the Projects Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Test Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Manage Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Use Paths in Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Create a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Refine your Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Use Your Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Control Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 File Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Use Other Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Collaborate with Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Summar y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Chapter 2

Navigation

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

The ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . . Overview: SteeringWheels . . . . Hands-on Demo: ViewCube . . . . Switch Views . . . . . . . . . . . . The Shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . Orbit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . More about Orbit . . . . . . . . . Home View . . . . . . . . . . . . Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hands-on Demo: SteeringWheels . Click and Hold . . . . . . . . . . Pan and Screen Size . . . . . . . . Orbit and Pivot Point . . . . . . . Up and Down . . . . . . . . . . . Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Walk and Look . . . . . . . . . . Other Features . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . Summar y . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 20 . 22 . 23 . 23 . 23 . 24 . 24 . 25 . 25 . 26 . 27 . 27 . 28 . 28 . 28 . 29 . 29 . 30 . 30

Chapter 3

Sketch

Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 . 34 . 36 . 37 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 43 . 44 . 45 . 46 . 47 . 48 . 49 . 51 . 52

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drag Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . Drag Geometry (continued) . . . . . Drag All the Geometry . . . . . . . Rotate a Sketched Line . . . . . . . Constrain to the Origin . . . . . . . Apply a Horizontal Constraint . . . Apply a Perpendicular Constraint . . Apply a Parallel Constraint . . . . . Apply a Dimension . . . . . . . . . Apply an Angular Dimension . . . . Show All Constraints . . . . . . . . Examine Constraint Relationships . Delete a Constraint . . . . . . . . . Summar y . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4

Direct Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . Open the Sketch Profile file . . . . . . Revolve the Sketch Profile . . . . . . . Interpreting the In-Canvas Display . . Create an Offset Parallel Work Plane . Create a New Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 . 55 . 56 . 57 . 61 . 63

ii | Contents

Project Geometry onto the Sketch Plane . Draw the Sketch Geometry . . . . . . . . Mirror the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extrude the Two Sketch Profiles . . . . . . Create a Third Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . Extrude the Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Edge Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Tapped Hole . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate a Face Using the Triad . . . . . . . Summar y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 64 . 65 . 69 . 71 . 74 . 79 . 81 . 84 . 90 . 94

Chapter 5

Parts 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Create the Part from Scratch in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Viewing and Editing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Create and Pattern a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Create a Revolved Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Use Save As to Create a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Create a Concentric Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Edit the Tapped Hole Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Mirror a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Chapter 6

Parts 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Mounting Base Profile . . . Sketch on a Part Face . . . . . . . . . . Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes . Create a Tangent Work Plane . . . . . Add the Base Mounting Holes . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 . 138 . 140 . 145 . 155 . 160 . 164

Chapter 7

Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert a 2D Part and Constrain to a Solid . Create a Contact Set . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert and Constrain a Subassembly . . . . Edit a Part in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . Constrain Cylindrical Components . . . . Add the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 . 170 . 171 . 176 . 179 . 185 . 191 . 198 . 204

Contents | iii

Chapter 8

Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . View Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . Place Centerlines and Center Marks . . Place Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . Place Angular Dimensions . . . . . . . Radial and Reference Dimensions . . . Add a Hole Note . . . . . . . . . . . . Open an Assembly Drawing . . . . . . Place a Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjust Balloons and Balloon Leaders . Adjust the Leader Arrowhead . . . . . Place Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 208 . 209 . 211 . 212 . 217 . 220 . 226 . 229 . 231 . 233 . 234 . 238 . 242 . 245 . 246 . 249

Chapter 9

Drawing Styles and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the project and open the Tutorial File . Annotation Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Defaults and Standards . . . . . . . Override Annotation Styles . . . . . . . . Hatch Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Hatch Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 . 252 . 253 . 255 . 259 . 260 . 265 . 267

Chapter 10

iLogic Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . Prepare to Add Parameters . . . . Create a Numeric Parameter . . . Create a Text Parameter . . . . . Create a True-False Parameter . . Set Parameter Filters . . . . . . . Create Feature Suppression Rule . Create Feature Activation Rule . . Create Dimension Rule . . . . . Test for Range of Values . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 . 271 . 272 . 272 . 274 . 275 . 276 . 287 . 289 . 294 . 298

Chapter 11

The Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

iv | Contents

Interface Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . Set the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Sketch Geometry . . . . . . . . . Finish the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extrude the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch to an Environment . . . . . . . . . Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Command to Quick Access Toolbar . Use File Tabs and Edit the Part . . . . . . . Increase Screen Space . . . . . . . . . . . Create Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . Create Parts List and Annotation . . . . . Customize Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Your Own Tab Panels . . . . . . . . Export Tab Settings to XML . . . . . . . . Using Access Points through the Browser . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 300 . 302 . 302 . 303 . 304 . 306 . 307 . 307 . 308 . 308 . 309 . 311 . 312 . 313 . 313 . 318 . 319 . 319 . 321 . 324 . 327 . 327 . 329

Chapter 12

Content

Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 . 332 . 333 . 335 . 335 . 336 . 338 . 340 . 343 . 344 . 345

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . Review Content Center Configuration . Place from Content Center Dialog Box . Browse in Content Center Library . . . . Place Content Manually . . . . . . . . . Create iMates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Content Manually Using iMates . . Use AutoDrop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resize Standard Content . . . . . . . . . Replace Standard Content . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 13

Sketch Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

About this tutorial . . . . . . . Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . Create Sketch Blocks . . . . . . Edit Sketch Blocks . . . . . . . Format Sketch Blocks . . . . . Nested Flexible Sketch Blocks . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 . 348 . 349 . 352 . 355 . 359 . 367

Contents | v

Chapter 14

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the External Table . . . . . . . . Finish the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . Review Parameter Assignment Process . Open a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Parameters . . . . . . . . . . Link Your External Table . . . . . . . . . Prepare to Assign Parameters . . . . . . Modify Your Sketch Dimensions . . . . . Modify the Two Extrusions . . . . . . . Modify the Chamfer Feature . . . . . . . Modify the Hole Feature . . . . . . . . . Control Your Part with Parameters . . . Update Your Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 . 370 . 371 . 372 . 373 . 374 . 375 . 377 . 379 . 379 . 381 . 383 . 384 . 385 . 386 . 386

Chapter 15

iLogic - Part Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the Sample Model . . . . . . . Open a Part Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Port Size Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . Create Block and Component Type Parameters . Define a Model Rule to Control Port Visibility . Test the Block Shape Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage Part Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . Test the Port Size Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Block Size Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the Component Type . . . . . . . . . . . . Reorder Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Driving Rule Values . . . . . . . . . . . Update iProperties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test the iProperties Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rule Text Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 . 391 . 391 . 392 . 393 . 394 . 396 . 398 . 403 . 404 . 408 . 409 . 410 . 410 . 411 . 412 . 412

Chapter 16

iLogic - Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start a New Assembly File . . . . . . . . . . Customize Components Before Assembly . . Edit iLogic Parts from Within an Assembly . Add Control Parameters for Assembly . . . . Create Rules in the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 . 422 . 425 . 427 . 435 . 436

vi | Contents

Calculate Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . Write Information to an Excel Spreadsheet . Test Your Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rule Text Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. 448 . 454 . 458 . 459 . 460

Chapter 17

Derived Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . Create a Part File . . . . . . . . . Create a Derived Part . . . . . . . Understand Derived Parts . . . . Add Features to the Derived Part Modify the Parent Part . . . . . . Update the Derived Part . . . . . Protect the Derived Part . . . . . Restore and close the parent file . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 . 479 . 479 . 480 . 481 . 482 . 484 . 484 . 486 . 486

Chapter 18

iFeatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
About this tutorial . . . . . . . Create an iFeature . . . . . . . Insert an iFeature . . . . . . . . Place an iFeature . . . . . . . . Modify the iFeature File . . . . Place iFeatures from a Family . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 . 491 . 492 . 494 . 496 . 499 . 500

Chapter 19

Content Center User Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Standard and User Libraries . . . . Enable Edit of a Part Family . . . . . . . . . . Edit the Family Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify the Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Save Copy As to Create a Family . . . . . Edit Family Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify Your Edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepare a Part to Publish to Content Center . Publish to Content Center . . . . . . . . . . . Verify the Published Part . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 . 502 . 503 . 504 . 505 . 506 . 507 . 507 . 508 . 511 . 512 . 514

Chapter 20

Top-down Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Contents | vii

Place and Constrain a Sketch Block Instance . Make Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset Components from the Layout Plane . . Add Features and Demonstrate Associativity . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. 517 . 521 . 524 . 529 . 533

Chapter 21

Substitute Level of Detail Representations . . . . . . . . . . . 535

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open sample file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workflow Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . Derived In-place Part Method . . . . . . . Create the Derived Part . . . . . . . . . . The Substitute Representation . . . . . . . Use the Substitute Representation . . . . . Compare Memory Usage . . . . . . . . . . Part-on-disk Method . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Substitute Representation . . . Guidelines for Creating a Substitute Part . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 . 538 . 538 . 540 . 542 . 543 . 544 . 545 . 545 . 547 . 547 . 549

Chapter 22

Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
About this tutorial . . . . . Get Started . . . . . . . . . A Word about Color . . . . Create Tweaks . . . . . . . Tweak Clamp.ipt . . . . . . Tweak the Retaining Ring . Place an Exploded View on Edit the Explosion . . . . . Associative Drawing View . Rotational Tweaks . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 . 552 . 554 . 556 . 560 . 561 . 563 . 564 . 568 . 568 . 571

Chapter 23

Plastic Parts and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

About this tutorial . . . . . . . Split the Solid . . . . . . . . . Create the Grill . . . . . . . . . Create a Rule Fillet . . . . . . . Create a Rest . . . . . . . . . . Create a Lip . . . . . . . . . . Create a Body Using Split . . . Create a Segmented Lip . . . . Create a Snap Fit . . . . . . . . Add a Rule Fillet to a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 . 576 . 578 . 583 . 586 . 587 . 593 . 595 . 600 . 605

viii | Contents

Create a Boss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Holes to a Single Body . . . . . . Insert a Toolbody Using Derive . . . . Moving Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use the Combine Command . . . . . Create a Body Using Revolve . . . . . Export the Design as Individual Parts . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 607 . 617 . 617 . 618 . 620 . 621 . 622 . 623

Chapter 24

Studio - Renderings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

About this tutorial . . Get Started . . . . . . Activate Studio . . . . Render . . . . . . . . Change Styles . . . . Change Appearance . Save Image . . . . . . Image Extents . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 . 626 . 626 . 626 . 627 . 627 . 628 . 628 . 628

Chapter 25

Studio - Animations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activate Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start at the Beginning . . . . . . . . . . . Watch Your Animation . . . . . . . . . . Configure the Animation . . . . . . . . . Animate Camera Viewpoint . . . . . . . . Animate Camera Viewpoint (continued) . Animate Camera Viewpoint (continued) . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 . 630 . 630 . 630 . 630 . 631 . 632 . 633 . 633 . 633

Chapter 26

Studio - Positional Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Sample File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Three Positional Representations . . . Define the First Positional Representation . . Define the Second Positional Representation . Define the Third Positional Representation . . Activate Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduce the Timeline Length . . . . . . . . . . Create the First Animation . . . . . . . . . . . View the Keyframes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Second Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 . 636 . 637 . 638 . 640 . 642 . 642 . 643 . 643 . 644 . 645

Contents | ix

Create the Third Animation . Play the Animation . . . . . Edit the Animation . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. 645 . 646 . 647 . 647

Chapter 27

Skeletal Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . Open the Sample Model . . . . . . Create an Assembly . . . . . . . . Create a Frame Leg . . . . . . . . . Create a Frame Subassembly . . . . Create a Diagonal Tube . . . . . . Add a Second Horizontal Tube . . . Derived Surface from Skeleton . . . Complete the Frame Subassembly . Assembly Update . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 . 650 . 654 . 658 . 659 . 663 . 665 . 667 . 671 . 673 . 674

Chapter 28

iCopy:

Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 . 678 . 680 . 680 . 685 . 688 . 688 . 690

Use iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Target Assembly . . . . . . . . . iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constrain iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . Constrain iCopy - Path Pattern . . . . Copy and Reuse iCopy Components . iCopy: File Names . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 29

Use

iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691 . 692 . 694 . 696 . 696 . 697 . 700 . 701 . 710 . 713 . 714 . 717 . 726 . 728 . 736

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . Open the Template Layout Part . . . . Create the iCopy Template Assembly . Constrain the Template Layout Part . . iCopy Author - Layout tab . . . . . . . iCopy Author - Geometry tab . . . . . iCopy Author - Parameter tab . . . . . Test the iCopy Definition . . . . . . . Create a Frame Part . . . . . . . . . . Complete the Assembly . . . . . . . . Constrain the Frame Part . . . . . . . Test the iCopy Definition . . . . . . . Place the Support Plates . . . . . . . . Test the iCopy Definition . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

x | Contents

Chapter 30

Splines and Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Spline Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Spline Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Lofted Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Top of the Object Using Replace Face . Split the Part into Two Solid Bodies . . . . . . . . . Create Another Split Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Split the Part to Create a Third Solid Body . . . . . Isolate the Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Offset Surface and Trim . . . . . . . . . . Create an Embossed Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Vented Opening Using Grill . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 741 . 745 . 747 . 749 . 752 . 757 . 765 . 766 . 767 . 772 . 775 . 781

Chapter 31

Bolted Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place the Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place the Holes (continued) . . . . . . . . . . Place the Holes (continued) . . . . . . . . . . Add the Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Existing Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Bolted Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Hole Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Bolted Connection Direction . . . . . Change Configuration of Bolted Connection . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783 . 784 . 786 . 787 . 789 . 790 . 795 . 800 . 805 . 809 . 812 . 818

Chapter 32

Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Assembly File . . . . . . . . . . . Start the Shaft Generator . . . . . . . . . . 2D and 3D Dynamic Preview . . . . . . . . Add Shaft Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Shaft Element Type . . . . . . . . . Change Dimensions of First Shaft Section . . Change Dimension of Third Shaft Section . Change Dimensions of Cone Section . . . . Change Dimensions of the Next Section . . Add and Edit the Last Shaft Section . . . . . Insert Cylindrical Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819 . 820 . 821 . 821 . 822 . 823 . 825 . 826 . 826 . 827 . 830 . 831 . 832 . 834

Contents | xi

Add Shaft to Templates Library . . . . . The Calculation Tab . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Loads and Perform Calculation . File Name Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert the Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit the Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 835 . 836 . 836 . 838 . 839 . 840 . 841 . 842

Chapter 33

Spur Gears Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Sample File and Start Generator . . . . . Spur Gears Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Gear Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place the Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place the Second Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perform the Calculation and Set File Names . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845 . 846 . 847 . 851 . 853 . 856 . 859 . 860 . 862

Chapter 34

V-Belts Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select the Belt Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Belt Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select First Pulley Type . . . . . . . . . . . Set First Pulley Position . . . . . . . . . . Select Second Pulley Type . . . . . . . . . Set Second Pulley Position . . . . . . . . . Change Pulley Properties . . . . . . . . . Specify the Second Pulley Final Position . File Name Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863 . 864 . 865 . 867 . 868 . 868 . 870 . 871 . 872 . 872 . 873 . 874 . 876

Chapter 35

Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . Select the Shaft Cylindrical Face and Select Type of Bearing . . . . . . . . Set Filter Parameters . . . . . . . . . Update the Bearing List . . . . . . . Select Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . Perform the Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877 . 878 . 879 . 882 . 882 . 883 . 883 . 884

xii | Contents

Insert First Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start the Generator and Specify Bearing Filter Value . Select Bearing Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place and Insert Second Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. 884 . 885 . 887 . 887 . 890

Chapter 36

Disc

Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891 . 893 . 894 . 895 . 896 . 897 . 898 . 899 . 900 . 901 . 902

About this tutorial . . . . . . . Start the Generator . . . . . . . Specify Disc Cam Placement . . Specify Disc Cam Parameters . Set Segment Values . . . . . . . Adding Segments . . . . . . . . Create Your Own Motion File . Perform the Calculation . . . . File Name Settings . . . . . . . Place Constraints . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 37

Compression

Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905 . 907 . 908 . 912 . 914 . 915 . 917

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Compression Spring Placement and Load . . Measure the Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perform the Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert the Compression Spring into the Assembly . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 38

Weldments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . Welding Steps Overview . . . . . . . . . Weldment Feature Groups . . . . . . . . Open an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . Weld Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead . . . . . . . Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead (continued) . Complete the Cosmetic Weld . . . . . . Weld Extents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Complete the Weld Extent . . . . . . . . Create a 3D Fillet Weld . . . . . . . . . . Complete the 3D Fillet Weld . . . . . . . Change Weld Symbol Visibility . . . . . Add a Machining Feature . . . . . . . . Add a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919 . 920 . 922 . 924 . 925 . 926 . 927 . 928 . 930 . 930 . 931 . 932 . 934 . 934 . 935

Contents | xiii

Add an Extrude Cut . . . . . . Complete the Sketch . . . . . . Extrude the Sketch . . . . . . . Feature Rollback . . . . . . . . Create a Weldment Drawing . . Place Drawing Views . . . . . . Complete Orthographic Views . As-machined Drawing Views . Projected Drawing Views . . . . Retrieve Weld Symbols . . . . . Add a Caterpillar . . . . . . . . Add a Caterpillar (continued) . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 936 . 937 . 937 . 939 . 940 . 940 . 941 . 942 . 943 . 944 . 945 . 946 . 948

Chapter 39

Sheet Metal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . Prepare Your Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Open Profile . . . . . . . . . Create a Contour Flange . . . . . . . . . Complete the Contour Flange . . . . . . Place a Flange Feature . . . . . . . . . . Prepare to Sketch Punch Center Marks . Sketch Punch Centers . . . . . . . . . . Punch Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Punch Holes (continued) . . . . . . . . Mirror the Punched Holes . . . . . . . . Create the Flat Pattern . . . . . . . . . . Flat Pattern Drawing Annotation . . . . Place a Punch Table . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950 . 952 . 954 . 956 . 958 . 960 . 963 . 965 . 968 . 971 . 973 . 975 . 976 . 979 . 981 . 983 . 985

Chapter 40

Sheet Metal Parts 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 Lofted Flange - Select Profile Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 Lofted Flange - Create the Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993 Rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994 Rip (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998 Flatten the Ripped Lofted Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 Bend Order Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005 Directed Reorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007 Sequential Reorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 Cosmetic Centerlines - Create Sketched Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012 Cosmetic Centerlines - Convert Sketched Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015

xiv | Contents

Contour Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Contour Roll Profile Geometry . Create a Contour Roll . . . . . . . . . Create a Second Contour Roll . . . . . Add another Contour Flange . . . . . . Flatten the Rolled Tube . . . . . . . . . Unfold and Refold Feature Pair . . . . . Continue Unfold Selection . . . . . . . Partially Unfold the Tube . . . . . . . . Complete the Unfold Feature . . . . . Add a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pattern the Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Two Refold Features . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 1017 . 1019 . 1022 . 1023 . 1026 . 1028 . 1030 . 1032 . 1036 . 1040 . 1044 . 1046 . 1048 . 1050

Chapter 41

Sheet Metal Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit the Project and Open the Sample File . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a New Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Gauge and Material . . . Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Bend and Corner Relief . Save Styles to Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Sample Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Sheet Metal Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheet Metal Defaults and Editing Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheet Metal Defaults and the Flat Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054 . 1056 . 1057 . 1057 . 1058 . 1060 . 1062 . 1063 . 1065 . 1069 . 1071 . 1071 . 1073

Chapter 42

Frame Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075

About this tutorial . . . . . . Get Started . . . . . . . . . . Skeletal Model . . . . . . . . Insert Profile . . . . . . . . . Profile Orientation . . . . . . Create Profile . . . . . . . . . Place the Upper C-channel . . Orient the Upper C-channel . Place the Lower C-channels . Place the Horizontal tube . . . Place the Angle Braces . . . . Lengthen Profile . . . . . . . Notch Profile . . . . . . . . . Create Miter Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075 . 1077 . 1077 . 1079 . 1081 . 1086 . 1087 . 1090 . 1091 . 1094 . 1097 . 1098 . 1100 . 1102

Contents | xv

Change Miter Joint Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove End Treatments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-create Miter Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cut Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Profile Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify the Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Profile - Insert Frame Members . . . . . . . . . Insert Profile - Select Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Profile - Position First Vertical Member . . . . . Insert Profile - Position Remaining Vertical Members . Lengthen Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Miter Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Profile - Place Other Members . . . . . . . . . . Insert Profile - Add Support Members . . . . . . . . . Cut Profile - Trim Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lengthen Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notch Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Profile - Point To Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cut Profile - Trim Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 1103 . 1106 . 1108 . 1109 . 1114 . 1117 . 1118 . 1118 . 1119 . 1119 . 1121 . 1122 . 1123 . 1127 . 1129 . 1130 . 1132 . 1135 . 1138 . 1141 . 1142 . 1145 . 1147 . 1152 . 1155

Chapter 43

DWG Data 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159

About this tutorial . . . . . . Open a New Part File . . . . . Import DWG Data . . . . . . Extrude Sketch Geometry . . Orient the Part . . . . . . . . Change the Part Appearance . Save the Part . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160 . 1161 . 1162 . 1163 . 1165 . 1166 . 1167 . 1168

Chapter 44

DWG Data 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169

About this tutorial . . . . . . Open Part and Access DWG . Import DWG . . . . . . . . . Extrude Sketch Geometry . . Create a Round . . . . . . . . Create a Shell . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170 . 1171 . 1172 . 1173 . 1176 . 1181 . 1186

xvi | Contents

Chapter 45

DWG Data 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create New Assembly File . . . . . . . . . . . Create In-place Component . . . . . . . . . . Insert DWG Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extrude Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Rounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Cut Extrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show Origin Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unconstrained Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounded Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constrain the Panel Part - Display Planes . . . Constrain the Panel Part - First Constraint . . . Constrain the Panel Part - Second Constraint . Constrain the Panel Part- Third Constraint . . Constrain the Cover Part - Place Constraint . . Constrain the Cover Part - Finish Placement . Final Constraint - Mate or Flush? . . . . . . . View the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189 . 1191 . 1192 . 1193 . 1194 . 1196 . 1199 . 1201 . 1208 . 1209 . 1210 . 1212 . 1213 . 1213 . 1214 . 1214 . 1215 . 1216 . 1219 . 1221 . 1222 . 1224

Chapter 46

Alias to Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227

About this tutorial . . . . . . Translate the Alias Wire File . Update the Inventor Part . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227 . 1229 . 1234 . 1242

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245

Contents | xvii

xviii

Projects

About this tutorial

Create a project to manage files.

Category Time Required New Users 20 minutes

Tutorial File Used

Start a new project file

This exercise explains the purpose and function of the Autodesk Inventor project file (*.ipj file). You do not need to complete this tutorial to complete any of the other tutorial exercises. If you are working for a company that already uses Autodesk Inventor, the chances are good the company already has one or more existing project files. If so, consult the CAD Manager or a co-worker to determine the company policy regarding project files. You may be able to set the proper project file and move on to the other exercises. This tutorial is intended to provide a "best practices" example in which a single project file controls all the searchable directories. The single master project file technique provides stability and simplicity. It also makes the data more accessible to document control systems such as Vault or Productstream. NOTE A master project file supports the use of other project files. You can create multiple project files if they are needed for prototyping or other development work. If multiple project files are required, they should be located in subfolders beneath the master project folder for stability and simplicity. Objectives Learn about Project file options.

Create a simple project file to introduce the concepts Inventor uses to manage files.

Prerequisites Inventor is installed.

Inventor is open in a blank document state. Desire to learn how to create Project files.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 3)

2 | Chapter 1 Projects

What are Projects?

Relationships exist between the various files you create with Autodesk Inventor. Projects files are text files saved in an xml format that specify the valid file locations for Autodesk Inventor data. For example, a part is usually linked to both an assembly and a drawing document. To avoid broken links or browsing for files that were not found, an understanding of Project files is essential. If you plan on using a data management solution such as Autodesk Vault or Productstream, a clean file folder structure and a single master project file can ease the transition. A single master project file provides: Simplicity

Reduced file resolution failures Increased design re-use

Autodesk Inventor actively supports two types of projects: Single-user project

What are Projects? | 3

Vault project (If Autodesk Vault is installed)

We recommend using Autodesk Vault for users whose sharing requirements extend beyond a single-user project. Vault provides a file check-out and check-in process which prevents files from being accidentally overwritten. Autodesk Vault also contains other powerful file management tools such as easily copying an entire design. For more information on Autodesk Vault and the Autodesk Data Management Server, please refer to the Implementation Guide. This guide is delivered in .pdf format with Vault. Previous (page 1) | Next (page 4)

What Else Do Projects Control?

The following list summarizes a few of the purposes and features of projects. The Styles Library folder identifies where the program stores project-specific styles definitions.

The Templates folder identifies where the program stores file templates. The Content Center Files folder identifies the root folder for the Content Library files of the project. The Libraries folders store standard components. The Frequently Used Subfolders create shortcuts to folders deeply nested within project locations.

You create, modify, and manage your projects using the Projects editor. You can access the Projects editor dialog box from Autodesk Inventor, or externally from the Microsoft Windows Start menu. Previous (page 3) | Next (page 4)

Understand Projects
All projects contain the following parameters: Workspace location (or a workgroup location)

Styles folder, Templates folder, and a location for Content Center Components Project options

4 | Chapter 1 Projects

Projects can also contain any of the following parameters: Included project file

Library search paths Frequently used subfolders

A simple project typically contains a workspace parameter, and perhaps some subfolders and library search paths.

Previous (page 4) | Next (page 5)

Examine a Project
When you install Autodesk Inventor, it creates a Default project, an iLogic Samples project, and a tutorial_files project automatically. Examine a simple project: 1 Close any open Autodesk Inventor files.

2 Click

Manage Projects.

Examine a Project | 5

3 Click tutorial_files in the upper pane of the Projects editor dialog box. The contents of the file display in the lower pane of the Projects editor.

6 | Chapter 1 Projects

Previous (page 4) | Next (page 7)

Understand Workspaces
In addition to the default Folder Options and Options parameters, the tutorial_files project contains only one other parameter, a workspace location. It is the simplest type of project. The workspace points to the folder where your tutorial exercise files are installed. When this project is active, the Open, Save, and Place Component dialog boxes default to this location. Only one workspace can be defined in a single-user project.

Previous (page 5) | Next (page 7)

Select a Project
To select a project and make it the active project. 1 In the top pane of the Projects editor, locate the name of the project; in this case, locate the tutorial_files project. 2 Double-click tutorial_files.

Understand Workspaces | 7

A check mark appears next to the project name, indicating that it is the active project file.

In the lower pane, the workspace path is absolute and defined as "Location = (wherever you installed Autodesk Inventor)\Inventor {version}\Tutorial Files\." Previous (page 7) | Next (page 8)

Use the Projects Editor

In the upper section of the Projects editor you can create, rename, and delete projects (excluding the Default and tutorial_files projects). You can also browse for existing projects. In the lower section, you can modify the parameters of the current project. Right-click to access context menus with available options, or use the commands at the bottom and side of the editor.

8 | Chapter 1 Projects

Previous (page 7) | Next (page 9)

Test Project Settings

Next, test the project settings. 1 Click Done to close the Projects dialog box.

2 Click

Open.

The Tutorial Files folder opens, and its files and subfolders are listed. If you hover over the Workspace entry in the Open dialog box, the tooltip indicates that the Tutorial Files folder is defined as your workspace. In addition, any libraries and subfolders that you define are also accessible here.

Test Project Settings | 9

Previous (page 8) | Next (page 11)

10 | Chapter 1 Projects

Manage Projects
You use the Projects editor to manage your designs. You can create new projects as you need them, and modify existing projects when paths change or new paths are required. Place common search paths (such as library search paths) in a separate project file. You can then specify this file as the included project file in your other project files. All search paths in the included project file are added to the current project file.

Previous (page 9) | Next (page 11)

Use Paths in Projects

If you are working alone, your single-user project might only contain a workspace and perhaps one or more library paths for files such as standard fasteners. NOTE If you are working as part of a team, consider using Autodesk Vault, and discuss project and file-sharing strategies with team members.

Manage Projects | 11

Use the Projects editor from Autodesk Inventor or from the Microsoft Windows Start menu to maintain and manage your projects.

Previous (page 11) | Next (page 12)

Create a Project
Next, we create a project. 1 Create a folder on your local hard drive in the My Documents area. Name the new folder InventorMasterProject. 2 Locate the Tutorial Files folder in the Autodesk Inventor install directory. 3 Copy the Arbor Press folder to the InventorMasterProject folder. Notice that the Arbor Press folder contains two subfolders to further organize the data files. 4 Start Autodesk Inventor in a blank document state.

12 | Chapter 1 Projects

5 If the Projects dialog box is not currently open, close any open files, and then click Manage Projects.

6 Click New at the bottom of the dialog box. 7 Click New Single User Project, and then select Next on the Autodesk Inventor project wizard dialog box that appears. 8 In the Name field, enter: InventorMasterProject 9 In the Project (Workspace) Folder, select Browse to navigate to the InventorMasterProject folder. 10 Select InventorMasterProject from the folder list and click OK to close the Browse For Folder dialog box. 11 Click Finish in the Inventor project wizard dialog box to create the project. Autodesk Inventor adds the new project to the list of your other projects and makes the new project the currently active project. Previous (page 11) | Next (page 13)

Refine your Project

Now we will refine the project with additional settings. 1 In the lower panel of the Projects editor, select Use Style library. 2 Right-click, and choose Read-Write in the context menu. Setting the Style Library option to Read-Write enables read/write capabilities for the xml files that control styles such as dimensioning, materials, and appearances. 3 Select Libraries, and right click to access the context menu. 4 Choose Add Path in the context menu. Inventor creates a folder named Library under the InventorMasterProject folder. NOTE Library folders are used to hold standard components that do not change. You can store library files on a shared, read-only network folder to provide access for all users. Files placed in a project libraries folder cannot be edited in the context of the project file. To edit a file that resides in a defined project file library

Refine your Project | 13

location, create a project file that does not list this directory as a project library folder. If you edit a file saved in an active library location, the following message displays: Cannot modify the library file C:\My Documents\InventorMasterProject\Library\<filename>. TIP To create a separate folder for library files without limiting the edit abilities, do not use the project to define the Library. Instead, create a library folder with the required name nested under the project file folder. 5 Select Frequently Used Subfolders, and right-click to access the context menu. Use Add Path to add one directory folder at a time. You can provide a unique shortcut name for each folder added.

Use Add Paths from File to specify another project file to add paths. Use Add Paths from Directory to add all subfolders beneath the selected folder to the subfolder list.

6 Select Add Paths from Directory, and select the Arbor Press folder. 7 Click OK to close the Browse For Folder dialog box. Notice that the subfolders located beneath the Arbor Press folder appear in the Projects dialog box. 8 Click Save, and then click Done to close the Projects dialog box. NOTE In the future, press Esc to exit any Add Path operation without adding a path. Previous (page 12) | Next (page 14)

Use Your Project

1 Click Open.

Notice the Workspace is the InventorMasterProject folder. The Open dialog box shows all the subfolders contained in the root of the workspace. 2 In the upper-left panel of the Open dialog box, choose the Components folder under Frequently Used Subfolders.

14 | Chapter 1 Projects

3 The Components folder containing the arbor press part files opens. 4 To navigate back to the root of the workspace, click Workspace in the upper-left panel. Notice the Content Center Files folder is listed as an available Library in the left panel. 5 Click Cancel to close the Open dialog box. Previous (page 13) | Next (page 15)

Control Projects
In the Projects Editor dialog box, use the right-click context menus in the upper pane to: Rename existing projects.

Browse for existing projects. Create new projects. Delete existing projects.

You can directly edit the various parameters in the current project using context menus to add, change, and delete paths. You can also change optional settings for a project, including the number of file versions to store. Previous (page 14) | Next (page 15)

File Versions
Each time you save an Autodesk Inventor file, the previous version of the file is stored in an OldVersions folder under the folder containing the file. You can specify how many versions of each file are stored in the OldVersions folder. 1 Expand Options. 2 Select Old Versions To Keep On Save. 3 Click the Edit selected item button (on the right-hand portion of the dialog box). 4 Enter the number of versions to keep.

Control Projects | 15

Once the specified number of saved versions is reached, subsequent saves eliminate the oldest version. Old versions are formatted as follows: First save of existing file = file name.0001.extension.

Second save of existing file = file name.0002.extension. Subsequent saves are named in a similar manner.

You can open an older version of a file as a read-only file. Alternatively, you can restore an old version as the current version of the file. Before the restoration of an old version, the file is saved as the most recent version in the OldVersions folder. NOTE Assembly files always use the current version of parts included in the assembly. Old versions of assembly files do not retain information on the part and subassembly versions that were in effect when you saved the assembly. Previous (page 15) | Next (page 16)

Use Other Paths

In addition to a workspace, you can also define library and subfolder search paths. Search paths are examined in a specific order when opening a file (for example, an assembly) that references other files. The Using Unique File Names option determines how Autodesk Inventor behaves when searching for missing file references. When this option is Yes, Autodesk Inventor searches the entire project workspace and workgroups (including subfolders) for a file with that name. If a file with that name is found, Autodesk Inventor uses it. If more than one is found, then Autodesk Inventor displays a dialog box listing all the files with that name. If the missing file name is not found, Autodesk Inventor activates the Resolve Link dialog box, where you can provide input as needed.

When set to No, Autodesk Inventor uses its normal search process.

16 | Chapter 1 Projects

Previous (page 15) | Next (page 17)

Collaborate with Others

The primary collaborative environment for Autodesk Inventor is Autodesk Vault. Autodesk Vault is an engineering data management system that offers file security, version control, and multi-user support. By using Autodesk Vault, you have a copy of the necessary project data in your workspace. All previous versions are maintained in a vault repository, which can be either on your own computer or on a shared server. Autodesk Vault manages a collaborative work environment by tracking file versions. Other users can get the latest version of data, modify it, and check the changes back into the vault. NOTE Autodesk Inventor also continues to support two other legacy project environments: shared and semi-isolated. Discuss these project types with your system administrator or CAD Manager if your site is currently using either.

Collaborate with Others | 17

Previous (page 16) | Next (page 18)

Summary
This tutorial introduced you to single-user project fundamentals including: Understanding projects

Working with projects Creating a simple project Testing a new project file

If you are working with an existing collaborative team of Autodesk Inventor users, discuss their use of the legacy project types: shared and semi-isolated. We recommend that you use Autodesk Vault for team collaboration. Previous (page 17)

18 | Chapter 1 Projects

Navigation Tools

About this tutorial

ViewCube SteeringWheel

Navigate in 3D space.
Category Time Required Tutorial File Used New Users 20 minutes

Understand view tools to help navigate 3D model space efficiently.

Prerequisites Know how to open files.

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. NOTE The ViewCube and SteeringWheels appear in several Autodesk products. Some of the features and functions of these tools might not be appropriate for a particular workflow. Next (page 20)

The ViewCube

20 | Chapter 2 Navigation Tools

The ViewCube is an on-screen device, like Common View. In R2009 and later, the ViewCube replaces Common View. Like Common View, you click the cube corners to snap the model to isometric views, and click the faces for orthographic views. The ViewCube provides the following additional features: Persists onscreen in a corner of the graphics window (you can specify which corner).

Can be dragged to orbit the model. Provides labeled faces to indicate current view angle relative to the model world. Provides clickable edges (along with the clickable corners and faces). Provides a Home button to return to a user-defined base view. Provides the ability to set the Front and Top views to user-defined views, thereby also redefining the other orthographic views, along with the isometric views. The redefined views are recognized by other environments or applications such as drawings or DWF. In orthographic views, provides rotation arrows so you can rotate the camera in 90-degree increments, normal to the screen. Provides options so that you can adjust the cube characteristics according to your preferences.

Previous (page 19) | Next (page 22)

The ViewCube | 21

Overview: SteeringWheels
SteeringWheels is a convenient onscreen pallet of familiar navigation controls, as well as controls that may be new to you.

SteeringWheels provides: Zoom Change the camera distance from the model. Zoom direction can be reversed relative to mouse motion.

Orbit Change the camera position around a pivot point. Pan Translate the camera across the screen. Center Redefine the orbit center point.

In addition, SteeringWheels adds some controls that are either new to Autodesk Inventor or noticeably different and improved in their behavior: Walk In Perspective mode, the ability to navigate through a model, much as you might walk through passages in a building.

Look In Perspective mode, the ability to change your view angle without changing camera position, like pivoting a camera in any direction around a fixed point, or like moving your head from side to side or up and down. Up/Down The ability to translate the camera upwards or downwards, the direction defined as normal to the Top face of the ViewCube. Rewind The ability to quickly, graphically select any previous view or perspective through a series of thumbnails.

SteeringWheels follows the cursor. You can access this pallet of tools instantly, without having to move the cursor to an icon on the ribbon. Like the ViewCube, you can turn SteeringWheels on and off through the drop-down menu in the Navigate panel of the View tab. Also, like the

22 | Chapter 2 Navigation Tools

ViewCube, SteeringWheels has options for tailoring the tool to your preferences. Previous (page 20) | Next (page 23)

Hands-on Demo: ViewCube

The remainder of the tutorial highlights certain characteristics and behaviors that may not be familiar or readily apparent. The tutorial is not intended to cover every aspect of the tools. See Help for further detailed information. Any references to default settings are based on the templates that ship with Autodesk Inventor. The ViewCube is on by default (select View Windows User Interface to turn the ViewCube on and off). The default location for the ViewCube is in the upper-right corner of the screen. The ViewCube is partially transparent when inactive. Previous (page 22) | Next (page 23)

Switch Views
1 Click an edge to switch to an edge-on view. 2 Click a face to switch to an orthographic view. 3 In an orthographic view, the Z-rotation arrows are available and provide a rotation axis normal to the screen. The axis passes through the geometric center of the model. Click an arrow to rotate the model 90 degrees. Also in orthographic view, the program shows arrows to select faces adjacent to the displayed face. Previous (page 23) | Next (page 23)

The Shadow
Notice that a shadow is adjacent to the bottom face. It always moves with the bottom face to provide a constant, almost subliminal, indication of the Up direction of the model.

Hands-on Demo: ViewCube | 23

For most models, the sense of up is inherent in the model, or is not important. However, for some models and modeling situations, such as running a gravity-influenced motion simulation, a clear and constant sense of up and down may be useful or important. The shadow does not display when the Bottom face is visible. Previous (page 23) | Next (page 24)

Orbit
You can also use the ViewCube to orbit the model. Click and drag the cube to adjust your view. Unless you are an AutoCAD user, the term Orbit may be new to you. Prior to Inventor 2009, all user interface labels and tooltips, along with Help documentation, used the term Rotate. Though Rotate is descriptive of this particular interaction with the model, it is not technically accurate. Every view of the model is actually from the viewpoint of a mobile camera, as if you are looking at the model through a camera. When you rotate a model, the camera is actually orbiting the model. Fortunately for veteran Autodesk Inventor users, the default behavior is the same as it was in previous versions. Previous (page 23) | Next (page 24)

More about Orbit

In Inventor 2009, an additional, optional orbit behavior was added, known as constrained orbit. Again, unless you are an AutoCAD user, this behavior may be new to you. For the existing orbit behavior, the orbit is free about the screen axes. For constrained orbit, the orbit is constrained about the Up direction of the model. To see the difference between the two types: 1 Position the model in an isometric view with the Top face of the cube on top. 2 On the ribbon, click View tab Navigate panel Constrained

Orbit

(grouped with the Orbit command).

24 | Chapter 2 Navigation Tools

3 Position the cursor outside the reticle, adjacent to one of the horizontal markers. Click and drag the cursor across the screen. The orbit is constrained to the Up axis of the model.

4 Click the Free Orbit icon

, and drag the cursor as before.

Notice that the orbit axis is parallel to the screen. If you are an AutoCAD user and new to Autodesk Inventor, you may find Constrained Orbit familiar and comfortable. Previous (page 24) | Next (page 25)

Home View
The Home button appears when you pause the cursor over the ViewCube. 1 Click the Home button. The viewpoint returns to a predefined location. NOTE In R2009 and later, the context menu option Isometric View (F6) has been changed to Home View. You can set any viewpointnot just an isometric viewas the Home view. 2 Orbit the model to some arbitrary viewpoint. 3 Right-click the ViewCube, and then select Set Current View as Home Fixed Distance. The Home view is now the specified view. Previous (page 24) | Next (page 25)

Front View
You can also set any viewpoint as the Front view. 1 Select any face on the ViewCube, other than the face currently labeled as Front. 2 Right-click the ViewCube, and select Set Current View as Front. This function also reorients all the other orthographic and isometric model views, For example, the Back view must always be opposite the Front view.

Home View | 25

Notice that the view does not need to be orthographic. You can specify any viewpoint to be the Front view. To pick up model view redefinitions in a drawing, ensure that the From Model option is selected in the Style and Standard Editor. To access to this option: 1 Start a new drawing. 2 On the ribbon, select Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor. 3 In the Style and Standard Editor browser, select the relevant standard under the Standard node. 4 Select the View Preferences tab. 5 Ensure From Model is selected on the Front View Plane drop-down menu. As suggested in the introduction, drawing views created after a model view redefinition honor the redefined model view. On the other hand, model view redefinition is not backward-associative. Drawing views created before a model view is redefined do not update to match the redefinition. Close the Style and Standard editor. Previous (page 25) | Next (page 26)

Hands-on Demo: SteeringWheels

Unlike the ViewCube, SteeringWheels is not on by default. On the ribbon,

click View tab Navigate panel Full Navigation Wheel. SteeringWheels follows your cursor, also by default. This feature makes the tool convenient in terms of access. If you find this behavior distracting and a little disorienting, hopefully, with a little use, you will grow accustomed and appreciate the convenience and immediacy. If you find that you really would like to use SteeringWheels, but the cursor-following behavior continues to be a distraction, you can use one of the mini wheels. More information on that option is provided later in this tutorial.

26 | Chapter 2 Navigation Tools

Previous (page 25) | Next (page 27)

Click and Hold

Probably the most important behavior to note about SteeringWheels is that to use one of the controls, you must click and hold the mouse button. The control is only active while you hold the mouse button. Click and hold Pan , then drag the cursor across the screen. Release the button and the control automatically ends. The advantage with this behavior is that you do not need any extra motions (like pressing Esc, bringing up a context menu, or pressing the command again) to end the command. Previous (page 26) | Next (page 27)

Pan and Screen Size

Another interesting and convenient behavior that affects some of the controls is that cursor movement is not limited by screen size. This is easiest to demonstrate with the Pan control. To see this: 1 Click and hold Zoom, and then draw the mouse towards you to zoom in close on the model. 2 Click and hold Pan, and then drag the cursor across the screen. Notice that the cursor leaves the screen, and then instantly appears on the opposite side. You can pan more with one hand motion before you have to reposition your hand on the mouse pad. The limiting factor is the mouse pad and cursor speed or acceleration, not the screen size. While this may seem insignificant, it all adds up. This feature may take a little getting used to when you are used to the Pan cursor stopping against the edge of the screen. Previous (page 27) | Next (page 28)

Click and Hold | 27

Orbit and Pivot Point

As mentioned earlier, the actual behavior of the Orbit control is the same as earlier releases, as long as you selected Free Orbit on the ribbon. 1 Click and hold Orbit, and then drag the cursor. If Constrained Orbit is selected, then the Orbit control honors that setting. Notice that a Pivot indicator appears on screen as you orbit. The indicator provides positive feedback as to the orbit center point location. You can modify the pivot point and snap to model edges and vertices. 2 Press and hold Center, select a vertex, and then release the mouse button. The orbit center point is now that vertex. Previous (page 27) | Next (page 28)

Up and Down
Just as it sounds, you can use the Up/Down control to translate the camera up and down. Up/Down translates the camera along the top/bottom axis. Previous (page 28) | Next (page 28)

Rewind
If you have ever wanted to save and quickly access views in a part document, try using the Rewind control. 1 Press and hold the Rewind control. A set of thumbnails appear, almost like a film strip, showing you a selectable history of model views. 2 Drag the cursor to the left across the thumbnails. The model view seamlessly animates back through the preceding views. 3 Release the mouse button to select a view. Notice that the selected view can be any intermediate view, not just the views shown in the thumbnails. Previous views are stored only for that session. Previous (page 28) | Next (page 29)

28 | Chapter 2 Navigation Tools

Walk and Look

The Walk and Look controls work especially well when used in conjunction with each other. The controls only function when in Perspective mode. If you are in Orthographic mode, when you click either control, the camera automatically switches to Perspective mode. Before proceeding with the following steps, right-click the wheel and select Options. Clear the checkmark next to Walk Tool - Constrain movement to ground plane. Click OK. 1 Orient the model as shown. Press and hold Walk. Move the mouse forward, and the camera moves through the model. Move the mouse to the side, and the camera moves laterally. Release the mouse button. The walk speed is proportional to the cursor distance from walk origin indicator. 2 Press and hold Look. Move the mouse, and the camera pivots around a fixed point in that direction. 3 Now use the controls in conjunction. Press Walk to move through the model, then press Look to turn and look down the next walk path. Use the Walk control again to move down that line of sight. Previous (page 28) | Next (page 29)

Other Features
If you have multiple windows open, SteeringWheels passes seamlessly from window to window. As an alternative to right-clicking to bring up the SteeringWheel context menu, you can click the context menu button to bring up the menu.

Walk and Look | 29

To switch the display of SteeringWheels on and off, press Ctrl + W. To dismiss SteeringWheels, click the x at the top right of the tool.

Previous (page 29) | Next (page 30)

Mini Wheels
The full version of SteeringWheels displays by default, but you can specify other full-size versions of SteeringWheels as well as miniature versions of each wheel. To experiment with these versions, right-click the SteeringWheels tool, and select a version from the menu. For example, select Mini View Object Wheel to see a small version of the full SteeringWheels. Previous (page 29) | Next (page 30)

Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to: Use the ViewCube to switch defined views.

Use the ViewCube to orbit a model. Use the ViewCube to redefine named views. Use the ViewCube to return to a home view. Use SteeringWheels to orbit a model and redefine the orbit pivot point.

30 | Chapter 2 Navigation Tools

Rewind to and select previous viewpoints. Navigate model space using the Walk and Look commands. Access alternative SteeringWheels.

Check Help for further detailed information. Previous (page 30)

Summary | 31

Sketch Constraints

About this tutorial

Explore the impact of geometric and dimensional constraints on a simple sketch.

Category Time Required New Users 25 minutes

Tutorial File Used

sk1.ipt

Establish relationships between geometry. View and delete constraints.

Prerequisites Know how to set the , navigate the model space with the various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding.

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 34)

Get Started
1 Double-click Sketch1 in the browser to open the sketch for edit. 2 To orient the view, click View Face from the navigation toolbar, and click Sketch1 in the browser so the sketch is parallel to the screen.

34 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

The sketch used in this tutorial contains four straight line segments drawn so the line endpoints are constrained to be coincident. Otherwise, the geometry is unconstrained.

Get Started | 35

Previous (page 33) | Next (page 36)

Drag Geometry
Move the endpoint of one of the lines: 1 Move your mouse cursor over the top-most endpoint. 2 When it highlights, click and hold the mouse button down, and then drag the point up and toward the right. 3 Release the mouse button to select the new position.

36 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

Two line segments lengthen to adjust to the new position specified for the endpoint. Previous (page 34) | Next (page 37)

Drag Geometry (continued)

Move one of the lines: 1 Move your mouse cursor over the left-most line. 2 When it highlights, click and hold the mouse button down, and then drag the line toward the left.

Drag Geometry (continued) | 37

3 Release the mouse button to select the new position. Two line segments lengthen to adjust to the new position while the selected segment becomes shorter. Previous (page 36) | Next (page 38)

Drag All the Geometry

Move all the lines: 1 Move your mouse cursor to the left and below the sketch geometry. 2 Click and drag a selection window to the upper-right around the geometry. Release the mouse button to select the geometry.

38 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

3 Move your mouse cursor over one of the lines. 4 When the line highlights, click and hold the mouse button down, and then drag up and toward the right. 5 Release the mouse button to select the new position.

Drag All the Geometry | 39

The program repositions all the selected geometry without changing the size or angle of any of the line segments. 6 Click in your graphic window to cancel the selection of all four line segments before proceeding to the next step. Previous (page 37) | Next (page 41)

40 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

Rotate a Sketched Line

Rotate one of the lines:

1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Modify panel Rotate. 2 Select the left-most line in the sketch. 3 Right-click and select Continue. 4 Select the lower endpoint of the line segment as your center point. This is the pivot point for the rotation. 5 Click No on the dialog box which prompts you if you want to remove constraints. If you click Yes, the constraints on the line are deleted and the line rotates independent of the other geometry. 6 Drag the displayed handle to rotate the line segment. NOTE You can also enter a value in the Angle field of the dialog box and click Apply to view the change.

Notice that one end of the line remains fixed while the program dynamically repositions the other. The attached segment also adjusts length and angle to stay attached. 7 Click to select a new angle for your line segment and click Done to close the Rotate dialog box.

Rotate a Sketched Line | 41

Previous (page 38) | Next (page 42)

Constrain to the Origin

1 Right-click the Origin folder in the browser, and select Expand All Children to see the browser nodes you use to select the origin geometry when it is not displayed. 2 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Draw panel Project

Geometry. 3 Select the browser node Center Point to include the origin point as a point in your sketch. 4 Click Sketch tab Constrain panel Coincident Constraint.

5 Select the lower endpoint of the left-most line, and then the projected origin point.

42 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

Notice that two line segments adjust their length and angle to allow the endpoint to become coincident with the origin point. NOTE Do not be concerned if the shape of your geometry does not exactly match the illustrations. Previous (page 41) | Next (page 43)

Apply a Horizontal Constraint

The set of geometric constraints contains both a horizontal and vertical constraint. You can apply to lines to make them horizontal or vertical relative to the sketch X or Y orientation.

1 Select the Horizontal Constraint command. 2 Select the lower line of the sketch. NOTE Ensure that you select the line and not the line midpoint.

Notice that the lower segment becomes horizontal while remaining coincident to the origin.

Apply a Horizontal Constraint | 43

Previous (page 42) | Next (page 44)

Apply a Perpendicular Constraint

The set of geometric constraints contains a perpendicular constraint which makes one line perpendicular to another.

1 Select the Perpendicular Constraint command. 2 Select the right-most line of the sketch. 3 Select the (now horizontal) lower line of the sketch.

The line segment becomes perpendicular to the lower segment. NOTE If a design change later requires you to rotate your sketch, it is often more appropriate to make one line perpendicular to another rather than using the horizontal or vertical constraints (which prevent rotation). Previous (page 43) | Next (page 45)

44 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

Apply a Parallel Constraint

The set of geometric constraints contains a parallel constraint which makes one line parallel to another.

1 Select the Parallel Constraint command. 2 Select the right-most line of the sketch. 3 Select the left-most line of the sketch.

Although the left line segment becomes parallel to the right line segment, the length of the upper and lower lines changed. Next, you apply dimensions which constrain your geometry to a specific size. Previous (page 44) | Next (page 46)

Apply a Parallel Constraint | 45

Apply a Dimension
Use the General Dimension command in the sketch environment to place linear and angular dimensions. What you select determines what type of dimension you obtain. If you want to dimension the length of a line, you can select the line. If you want to place a dimension between two pieces of sketch geometry, you can select each piece of geometry. 1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Constrain panel Dimension.

2 Select the right-most line of the sketch. 3 Select the left-most line of the sketch. 4 Click to place the dimension. 5 Click the dimension to change the value. 6 Enter a new value of 4 in, and click the check mark to apply the new value.

46 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

TIP You can set an application option so you can edit dimensions during placement. Each time you click to place a dimension, the Edit Dimension dialog box appears automatically and you can specify the actual dimension or equation. The option is called Edit dimension when created and is located on the Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box. Previous (page 45) | Next (page 47)

Apply an Angular Dimension

The Dimension command is still active. Place an angle dimension between the right-most vertical line and the top line: 1 Select the right-most line of the sketch. 2 Select the top-most line of the sketch. 3 Click between the lines to place the dimension. 4 Click the dimension to change the value. 5 Enter a new value of 60 deg, and click the check mark to apply the new value.

Apply an Angular Dimension | 47

NOTE You can also delete dimensions. With no command active, right-click the dimension and select Delete from the context menu. Alternatively, select the dimension and then press the Delete key. In the next steps, you explore which constraints you applied and ways to delete constraints that you no longer need. Previous (page 46) | Next (page 48)

Show All Constraints

Knowing what constraints the program applies to which pieces of geometry is critical to predictable sketch behavior. 1 Right-click in an empty area of your sketch. 2 Select Done from the context menu to terminate the placement of dimensions. 3 Right-click again in an empty area of your sketch. 4 Now select Show All Constraints from the context menu.

48 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

Notice that icons appear near each piece of geometry with indications of the applied constraints. Previous (page 47) | Next (page 49)

Examine Constraint Relationships

The icons represent the constraints that you applied to the geometry or that the system applied when you created the geometry.

Examine Constraint Relationships | 49

Pause your mouse over the perpendicular constraint icon near the bottom of the right-most vertical line segment.

Notice that the lines which are perpendicular highlight, as does the perpendicular constraint icon. Using this technique you can understand the network of constraints that govern the behavior of your sketch. Previous (page 48) | Next (page 51)

50 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

Delete a Constraint
By right-clicking a displayed constraint icon, you can delete the constraint. 1 Right-click the perpendicular constraint icon near the bottom of the right-most vertical line segment. 2 Select Delete to remove the perpendicular constraint between this line and the horizontal lower line segment. 3 Click and drag the top-most endpoint to see how the geometry now behaves.

Delete a Constraint | 51

Finally, right-click an empty area of your sketch, and select Hide All Constraints to make the constraint icons invisible. Previous (page 49) | Next (page 52)

Summary
In this tutorial, you explored: Various ways that under-constrained geometry behaves during dynamic dragging.

The application of various geometric constraints such as: coincident, horizontal, perpendicular, and parallel. The application of dimensional constraints. The effect of constraints on geometry size and position. Access to a display of constraint relationships to their geometries. Deleting constraints.

Previous (page 51)

52 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints

Direct Manipulation

About this tutorial

Category Time Required Tutorial File Used

New Users 30 minutes Sliding-pin Hanger.ipt

Rotate and extrude sketch profiles using manipulators. Offset a work plane using a distance arrow. Create a sketch using the mini-toolbar. Use the Dynamic Input Heads-Up Display (HUD) to construct accurate sketch geometry and have it automatically dimensioned. Recognize the differences between Join, Cut, and Intersect graphical previews. Create an edge fillet. Construct a tapped hole. Rotate an existing face.

Prerequisites See the Help topics "Getting Started", "Direct Manipulation", and Dynamic Input for further information. System Settings On the ribbon Tools tab, Options panel, select Application Options and click the Sketch tab to enable the following settings: Edit dimension when created

Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit

NOTE The Grid lines display is not enabled in any of the sketch environment images in this tutorial.

54 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 55)

Open the Sketch Profile file

1 Click Get Started tab Launch panel Open on the ribbon. Select Sliding-pin Hanger.ipt from the file list in the Open dialog box.

2 Click OK. 3 The Sliding-pin Hanger sketch profile appears in the isometric Home View (isometric orientation) as shown. Press F6 to restore the Home View if your view is different from the image.

Take a moment to study the Model browser at the left side of the graphics window. It displays both the part origin and the sole feature in the part, Sketch1. Click the + button to the left of the Origin folder name to expand the item. Notice that the center point of the part (X=0, Y=0, Z=0), the origin

Open the Sketch Profile file | 55

planes, and origin axes are displayed in the browser. Each of the browser elements highlights in the graphics window as you move your cursor over them. NOTE The Origin elements appear dimmed in the browser. Although their visibility is turned off by default, they are still active. You can turn on the visibility by right-clicking over any one of them and activating the corresponding Visibility check box in the pop-up context menu. It is not necessary to turn them on for this exercise, however. Previous (page 53) | Next (page 56)

Revolve the Sketch Profile

The Revolve command creates a feature by revolving one or more sketch profiles about an axis through any angle measuring between zero and 360. The axis of revolution can be part of the profile or offset from it. The profile and axis must be coplanar.

Click Model tab Create panel Revolve on the ribbon, or press R to invoke the Revolve command. After invoking the Revolve command, both the Direct Manipulation in-canvas display and the title bar of the Revolve dialog box appear in the graphics window. The dialog box is in a collapsed state, but can be expanded by clicking the down arrow near the top of the dialog box. For this tutorial, we use the Direct Manipulation in-canvas display and mini-toolbar to revolve the sketch profile rather than use the dialog box options.

2 Observe that the sketch profile automatically highlighted when you invoked the Revolve command because it is the only sketch in the part file. Note also that the axis button in the mini-toolbar is highlighted . This indicates that the revolution axis selection is not yet satisfied. 3 Click to select the long horizontal axis of the profile.

56 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

Previous (page 55) | Next (page 57)

Interpreting the In-Canvas Display

After selecting the axis of revolution, the in-canvas display appears in the graphics window. Take a moment to examine the various elements of the in-canvas display.

Interpreting the In-Canvas Display | 57

The value input box reports that a full 360 revolution will be performed around the sketch axis you selected. It is the default condition for the Revolve command and the graphical preview on your display screen reflects that. However, you can enter any angular value in the value input box to create a revolution other than a full 360. As an alternative to entering an explicit angular value in the value input box, you can also click the gold rotation arrow manipulator. Then dynamically drag the sketch profile around the axis of revolution. 1 Try it now. Click the rotation arrow manipulator and drag the profile around the axis. First drag in one direction, and then try dragging in the opposite direction. As you drag the rotation arrow, observe the changing

58 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

angular values displaying in the value input box. Note also that the graphical preview updates in real time to show the results of the Revolve operation. 2 When you are finished experimenting with dynamic drag, direct your attention to the Revolve mini-toolbar in the in-canvas display. 3 Starting at the upper-left, let us examine each of the buttons.

The grip button lets you easily move the mini-toolbar to a different screen location. The fly-out arrow on the Extents button offers several termination options: Angle lets you revolve the sketch profile around the axis at any angle.

To next face/body lets you revolve to an existing face or body of a multi-body part. To selected face/plane lets you revolve to an existing part face, work plane, or work point. Between two faces/planes lets you select beginning and ending faces or work planes on which to terminate the revolution. Full performs a full 360 of revolution around the sketch axis.

Click the Profile button and then select the sketch to revolve. (Remember that the very first sketch in a new part file is selected automatically.) Click the Axis button which to revolve the profile. The Solid button in a multi-body part. The Solid output button a solid or a surface object. and then select the axis about

selects the participating solid body

lets you revolve a profile into

Interpreting the In-Canvas Display | 59

The Join button adds the volume created by the revolved feature to another feature or body. We will explore the Cut and Intersect options a bit later in this tutorial. The fly-out arrow on the Direction button displays the direction options available: Direction 1 revolves the sketch profile in the positive direction (towards you).

Direction 2 revolves the sketch profile in the negative direction (away from you). Symmetric revolves the sketch profile in both directions with equal angular values. Asymmetric revolves the sketch profile in both directions with different angular values.

Click the Ok button complete the revolution. The Cancel button revolution is performed.

to finish the Revolve command and

cancels the Revolve command. No

The Mini-Toolbar Options button offers two options. You can pin the mini-toolbar so that it remains stationary in the graphics window and/or use the Auto Fade option to enable or disable the mini-toolbar display.

4 Now, select the Full option in the Extents button flyout and click the green Ok button to complete the Revolve command. 5 Observe that the Revolution1 feature was added to the Model browser. Click the + button to the left of the feature name to expand the item. The feature has one child - the sketch from which it was created. 6 Move your cursor over both the Revolution1 feature name and Sketch1 in the browser. The corresponding items highlight in the graphics window as you do so.

60 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

Previous (page 56) | Next (page 61)

Create an Offset Parallel Work Plane

In the next part of the tutorial, you create a work plane which is offset from the default XY plane of the part origin. The work plane is the base for a new sketch.

Click the down arrow of the Model tab Work Features panel Plane command on the ribbon. Then select Offset from

Plane from the Plane drop-down menu

2 Once again, direct your attention to the Model browser at the side of the graphics window. The Origin folder should still be in an expanded state. If not, click the + button to expand the part Origin folder. 3 As you did previously, move your cursor over the YZ Plane, the XZ Plane, and the XY Plane in the browser. As each Origin plane

Create an Offset Parallel Work Plane | 61

highlights in the graphics window, make a point of identifying which browser element corresponds to which origin plane in the graphics window. 4 Click the XY Plane. Next, you create a work plane parallel to the default XY plane (highlighted in blue), but at a specified distance. 5 Click the gold distance arrow manipulator and drag the parallel work plane in a positive direction (towards you) approximately 38 mm. Alternatively, you can directly enter 38 in the value input box. It is not necessary to include the mm if you choose this method. 6 Click the green Ok button to create the parallel offset work plane and end the command.

The new feature, Work Plane1, is added to the Model browser.

62 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

Previous (page 57) | Next (page 63)

Create a New Sketch

We will now create a sketch on the work plane. In a later step, this sketch is mirrored across the X axis of the part. It is used to cut away, or extrude, portions of material from the cylindrical feature of the part. 1 Click any one of the four edges of the work plane. 2 When the mini-toolbar appears, click the second button on the right labeled with the tooltip Create Sketch.

Create a New Sketch | 63

3 The view automatically rotates parallel to the XY plane. This is because the Look at sketch plane on sketch creation option on the Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is active.

The new feature, Sketch2, is added to the Model browser. Previous (page 61) | Next (page 64)

Project Geometry onto the Sketch Plane

The Project Geometry command projects edges, vertices, work features, loops, and curves from existing sketches or part geometry onto the current sketch plane. It can also be used to project part origin planes and axes.

On the ribbon, click the Sketch tab Draw panel Project Geometry button.

2 Select the top horizontal line and the arc representing the spherical radius to project onto the sketch plane. Select the X axis from the

64 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

expanded Origin folder in the Model browser, as well.

3 After selecting the three elements, right-click in the graphics window and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu to end the Project Geometry command. Alternatively, you can also press the Esc key on your keyboard. Previous (page 63) | Next (page 65)

Draw the Sketch Geometry

1 Click Sketch tab Draw panel Line on the ribbon, or press L to invoke the Line command. You can also right-click in the graphics window and select Line at the top of the marking menu.

2 Left-click the point shown to begin the first point of the line. A green dot appears to indicate that you have selected the precise endpoint of the projected line. The Heads-Up Display (HUD) Pointer Input displays

Draw the Sketch Geometry | 65

the line starting coordinates as X = -25 mm, Y = 25 mm.

3 Move your cursor to the left (180). End the first line segment by clicking where the horizontal line intersects with the start of the spherical radius. Do not be concerned with the displayed value in the value input box.

4 The first sketch line is now complete. The Line command can also be used to draw an arc radius. For the starting point of the arc, click the endpoint of the line you just drew. Press and hold the left mouse button

66 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

and drag your cursor to trace over a portion of the spherical radius.

5 The length of the arc segment is not important. Drag your cursor just enough to approximate what you see in the image. Be sure to keep your cursor on the spherical radius to ensure that the arc ending point is coincident with the projected geometry. (A yellow dot at the end of the cursor and a coincident constraint symbol appear when you are coincident with the sketch geometry.) Click to set the ending point of the arc. 6 You now use the Dynamic Input Heads-Up Display (HUD) to sketch another line with a precise distance and angle. Still in the Line command, pick the ending point of the arc you just completed and move your cursor to the right. Two value input boxes appear near your cursor indicating the length (distance) and angle of the sketch line under construction. Notice that the first value input box is highlighted and awaits your input. Enter 60 in the box for the line length and press the Tab key to shift the input focus to the second value input box. Enter 0 for the line angle and press the Tab key again. 7 Observe the small lock icon within each value input box. They indicate that the values you entered are locked (constrained) for both the distance and angle of the line. Note also the two parallelism glyphs indicating

Draw the Sketch Geometry | 67

that the two sketch lines are exactly parallel.

8 Press Enter to finish drawing the line. The dimensional values, called persistent dimensions, are created and placed when Dynamic Input is used to define sketch geometry. 9 Next, draw the final line segment back to the point at which you started. When the green dot appears, click to complete the segment and close the profile. 10 Finally, right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu, or press the Esc key, to exit the Line command. We will now create a vertical dimension to specify the width of the profile.

Click Sketch tab Constrain panel Dimension on the ribbon, or press D to invoke the Dimension command. You can also right-click in the graphics window and select General Dimension from the marking menu.

12 Select the two line endpoints shown in the image. (The endpoints appear as red dots when you place your cursor over them.) Move your cursor to the left and click to place the dimension.

68 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

13 Enter 9 in the Edit Dimension text box. Click the green arrow (or press Enter) to create the dimension.

14 Right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu to exit the Dimension command. Previous (page 64) | Next (page 69)

Mirror the Sketch

Before making a mirror image of the sketch, turn off the visibility of the work plane. There are two ways to do it: Right-click any one of the four edges of the work plane and clear the check mark in theVisibility marking menu node.

Or, right-click Work Plane1 in the Model browser and clear the Visibility check mark.

Your display screen should look like the following image.

NOTE The 60mm dimension has been moved and the angular dimension deleted in the image to provide clarity.

Mirror the Sketch | 69

You are now ready to mirror your new sketch about the X axis of the part.

Click Sketch tab Pattern panel Mirror on the ribbon. The Mirror dialog box appears with the Select button active. Now pick two diagonal points on the screen to enclose the sketch profile completely within the Mirror window.

2 Move your cursor to the upper left and outside the sketch to pick the first point. Next, move your cursor in a diagonal direction to the lower right to pick the second point. As you move your cursor, the window graphically previews to help you determine the required extents of the Mirror window.

3 Click the Mirror line button in the Mirror dialog box and select the X axis which you projected in a previous step. 4 Click the Apply button in the Mirror dialog box to preview the results of the mirror operation.

70 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

5 Click the Done button to mirror the sketch, close the Mirror dialog box, and exit the Mirror command.

Click Sketch tab Exit panel Finish Sketch on the ribbon to finish the sketch and exit the sketch environment. You can also right-click in the graphics window and select Finish Sketch from the marking menu.

7 The model rotates automatically into the Home view when you finish the sketch. If not, press function key F6 to rotate the view. Previous (page 65) | Next (page 71)

Extrude the Two Sketch Profiles

The Extrude command creates a feature by adding depth to an open or closed sketch profile. You specify the direction, depth, taper angle, and termination method for the extrusion. You now perform an extrude operation with a Cut that uses the two sketch profiles to remove material from the cylindrical portion of the part.

Click Model tab Create panel Extrude on the ribbon, or press E to invoke the Extrude command. You can also right-click in the graphics window and select Extrude from the marking menu.

2 Select the two sketch profiles.

Extrude the Two Sketch Profiles | 71

3 After selecting the profiles, the in-canvas display appears in the graphics window. The default option for the Extrude command is to perform a Join operation. The graphical preview appearing on the screen displays in green for a Join.

4 Click the flyout arrow on the Operation button and select the Cut option .

5 Next, click the flyout arrow on the Direction button and select the Direction 2 option , if not already active. Observe that the graphical preview changes color from green to red to indicate a Cut operation. Note also that the gold distance arrow manipulator has reversed position and now points in a negative direction into the screen. 6 Take a moment now and try dragging the distance arrow backward and forward over the object. The red graphical preview shows you the material to be removed during a Cut operation.

72 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

NOTE As an experiment, click the flyout arrow on the Operation button and select the Intersect option . An Intersect operation calculates the shared volumes of two or more intersecting objects and graphically previews in blue. After previewing the intersections, click the flyout arrow on the Operation button and select Cut once again.

7 Next, click the flyout arrow on the Extents button to display the termination options. Use Distance to extrude a sketch profile with a numeric value which you enter in the value input box. It is the default option.

To next face/body extrudes to the next part face or solid body encountered in the direction of the extrusion. To selected face/point extrudes to an existing part face, work plane, or work point. Between two faces/plane selects beginning and ending faces or work planes on which to terminate the extrusion. Through All performs a Join, Cut, or Intersect operation through the entire part.

8 Now, select the Through All option in the Extents button flyout and click the green Ok button to complete the Extrude command. The new feature, Extrusion1, is added to the Model browser.

Extrude the Two Sketch Profiles | 73

Previous (page 69) | Next (page 74)

Create a Third Sketch

We now create a third sketch to draw and dimension a rectangle. The rectangle is then extruded with a cut to produce a rectangular-shaped opening through the part. 1 Click the flattened top face of the part. 2 The Direct Manipulation mini-toolbar appears and, starting from the left, displays three buttons offering the following commands: Edit Extrude

Edit Sketch Create Sketch

74 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

3 Select the third button, Create Sketch.

4 The view automatically rotates parallel to the XY plane. This is because the Look at sketch plane on sketch creation option on the Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is active. 5 The edges of the selected face are automatically projected. The Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit option on the Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is also active.

Click Sketch tab Draw panel Rectangle on the ribbon and select Rectangle Two Point from the drop-down menu. You can also right-click in the graphics window and select Two Point Rectangle from the marking menu.

7 Pick the approximate point shown in the image to place the lower-right corner of the rectangle. Do not be concerned with the values displayed

Create a Third Sketch | 75

in the Pointer Input fields.

. 8 Move your cursor to the upper left to activate the rectangle horizontal and vertical value input boxes. The current input focus is in the value input field representing the horizontal dimension. Enter 50 and press Tab. The lock icon indicates that the horizontal dimension of the rectangle is fully constrained. 9 Input focus is now shifted to the second value input field representing the vertical dimension. Enter 25 and press Tab. 10 Press Enter to draw and dimension the rectangle. The rectangle is fully dimensioned because Dynamic Input with persistent dimensions was

76 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

used to input the dimensional values.

11 Right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu to exit the Two Point Rectangle command. NOTE To move a sketch dimension to a new location, select the dimension, and press and hold the left mouse button as you drag the dimension. Release the mouse button when the dimension is placed to your satisfaction. The new feature, Sketch3, is added to the Model browser. We now create a single vertical dimension to center the rectangle on the flattened face.

Click Sketch tab Constrain panel Dimension on the ribbon, or press D to invoke the Dimension command. Remember that you can also select General Dimension from the marking menu.

13 Select the two line endpoints shown in the image. Move your cursor to the left and click to place the dimension.

Create a Third Sketch | 77

14 Enter 6.71 in the Edit Dimension text box. Click the green arrow (or press Enter) to create the dimension.

15 Right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu.

Click Sketch tab Exit panel Finish Sketch on the ribbon, or select Finish Sketch from the marking menu, to finish the sketch and exit the sketch environment.

17 The model rotates automatically into the Home view when you finish the sketch. If not, press function key F6 to rotate the view. Previous (page 71) | Next (page 79)

78 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

Extrude the Rectangle

Rather than use the Extrude command from the ribbon, keyboard, or marking menu, Direct Manipulation provides another method to create an extrusion. 1 Select any one of the four lines comprising the sketched rectangle to display the Sketch mini-toolbar.

2 Starting from the left, the Sketch mini-toolbar offers the following four commands: Extrude

Revolve Hole Edit Sketch

Extrude the Rectangle | 79

3 Click the Extrude button and select the rectangle as the profile to extrude. Be sure to pick inside the rectangle.

4 When the Extrude mini-toolbar appears, click the flyout arrow on the Operation button and select the Cut option .

5 Now, select the Through All option in the Extents button flyout and click the green Ok button to complete the Extrude command. The new feature, Extrusion2, is added to the Model browser.

80 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

Previous (page 74) | Next (page 81)

Create an Edge Fillet

Fillets and rounds are placed features that round off or cap interior or exterior corners or features of a part. The Fillet command creates the following types of fillets: Edge fillets are created based on selected edges. The fillets can be of constant or variable-radius, of different sizes, and of different continuity (tangent or smooth G2). They can all be created in a single operation. All fillets and rounds created in a single operation become a single feature.

Face fillets are created between two faces or face sets. The faces need not share an edge. Any small edges and irregular geometry are blended over by the fillet. Full round fillets are variable-radius fillets that are tangent to three adjacent faces or face sets. The center face set is replaced by a variable-radius fillet.

Create an Edge Fillet | 81

We now create a simple edge fillet using Direct Manipulation. 1 Click the circular edge of the large diameter of the part.

2 The mini-toolbar appears offering both Fillet (first button) and Chamfer (second button) command options. 3 Click the Fillet button and the Fillet mini-toolbar appears.

82 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

NOTE While it is beyond the scope of this exercise to describe each of the mini-toolbar components, you are encouraged to review the Fillet topic in the Inventor Help. 4 For the purpose of this tutorial, we need only consider the following four components of the mini-toolbar: Value input box - used to enter a fillet radius in the value input field.

Ok button - indicated by a green check mark, the Ok button creates the fillet and terminates the command. Apply button - indicated by a green '+', the Apply button lets you apply one or more edge fillets without exiting the Fillet command. Cancel button - indicated by a red 'X', the Cancel button cancels the Fillet command. No fillets are created.

5 Try dragging the gold distance arrow manipulator forward and backward over the circular edge. Observe how the fillet radius increases and decreases in real time.

Create an Edge Fillet | 83

6 Drag the manipulator until 3.250 mm appears in the value input box, or enter the value 3.25 from the keyboard.

7 Click the Ok button to create the fillet and exit the command. The new feature, Fillet1 is added to the Model browser. Previous (page 79) | Next (page 84)

Create a Tapped Hole

1 Click Model tab Modify panel Hole on the ribbon, or press H to invoke the Hole command. You can also select the Hole

84 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

command from the marking menu. The Hole dialog box appears in its collapsed state in the graphics window. 2 Select the top face at the rear of the part. The Hole mini-toolbar appears in the graphics window. If the mini-toolbar obscures the pick location on the top face of the model, select the mini-toolbar by the grip button just to the left of the value input box, and move it to a

different location. 3 Look closely at the point you picked on the top face. The ring manipulator around the center of the hole represents the hole diameter. Click the ring with your mouse and it will turn gold in color. Try dragging the gold ring manipulator to increase and decrease the diameter of the hole.

Create a Tapped Hole | 85

NOTE You may need to zoom up your display a bit to make the manipulators easier to select. 4 The sphere manipulator at the center of the pick point represents the center location of the hole. Click the sphere with your mouse and it will turn gold in color, also. Try dragging the gold sphere manipulator to place the hole location dynamically.

For this exercise, we will use precise linear placement by selecting the appropriate edges and entering the required distances from each. 5 Click the inside edge of the rectangle.

86 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

6 Enter 5 in the value input box and press Tab to lock the horizontal dimension. 7 Next, click the outside edge of the highlighted face.

8 Enter 19 in the value input box and press Tab to lock the vertical dimension. 9 Using the Hole dialog box, enter the following values to create a M6x1 - 6H metric tapped hole with a thread depth of 6 mm:
Thread depth Drill Point Termination Hole Type Thread Type Size Designation Class Direction 6 mm 118 deg Distance Threaded ANSI Metric M Profile 6 M6x1 6H Right Hand

Create a Tapped Hole | 87

The Hole dialog box appears as shown in the image.

88 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

Create a Tapped Hole | 89

10 Click the OK button to close the dialog box, create the tapped hole, and finish the command. The new feature, Hole1, is added to the Model browser. Previous (page 81) | Next (page 90)

Rotate a Face Using the Triad

The Move Face command lets you move one or more faces on a part. You can specify an explicit direction and distance to move a set of faces. You can also freely move and rotate a set of faces or features about the X, Y, or Z axes using the Free Move option. In this final section of the tutorial, the Free Move triad is used to modify the top angled face of the Sliding-pin Hanger.

Click Model tab Modify panel Move Face on the ribbon.

2 Select the angled face on the top of the part. The Move Face Free Move

triad appears. You can interactively position a face or feature by dragging the triad in a planar move, axial move, or free movement. The selected area of the triad controls the movement. The colors help you identify triad axes:

Red is the X axis Green is the Y axis Blue is the Z axis

90 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

When you first activate the triad, its origin sphere is coincident with the geometry you want to transform. Click a triad section or drag to indicate the type of transform you want. As you select other parts of the triad, you can drag or enter precise coordinates corresponding to your selection. The triad is comprised of the following elements:

Arrowheads move the triad along the axes. Rotational manipulators rotate the triad around the axis. Click the red rotational manipulator to rotate in the YZ plane dynamically around the X axis. Click the green rotational manipulator to rotate dynamically in the XZ plane around the Y axis. Click the blue rotational manipulator to rotate dynamically in the XY plane around the Z axis. Planes move the triad in the selected plane. Sphere allows unrestricted movement in the view plane.

In the next step, we rotate the angled face in the XZ plane using the green rotational manipulator. It may be helpful to rotate the view a bit to provide easier access to the manipulator. 3 Click the Free Orbit command in the Navigation Bar at the right of the graphics window. The rotation symbol appears in the graphics window with both vertical and horizontal axes. Click inside the rotation symbol. Press and hold the left mouse button as you move your cursor

Rotate a Face Using the Triad | 91

to approximate the viewing angle shown in the image.

When you are satisfied with the new view, press the Esc key to exit the Free Orbit command.

92 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

TIP You can quickly access the Free Orbit function in the middle of another command by pressing and holding function key F4 as you rotate the view. When the view is rotated to your satisfaction, release the function key to resume the previous command. You can also use the ViewCube to orbit the model. Click and drag the cube to adjust your view.

4 Click the green rotational manipulator and drag to the right to see the effects of a negative rotation. Drag to the left to view a positive rotation. 5 Enter 2 in the value input box and click the green Ok button to rotate the face 2 in the positive direction. The Move Face command terminates and the new feature, Move Face1, is added to the Model browser. 6 Press F6 to restore the Home view.

Rotate a Face Using the Triad | 93

7 Save and close the file. This concludes the Introduction to Direct Manipulation tutorial. Previous (page 84) | Next (page 94)

Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to: Revolve and extrude profiles using Direct Manipulation.

Create a parallel work plane using a distance arrow manipulator. Project a coordinate axis. Sketch geometry and dimension using Dynamic Input. Mirror a sketch profile. Create a fillet using the mini-toolbar. Create a tapped hole. Rotate an existing face using the Move Face Triad.

What Next? In this exercise, the Sliding-pin Hanger sketch profile was provided for you. To learn how to create a part from scratch and gain further experience with sketching, part modeling, and work feature commands, try the Parts 1 and Parts 2 tutorials. Previous (page 90)

94 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation

Parts 1

About this tutorial

Create parts from sketches.

Category Time Required New Users 60 minutes

Tutorial File Used

Start a new part file (metric).

In this tutorial, you work with various commands and workflows in Inventor to build 3D parts. This tutorial exposes you to various feature creation commands and workflows you can use when you create 3D parts. If the finished part is the correct size and shape, your modeling effort is successful. Objectives Create a part from a sketch.

Add dimensions and constraints to sketch geometry. Create and use parameters. Use feature commands such as Extrude and the Hole command. Use the pattern command to array features. Save a copy of a part as a new file.

Prerequisites Complete the Sketch Constraints and Introduction to Direct Manipulation tutorials.

Set these options in Application Options, Sketch tab: Apply driven dimension - Select

Grid lines Clear Minor grid lines Clear Axes - Select Snap to grid Clear Edit dimension when created - Select Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit - Select Autoproject part origin on sketch create - Select

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 97)

96 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

Create the Part from Scratch in Autodesk Inventor

In this section, we apply horizontal and vertical constraints to constrain the shape to the X,Y, Z coordinates 0, 0, 0. We then add dimensions, create named parameters and use equations. Adding relationships between dimensions reduces the amount of edits, especially in complex parts. You can also add mathematical formulas to dimensions. A link is provided in the exercise to the operators that can be used in equations.

Click the Autodesk Inventor icon to start a new part. Select New to open the Create New File dialog box.

2 Click the metric folder to start a new metric part. Under the Part category,

double-click Standard (mm).ipt

If your sketch settings match the recommendations listed previously, you see an X axis, a Y axis, and a point at 0,0,0. 3 Click Sketch tab Draw panel Rectangle. Select Rectangle Two Point from the drop-down menu, or select Two Point Rectangle from the marking menu. Sketch a rectangle approximately centered about 0,0.

Apply a Horizontal constraint between the origin and the midpoint of a vertical line. Hover your cursor near the midpoint of the vertical line to display and select the midpoint.

Create the Part from Scratch in Autodesk Inventor | 97

Apply a Vertical constraint between the origin and the midpoint of a horizontal line. Hover your cursor near the midpoint of the horizontal line to display and select the midpoint. If the logic of these picks seems confusing, imagine the axis between the two points you are picking.

On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Constrain panel Dimension, or select General Dimension from the marking menu.

7 Place a horizontal dimension. 8 In the Edit Dimension dialog box, enter the equation Width=49mm to define a new variable named Width with an initial value of 49 mm. 9 Place a vertical dimension. Highlight the value in the Edit Dimension dialog box. Instead of entering a number, pick the horizontal dimension value. The variable name of the first dimension (Width) appears in the dialog box. Click the check mark to link the current dimension to the first dimension. The vertical dimension displays as fx:49. The display means that a formula is in effect for the vertical dimension and the current value is 49. 10 Right-click and select Done [ESC] from the marking menu to exit the Dimension command. You have created another equation!

98 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

11 To see the entire equation, right click in a blank area of the graphics window. Choose Dimension Display from the overflow menu, and then choose Expression. Notice the variable names and formulas appear. Each dimension is assigned a variable based on the order of creation. d0 is the first value assigned because 0 is the first integer. In this example, d0 was renamed Width and is a driving dimension. The second dimension retains the original variable name d1 and is driven by the dimension named Width. NOTE The order of creation has no impact on which dimension can be the controlling dimension.

Create the Part from Scratch in Autodesk Inventor | 99

NOTE The marking menu appears near the area of the screen on which you right-click. Use this technique to control where a marking menu appears. Previous (page 95) | Next (page 100)

Viewing and Editing Parameters

You can assign names to the dimension variables or you can create your own parameters. You can also create formulas using mathematical expressions. If you do not create an expression at the time you create a dimension, you can use the parameters dialog box to add or edit equations. 1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab Parameters panel Parameters to open the Parameters dialog box. 2 Notice that d0 inside the Model Parameters column is displayed as Width. The model parameter also shows d1 is equal to the value of Width.

NOTE Variables names are case sensitive and no spaces are allowed in the name. 3 Select Done when finished. TIP You can use algebraic operators in the equation area or in the Edit Dimension dialog box to create a mathematical formula. Incomplete or invalid equations display in red.

100 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

4 Right-click in a blank area of the graphics window. Choose Dimension Display from the overflow menu, and then Tolerance to display the dimensions without the parameter names. 5 Finish the sketch using one of the following methods:

Select the Finish Sketch command. Right-click in the graphics window, and choose Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu. Click the Return button on the Quick Access toolbar at the top left of the screen display.

After finishing the sketch, the view automatically rotates to the Home (isometric) view. 6 Create the extrusion.

Click the 3D Model tab Create panel Extrude, or select Extrude from the marking menu. Click and drag the gold distance arrow manipulator until the value 20 mm appears in the value input box. Alternatively, you can enter 20 in the field using the keyboard. 7 Click the green Ok button to create the extrusion and finish the command. 8 Save the file with the name End Cap Back.

Previous (page 97) | Next (page 101)

Create and Pattern a Hole

In the next section, we will create a hole using offset sketch geometry to determine hole placement. After we create the hole, we will use the rectangular pattern command to create additional holes. There are several reasons to use a hole instead of an extrusion with the cut option: Using a Hole command instead of an extrusion with a cut provides more control over the part feature.

Create and Pattern a Hole | 101

The drafting environment contains a hole note command which can associatively extract all the details of a hole.

To begin:

Start a sketch on the part face using one of these methods to start a new sketch (the second option is the most direct and offers the least amount of mouse movement). On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Sketch panel Create 2D Sketch, and then select the part face to sketch on.

Select the face to sketch on. When the mini-toolbar appears, click the third button on the right labeled with the tooltip, Create Sketch.

Select the face to sketch on, then right-click and select New Sketch from the marking menu.

The edges of the extrusion are copied to the current sketch.

102 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

TIP The icons for 2D Sketch and 3D Sketch are similar. They provide two different sketching environments. If you start a 3D sketch, perform an Undo and start a new 2D Sketch. 2 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Modify panel Offset.

3 Select one of the edges, then drag it to the inside, and click to place. All edges highlight and drag. If all the edges do not highlight, right-click and make sure Loop Select and Constrain Offset are checked in the overflow menu, then retry the selection. Enable Loop Select to allow all planar continuous sketch geometry to be selected as a group. Disable to select individual edges.

Enable Constrain Offset to apply automatic constraints which allow one offset distance to determine the position for the entire selection. Disable to allow each edge to be dimensioned independently.

Start the Dimension command. Dimension the offset geometry 5 mm away from a feature edge.

5 Place a horizontal and vertical dimension on the two edges of the offset geometry. The horizontal and vertical dimensions appear in parentheses as reference (driven) dimensions. These dimensions will be used later to extract the spacing in the feature pattern. NOTE If you receive a warning when you dimension the offset sketch geometry, choose Accept to create a driven dimension. This message appears if you did not choose Apply driven dimension in the Application Options Sketch tab.

Finish the Sketch.

Click 3D Model tab Modify panel Hole, or select Hole from the marking menu. Set the Placement option to From Sketch. Select the lower left vertex in the offset sketch to position the hole. Set the hole diameter to 6 mm and the termination to Through All, then choose OK to create the hole.

Create and Pattern a Hole | 103

104 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

The sketch is consumed under the hole feature in the browser. 8 To select the 39-mm sketch reference dimensions for the hole pattern spacing, they must be visible. Locate the hole feature in the browser, and click + to expand and show the sketch. Right-click the sketch, and choose Visibility from the context menu.

Click 3D Model tab Pattern panel Rectangular. The Features selection arrow is selected. Pick the Hole. If you are viewing the hole in a plan view, it is difficult to select the hole on the part. Rotate

Create and Pattern a Hole | 105

the view slightly in 3D before selecting the hole on the part. You can also select the hole directly in the Model browser. IMPORTANT Do NOT select the extruded body, or it will be patterned with the hole. 11 Pick the Direction 1 arrow, and then choose a horizontal edge to set the direction. The edge you choose determines the initial direction. For example, if you choose the lower model or sketch edge, the horizontal pattern direction is to the left. If you choose the upper model or sketch edge, the horizontal pattern direction is to the right.

Use the Flip direction arrow to reverse the direction. Set the count to two, and then highlight the text in the dimension spacing field. With the text highlighted, select the horizontal sketch dimension to use the dimension value for the spacing. Pick the Direction 2 arrow, and then pick a vertical model or sketch edge. Set the count to two, and then highlight the text in the dimension field. Select the vertical reference dimension to use the dimension value.

106 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

12 Click OK to create the pattern. After you create the pattern, right-click Sketch2 in the Model browser, and turn off the sketch Visibility. Previous (page 100) | Next (page 107)

Create a Revolved Feature

In this section, we create a revolved feature using projected model edges. Projected edges help anchor the geometry to the model when no edges are projected. Use the Revolvecommand to create cylindrical shapes quickly. 1 Expand the Origin folder in the browser, right-click on the YZ Plane, and select New Sketch from the context menu. Turn Visibility on to view the YZ Plane in the graphics screen.

Create a Revolved Feature | 107

2 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Slice Graphics from the overflow menu, or choose F7 to toggle Slice Graphics on and off. Navigate to a plan view using the ViewCube (use Right, for example.).

Select Project Geometry to copy a parallel model edge to the sketch in the center of the part.

Start the Line command and begin to sketch a shape. Start with a vertical line from the midpoint of the projected geometry. A green dot indicates the midpoint.

108 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

TIP An explicit horizontal line on the lower section of the sketch is not required to create a closed shape. Inventor uses Coincident constraints to determine closed boundaries. If the two vertical lines are attached to the projected edge of the sketch with Coincident constraints, there is no need to draw the line.

Dimension the sketch as shown in the following image. Apply a Collinear constraint to the outer vertical edges as shown in the following image. It enables both lines to be controlled by the same dimension. All sketch elements change color to indicate that the sketch is fully constrained. TIP If the sketch is not fully constrained, one or both of the outside vertical lines are probably not attached to the projected line. Apply coincident constraints to attach the ends (indicated by the arrows in the following image) to the projected line. You can also apply a coincident constraint using a drag operation to connect elements.

Create a Revolved Feature | 109

Finish the sketch.

On the Model tab, select the Revolve command. The closed boundary sketch profile you just completed should already be highlighted. If not, select it. Next, the highlighted axis button in the mini-toolbar prompts you to pick an axis to revolve around. Pick the center line.

110 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

TIP

If you define the axis line as a centerline, Autodesk Inventor selects the axis for you. Define the axis as a centerline to dimension the diameter when you dimension from the centerline to an outer edge. To designate the central axis as a sketch centerline, you must be in the Sketch environment. Select the axis, and then choose the centerline icon on the Format panel of the Sketch tab.

Create a Revolved Feature | 111

Finished shape -

112 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

Previous (page 101) | Next (page 113)

Use Save As to Create a Part

We now turn the part into two unique parts. There are multiple ways to create a part from the existing model. Two common methods are: Use Save As to create a part containing all the features in an editable state.

Create a table driven iPart, and suppress or enable unique features.

Before we create a new unique part, we create the sketch to locate the tapped hole on both parts. 1 Start a new sketch on the top face as shown in the following image. TIP Use the ViewCube to navigate to the Top view.

Use Save As to Create a Part | 113

2 Create and dimension a line 6 mm from the midpoint of the front edge. Make sure it is either perpendicular to the front edge or parallel to a side edge. 3 Finish the sketch.

Save the file.

5 Click Cap Front

Save As Save As, and name the new part End

114 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

6 You are now working in the new file, and the origin file End Cap Back has been closed. We are now ready to add the unique features to End Cap Front. Previous (page 107) | Next (page 115)

Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole

In this section, we introduce the work axis command. We will use the work axis and a work plane to simplify creating two intersecting holes.

Start the Hole command. The Placement option From Sketch is active.

2 Select the far end of the 6-mm line for the hole center location. Set the hole depth to 14 mm.

Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole | 115

3 Set the hole type to tapped. Change the thread type to ANSI Metric M Profile. Set the size to 5 and the designation to M5 x 0.8.

116 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

4 Click OK to finish the command and create the tapped hole. 5 On the ribbon, click the down arrow on the 3D Model tab Work

Features panel Axis command to display work axis options. Then select Through Center of Circular or Elliptical Edge from the Axis drop-down menu. Move your cursor over the tapped hole, and click to place the Work Axis when you see the preview image of the axis. 6 On the ribbon, click the down arrow on the 3D Model tab Work Features panel Plane command to display work plane options.

Select Angle to Plane around Edge from the Plane drop-down menu. Pick the front face of the part and the work axis as

Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole | 117

shown. Change the Angle in the value input box to 0, and then pick the green check mark to create the work plane.

7 Start a new sketch on the front face of the revolved shape. 8 Create a vertical line on the center point. Add a 12.5-mm dimension to the line. 9 Click Sketch tab Draw panel Point. Place a center point at the end of the vertical line to allow the Hole command to detect and use the Center Point as a hole location. Finish the sketch.

118 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

Start the Hole command. The Center Point is selected.

11 Set the hole diameter to 4mm. In the Termination drop down, select To and then pick the work plane that passes through the tapped hole as the termination location.

Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole | 119

12 Click OK to finish the command and create the hole. If you edit the sketch that locates the tapped hole, the work plane and the 4-mm hole that terminates on the plane will reposition.

120 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

TIP The cutaway image was created by starting a sketch on the YZ Origin plane, then choosing Slice Graphics from the right-click context menu. It is not required for this exercise. Previous (page 113) | Next (page 122)

Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole | 121

Create a Concentric Hole

It is possible to create holes with no pre-existing sketch. In the next section, we introduce you to alternative hole placement methods.

Start the Hole command.

2 On the Placement drop down menu, select Concentric. 3 The Plane select option is enabled. Choose the front face of the cylindrical shape to define the plane. 4 The Concentric Reference select option is enabled. Choose an edge of the cylinder to position the hole at the center of the circular face.

5 Set the diameter to 14 mm. 6 Set the Termination option to Through All.

122 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

7 Choose OK to create the through hole. 8 On the ribbon, click View tab Visibility panel Object Visibility and then clear the All Workfeatures check box from the drop-down menu to change the Work Plane and Work Axis display to off. 9 Save the file. Previous (page 115) | Next (page 124)

Create a Concentric Hole | 123

Edit the Tapped Hole Location

In the next series of steps, we edit the sketch to move the tapped hole location to demonstrate a feature edit and to show the associativity between features. In this scenario, a change order was submitted stating that the tapped hole on the front cylinder cap must be located in the middle of the part. To begin: 1 Locate the tapped hole in the Model browser. If you did not delete any holes in the first part of the exercise, it should be named Hole2 in the browser. 2 Click + next to the hole feature to expose the sketch beneath the feature. Right-click the sketch, and choose Edit Sketch from the context menu. TIP You can also choose Edit Sketch with a right-click on the feature without exposing the sketch. 3 Double-click the 6-mm dimension to enable the edit box. Change the 6-mm dimension to 10 mm. Notice that when you edit a sketch, the part history is rolled back to the feature state that existed at the time the sketch was created.

124 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

4 Exit the sketch. The tapped hole, the work plane, work axis, and 4-mm hole are updated. 5 Save the file and close it. 6 Open the file End Cap Back. Previous (page 122) | Next (page 126)

Edit the Tapped Hole Location | 125

Mirror a Feature
We now add a unique feature to the back cylinder cap. Use the Mirror command to create an identical feature on the opposite side of the part. Creating a feature and then mirroring it allows symmetrical features to be controlled by the original feature. When you edit the first instance, the mirrored feature automatically updates.

Start the Hole command.

2 In the Hole dialog box, set the Placement to Concentric and the hole type to Counterbore.

126 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

Set the counterbore diameter to 26 mm. Set the counterbore depth to 6 mm. Set the drill diameter to 10 mm. Set the Termination to Through All.

Mirror a Feature | 127

3 Click the Plane selection arrow in the dialog box, and then select the front plane of the revolved shape. The hole is previewed and the select arrow is moved to Concentric Reference. 4 On the model in the graphics window, choose the edge of the revolved shape to define the concentric edge.

128 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

5 Choose OK to create the hole.

Start the Hole command. Set the Placement to From Sketch, and select the end of the 6-mm line to locate the hole.

7 In the Hole dialog box. Set Hole Type to Drilled.

Set Termination to To. Set Hole to Tapped. Set Thread Type to ANSI Metric M Profile.

Mirror a Feature | 129

Set Size to 5. Set Designation to M5 x 0.8.

8 Select the interior of the counterbored hole on the model to define the To termination, and then click OK to create the hole.

130 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

9 Start a sketch on the side of the cylinder block shown in the following image. 10 Place a Point, Center Point near the middle of the face, and constrain it to be horizontal and vertical to the outside edges.

Mirror a Feature | 131

11 Finish the sketch.

Start the Hole command. Set the Placement type to From Sketch. If there are no other sketches in the model, Autodesk Inventor selects the point. If there are other sketches present, pick the point.

13 Set the hole type to Drilled, the hole diameter to 10 mm, and the hole depth to 10 mm. 14 Click OK to create the hole.

132 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Pattern panel Mirror.

16 The feature selection arrow is active. Select the inside of the hole you just created to add it to the mirror. 17 Change the selection type to Mirror Plane. You can do it in the dialog box, or you can right-click and choose Continue from the pop-up context menu. 18 In the Model browser, under the Origin folder, pick YZ plane to define the mirror plane.

19 Click OK to mirror the feature.

Mirror a Feature | 133

20 Save and close the file. Previous (page 124) | Next (page 135)

134 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

Summary

Congratulations! You have successfully completed this tutorial. In this exercise you: Created a part from a sketch.

Used the dimension and constraint commands to control the size and behavior of the sketch geometry. Used parameters to name and link dimensions. Used feature commands to create solid geometry. Used the pattern command to array features. Saved a copy of a part to create a new part file.

What Next? - This tutorial introduced you to basic part modeling commands. To learn about additional part modeling techniques, such as the use of work features, see the Parts 2 tutorial. Previous (page 126)

Summary | 135

136

Parts 2

About this tutorial

Explore construction techniques to create elements of your model.

Category Time Required Tutorial File Used New Users 90 minutes Start a new part file.

137

In this tutorial, you build a clamp mounting base using sketch geometry and common construction techniques. Objectives Create a work plane that bisects the part to mirror symmetrical features.

Create an offset work plane for a new sketch. Create a tangent work plane to locate a hole on a curved face.

Prerequisites Complete the Sketch Constraints, Introduction to Direct Manipulation, and Parts 1 tutorials.

Set these options in Application Options, Sketch tab: Apply driven dimension - Select

Edit Dimension when created - Select Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit - Select Autoproject part origin on sketch create - Select Grid lines Clear Snap to grid Clear

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 138)

Create the Mounting Base Profile

In this exercise, we sketch a rectangle and constrain the lower right corner of the first sketch to 0, 0, 0. Constraining a sketch to the origin makes the sketch behavior predictable and eliminates two degrees of freedom by defining the XY location. To begin: 1 Start a new mm part. Sketch a rectangle with the lower right-hand corner located at 0,0.

138 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

Start the Dimension command.

3 Create a horizontal dimension with a value of 160 mm and a vertical dimension with a value of 86 mm. The sketch is fully constrained. NOTE If the sketch is not fully constrained, make sure that the sketch is constrained to the Origin.

Exit the sketch. Use the Finish Sketch command, the Return command, or right-click and choose Finish Sketch from the marking menu to exit the sketch environment.

Start the Extrude command. Extrude the sketch 15 mm.

Previous (page 137) | Next (page 140)

Create the Mounting Base Profile | 139

Sketch on a Part Face

In the next step, there are multiple approaches to creating the feature: Create an extrusion the entire width of the part, and then cut out the middle.

Create an extrusion the exact depth and then mirror it:

140 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

For this exercise, we detail the second technique.

Use Direct Manipulation to start a new sketch on the side of the part. Click the face indicated. When the mini-toolbar appears, select the third button on the right, Create Sketch.

Sketch on a Part Face | 141

2 Create and dimension the sketch profile geometry as shown. You do not have to draw the bottom horizontal line if you connect the line endpoints to the projected geometry. As you dimension the profile, keep in mind that the 53 mm dimension is from the bottom projected edge as shown in the image.

Finish the sketch.

Extrude the profile 18 mm. Use the Direction 2 button on the mini-toolbar to extrude the profile to the interior of the part.

142 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

TIP The default direction for extrude/join is away from existing material. The default direction for extrude/cut is towards existing material. It is good idea to view a model in a 3D view before you extrude a profile to visualize the direction. If you make a mistake and extrude a profile to the wrong side, use Edit Feature and flip the direction.

Use Direct Manipulation to start the Fillet command. Click the edge indicated and select Create Fillet from the mini-toolbar. Drag the distance arrow manipulator to add an 8-mm radius to the edge, or enter 8 in the value input box.

Sketch on a Part Face | 143

6 Click the green check mark to finish the command.

Start the Hole command. Set the Placement option to Concentric.

Select the plane and the concentric edge. Set the hole diameter to 11 mm and the Termination to Through All

Select OK to create the hole.

144 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

Previous (page 138) | Next (page 145)

Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes

In the next section, we allow Autodesk Inventor to place a plane in the middle of the part. This technique is useful because it does not require any dimensions or edits to maintain the position. If the width of the part is edited, the plane stays centered. We will then create an offset work plane to use as the location of a new sketched feature.

Select Midplane between Two Parallel Planes from the Plane drop-down menu. To create a work plane that bisects the part, pick the face with the new feature and then the parallel face on the opposite side of the part. A work plane is created in the middle of the part.

Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes | 145

146 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

NOTE The initial size of a work plane is determined by the size of the existing features. To resize a work plane, first select the corner, then drag the corner when the resize symbol appears.

Start the Mirror command. Select the extrusion, the fillet, and the through hole as the features to mirror.

TIP You can select the features on the part or in the Model browser.

Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes | 147

3 When you finish selecting the features, choose the Mirror Plane selection arrow in the dialog box. You can also right-click and choose Continue from the context menu to change the selection arrow. Select the work plane in the center of the part to satisfy the Mirror Plane pick. Click the OK button to create the mirrored features and terminate the Mirror command.

Select Offset from Plane from the Plane drop-down menu. Steps 4-6 create a work plane that is parallel to the center plane and offset a specific distance.

148 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

5 Select the center work plane, and drag the new work plane towards you using the distance arrow manipulator. The Offset value input box displays with a numeric value in it as you drag (if not, clear all selections and restart the command, then try again). 6 Enter 30 mm in the Offset value input box to specify the exact distance from the center plane. 7 Click the green check mark to finish the command.

Start a new sketch on the offset work plane. (Select the edge of the work plane and click Create Sketch from the contextual mini-toolbar.) NOTE When you select a work plane for a new sketch, no geometry is projected to lock the sketch to the part. Project model edges to obtain geometry for connecting the sketch.

Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes | 149

Start the Project Geometry command. Select the front edge as shown to project it to the sketch plane, and then sketch and dimension the profile shown. Be sure to select the bottom edge of the part when creating the 25 mm dimension.

Finish the sketch.

150 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

Extrude the profile 14 mm towards the interior of the part. Use the Direction 2 button on the mini-toolbar to change the orientation before selecting OK.

Start the Hole command. Set the Placement option to Concentric. Select the plane and the concentric edge. Set the hole diameter to 8mm and the Termination to Through All

13 Select OK to create the hole.

Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes | 151

Start the Mirror command. Select the extrusion and the through-hole as the features to mirror. Select the work plane in the center of the part to satisfy the Mirror Plane pick.

We now create two chamfers on the front of the base to create a smaller footprint for the front of the base. To determine the chamfer distance, we use the Measure Distance command to extract the distance between the two planes. 15 Start the Measure Distance command. You will find this command in the marking menu, or on the Measure panel of the Tools tab. Select the plane on the outside of the part and the plane on the front face of the small mounting tab. The distance between the two faces displays as 13 mm. We will use this distance to create a chamfer that terminates at the edge of this feature and the edge of the mirrored copy.

152 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

Start the Chamfer command. Select the Two Distances option from the fly-out button on the mini-toolbar.

17 In the left value input box in the mini-toolbar, enter a value of 13 mm for Distance 1, and a value of 40 mm for Distance 2 in the right value input box. Click the Edges button and select the vertical edge on the outside of the part. If your preview image does not look like the preview in the following image, reverse the values for the distance input, or use the flip direction arrow to reverse the reference face.

Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes | 153

18 Click the green Apply button (+) to create the chamfer and stay in the Chamfer command. Select the opposite outside edge to create the

154 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

second chamfer. Reverse the input values, or use the flip direction button to achieve the desired results. In the next exercise, we create a tapped hole for a set screw on a curved face. To do this, we create a work plane that is tangent to the curve and parallel to the base. Previous (page 140) | Next (page 155)

Create a Tangent Work Plane

In this section, we create a work plane on a curved surface to provide a flat area for a 2D sketch. We use projected geometry to assist in accurately placing hole location geometry. 1 Right-click the XY Plane in the Origin folder, and check the Visibility option to turn it on.

NOTE As you become a more advanced user, you might prefer to control globally the visibility of Work Geometry, Sketches, and more by using an Object Visibility filter in the View tab. If you switch the visibility off using these controls, right-click a work plane, other work feature, or sketch and note that the visibility is enabled but the feature is off. To enable it, switch the visibility to on in the Object Visibility area.

Select Tangent to Surface and Parallel to Plane from the Plane drop-down menu. Select the edge of the XY Plane and the tangent face of the curved surface to create the work plane.

Create a Tangent Work Plane | 155

Start a new sketch on the work plane.

Start the Project Geometry command. Select the two edges of the mounting tab as shown in the following image to project them to the sketch plane. Repeat this process for the other tab before leaving the Project Geometry command.

Start the Line command, and draw a line from the midpoint of one line to the midpoint of the other line. Repeat this process for other tab. Place a Point, Center Point at the midpoint of each line to locate the hole in the middle of the mounting tab. These points also allow the Hole command to detect them for hole placement.

156 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

Finish the sketch.

Start the Hole command. The Placement option defaults to From Sketch because Autodesk Inventor detects that an unconsumed sketch is present. Autodesk Inventor detects the hole centers and selects them for the hole location. TIP Autodesk Inventor automatically selects hole locations from sketch points if no other unconsumed sketch exists.

9 Select the Tapped Hole option. Set the Thread Type to ANSI Metric M Profile, the Size to 6, and the Designation to M6x1.

Create a Tangent Work Plane | 157

10 Select To in the Termination option to terminate the tapped holes on the center holes. 11 Select an inside face of one of the existing holes to satisfy the termination selection. Make sure the check box in the dialog box is selected as shown here, or the operation fails. Click the OK button to create the holes and exit the Hole command.

158 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

Previous (page 145) | Next (page 160)

Create a Tangent Work Plane | 159

Add the Base Mounting Holes

We are almost done. We now create the mounting holes to secure the base. Make sure that the work plane in the middle of the part is visible.

Start a new sketch on the top face of the part.

Start the Project Geometry command. Select the work plane in the middle of the part to project the work plane as a line to the current sketch. Place two points (Point, Center Point) vertically in-line with each other. Place a vertical constraint between the two points to align them.

Add a 16-mm dimension from the center of the base to the upper center point.

Dimension the overall distance between the two points. Pick the two center points. Instead of adding a number for the overall distance, clear the value in the dialog box. Then, select the 16-mm dimension to add the dimension variable to the dialog box. Enter the multiplication operator *, and then the number 2. NOTE The dimension variables in your sketch may differ from the numbers presented in the following image. If they do, it does not affect the exercise.

Add a 33-mm dimension from the front edge of the part to one of the center points.

160 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

Finish the sketch.

Start the Hole command. Place two through holes of 11 mm each on the center points.

Start a new sketch on the top face of the part.

Add the Base Mounting Holes | 161

Start the Line command. Create a line from the mid-point of the back edge of the base towards the middle of the part.

Add a dimension of 16 mm to the line.

Finish the sketch. In the remaining steps, we create a counterbore clearance hole for a hex head bolt from a look up table.

Start the Hole command. Pick the endpoint of the line to specify the hole location.

162 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

15 Select the counterbore hole with the clearance hole option as shown in the following image. The system determines the proper counterbore size for the fastener you specify.

Add the Base Mounting Holes | 163

16 Select the fastener parameters listed in the image, and then click OK to create the hole. 17 Save the file. You have successfully completed this exercise! Previous (page 155) | Next (page 164)

Summary
The completed part with all work features turned off.

In this tutorial, you created a: Part from a sketch.

Symmetrical work plane in the middle of the part. Planar parallel offset work plane. Tangent work plane. Tapped hole on a cylinder.

164 | Chapter 6 Parts 2

Counterbore and clearance hole from a look-up table for a specified fastener.

You used the mirror command to duplicate symmetrical features, and projected geometry from existing features to a sketch. Previous (page 160)

Summary | 165

166

Assemblies

167

About this tutorial

168 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

Insert and position components in the Assembly environment.

Category Time Required Tutorial Files Used New Users 60 minutes Cylinder Base.ipt, Cylinder Body Sub_Assy.iam, Clamp Sketch.ipt, Long Shaft.ipt, Short Shaft.ipt, Lock Pin.ipt, 6mm SHCS.ipt.

Contact sets Flexible assemblies Analyze interference Insert components

Prerequisites Know how to set the active project, navigate model space with the various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding.

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 170)

About this tutorial | 169

Create the Assembly

To begin, create the top-level assembly. 1 Set you active project to tutorial_files. 2 Start a new Standard (mm) assembly.

On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Place , or right-click and choose Place Component from the context menu.

4 Select Cylinder Clamp Cylinder Base.ipt and choose Open. The component is placed in the assembly. NOTE By default, you can place multiple copies. If you click in the graphics window, you will place place two copies. If you accidentally placed two copies remove one before proceeding. 5 Right-click, and select Done, or press ESC to exit the command. 6 Orient the view as shown in the following image. Set the view as the Home view. Make sure Work Plane1 in the center of the base is visible. TIP If necessary, expand the list under Cylinder Base in the browser, right-click Work Plane1, and turn on Visibility.

170 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

7 Save the file with the name Cyl_Clamp.iam. Previous (page 168) | Next (page 171)

Insert a 2D Part and Constrain to a Solid

In a top down workflow, create a part or subassembly in the assembly using Create Component. At the prompt to select the sketch plane, select an origin plane, a work plane, or part face. This pick establishes the coordinate system for the new component. In the Create In-Place Component dialog box, the option Constrain sketch plane to the selected face or plane is enabled by default. This option applies a Flush constraint between the new component and the selected face or plane. Clear the check mark to apply no initial constraint. The following are some of the advantages to creating a part in the assembly: Use a top-down workflow to design a component in place.

Project edges from other components to a part sketch. Measure clearance space for the component envelope.

To create a part in the assembly, start the Create Component command, follow the steps described previously, and use the provided clamp sketch as a guide.

Insert a 2D Part and Constrain to a Solid | 171

To save time, insert a 2D part in the assembly. Apply assembly constraints to position the 2D sketch on the base. Then extrude the sketch into a solid. 1 Start Place Component. 2 Place one copy of Clamp Sketch.ipt, and stay in the Place Component command.

3 While still in the the Place Component command, move the cursor over the edge of the sketch circle. In the graphics window:

The entire Clamp Sketch highlights. A copy of the Clamp Sketch moves with your cursor. A tooltip prompts you to make a second selection.

When the axis displays, select the circle, as shown in the following image. A mini-toolbar displays in the upper left-hand corner of the graphics window.

172 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

4 To select an axis, move the cursor over the inside of the hole on the base. When the axis preview displays, select inside the hole, as shown in the following image. Do not select the edge of the hole when a green dot appears. The dot is a point constraint, and does not result in an axis to axis constraint.

Insert a 2D Part and Constrain to a Solid | 173

The copy of the Clamp Sketch is attached to the Cylinder Base, and the mini-toolbar moves to the area where you clicked. 5 Click OK to create the constraint. Hold the left mouse button down as you select the 2D sketch, and then push or pull on the geometry. The movement is limited to the axis you defined. 6 In the browser, under Clamp Sketch, expand the Origin folder, right-click the XY Plane, and turn on Visibility 7 Start the Assemble command. The mini-toolbar displays in the upper left-hand corner of the graphics window. 8 On the clamp sketch, select the XY Plane to satisfy the first pick. 9 Select the work plane in the center of the base, as shown in the following image.

174 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

The mate constraint displays in the preview. 10 On the mini-toolbar, click Constraint Type, and select Mate-Flush. Click the green OK button to apply the constraint and close the mini-toolbar. The following image shows the correct Mate/Flush solution on the left. The solution on the right is the result of a Mate/Mate. If you made a mistake, you can edit the constraint and apply the correct solution. In this case, the correct selection was specified for you. In the future, use the preview to help you decide whether to apply a Mate/Mate or a Mate/Flush constraint between two planes.

Insert a 2D Part and Constrain to a Solid | 175

11 Click the Clamp Sketch, and hold the left mouse button down. Drag the 2D sketch. The part still has one degree of rotational freedom. All ungrounded components initially have six degrees of freedom: three translational (linear X, Y, and Z), and three rotational (rotational X,Y, and Z). 12 Click View tab Visibility panel Degrees of Freedom. A rotational arrow on the Clamp Sketch indicates the part still has rotational freedom. Select the Degrees of Freedom command again to turn it off. 13 Save the file as Cylinder_Main.iam. Previous (page 170) | Next (page 176)

Create a Contact Set

Add a contact set to an assembly and then set limits on the motion. Use a contact set to stop movement when bodies collide, as they would in the physical world. To avoid slow calculation time, limit the number of components in a contact set to only the components necessary. 1 Open the file Cylinder Body Sub_Assy.iam, located in \Tutorial Files\Cylinder Clamp. 2 Use the left mouse button to click and drag the blue shaft on the assembly. The shaft can move in a linear and rotational direction. You can also pull the piston and shaft completely out of the body. The linear

176 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

and rotational freedom is intentional so that the piston can move in a higher-level assembly. Before proceeding, use Undo to restore the piston to the position it was in when you opened the file.

On the ribbon, click Inspect tab Interference panel Activate Contact Solver. The command activates, but no components belong to the contact set yet.

4 In the browser, right-click each of the following components, or in the graphics area right-click the components. Enable Contact Set in the context menu. Cylinder Head Cover_Front

Cylinder Head Cover_Back Piston

5 Push and pull on the piston shaft. The piston body movement is limited by the physical contact with the front and back cylinder heads. NOTE Rapid mouse movement allows the piston to pass through the cylinder cover bodies. This intentional behavior enables you to move contact set members in or out of a closed body. 6 Pull the piston to the end of its stroke. In the Interference panel, click Activate Contact Solver again to deactivate it. 7 Right-click the Cylinder Body and clear Enabled to make it easier to select internal parts. When you turn off Enabled, a component displays transparently for reference, and you cannot select it. A component that is not enabled appears green in the browser. To re-enable a component, right-click the component in the browser, and click Enabled. 8 Start the Constraint command. In the dialog box, do not change any settings. 9 Click the end face of the Cylinder Head Cover- Back, as shown in the following image.

Create a Contact Set | 177

10 Rotate the assembly or use Select Other to select the back face of the Piston, as shown in the previous image. 11 Click More, and specify the following: Maximum: 35mm Minimum: 0 12 Click OK to create the constraint and close the dialog box. Drag the piston rod. The piston stops at either end. 13 In the browser, right-click the cylinder body and select Enabled. Experiment with Limits settings to change the range of motion. In the browser, edit the constraint. Expand the Piston, right-click the last Mate constraint, and select Edit. If you click Use Offset As The Resting Position, you can enter a default value for the piston position. If you drag the piston and let go, it snaps back to the resting position. Previous (page 171) | Next (page 179)

178 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

Insert and Constrain a Subassembly

Constrain the piston to the Base and the 2D sketch part. The next portion of the exercise assumes Cylinder_Main.iam and Cylinder Body Sub_Assy.iam are both open. 1 On the ribbon, click View tab Windows panel Tile. 2 Click inside the window containing Cylinder Body Sub_Assy. 3 Click and drag the assembly icon from the browser to the Cylinder_Main window. The subassembly is inserted in the main assembly without using the Place Component command.

4 Save and Close the subassembly file. 5 Maximize the window containing the main assembly. 6 Start the Constrain command. 7 Apply a Mate axis/axis constraint between the 2D sketch and the hole in the piston rod, as shown in the following image.

Insert and Constrain a Subassembly | 179

When the subassembly is open in a separate window, the piston is free to move. When you insert the subassembly in the upper level assembly, the free movement is disabled. To finish constraining the subassembly in the main assembly, you must enable the freedom to move in the upper-level assembly. If the piston is not free to spin, the subassembly cannot rotate into the correct position. 8 Locate Cylinder Body Sub_Assy in the browser. 9 Right-click the subassembly, and select Flexible in the context menu. It activates the freedom of movement that was present in the subassembly in the upper level assembly. The subassembly icon in the browser changes to indicate that Flexible status is active.

180 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Position panel Rotate to move the subassembly until the tapped holes in cylinder end caps are facing up, as shown in the following image. Right-click, and select Done. Unlike a view rotation, this command physically rotates a component in space. If you take the time to orient components relative to each other before you apply constraints, the constraints behave more predictably when applied.

Insert and Constrain a Subassembly | 181

10 Start the Constrain command. Accept the default settings. 11 In the browser, expand Cylinder Base and Cylinder Body Sub_Assy to expose the browser tree. Expand the Origin folder in Cylinder Body Sub_Assy. 12 Select Work Plane1 under Cylinder Base and YZ Plane in the Origin folder under Cylinder Body Sub_Assy to apply a Mate plane/plane constraint.

182 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

If the subassembly turns inside-out, drag it toward the back of the base to correct the orientation as shown in the following image. The constraints you applied limit the movement.

13 Start the Constrain command. Accept the default options. 14 Select the center of each of the holes indicated in the following image to place a Mate axis/axis constraint.

Insert and Constrain a Subassembly | 183

15 Drag the 2D sketch part to check the motion of your digital prototype.

Previous (page 176) | Next (page 185)

184 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

Edit a Part in an Assembly

In this section, we will finish creating the 2D hinge clamp without leaving the assembly. The edit-in-place workflow allows you to project edges from other components into a sketch if necessary. You can also measure the available clearance before creating a solid. We will then check the part for interference in the required range of motion. To get started, drag the piston rod or the 2D sketch until the 2D sketch is in a near vertical orientation, as shown in the following image.

1 Right-click the part Clamp Sketch in the browser and select Edit from the pop-up context menu, or right-click the 2D sketch in the graphics window and select Edit Component from the marking menu. You can also double-click the sketch or the part file in the browser to start an edit-in-place operation. Do not choose Open; if you do, the part file opens in a separate window. The inactive assembly components appear transparent.

Edit a Part in an Assembly | 185

2 Start the Extrude command. Enter a distance of 32 mm. Use the symmetrical in both directions option. Click OK to create the extrusion.

186 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

3 To remove material from the solid to allow clearance for the piston, start a new 2D sketch on the front face of the clamp as shown in the following image.

Edit a Part in an Assembly | 187

4 Project the geometry at the top of the extrusion to the sketch, as shown in the following image. 5 Sketch a rectangle that is coincident with the projected line, as shown in the following image. 6 Create a vertical constraint between the two edges indicated. NOTE If your geometry does not match the following image after applying the constraint, undo and apply a horizontal constraint. 7 Add a 16-mm horizontal dimension and a 3-mm vertical dimension, as shown in the following image.

188 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

Finish the sketch.

9 Start the Extrude command. Cut the profile through the part. Use the All option.

Edit a Part in an Assembly | 189

10 Click OK to create the extrusion.

Click the Return command, or right-click and select Finish Edit to return to the assembly environment.

12 On the ribbon, enable the Inspect tab Interference panel Activate Contact Solver command. 13 Move the clamp forward until the piston touches the front-end cap.

Choose Analyze Interference. Select the piston rod to define set 1. Select the clamp to define set 2. Click OK to check for interference. A small interference is detected where the piston rod passes through the cut in the clamp.

190 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

15 To remove the interference, double-click the clamp hinge to initiate an edit-in-place operation. In the part browser, edit the sketch under Extrusion4, and increase the vertical dimension from 3 mm to 6 mm. Update the part, and return to the assembly. Check for interference again. The interference has been resolved. 16 Save the assembly file and other components if prompted. Previous (page 179) | Next (page 191)

Constrain Cylindrical Components

It is best to limit the number of constraints you use to position components. For example, if two components have face-to-face contact, then apply a single Mate constraint to the faces rather than using two Mate constraints on edges. Each constraint you add contributes to file size and complexity. TIP Consider using Grip Snaps to position components and then ground them if you work with large assemblies and the components do not need to move. The following section details the steps to minimally and fully constrain cylindrical components in an assembly. 1 Start the Place Component command. 2 Place one copy of Long Shaft.ipt, and apply these constraints.

Constrain Cylindrical Components | 191

3 Right-click, then choose Repeat Place and place one copy of Short Shaft.ipt. Right-click and select Done when finished.

Start the Constrain command, and use Mate/Mate (the default) to constrain the axis of the long shaft to the axis of the lower hole.

5 Choose Apply to place the constraint. 6 Constrain the axis of the short shaft to the axis of the upper hole, as shown in the following image.

7 Choose Apply to place the constraint.

Change the constraint type to Mate/Flush.

9 Select the planar face of the base mounting tab first, and then select the planar face at the end of the long shaft. Enter 5 mm for the offset value. Notice that the face selection color matches the color of the selection arrow order. The first selection is blue and the second selection is green. This can help you troubleshoot constraints as you use Autodesk Inventor.

192 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

NOTE If you pick the faces in the reverse order, enter a value of -5 mm. 10 Select Apply to place the constraint and stay in the dialog box to place another Mate/Flush constraint. 11 Pick the planar face of the clamp, and then pick the planar face at the end of the short shaft. Enter an offset value of 4mm, and then click OK to finish the command. The long and short shafts should appear symmetrically constrained as shown in the following image. The shafts are still free to rotate, but the constraints that fix their position relative to the other components are in place.

Constrain Cylindrical Components | 193

In the next segment, we will place and position the two cylindrical lock pins. We will position them in the hole so the flat surface of the pin faces the tapped hole. In this case, we do not want the cylinder to rotate. 1 Start the Place Component command, and place two instances of Lock Pin.ipt.

194 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

2 Select the Cylinder Base component. Right-click, and select Visibility in the context menu to switch off the visibility . 3 Place a Mate/Mate constraint to align each of the lock pins axially to the holes in the end of the Cylinder Body Sub_Assy. The long section should face towards the middle on both lock pins, with the flat area facing up as shown in the following image. TIP Use the Rotate command to re-align the pins if they are constrained axially, but the long section is facing out. After rotating, use Update to recalculate the axial constraint in the new position.

Constrain Cylindrical Components | 195

4 Select the Cylinder Base in the browser. Right-click, and select Visibility to re-enable the component visibility. To align the center of the flat area on the lock pin with the tapped hole in the base, we will create a work axis on the lock pin. 5 Double-click one of the lock pin instances, or right-click and choose EditComponent from the marking menu to initiate an edit-in-place operation. 6 On the View tab Visibility panel, select Object Visibility and ensure that All Workfeatures is enabled to view the work geometry. 7 On the 3D Model tab Work Features panel, select Work Axis. 8 Select Work Plane1 and the XZ Plane in the Origin folder of the Lock Pin to create a Work Axis in the middle of the flat cutout. A work axis should appear in the center of the flat section, as shown in the following image.

196 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

9 Right-click, and choose Finish Edit from the marking menu. Alternatively, choose the Return command on the 3D Model tab to finish the local edit and return to the assembly. 10 Start the Constrain command, and place a Mate/Mate constraint between the new work axis and the axis in the center of the tapped hole.

11 Choose Apply to place the constraint. 12 Place a Mate/Mate constraint between the two axes on the remaining lock pin to position the pin in the hole.

Constrain Cylindrical Components | 197

13 Click OK to apply the constraint and exit the dialog box. The lock pins are fully constrained in alignment with the tapped holes. 14 Save the file. In the following image depicting the Cylinder Base, Enabled is toggled off, while Visibility is not. If a component is not enabled, it remains visible in a transparent state, but it is not selectable. A component that is not enabled appears green in the browser. To re-enable a component, select the component in the browser, and choose Enabled in the context menu.

Previous (page 185) | Next (page 198)

Add the Hardware

The assembly is nearly complete. We will now finish placing the components necessary to create an accurate Bill of Materials and Parts List. This section of the exercise assumes that you have Content Center installed and available. If Content Center is not available, the required hardware to

198 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

finish the assembly is furnished in the tutorial directory. The steps listed in the following section do not detail the workflow to place the circlips without Content Center. The Content Center allows you to place a component, adjust the size to match the target, and constrain it in a few picks. The target edge for the circlip we will place in the next section is the inside edge noted in the following image.

1 On the Assemble tab Component panel, choose the drop-down arrow under Place to access the Place from Content Center command. You can also right-click in the graphics screen and select the command from the context menu. 2 Expand the section titled Shaft Parts. 3 Expand the sub-section titled Circlips, and select External.

Add the Hardware | 199

4 Select ANSI B 27.7M in the dialog box, and then choose OK. A preview of the component appears in the graphics window attached to the cursor. The question mark in the preview image indicates that the clip can be automatically resized using AutoDrop.

5 Move your cursor over the inside edge of the groove, and wait for the component to resize automatically. Click the edge when the component is the proper size, and then click the check mark in the AutoDrop dialog box to place and constrain the component.

200 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

6 Repeat to place the remaining circlips. Choose Done from the context menu when finished. There should be four instances of ANSI B 27.7N 3AMI-7 in the browser. 7 Start the Place Component command. 8 Place two copies of 6mm SHCS.ipt in the assembly. 9 Rotate the components, if necessary, to position the hex opening up as shown in the following image.

Add the Hardware | 201

10 Start the Constrain command, and place a Mate/Mate between the centerline of the fastener and the centerline of the hole. 11 Choose Apply, and repeat for the other fastener. Click OK to apply the constraint and finish the command. 12 Turn off the Visibility of the Cylinder Base. 13 Start the Constrain command. Place a Mate/Mate constraint between the planar face at the bottom of the fastener and the planar face of the cutout in the lock pin.

202 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

14 Choose Apply and repeat for the other side. 15 Choose OK to finish. 16 Turn on the Visibility of the Cylinder Base. 17 Save the file. Previous (page 191) | Next (page 204)

Add the Hardware | 203

Summary

Congratulations! You have completed this tutorial. In this exercise, you: Placed components in an assembly.

Applied assembly constraints. Edited parts from the assembly environment. Created and used Contact Sets. Enabled the Flexible state on a lower level subassembly. Used interference detection. Placed components using the Content Center library with AutoDrop.

204 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

What Next? Try the Drawings tutorial to learn how to document parts and assemblies using the drafting and view layout commands. Previous (page 198)

Summary | 205

206

Drawings

8
New Users 45 minutes hinge.idw hinge.ipt Cylinder Clamp.idw

About this tutorial

Prepare final drawings of your models.
Category Time Required Tutorial Files Used

207

Understand the basics of the technical drawing process and industry standards, such as ANSI, ISO, and so on. Understand the material covered in the Help topic Getting Started. Click Application Options on the Options panel of the Tools tab. On the Application Options dialog box, click the Drawing tab and uncheck the option Edit dimension when created.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 208)

Get Started
1 Open hinge.idw,located in \Tutorial Files\Cylinder Clamp.

This file contains a simple, two sheet drawing that you can refer to during the tutorial. Sheet:1 of the drawing contains four views of the part you

208 | Chapter 8 Drawings

will detail during the first part of this tutorial. Sheet:2 shows how the drawing would look after the addition of a section view, dimensions, and annotation. 2 To view Sheet:2, double-click the Sheet:2 node in the browser.

NOTE Although you can add sheets to any drawing you create, you do not typically add sheets containing the same views shown on other sheets. The second sheet in the supplied drawing is simply an easy way to reference incremental progress for this tutorial. You can leave this drawing open as you continue with the tutorial. In the next several steps, you will select a template to begin a new drawing and add front, left-side, top and isometric views to the drawing sheet. Previous (page 207) | Next (page 209)

Create a Drawing
1 Click New on the Application Menu. 2 Click the Metric tab, and then select ISO.idw. 3 Click OK.

Create a Drawing | 209

Autodesk Inventor opens an empty A3 drawing sheet with a generic border and title block. In the remaining steps, you place four views like the views you saw on Sheet:1 of the already open drawing.

4 On the ribbon, click Place Views tab Create panel Base . 5 To specify a model, in the Drawing View dialog box, click Open an existing file. 6 Select hinge.ipt, and click Open. 7 Click a location on your sheet for your front view. Leave space between the view boundaries and the drawing border to allow for additional view and dimension placement. NOTE Before you place the base view, you can use options on the Drawing View dialog box to specify the base view properties. For this tutorial, you accept the system default values. Previous (page 208) | Next (page 211)

210 | Chapter 8 Drawings

View Projection
After you place a base view, the Place Views tab Create panel

Projected

command is activated by default.

To understand your view projection options, move your cursor in a circle around the front view boundary without clicking. Notice that Autodesk Inventor previews eight different projected views.

1 Click below your front view to place a top view. Notice that a temporary rectangle is placed, indicating the intended location of the new view. 2 Click to the right of your front view to place a left side view. Another temporary rectangle is placed. 3 Click below your front view and to the right of your top view. A temporary rectangle is placed for an isometric view. 4 Right click, and select Create. The three projected views that you positioned are now created. NOTE The ISO drafting standard specifies first-angle projection. The ANSI drafting standard specifies third-angle projection. Views are projected according to the standard specified by the template used to create drawings. Autodesk Inventor supplies templates for standards accepted world-wide. The supplied standards can be modified to suit your requirements.

View Projection | 211

Approximate layout of current drawing sheet with one base view and three projected views. Moving views is easy, if necessary. Just click and drag a drawing view while the red dotted view boundary displays. Dependent views will position relative to the parent view. At this point, you would likely begin adding dimensions to a simple part. However, for this part, add a section view. Previous (page 209) | Next (page 212)

Add a Section View

1 On the ribbon, click Place Views tab Create panel Section

. The Status Bar at the bottom left of the display screen prompts you to: Select a view or view sketch. 2 Click the left side view located to the right of the front or base view on your drawing sheet. You are prompted to enter the endpoints of the section line. Draw a vertical line that starts above the view geometry, extends below the view geometry, and passes through the middle of the part.

212 | Chapter 8 Drawings

3 To find the middle of the part, slowly move your cursor over the top-most line in the center portion of the part. When you reach the middle of that line, the cursor displays a green ball. Do not click yet!

4 Move your cursor slowly above the drawing view.

Add a Section View | 213

As you move upwards, notice the dotted line extending from your cursor to the middle of the part. This dotted line lets you know that you are aligned with the midpoint of the line that was located under the green ball. If you move too far to the right or the left as you move upwards, you are no longer aligned to that point, and the dotted line disappears. 5 With the dotted vertical line visible, click to select the top-most point of the section line. 6 Move your cursor straight down below the view. Your cursor indicates that the line is perpendicular to the part edge.

214 | Chapter 8 Drawings

7 While the perpendicular icon displays next to your cursor, click to select the end point of the section line. 8 Right-click, and select Continue. The Section View dialog box appears offering various options for defining, identifying, and scaling the section view. For this exercise, accept the default settings. 9 Move your cursor to the left of the front view, and click to place the section view and close the Section View dialog box.

Add a Section View | 215

During the creation of a section view, you can use Inventor ability to infer geometric relationships while you sketch your section line. In this example, you used a single, straight line. In other more complex cases, you will use a multi-segment line that passes through key points of multiple features.

A section view is created, and a label is positioned that identifies the view and indicates the view scale. This view label is optional and can be repositioned and edited after placement as required. 10 Move your cursor over the view label. When the label text changes to red, click and drag the label away from the view geometry to allow room for dimensions. You will now place dimensions and other annotation on your drawing. Previous (page 211) | Next (page 217)

216 | Chapter 8 Drawings

Place Centerlines and Center Marks

1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab Symbols panel Centerline

. 2 Move your cursor over the center of the upper left hole in the section view. When the green-filled circle appears, indicating that you are directly over the center point, click to select the first point of your centerline. TIP After clicking on the Centerline command, you can optionally click to select the circle first. You can then more easily select the circle center with a second click.

3 Move your mouse to the right until you are over the center of the upper-right hole in the section view. When the green-filled circle appears, click to select the endpoint of your centerline.

Place Centerlines and Center Marks | 217

4 Right-click to display the context menu. 5 Select Create to complete the placement of the centerline.

6 Repeat steps 2-5 to place a similar centerline between these same two holes in the front view.

7 Click Annotate tab Symbols panel Center Mark

8 Move your cursor over the center of the cylindrical feature in the lower right of the section view. When the green-filled circle appears (to indicate that you are directly over the center point) click to place a center mark.

9 Repeat the previous step to place a center mark on the inside cylindrical radius and on these same locations in the front view.

218 | Chapter 8 Drawings

With centerlines and center marks in place, it is time to place dimensions. Previous (page 212) | Next (page 220)

Place Centerlines and Center Marks | 219

Place Dimensions

In this exercise, we use the general Dimension command. Autodesk Inventor also provides some unique dimensioning commands that are not covered in this tutorial. As you proceed, you may decide that a dimension (or other annotation) you placed is unsatisfactory. To delete a dimension or annotation that has already been placed, select the Undo command from the Quick Access toolbar. You can also select the dimension and press Del, or right-click and select Delete from the displayed context menu.

220 | Chapter 8 Drawings

NOTE The following steps assume that you canceled the Edit dimension when created selection on the Drawing tab of the Application Options dialog box as instructed in the Prerequisites for this tutorial. If you did not, you will see an Edit dialog box displayed after clicking to place each dimension. You can continue this tutorial without changing the default settings by always clicking OK when this dialog box displays. However, we recommend that you change the default. 1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab Dimension panel

Dimension

2 Move your cursor over the top-most extent of the vertical center mark on the left-most hole in the section view. 3 When the two green-filled circles appear and the vertical line highlights, click to select the vertical line of the center mark as the left extent of your dimension.

4 Move your cursor over the top-most extent of the vertical center mark on the right-most hole in the section view. 5 When the two green-filled circles appear and the vertical line highlights, click to select the vertical line of the center mark as the right extent of your dimension.

Place Dimensions | 221

6 Notice that as you move your cursor, the dimension extension lines adjust. Click to position your dimension.

Although you placed a single dimension, the Dimension command is still active. 7 Move your cursor over the lower-most extent of the vertical center mark on the left-most hole in the section view.

222 | Chapter 8 Drawings

8 When the two green-filled circles appear and the vertical line highlights, click to select the vertical line of the center mark as the left extent of your dimension.

9 Move your cursor over the lower-most extent of the vertical line representing the cut material. 10 To select the right extent of your dimension, click when the line highlights and the green-filled circle appears.

Place Dimensions | 223

11 Move your cursor to select a position, and then click to place the 16-mm dimension.

224 | Chapter 8 Drawings

12 Continue to place horizontal and vertical dimensions on the section, front, left, and top views. Click the Esc key to terminate the dimension command. 13 After placing several dimensions, you may decide that you would like to move a dimension. With no command active, move your cursor over a dimension value that you would like to move. When the dimension highlights, click and drag the dimension value (up/down or left/right) to new location. You can also click and drag any of the green-filled circle edit handles to make other dimension edits.

Place Dimensions | 225

Previous (page 217) | Next (page 226)

Place Angular Dimensions

1 The general Dimension command is also used to place angular dimensions. On the ribbon, click Annotate tab Dimension panel Dimension. 2 Move your cursor over the angled line in the front view. When the line highlights, click to select the first side of the angle that you wish to dimension. For this selection, you do not have to locate a key point on the line. No green-filled circles must be located that infer the selection of the line midpoint or endpoint.

226 | Chapter 8 Drawings

3 Move your cursor over the bottom horizontal line. When the line highlights, click to select the second side of the angle that you want to dimension. Notice that the icon near the cursor indicates that your selection will create an angle dimension.

4 To understand your dimension options, drag your cursor in a circle and notice that you can place your angle dimension in one of four quadrants defined by the intersection of the two lines that you selected.

Place Angular Dimensions | 227

5 Click to place your angle dimension in the quadrant shown.

Previous (page 220) | Next (page 229)

228 | Chapter 8 Drawings

Radial and Reference Dimensions

1 The general Dimension command (which should still be active) is also used to place radial dimensions. Move your cursor over the right-most arc in the front view. Click when the arc geometry highlights.

2 Drag your cursor to place the radial dimension.

3 Move your cursor over the left-most arc in the front view. Move your cursor along the arc until the green-filled circle appears at the 270-degree position. It indicates that you located the left-most quadrant key point. Click to select the left-most point of what will be an overall reference dimension. CAUTION: The midpoint of the arc segment also displays a green-filled circle at approximately 290 degrees. Selecting the arc segment midpoint will not produce the appropriate dimension.

Radial and Reference Dimensions | 229

4 Move your cursor over the right-most arc in the front view. Move your cursor along the arc until the green-filled circle appears to indicate that you located the right-most quadrant key point. Click to select the right-most point of what will be an overall reference dimension.

5 Drag your cursor to place the overall dimension.

230 | Chapter 8 Drawings

TIP Dimensions, centerlines, and center marks can also be placed for holes and other features in isometric views. Previous (page 226) | Next (page 231)

Add a Hole Note

1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab Feature Notes panel Hole

and Thread

2 Move your cursor near the 10 oclock position of the left-most hole in your front view, and click to select the arrow location of your hole call out.

Add a Hole Note | 231

3 Drag your cursor to position the leader and dimension for your hole callout. Click to finalize the placement.

Your drawing should now appear like Sheet:2 on the previously opened hinge.idw. Before you continue by working within a partially complete assembly drawing, save your drawing. 4 With the drawing you created active, click Save As on the Application menu. 5 Type a name for your drawing in the File name field of the Save as dialog box.

232 | Chapter 8 Drawings

6 Click Save. By default, your drawing is saved in the Inventor IDW drawing format. If you routinely work with or send drawings to individuals using AutoCAD, consider saving your drawing in the DWG format. With the drawing you created active, click Save As on the Application Menu.

Click the selection arrow on the Save as type field on the Save As dialog box. Select Inventor drawing files (*.dwg) from the drop-down list. You may want to change the name of the saved drawing or the location where you will save DWG files, but for this tutorial, simply click Save. 7 From the Application Menu, click Close All.

Open an Assembly Drawing

In the next portion of the tutorial, you add a parts list, balloons, and notes to an assembly drawing. Assembly drawing views and dimensions are created and placed using the same steps that you just completed. They are not repeated in the remaining portion of the tutorial. 1 Click Open on the Application Menu. 2 Select Cylinder Clamp.idw in the Open dialog box, and click Open. A single sheet drawing opens that has three orthographic views and one isometric view of the cylinder clamp assembly used in the Parts 2 and Assemblies tutorials.

Open an Assembly Drawing | 233

Assembly drawings often contain numbered lists of component parts along with corresponding balloons which identify each part. In the next set of exercises, you place a parts list and balloons with corresponding numbers. Previous (page 231) | Next (page 234)

Place a Parts List

1 On the Annotate tab, Table panel, click Parts List. 2 The Parts List dialog box appears, and the view selection stage of the command is active. Move your cursor over the isometric view of the assembly. When the view highlights with a red dotted boundary, click to select the view.

234 | Chapter 8 Drawings

3 In the Parts List dialog box, select Parts Only from the BOM View drop-down list control in the BOM Settings and Properties area. 4 Click OK in the Parts List dialog box. A rectangle the size of the parts list appears attached to your cursor.

Place a Parts List | 235

You are now ready to move the parts list to a position on your drawing sheet. 5 Move the parts list so that it aligns with the upper left of the drawing border. Notice that when your cursor is over the drawing border, an icon appears indicating the connection point for the parts list.

236 | Chapter 8 Drawings

6 Click to accept the position of the parts list on your drawing sheet.

Place a Parts List | 237

Each item in the assembly is given a sequential item number in the parts list. You will now add balloons which use these item numbers. Previous (page 233) | Next (page 238)

Add Balloons
8 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab Table panel, and then click the drop-down menu below Balloon. .

9 On the drop-down menu, click Auto Balloon. 10 Move your cursor over the isometric view of the assembly. When the view highlights with a red dotted boundary, click to select the view. 11 Use the Balloon command to select individual components for ballooning. In this exercise, you select all the components in the view. Click above and to the left of the view geometry, and drag the mouse

238 | Chapter 8 Drawings

down and to the right. The pink rectangle should cover all the view geometry.

12 Release the mouse button to select all the view geometry.

Add Balloons | 239

13 Select the Around option in the Placement area in the Auto Balloon dialog box. 14 Enter a value of 5 mm in the Offset Spacing field in the Auto Balloon dialog box. 8 Click Select Placement in the Placement area in the Auto Balloon dialog box. 9 Move your cursor into the drawing sheet. As you move your cursor, the balloons arrange themselves closer or farther away from the view center. Vertical rows move based on the horizontal position of the cursor relative to the view center. Horizontal rows move based on the vertical position of the cursor relative to the view center. The following illustration shows four possible balloon positions using the Around option.

240 | Chapter 8 Drawings

10 Move your cursor to a position that most closely resembles the display in the lower-right quadrant of the image shown above. When your balloon spacing appears similar, click to display the balloon arrows. 11 Click OK in the Auto Balloon dialog box to accept and place the balloons and arrows. Previous (page 234) | Next (page 242)

Add Balloons | 241

Adjust Balloons and Balloon Leaders

Having placed many balloons automatically, you may decide to reposition one or more balloons or balloon leaders. In this case, the leader for balloon 1 (which identifies the base) needlessly crosses over the cylinder. In the following steps you move both the balloon and the leader arrow. 1 Move your mouse over balloon 1. The balloon and leader highlight, and a green edit handle appears in the balloon center. 2 Move your cursor over the green edit handle. When the move glyph appears next to your cursor, drag the balloon down towards balloon 7.

242 | Chapter 8 Drawings

3 Drag slowly over balloon 7 and then downwards. As you drag downwards, notice the vertical dotted line appears, indicating that your balloon position is aligned with balloon 7. 4 Release your mouse button to accept a new balloon position similar to that shown in the following illustration.

Adjust Balloons and Balloon Leaders | 243

Next, you adjust the leader arrowhead position.

244 | Chapter 8 Drawings

Previous (page 238) | Next (page 245)

Adjust the Leader Arrowhead

Now that the balloon is in a better position, you will move the leader arrowhead to a position closer to the balloon. 1 Move your cursor over the end-most edit handle located at the arrowhead point of the leader from balloon 1.

2 When the move symbol appears next to the cursor, click and drag the location of the arrowhead point to the corner of the base closest to the balloon.

Adjust the Leader Arrowhead | 245

3 When the lines representing the bottom and side of the base highlight and the connection point icon appears next to your cursor, release your mouse button to select the new position for the arrowhead point. Next, you will place a few example notes. Previous (page 242) | Next (page 246)

Place Notes
Every drawing contains text and annotation. This text may be attached to drawing geometry with an arrow leader or contained within a specific area of a title block or revision table. It can be a lengthy set of notes. To place text:

1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab Text panel Text

246 | Chapter 8 Drawings

2 Placing text on a drawing requires you to specify a location and an approximate initial size of the area occupied by the block of text. Move your cursor to the empty area above the title block. Click and drag a rectangle approximately as shown in the following image:

NOTE For smaller amounts of text, your initial rectangle can be smaller. The size of the text boundary can be adjusted at any time after placement so getting it exactly correct is not critical. When you release the mouse button, the Format Text dialog box displays. In addition to some text formatting options, this dialog box contains a large text entry field located along the bottom of the dialog box. For many general notes, you can accept the text formatting defaults (which are specified by the active style for your drawing). 3 Enter text in the text entry field. Type NOTES:, then press Enter and continue to type 1. This is a note. Press Enter again and continue to type 2. This is another note. 4 Click OK to place the text you typed in the text entry field on the drawing sheet, within the area specified by your rectangle.

Place Notes | 247

5 Select another command, or click Esc to terminate the Text command. 6 Click the placed text.

248 | Chapter 8 Drawings

The text highlights and displays edit handles (green-filled circles). You can drag the entire text block to a new location or move your cursor over one of the eight edit handles to resize the text block boundaries. 7 With the text selected, right-click and select Edit Text from the context menu. The Format Text dialog box opens with the selected text in the entry field. You can highlight individual words and apply formatting (bold, italic, underline) or change font or size. 8 Click Save to save the Cylinder Clamp drawing. NOTE After clicking Save, you may be presented with the Save dialog box prompting you with: Do you want to save changes to Cylinder Clamp.idw and its dependents? You can click the Yes to All button to save all the files associated with the assembly, or click No to All if you wish to save none. Click the OK button to save only the files changed in this exercise and close the dialog box. Congratulations! You have completed the Drawings tutorial. A brief summary follows.

Summary
The Autodesk Inventor drawing environment contains a collection of commands most of which were not discussed in this tutorial. Knowing how to use the fundamental methods to create basic drawings provides you with a foundation to explore the use of these other commands. The basic procedures covered in this tutorial include: Projected and section view creation

Basic dimensioning Placing basic notes

Previous (page 246)

Summary | 249

250

Drawing Styles and Standards

About this tutorial

Open a drawing and modify the drawing styles for dimensions. Apply the styles to dimensions and modify the display of hatch patterns.
Category Time Required New Users 45 minutes

251

Tutorial File Used

Cylinder Body Sub-Assembly.idw

Set the project and open the Tutorial File

Inventor stores styles in documents (local styles) and in the style library (library styles). The Use Style Library setting in the project determines whether styles in the style library are open for edit. The Read-Only status ensures that all style edits are kept in the local document.

1 With all Inventor files closed, click 2

Manage Projects.

In the lower pane of the Projects dialog box, confirm that the Use Style Library setting is Read-Only. If it is set to Read-Write, right-click the setting, and select Read-Only. Then click Save.

252 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards

NOTE Read-Only status enables sharing styles in model or drawing documents. When styles in the library change, CAD administrator can update all documents to use the new library styles. 3 Click Done to close the Projects dialog box. 4 In the Tutorial Files > Cylinder Clamp folder, open Drawing Styles.idw.

Previous (page 251) | Next

Annotation Styles
Drawing styles control the appearance of drawing annotations. The default styles delivered with Inventor comply with national and international standards such as ANSI, ISO, and GB. You can modify the styles to meet the requirements of your company. For example, if you have a text style that uses a large font, you can use that style to override the appearance of notes. This drawing was created using the ISO standard. Although most of the annotations follow the standard, some changes are required. In this exercise, you create a dimension style that uses a period instead of a comma for the decimal marker.

Annotation Styles | 253

1 Click the Manage tab Styles and Standards group Styles Editor. The Style and Standard Editor dialog box displays. Each drawing contains the style information that controls the display of the annotations. In addition, the drawing can contain styles that are not used. The style library can store all the styles your company uses. To reduce file size, there are more styles in the style library than in a drawing. For example, styles for weldments only are not included in most drawings. The dialog box has a style tree list on the left side. The tree list has a node for each type of annotation. If you click a node, it expands to display the styles. Some annotations have only one style, while others have several. 2 Expand the Dimension node in the browser, and select Default (ISO). 3 To create a dimension style based on the Default (ISO) style, click New 4 In the New Local Style dialog box, in Name, enter Modified (ISO). Clear the Add to Standard setting, and click OK. The new style is added to browser under the Dimension node. NOTE Add to Standard controls whether to include the style in the active standard. You do not use this style in the default standard. 5 In Decimal Marker, change the setting to . Period, as shown in the following image.

254 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards

6 Click Save. NOTE Each style is a separate collection of settings. Save changes before you switch to a different style. Previous (page 252) | Next (page 255)

Object Defaults and Standards

An object default style is a collection of all annotation types and their default settings. A standard contains settings for views, text, object defaults, and hatches. In this topic, you create an object default style and a standard, and use them to control the appearance of the drawing.

Object Defaults and Standards | 255

1 Expand the Object Defaults node and select Object Defaults (ISO). Click New, and in Name,enter Modified Object Defaults (ISO). Clear Add to Standard. NOTE The Add to Standard behavior for object default styles differs from annotation styles. If Add to Standard is selected, the new object default becomes active for the standard. 2 Set the filter to Dimension Objects. 3 Change the Object Style for all dimension types that use the Default (ISO) to Modified (ISO), as shown in the following image.

256 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards

4 Click Save. Expand the Standard node, select Default Standard (ISO), and create a standard named Modified Standard (ISO). On the Available Styles tab, select Dimension Modified (ISO) style. On the Object Defaults tab, set Active Object Defaults to Modified Object Defaults (ISO). Click Save, and double-click Modified Standard (ISO). The standard name changes to bold type to indicate it is active.

Object Defaults and Standards | 257

5 Click Done. Newly created dimensions use the Modified Standard (ISO). TIP To update existing dimensions, select the dimensions in the graphic window. Then on the ribbon, select Modified Standard (ISO) from the Style list on the Annotate tab Format panel.

258 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards

Previous (page 253) | Next (page 259)

Override Annotation Styles

In some cases, the appearance of certain annotations is wrong, and you do not want all the annotations to have this appearance. In this topic, you create a style that hides trailing zeros.

1 Right-click and select Repeat Style and Standard Editor. 2 Expand the Dimension node, right-click Modified (ISO), and select New Style. In Name, enter Modified- No Trailing Zeros (ISO) NOTE Do not clear the Add to Standard selection. Modified Standard (ISO) is active, and you want to add this style to it. 3 On the Units tab Display group, clear the selection of Trailing Zeros. Click Save, and Done. 4 Select the hole notes in the base view.

Override Annotation Styles | 259

5 On the Annotate tab Format panel Style List, click ModifiedNo Trailing Zeros (ISO).

Previous (page 255) | Next (page 260)

Hatch Styles
Hatch patterns are used in section views, and to fill in the profiles in sketches. Most standards specify the use of a single hatch pattern, and the angle of the pattern is automatically changed on individual parts in assembly section views. Some companies use different hatch patterns for different materials to help differentiate them. In this exercise, you learn how to map hatch patterns to materials, import a custom hatch pattern, and override the appearance of a hatch pattern.

260 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards

1 Zoom into view A-A. Since it is a view of a single part, all profiles have the same hatch pattern. 2 On the Manage tab, click Styles and Standards group Styles Editor. Expand the Standard node and select Modified Standard (ISO).

Hatch Styles | 261

3 Click the Material Hatch Pattern Defaults tab. The default hatch pattern is set to ANSI 31, and no materials are listed. Click the From Style Library icon to import the materials from the style library. All materials are listed, and they are all mapped to the default hatch pattern. NOTE If materials do not display, confirm that the style library setting in the project is Read Only. Scroll down to Steel, Mild and click the hatch pattern. The drop-down menu lists ANSI 31, several ISO hatch patterns, and Other . 4 Click Other... to display the Select Hatch Pattern dialog box. This dialog box controls which hatch patterns are available in the drawing. Select ANSI 32 and click OK. The ANSI 32 steel hatch pattern is now available, but it is not set as the default hatch pattern for the Steel, Mild material. Click the hatch pattern dropdown menu again, and select ANSI 32. Click Save, and Done. Even though we set ANSI 32 as the default hatch pattern, the section view does not update. Once you map hatch patterns to materials, new section views automatically use those patterns. For existing views, Edit the pattern and set the By Material option. Right-click the pattern, and select Pattern By Material The section view updates to use the ANSI 32 hatch pattern, as shown in the following image.

262 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards

The spacing on the hatch pattern is too close for this part cross-section. 5 Right-click on the pattern and select Edit . By Material is selected and Pattern is disabled. Change the Scale to 2, and click OK.

Hatch Styles | 263

The hatch pattern updates as shown in the following image.

6 Previous (page 259) | Next (page 265)

264 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards

Custom Hatch Styles

Some companies use custom hatch patterns to indicate a special material, surface finish, or to highlight an area for a manufacturing instruction. You can import AutoCAD standard pattern files into Inventor. 1 Open the Style and Standard Editor and create a hatch style called Modified Hatch (ISO). On the Pattern dropdown list, select Other . In the Select Hatch Pattern dialog box, select Load... In the Tutorial Files Cylinder Clamp folder, select Sample.pat, and click Open. Two hatch patterns are available in that file- Sample1 and Sample2. Select Sample1, and click OK to close the Load Hatch Pattern dialog box. Click OK again to close the Select Hatch Pattern dialog box Sample1 is now the active hatch pattern for this style. The image is a representation of the hatch pattern, but it is not a preview. The pattern lines are at an angle, and Angle reads 45 degrees. 2 Change Angle to 0 degrees. The image does not update. The Sample1 hatch pattern is defined with the crosshatch lines at 27 and 48 degree angles. The default Angle setting shifts the pattern by 45 degrees. By changing Angle to 0 degrees, the pattern appears in the drawing the way it was created. Click Save, and click Done. 3 Click View A-A. On the Annotate tab, click Sketch Group Create Sketch. In the Draw group, click Project Geometry, and then select the four lines in the middle of the view. Click Done (ESC). On the Sketch tab, in Draw group, click Fill/Hatch Region, and then click in the profile defined by the projected lines. 4 In the Hatch/Color Fill dialog box, click the Hatch button to enable the hatch controls. In the Pattern list, select Sample1. The pattern displays in the sketch. Although you selected the sample1 pattern, the rest of the settings did not update. The previous Angle setting does not work well with this pattern, so experiment with different angles. In Angle, enter 90 degrees, and click OK. The dialog box closes. Click Finish Sketch to return to the drawing. The section view resembles the following image.

Custom Hatch Styles | 265

NOTE Note If you do not select the view before you create the sketch, the sketch is created on the sheet instead of the view. You cannot project view geometry into a sheet sketch.

266 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards

Previous (page 260) | Next (page 267)

Summary

The Autodesk Inventor drawing environment supports extensive drawing customization. Knowing how to use the Style and Standard Editor to customize dimension and hatch appearance provides you with a foundation to explore annotation customization further. The basic procedures covered in this tutorial include: Creating and modifying styles, object defaults, and standards.

Setting style defaults. Overriding styles.

Previous (page 265)

Summary | 267

268

iLogic Basics

About this tutorial

Create rules-based models.

Category New Users

269

Time Required Tutorial File Used

40 minutes bracket_no_rules.ipt

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. iLogic extends the computational capabilities within Autodesk Inventor to include rules. These rules work with the parameter update mechanism of Autodesk Inventor and allow you to include much more sophisticated design intent into your models. In traditional parametric modeling, dimensional parameters drive geometry. Parameter values can be input directly by the user, or they can result from fixed equations involving other parameters or even linked spreadsheet values. Using rules in a parametric model allows for conditionally defined equations. Conditional equations can involve all aspects of the design. Equations or relationships can be defined between the parameters, properties, attributes, features, components, or any other aspect of the design. Defining the relationships between all objects in a design makes it possible to update the model completely, correctly, and automatically when input parameter values are changed. Objectives Become familiar with important iLogic concepts.

Create rules and parameters that control the modeling of a simple part.

Prerequisites Familiarity with Autodesk Inventor, and its basic part modeling functionality and concepts.

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 271)

270 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

Prepare to Add Parameters

In addition to the familiar numeric parameters available in Autodesk Inventor, you can create text and true/false parameters and then use them to control your model. In the following lessons, you create additional parameters in your model for later use in iLogic rules. 1 With Autodesk Inventor open, set your active project to iLogic 2012 Tutorials. 2 Open the file bracket_no_rules.ipt.

3 Use the Save As command to save this document as a new file named bracket.ipt. This open document is your working file for the tutorial.

On the ribbon, click Manage tab Parameters panel Parametersto display the Parameters dialog box, which serves as the editor for all Autodesk Inventor parameters.

Prepare to Add Parameters | 271

5 Click the Filters icon at the bottom of the dialog box. Select the All option to ensure that all parameters associated with the bracket model are displayed. Previous (page 269) | Next (page 272)

Create a Numeric Parameter

1 Select Add Numeric from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the dialog box. A new row is created at the bottom of the parameter list, and the cursor is positioned in the Parameter Name cell for that row. 2 Enter the name mass, and then click the Unit cell to display the Unit Type dialog box. 3 Expand the Mass node, and select lbmass. NOTE Parameter names in iLogic are case sensitive. Please be sure to follow the case being used in the Parameters dialog box, and while creating rules. 4 Enter 100 in the Equation cell, then click in another cell in the row and observe 100.000000 in the Nominal Value field. 5 Select the check box in the Key cell of this parameter to make it a Key parameter. Previous (page 271) | Next (page 272)

Create a Text Parameter

With the Parameters dialog box still open: 1 Select Add Text from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the dialog box. 2 Enter the name holes in the empty Parameter Name cell at the bottom of the parameter list. 3 Right-click in one of the cells of the row to display the contextual menu containing the options Make Multi-Value and Delete Parameter. 4 Select Make Multi-Value to open the Value List Editor dialog box.

272 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

5 In the Add New Items field at the top of the dialog box, enter base, flange, and none. Make sure to press Enter after each item to place it on its own line. 6 Click Add to transfer the new items to the Value field at the bottom of the dialog box.

(1) Enter your items here. (2) Click Add. (3) Observe items added as values.

7 Click OK to accept these values and close the Value List Editor dialog box. In the Equation cell of the holes parameter, click the drop-down arrow to see the three string values you added.

Create a Text Parameter | 273

8 Select the flange choice. Notice that as you change the value of the hole parameter to flange, it also changes in the Equation field. 9 Select Key checkbox of this parameter to make it a Key parameter. Previous (page 272) | Next (page 274)

Create a True-False Parameter

Now we create a parameter to control use of the chamfer feature on the bracket part. 1 Select Add True/False from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the dialog box. 2 Enter the name chamfers in the empty Parameter Name cell at the bottom of the parameter list. 3 Click in the Equation cell and notice that a drop-down menu appears, with True and False as the available options.

4 Select the Key check box to make the chamfer parameter a Key parameter. 5 Click Done to close the Parameter dialog box and complete the parameter creation process. Previous (page 272) | Next (page 275)

274 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

Set Parameter Filters

The Parameters dialog box includes filters to control which parameters are displayed. Filters help you focus on specific parameters. 1 Open the Parameters dialog box, and expand the dialog box window to show all the parameters associated with the bracket. Click the Filters icon in the bottom left corner of the dialog to view a list of the filters you can use to restrict the parameter list. 2 Select the check box in the Key field of each of the following Model parameters to set them as Key parameters. base_hole_length_loc

base_hole_width_loc base_hole_dia flange_hole_dia flange_hole_length_loc flange_hole_width_loc

3 Click the various choices in the list of filters. Notice how the list of displayed parameters changes.

All shows all parameters. Key shows only key parameters. Non-Key shows only non-key parameters. Renamed shows only those parameters that the user renamed. Equation shows only those parameters involved in an equation.

4 Close the Parameters dialog box. This simple bracket model has 28 parameters associated with it. It is not unreasonable to expect that a complex part or assembly of parts may have hundreds of parameters. By strategically designating Key parameters, it is possible to find relevant parameters much more easily by filtering the list. Previous (page 274) | Next (page 276)

Set Parameter Filters | 275

Create Feature Suppression Rule

With the necessary parameters in place, we can now add logic to the model using rules. Rules can be defined for various actions, including setting the values of parameters and activating or suppressing features. Our first rule suppresses a feature on a part.

Rule Editor

1 Rule.

On the ribbon, click Manage tab iLogic panel Add

2 Enter Modify_Feature in the Name field of the Rule Name dialog box, and click OK to display the Edit Rule dialog box. The Edit Rule dialog box is the heart of the iLogic functionality. You use this dialog box to create and edit iLogic rules. 3 Select the Model tab. The top left panel of this window includes a view of the Model tree. Click the Model Parameters node in the tree. Notice that the top right panel now lists only the Model parameters.

To see other sets of parameters, you can click the User Parameters node in the model tree to display only the manually created parameters. You write rules in the rule text area, which is located in the bottom panel of the Edit Rule dialog box. You can enter Rule keywords by typing them

276 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

directly into the text entry field. Or, you can select generic statements from the toolbar above the field and then editing the statements.

This tutorial describes entering the statements manually, unless otherwise indicated. 4 Click the User Parameters node to display the User parameters. The bracket model includes two holes: one in the base, and one on the flange.

(1) flange hole (2) base hole

Create Feature Suppression Rule | 277

Our new rule turns on (or off) the base hole, the flange hole, or both. In a previous lesson, we created a multi-value parameter named holes. We assigned three values to this parameter labeled base, flange and none. The rule turns on the flange hole when flange value is selected. Choosing base turns on the base hole, and a value of none turns off both holes

Add Parameters to Rule

Now we can create the rule. We begin with the flange setting of the holes parameter. 1 Enter If in the text box, followed by a space. Notice that the text of the If keyword turns bold and red. The red color indicates a recognized language element (in this case a keyword). 2 In the Model tree, click the User Parameters node, then double-click holes to insert the holes parameter name into the editor. 3 Type = , followed by a space, and then type flange (be sure to include quotation marks). Add another space, and type Then to finish this line. Notice that the different colors are applied automatically to the different language elements of the expression defined so far. This color coding makes rules much easier to read, and it helps you quickly comprehend their meaning, and identify any information entered incorrectly.

4 Press Enter to move to the next line. We can make the flange hole active by using an iLogic function.

Insert Code Snippets

1 In the Snippets area on the left side of the editor, click the System tab. Expand the Features node, then double-click the IsActive choice to insert its text into the rule editor.

278 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

2 Click the Model tab at the top of the Edit Rule dialog box, and click flange_hole in the Model tree. 3 Click the Names tab in the top right corner of the dialog box, and notice that flange_hole now appears here. 4 Highlight featurename in the rule text, and then double-click flange_hole in the Names tab to replace featurename with flange_hole.

Create Feature Suppression Rule | 279

(1) Highlight generic text. (2) Double-click name to replace highlighted text.

The Feature.IsActive function sets the activity state (suppression state) of a feature specified in quotation marks inside the parentheses. 5 To assign a value of True, first insert a space at the end of the statement. After the space, enter =, followed by another space, and then the word True. Assigning a value of True indicates that the flange hole is active (unsuppressed). When the flange option is chosen for the holes parameter, we want only the flange hole active. We must include a command that deactivates the base hole. 6 At the end of your rule text, press Enter to move to the next line, and then insert another Feature.IsActive(featurename) function. 7 Highlight the featurename string and click base_hole in the Model tree. Then double-click base_hole in the Name tab to replace featurename with base_hole, and assign a value of False. These two lines turn on the flange hole and turn off the base hole. Your rule now consists of three lines.

280 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

Copy Code Block

If holes = "flange" Then Feature.IsActive("flange_hole") = True Feature.IsActive("base_hole") = False For instances in which the base hole must be activated, a similar strategy is employed. We must activate the base hole and deactivate the flange hole.

Reuse Code Blocks

To create the next part of the rule, you copy and paste the reusable portion of the previous statements. Then change the pasted text as required. 1 Press Enter to insert a new line, and then enter ElseIf. 2 Highlight the reusable text, which includes everything after the word If, and press Ctrl + C to copy the text to the clipboard. Then, position the cursor after ElseIf, and press Ctrl + V to paste it. NOTE You can also Cut, Copy, and Paste by right-clicking selected text and selecting the appropriate command from a context menu. It also contains other editing commands. Or, you can use the icons in the editing toolbar above the rule text area. 3 In the newly pasted text, change flange to base, and switch the True and False conditions.

Create Feature Suppression Rule | 281

Copy Code Block

If holes= flange Then Feature.IsActive(flange_hole) Feature.IsActive(base_hole") = ElseIf holes = base Then Feature.IsActive(flange_hole) Feature.IsActive(base_hole) = = True False = False True

4 Add another ElseIf statement, and use the same copy and paste method to create the third part of this rule, where no holes are required. Modify the newly pasted text to suppress both hole features when the holes parameter is set to none. 5 Finish the statement by typing End If (or clicking the corresponding keyword button). The rule is complete.

Copy Code Block

If holes = "flange" Then Feature.IsActive("flange_hole") Feature.IsActive("base_hole") = ElseIf holes = "base" Then Feature.IsActive("flange_hole") Feature.IsActive("base_hole") = ElseIf holes = "none" Then = True False = False True

282 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

Feature.IsActive("flange_hole") = False Feature.IsActive("base_hole") = False End If 6 Click OK on the Edit Rule dialog box. If there are no mistakes, the dialog box closes without an error message. An icon representing the new rule appears in the Rule Browser.

To verify the new rule, click Manage tab iLogic panel Rule Browser and view the tree.

The Rule Browser provides a way for you to see the rules in the current model. We explore the Rule Browser further later in this tutorial.

Test the Feature Suppression Rule

1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab Parameters panel Parameters to display the Parameters dialog box. 2 Click the node icon to the left of the Model Parameters area to collapse the list of Model parameters. 3 Click in the Equation field of the holes parameter to enable the multi-value drop-down arrow. Then click the arrow and select flange from the drop-down menu.

Create Feature Suppression Rule | 283

4 Click any other cell and observe the bracket. The only hole shown is the flange hole.

5 Change the multi-value selection to base, and click another cell. Only the base hole is shown.

284 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

6 Finally, change the multi-value selection to none, and click another cell. No holes are visible.

Create Feature Suppression Rule | 285

7 Click Done to close the Parameters dialog box.

Rename the Feature Suppression Rule

The rule we created requires a more descriptive name.

On the ribbon, click Manage tab iLogic panel Rule Browser.

2 In the tree, click Modify_Feature once to highlight the rule, then click it again to enable edit mode. 3 Rename the rule to Hole_Rule, and press Enter. 4 Close the Rule Browser. Previous (page 275) | Next (page 287)

286 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

Create Feature Activation Rule

Now, we create a second rule to control the activation of the chamfers on the bracket. Previously, we created a Boolean-type parameter labeled chamfers. The two possible values for a Boolean parameter are True and False. We will use these values to turn chamfers on and off.

1 Rule.

On the ribbon, click Manage tab iLogic panel Add

2 Name the new rule Chamfer_Rule, and click OK to open the Edit Rule dialog box. The first part of the rule states that if the value for the Boolean parameter chamfers is true, then the chamfers feature is activated. 3 Enter the If statement for this rule.

Copy Code Block

If chamfers = True Then 4 From the Snippets area, insert a copy of the IsActive snippet (Feature.IsActive) into your rule. In the inserted snippet, replace featurename with Chamfers, and set the statement to True.

Copy Code Block

If chamfers = True Then Feature.IsActive("Chamfers") = True The second part of the rule states that when the value of the chamfers parameter is False, the chamfers are deactivated. 5 Add an Else statement, and use the Copy and Paste commands to create the second part of the rule. Complete the rule with an End If statement.

Create Feature Activation Rule | 287

Copy Code Block

If chamfers = True Then Feature.IsActive("Chamfers") = True ElseFeature.IsActive("Chamfers") = False End If The rule is complete. 6 Click OK to accept the rule. If no error messages appear, the rule can be tested.

Test the Feature Activation Rule

On the ribbon, click Manage tab Parameters panel Parameters.

2 In the chamfers row, click in the Equation field to enable the multi-value drop-down, then click the arrow and select False. Notice that all chamfers are deactivated.

288 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

3 Now, change your Equation selection to True. The chamfers are activated. Previous (page 276) | Next (page 289)

Create Dimension Rule

The third rule we create controls the dimensions of the bracket. Previously, we created a user parameter labeled mass. Our new rule modifies the width of the bracket based on the value of this parameter. In the first scenario, the width of the bracket changes according to the following values. Mass
100 200 300

Bracket Width
1 in 2 in 3 in

Create Dimension Rule | 289

Mass
400

Bracket Width
4 in

Add Values
First, we add the set of possible values for the mass parameter. Use the menus in the Filters area to display only the Key parameters in the list. This filter makes it easier to focus in on the mass parameter. 1 Right-click in any empty cell in the mass row, and select Make Multi-Value from the context menu. The Value List Editor opens. 2 In the Add New Item(s) field, add the values 200, 300, and 400 (the value of 100 should already be in the Value list). 3 Click Add button to populate the Value list, and then click OK to accept the list and return to the Parameters dialog box. You can click the drop-down menu in the Multivalue field of the mass row in the Parameter Editor to see the list of values. 4 Click Done to complete the modification of the mass parameter.

Add the Rule

Next, we create a rule to control the bracket width.

1 Rule.

On the ribbon, click Manage tab iLogic panel Add

2 Name the new rule Width_Rule. The first part of our rule states that if the mass is 100, the bracket width is 1 inch. 3 In the rule text area of the Edit Rule dialog box, begin the rule with an If statement. 4 Click the Model Parameters node in the Model tree, then locate the parameter labeled bracket_width under the Parameters tab to the right of the tree.

290 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

5 Double-click bracket_width to insert the parameter name into the rule text. Although parameter names can be directly typed into the rule, double-clicking from the list eliminates the possibility of spelling errors. 6 Set the bracket_width to 1 inch.

Copy Code Block

If mass = 100 Then bracket_width = 1 NOTE You can specify units in iLogic numeric expressions (for example, 1 in). However, the examples in this tutorial do not follow this convention. When units are omitted, the units specified in the properties of the model document are assumed. The second part of our rule states that if the mass is 200, the bracket width is 2 inches. 7 Use an ElseIf statement to set the bracket_width to 2 inches when the mass is 200.

Copy Code Block

If mass = 100 bracket_width ElseIf mass = bracket_width Then = 1 200 Then = 2

8 Add two more ElseIf statements to accommodate the remaining values of 300 and 400. 9 End the rule with an End If statement. The rule is complete.

Create Dimension Rule | 291

Copy Code Block

If mass = 100 bracket_width ElseIf mass = bracket_width ElseIf mass = bracket_width ElseIf mass = bracket_width End If Then = 1 200 Then = 2 300 Then = 3 400 Then = 4

10 Click OK to save this new rule.

Test the Rule

Open the Parameters dialog box.

2 Set the value of the mass parameter to 100. Notice that bracket_width is set to 1 inch.

292 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

3 Change the mass parameter value to 200, and notice that the bracket width changes again.

Create Dimension Rule | 293

If you change the mass to 300, the width of the bracket increases to 3 inches. A mass of 400 results in a width of 4 inches. Try it! Previous (page 287) | Next (page 294)

Test for Range of Values

What if the mass is not limited to exact values, but instead can occur in several ranges of values? Consider the following examples: Mass range
Less than or equal to 100 Greater than 100 but less than or equal to 200 Greater than 200 but less than or equal to 300

Width
1 in 2 in

3 in

294 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

Mass range
Greater than 300 but less than or equal to 400 Greater than 400

Width
4 in

6 in

We can change an existing rule to accommodate these ranges. 1 Open the Rules Browser, and double-click Width_Rule to open the rule in the Edit Rule dialog box. 2 Modify the rule as shown.

Copy Code Block

If mass <= 100 Then bracket_width = 1 ElseIf mass > 100 And mass <= 200 Then bracket_width = 2 ElseIf mass > 200 And mass <= 300 Then bracket_width = 3 ElseIf mass > 300 And mass <= 400 Then bracket_width = 4 Else

Test for Range of Values | 295

bracket_width = 6 End If With these changes, we check for a range of values in each If or Else
If statement.

3 Click OK to close the Edit Rule dialog box. Remove the Multi-Value List from the Mass Parameter As a last step, we modify the User parameter mass, which is currently a multi-value parameter. We can remove the multi-value characteristic associated with this parameter by editing the multi-value list. 1 Open the Parameters dialog box. 2 Right-click an empty cell in the mass row, and select Edit Multi-Value List from the context menu. 3 Select all the values in the Value list, and then click Delete. 4 Click OK to accept the change. Notice that the mass parameter no longer has a multi-value list to select from. Test the Modified Rule 1 In the Parameters dialog box, enter a mass value of 75. The width of the bracket is set to 1 inch. 2 Change the mass to 150. The bracket width is now 2 inches.

296 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

(1) mass=75, width=1 in (2) mass=150, width=2 in

Test for Range of Values | 297

3 Experiment further. By changing the mass to 250, the width changes to 3 inches. When mass is 350, the width of the bracket is 4 inches. Entering a mass value greater than 400 results in bracket width of 6 inches. Verify it by setting the mass to 1500. 4 Change the mass back to 150, then click Done. 5 Save and close bracket.ipt. Previous (page 289) | Next (page 298)

Summary
In this tutorial, you learned the following: Work with Parameters

Create numeric, true/false, and text parameters. Create multi-value parameters. Use Key parameters as search filters. Modify parameters.

Work with Rules

Create rules. Construct conditional statements. Activate and deactivate features. Control part dimensions using a rule. Modify an existing rule.

To learn more about iLogic, we suggest that you take time to complete the remaining iLogic tutorials. Previous (page 294)

298 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics

The Ribbon

11
New Users 25 minutes Start a new part file.

About this tutorial

Become familiar with the ribbon interface.
Category Time Required Tutorial File Used

Perform workflows to draw your attention to key characteristics of the ribbon interface. Prerequisites Know how to set the , navigate model space with the various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding.

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

As you work through a series of basic exercises to become familiar with the ribbon interface, it is not necessary to reproduce the sample geometry accurately. Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 300)

299

Interface Fundamentals
The fundamental characteristic of the new interface is that commands formerly located on panel bars and toolbars are now located on tabs.

300 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon

Commands formerly found on the various common menus are also located on the tabs.

Commands formerly found on the File menu are now located on the Application menu.

Interface Fundamentals | 301

Though the change to tabs is a fundamental change to the interface, other interface structures remain unchanged. For example, Autodesk Inventor still uses the browser to represent file structures. Autodesk Inventor still uses context menus. In addition, the actual design and behaviors of features and commands remains unchanged: Extrude is still Extrude, Create Constraint is still Create Constraint, and Project Views is still Project Views. Previous (page 299) | Next (page 302)

Set the
As mentioned, this tutorial uses a generalized, theoretical workflow to facilitate your discovery of the interface. The workflow is only a vehicle for learning and is not meant to be credible from an engineering or design point of view. This workflow begins with a typical first task: setting the . If Autodesk Inventor is in a zero-doc state (no files are open), you can access the command on the tab: Previous (page 300) | Next (page 302)

Create a Part
Create a part file with a default template: 1 Click the drop-down arrow next to the New command on the Quick Access toolbar. 2 Select the Part template (the actual template standard is not important for this tutorial).

302 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon

Previous (page 302) | Next (page 303)

Create a Sketch Geometry

If your default template does not open in sketch mode: 1 Expand the Origin folder in the browser. 2 Select the XY Plane browser node. 3 On the ribbon, click .

Create a Sketch Geometry | 303

Next, draw a rectangle: 4 Click . 5 Approximate the rectangle as shown in the following image.

Notice that tabs are subdivided into panels. For example, the sketch commands you use for drawing geometry are grouped on the Draw panel; the panel subdivisions group functionally related commands. Previous (page 302) | Next (page 304)

Finish the Sketch

Notice that the Sketch tab contains a prominent command called Finish Sketch.

304 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon

This command provides the same results as the right-click marking menu option of Finish Sketch, as well as the Return command. The reason the command is so prominent is to help make it clear at all times when you are in sketch mode. For example, before you exit the sketch, select the Environments tab. Notice that the Finish Sketch command persists on the Environments tab, and the Sketch tab label is also highlighted.

Finish the Sketch | 305

It is possible to select other tabs at any time in your workflow, but the persistence of Finish Sketch and the tab highlight help make it clear you are still in sketch mode. Click Finish Sketch. Previous (page 303) | Next (page 306)

Extrude the Sketch

1 Ensure that the Model tab is the active tab. 2 On the ribbon, click .

3 Click OK in the Extrude dialog box. 4 Click the Undo command, located on the Quick Access toolbar.

306 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon

5 Press E on the keyboard. Notice that keyboard shortcuts behave the same as always. 6 Click OK in the Extrude dialog box. Previous (page 304) | Next (page 307)

Switch to an Environment
1 Select the Environments tab. Previous (page 306) | Next (page 307)

Print
Print is located on the Application menu. Click Print.

There is no need to print the file. Cancel the Print dialog box. Previous (page 307) | Next (page 308)

Switch to an Environment | 307

Measure
1 Select the Tools tab. The Tools tab contains many of the commands formerly found on the Tools menu. 2 Select the Distance command, located in the Measure panel.

3 Press Esc to close the command. Previous (page 307) | Next (page 308)

Save
1 Click the Save command, located on the Quick Access Toolbar.

308 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon

2 Use the default file name. Leave the part open.

Create an Assembly
With many workflows and procedures within Autodesk Inventor, there is often more than one method available to reach a given result. This characteristic also applies to file creation. As an alternative to the New command on the Quick Access Toolbar, you can access the file templates from the Application menu. You can also use the Quick Launch command in the Open dialog box.

Click to expand the Application menu, then click the arrow next to New to expand the submenu.

Create an Assembly | 309

Select Assembly to use the default template.

Notice that if you select New directly from the Application menu, the New File dialog box opens.

310 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon

If you click the arrow next to New, the New submenu expands. Alternatively, the New submenu expands automatically after a short delay as you pause the cursor over the New parent menu. Previous (page 308) | Next (page 311)

Place Occurrences
1 Click the Place command, located in the Component panel of the Assemble tab.

2 Select the part file you created. 3 Place two occurrences.

Place Occurrences | 311

Previous (page 309) | Next (page 312)

Add Command to Quick Access Toolbar

In this next exercise, you create a shortcut. 1 Select the Manage tab. 2 Right-click the command, and select Add to Quick Access Toolbar.

312 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon

Use File Tabs and Edit the Part

1 Select the Part(#).ipt file tab, located at the bottom of the graphics window. 2 On the Quick Access Toolbar, click the down arrow to the right of As Material to display the drop-down Color menu. Select a new color for the part. Previous (page 312) | Next (page 313)

Increase Screen Space

The ribbon is designed to provide more available graphic space for your models. 1 Click the Minimize button once. The panels reduce to panel buttons.

Use File Tabs and Edit the Part | 313

2 Pause the cursor over a panel to display the commands on that panel.

314 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon

3 Click the Minimize button again to reduce to the tab and panel titles.

4 Click the Minimize button again to reduce to the tabs.

5 Click a tab title to reveal the tab.

Increase Screen Space | 315

6 Click the Minimize button again to restore the full ribbon.

As an alternative to cycling through the ribbon states, select a state from the drop-down menu.

You can also use the Clean Screen command to maximize model space instantly. 1 Select the View tab.

316 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon

2 Click Clean Screen. This command hides the browser and maximizes the graphics area to the application window. Tab panels are minimized if they were in a maximized state. The command also maximizes the Autodesk Inventor window to your screen.

You can also use the keyboard shortcut: press Ctrl 0 (zero) to switch from Clean Screen display. The browser is restored and the tabs are also restored to whatever state they were in previously. Click the Minimize button, as needed, to restore the tabs to their full display.

Increase Screen Space | 317

Create Constraint
1 Select the Assemble tab. 2 Click the Constrain command.

318 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon

You can create a constraint but is not necessary for the workflow. Previous (page 313) | Next (page 319)

Create Drawing Views

1 Click the New command.

2 Open the Standard.idw template. 3 Right-click the drawing sheet, and select Base View. 4 Click OK to place the view. 5 When you place the base view the Projected View functionality is automatically activated. Create one or more projected views.

Create Parts List and Annotation

1 Select the Annotate tab. 2 Click the Parts List command.

Create Drawing Views | 319

3 Select the base view, and place the parts list. 4 Click Auto Balloon, located on the Balloon drop-down menu.

5 Place the balloon. 6 Click the Dimension command and place a dimension.

320 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon

Previous (page 319) | Next (page 321)

Customize Tabs
You can move commands you do not use, or commands you use less frequently, to the drop-down portion of the tab panels. 1 Right-click the Bend command and select Move to Expanded Panel.

Customize Tabs | 321

2 Click the panel title to expand the panel and show the moved command.

322 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon

3 You can also click the pin icon to pin the panel in the expanded state, as needed.

Customize Tabs | 323

Create Your Own Tab Panels

You can add commands to a tab. 1 Select the Place Views tab. 2 Right-click anywhere on the tab panels, and select Customize User Commands.

324 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon

3 In the dialog box, specify Annotate Tab in the Choose commands from drop-down menu. 4 Select the command, and then click Add.

Create Your Own Tab Panels | 325

5 Repeat for the and commands. 6 Click OK in the Customize User Commands dialog box. A User Commands panel containing the commands you specified is added to the tab you specified.

326 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon

Right-click the tab and notice the other customize options. Experiment with these options to tailor the tab to your preferences. Previous (page 321) | Next (page 327)

Export Tab Settings to XML

You can save your customized tab settings to an XML file. You can also save to multiple XML files. For example, you can create one custom configuration and export it to XML. Then set up another with a different configuration and export it to another XML file using a different file name. 1 Right-click anywhere on the tab panels, and select Customize User Commands. 2 Click Export, located at the bottom of the dialog box. 3 In the Save As dialog box, specify a file name, and then click Save. The XML file is created in the default Preferences directory. Click Close in the Customize User Commands dialog box. To retrieve and apply settings contained in a customization XML file: 1 Click Import in the Customize User Commands dialog box. 2 Select one of the user-defined XML files. 3 Click Open. If you click Apply or OK the customization file is applied to the ribbon. Close the Customize User Commands dialog box. Previous (page 324) | Next (page 327)

Using Access Points through the Browser

As noted earlier, to access the various environments in Autodesk Inventor, you use the Environments tab. You also use the Finish command to exit environments, as well as to exit sketches. However, access methods to some functionality are the same as found in releases previous to the ribbon interface. You access Construction and Base Solid edit functionality through the browser.

Export Tab Settings to XML | 327

For Construction functionality: 1 Select the part file tab at the bottom of the graphics window to switch to that document. 2 Select the Model tab. 3 Click the Thicken/Offset command.

4 Create an offset surface. 5 Right-click the surface in the browser, and select Copy to Construction. 6 Right-click the newly created Construction node in the browser and select Edit Construction. For Base Solid edit functionality: 1 Open a common data format file, such as IGS or STP, that contains solid geometry. 2 Right-click the Base node in the browser and select Edit Solid.

328 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon

Previous (page 327) | Next (page 329)

Summary
The purpose of this tutorial was to help maximize your productivity within the new interface, as quickly as possible. In this tutorial, you learned how to: Find commands and command groupings within the tab structure.

Access and exit environments and sketches. Access commands on the Application menu. Use the Quick Access Toolbar. Increase model space. Customize the ribbon.

Summary | 329

In addition to this tutorial, there are a couple other ribbon-related Help items: Ribbon Introduction, a video overview of the ribbon interface.

Command Locator, an interactive guide that compares command locations in previous releases to their new locations in the ribbon.

You can access both items from: The Get Started tab.

The main Help drop-down menu on the application window. The Help home page.

Previous (page 327)

330 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon

Content Center

12
New Users 30 minutes Start a new assembly file (metric) Housing.ipt

About this tutorial

Access libraries of standard parts in the Content Center.
Category Time Required Tutorial File Used

331

Prerequisites Know assembly and part fundamentals in Autodesk Inventor.

Understand the interface. Understand projects in Autodesk Inventor. See the Help or Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 332)

Review Content Center Configuration

To begin, set your active project to tutorial_files. Then verify that Content Center libraries are configured correctly in the project.

1 Click

Manage Projects.

2 On the Projects dialog box, double-click the tutorial_files project in the projects list to set it as the active project. 3 Click Configure Content Center Libraries. The Configure Libraries dialog box displays a list of Content Center libraries in your library storage location. 4 Review the list to confirm that libraries are available in the project configuration. NOTE To perform the tutorial steps, at least one (non-empty) Content Center library must be available for use. A library is available if it has the In Use option selected and a Read-Only or Read/Write status in the Access column. TIP If no libraries are available, set up Content Center libraries first. See Help for more details, or contact your CAD Administrator. 5 Click OK in the Configure Libraries dialog box, and then click Done in the Projects dialog box. Previous (page 331) | Next (page 333)

332 | Chapter 12 Content Center

Place from Content Center Dialog Box

1 Create a blank assembly file using the Standard (mm).iam template. 2 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Place

from Content Center. The Place from Content Center dialog box displays. 3 Switch on the following: Search

Favorites AutoDrop Tree View Table View

TIP Some buttons may already be selected. Click them to make sure they are switched on.

The Place from Content Center dialog box is the main interface for a Content Center consumer. You can find, select, and place a standard part or feature to an assembly. The dialog box presents a merged view of content contained in all configured libraries.

Place from Content Center Dialog Box | 333

The Place from Content Center dialog box displays several panels: Category View panel on the left displays a tree structure of the current Content Center database.

List View panel on the right displays all items available in a category (folder) selected on the Category View panel. Table View panel displays all members of a part (feature) family selected on the List View panel. Search panel enables you to find components in libraries. Favorites panel stores your favorite parts. History panel displays previously placed components.

Previous (page 332) | Next (page 335)

334 | Chapter 12 Content Center

Browse in Content Center Library

Use the Content Center browser to locate the Forged Socket Head Cap Screw - Metric family. 1 In the Category View panel, expand the Fasteners Bolts category, and click the Socket Head category. A list of part families included in the Socket Head category displays in the List View panel on the right. Families are sorted alphabetically. 2 In the List View panel, locate and click the Forged Socket Head Cap Screw - Metric family. Members of the family are displayed in the Table View panel.

Previous (page 333) | Next (page 335)

Place Content Manually

Two methods are available for placing Content Center components: AutoDrop and manual placement. If you select AutoDrop on the toolbar, AutoDrop is the primary and manual placement is the alternate placement method. The primary method is available when you double-click a family in the Place from Content Center dialog box. Alternatively, you can select a family and click OK. To use the alternate placement method for the family, hold down the Alt key, and double-click a part family.

Browse in Content Center Library | 335

TIP To use manual placement as the primary method, unselect AutoDrop on the toolbar. To place a part manually by using the Table View: 1 In the Table View, click row 95 to select the family member (a screw with M6 thread type, 30-mm nominal length). 2 Click OK to place the selected part in the assembly. The manual placement method is automatically used because the family member to place is already determined. 3 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Done to finish the command. 4 Review the placed part in the assembly and in the browser.

Previous (page 335) | Next (page 336)

Create iMates
The components that are supplied in the Content Center libraries include iMates to make placement easier. Find the name of the insert iMate for the previously placed cap screw. Then open Housing.ipt and edit it to create an iMate with the same name. 1 In the browser, right-click the previously placed cap screw, and then select Expand All Children. Make a note of the name of the insert iMate, Insert In1. 2 Right-click the cap screw, and click Delete to delete it from the assembly. 3 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Place, and place one occurrence of the part Housing.ipt in the assembly.

336 | Chapter 12 Content Center

4 Use the View Cube or Orbit to adjust the viewpoint to approximate the following image.

5 Right-click the Housing part in the browser, and click Edit. 6 Click Manage tab Author panel iMate to activate the Create iMate command.

7 In the Create iMate dialog box, click Insert , and then select the circular edge, as shown on the following image.

Create iMates | 337

8 Click the More button (>>) to expand the dialog box, and then type Insert In1 in the Name field. 9 Click OK. The iMate is created in the part. 10 Click the Return command to return to the parent assembly. Previous (page 335) | Next (page 338)

Place Content Manually Using iMates

1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Place from Content Center. 2 Click History on the toolbar. The History panel displays. It includes the previously placed Forged Socket Head Cap Screw - Metric part family.

338 | Chapter 12 Content Center

3 Right-click the Forged Socket Head Cap Screw - Metric family, and select Navigate to Category. The family displays and selected in the List View. 4 Switch off the Table View panel. 5 Hold down the Alt key, and double-click the Forged Socket Head Cap Screw - Metric family to place a member of the family in the assembly. 6 In the Family dialog box, select the same family member as you placed previously: select M6 from the Thread Description list, and then select 30 from the Nominal Length list. 7 Select Use iMate, and then click OK. The selected cap screw previews in place (honoring the specified Insert iMate).

8 Click anywhere in the graphics window to place the cap screw.

Place Content Manually Using iMates | 339

9 Right-click, and select Done.

Previous (page 336) | Next (page 340)

Use AutoDrop
AutoDrop enhances placement techniques with functional design automation. It automatically checks geometry for placement and sizing based on the content family characteristics. Place head cap screws to the remaining mounting holes of the Housing part by using AutoDrop. 1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Place from Content Center. 2 Use Search to find available head cap screws: Insert the Head Cap Screw string in the Search For box of the Quick Search panel.

340 | Chapter 12 Content Center

Click Search Now.

3 On the Search Results panel, locate the DIN 6912 cylinder head cap screw. Right-click it, and select Navigate to Category. The family displays and selected in the List View. 4 Double-click the DIN 6912 family. The graphics window with the assembly displays. 5 Position your cursor over an empty mounting hole as shown:

6 Click to display the AutoDrop toolbar. AutoDrop determines that multiple placements of a selected component would be desired. Notice that the circular top edge of each of the other mounting holes highlights to indicate where AutoDrop places additional components. NOTE The Insert Multiple option on the toolbar controls how multiple components are placed.

Use AutoDrop | 341

7 Drag the red arrow on the screw preview to change the nominal length of the screw to 30 mm. NOTE When you drag the red arrow, a tooltip shows the entire size of the component. 8 Select Apply on the AutoDrop toolbar to place three cylinder head cap screws. 9 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Done to finish the command.

342 | Chapter 12 Content Center

Previous (page 338) | Next (page 343)

Resize Standard Content

1 In the graphics window or browser, right-click the Forged Socket Head Cap Screw - Metric part, and then select Change Size. The family dialog box displays. 2 Select 45 from the Nominal Length list, and click OK. The selected cap screw resizes to the new length.

Resize Standard Content | 343

Previous (page 340) | Next (page 344)

Replace Standard Content

1 In the graphics window or browser, right-click one of the occurrences of the DIN 6912 cylinder head cap screw, and then select Replace from Content Center. The Replace from Content Center dialog box displays, and the DIN 6912 cylinder head cap screw is selected. 2 On the List View panel, select the Forged Socket Head Cap Screw - Metric located in the same category, and click OK. 3 In the family dialog box, select M6 from the Thread Description list, and select 45 from the Nominal Length list. 4 Select Replace All to replace all occurrences of the DIN 6912 cylinder head cap screw.

344 | Chapter 12 Content Center

5 Click OK on the family dialog box. Then click OK on the message box. All occurrences of the selected screw are replaced.

Previous (page 343) | Next (page 345)

Summary

Summary | 345

In this tutorial, you learned how to: Review the library configuration in the project.

Work with the Place from Content Center dialog box. Find a part family by using the Content Center browser, Search, and History. Select a family member (part) and place it in an assembly. Use iMates to place a part from Content Center. Place a Content Center part by using AutoDrop. Change the size of a placed Content Center part. Replace a part with another part from the Content Center library.

Remember to check Help for further detailed information. What Next? Use a procedure from this tutorial to place a bearing in the assembly. Read more about Content Center in Help. Continue with the Content Center User Libraries tutorial. Previous (page 344)

346 | Chapter 12 Content Center

Sketch Blocks

About this tutorial

Define sketch blocks and use them in assemblies.

Category Time Required Tutorial File Used New Users 40 minutes Car Seat Sketch Blocks.ipt

347

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. Define sketch blocks to capture geometric configurations as a fixed set, and place instances of the set into an assembly layout. In many assembly designs, geometric configurations are repeated. For example, you can group 2D sketch geometry into a sketch block that represents a car seat screw assembly. You can place instances of the block into your assembly layout. The instances are defined in the sketch block. Any changes to the block design are automatically reflected by the instances. You could create nested sketch blocks to represent the car screw assembly and place flexible instances of these blocks into your layout. These flexible instances retain specified degrees of freedom that allow them to simulate the kinematics of the screw assembly. You start this tutorial in an existing part with 2D sketch geometry. Objectives Create, edit, and format sketch blocks.

Demonstrate kinematics with sketch blocks.

Prerequisites Know how to set the , navigate model space with the various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding.

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 348)

Get Started
Open Car Seat Sketch Blocks in Autodesk Inventor.

1 Click

Open.

348 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

2 Open Car Seat Sketch Blocks.ipt. Previous (page 347) | Next (page 349)

Create Sketch Blocks

After you open the part file, note the presence of one sketch, Sketch1, in the Model browser. Click Sketch1 and you see all geometry in the graphics

Create Sketch Blocks | 349

window highlighted. You can use one 2D sketch to create all your geometry then group the appropriate geometry into sketch blocks. 1 Use navigation commands, such as View Face and Zoom Window, to position the sketch geometry in the graphics window as shown. 2 Double-click Sketch1 in the Model browser.

3 Window-select the lowermost geometry, and click Create Block in the Layout Panel on the Sketch tab.

NOTE You can pre-select geometry and activate the Create Block command, or you can activate the command and select geometry. 4 For Block Name, enter Worm Gear Assy. You can also define the insert point and add a description. The insert point is where the sketch block is attached to the cursor when block instances are placed. 5 Click OK. The sketch block is created. 6 Expand Sketch1 in the Model browser. Pause the cursor over the sketch block instance , Worm Gear Assy:1. The associated sketch geometry highlights in the graphics window. Create Block creates a sketch block definition in the Blocks folder and replaces the original 2D sketch geometry with an instance of the block. Expand the Blocks folder to view the Worm Gear Assy block definition node.

350 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

7 You can create multiple sketch blocks without closing the Create Block dialog box. Click Create Block on the Sketch tab, and select the geometry shown. Enter Connecting Rod as the Name, and click Apply. The block is created, and the dialog box awaits selection of geometry for the next block.

8 Select the geometry shown, and create the Link Plate sketch block.

9 Select the geometry shown, and create the Pivot Plate sketch block.

Create Sketch Blocks | 351

10 Exit the sketch, and save your file. Previous (page 348) | Next (page 352)

Edit Sketch Blocks

You edit sketch block definitions either in-context or out-of-context. The benefit of the in-context edit is the ability to add existing active sketch geometry or blocks to the block definition. With both methods, you can add new sketch geometry to the block. Regardless of how the sketch block definition is edited, the changes are propagated to all instances of the block. NOTE You cannot edit a sketch block instance independent of the block definition. 1 Open Sketch1 for edit. 2 Create a rectangle that intersects the Worm Gear Assy geometry.

352 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

3 Exit the sketch. 4 Expand the Blocks folder, and double-click the Worm Gear Assy definition. The block definition opens for edit in the graphics window, but the newly created rectangle geometry is absent. It is because the edit is out-of-context of the sketch. You can make new geometry to add, but geometry that exists outside the block definition is not available. 5 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. 6 Open Sketch1 for edit. 7 Double-click block instance Worm Gear Assy:1, or right-click on the instance and select Edit Block. It opens the Worm Gear Assy block definition for edit in the context of Sketch1. The newly created rectangle geometry is exposed to the block definition. 8 Select the rectangle geometry you created. Hold down the Ctrl key, and click the four lines of the rectangle. When all four lines are selected, right-click and select Add To Block.

NOTE If you had created new geometry during the block edit, the new geometry is automatically added to the block definition. 9 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. NOTE Alternatively, you can double-click the Sketch1 browser node to finish editing the block and return to the sketch. 10 To illustrate that the block definition has changed, drag and drop the Worm Gear Assy block definition (from the Blocks folder) into the graphics window. Worm Gear Assy:2, another instance of Worm Gear Assy, is created showing the rectangle geometry you added when you edited the block definition in-context.

Edit Sketch Blocks | 353

11 Exit Sketch1. 12 Double-click the Worm Gear Assy block definition under Blocks. It opens the Worm Gear Assy block definition out-of context. 13 Delete the rectangle geometry you previously added. 14 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. Both instances of Worm Gear Assy are updated to show the geometry was removed.

354 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

Previous (page 349) | Next (page 355)

Format Sketch Blocks

You can apply specific geometric properties to sketch block definitions and instances. The geometric properties active in a sketch block definition are the default properties for the instances. However, as with other sketch geometry, you can override the default format for the sketch block instances. Use this functionality to differentiate between specific instances in your sketch. 1 Right-click the Worm Gear Assy block definition in the Blocks folder, and select Properties. 2 Select Magenta for Line Color, and click OK. Both Worm Gear Assy instances turn magenta to reflect the new default format.

Format Sketch Blocks | 355

3 Now, override the default format. Right-click the Worm Gear Assy:1 instance, and select Properties. 4 Select Blue for Line Color and click OK, then click in the graphics window to clear the selection. The instance is now blue.

356 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

5 In a similar manner, change the color of the Worm Gear Assy:2 instance to red.

Format Sketch Blocks | 357

6 Open Sketch1. 7 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Format panel Sketch

Properties

8 On the Sketch Properties toolbar, click the Formatting Toggle to switch between the default format associated with the block definition and the user format you applied. The default format displays when the toggle is selected. 9 Delete the Worm Gear Assy:2 instance. 10 Reset the geometric properties Line Color for the Worm Gear Assy block definition and Worm Gear Assy:1 instance to Default.

You can also update your block properties to change the Insert Point location, visibility, block name, and description. As with other block edits, any changes are made to the block definition and reflected in all block instances. 11 Double-click the Connecting Rod:1 instance. 12 Click in the graphics window to ensure that no geometry is selected. 13 With no geometry selected, right-click in open space in the graphics window, and select Block Properties. 14 Click Select, and redefine the Insert Point. The Insert Point simply defines the attachment point between the cursor and block instance, when the instance is placed into the sketch.

358 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

15 Change the name to Rod. 16 Click OK. The block definition name changes to Rod and the instance name changes to Rod:1. 17 Use the Block Properties to change the name back to Connecting Rod. 18 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. NOTE Alternatively, you can double-click the Sketch1 browser node to finish editing the block and return to the sketch. 19 Exit the sketch and save your file. Previous (page 352) | Next (page 359)

Nested Flexible Sketch Blocks

When you select block instances for inclusion in a new sketch block, you create a nested block. You use sketch constraints, within the nested blocks, and the Flexible attribute to simulate kinematic subassemblies. 1 Open Sketch1 for edit. 2 Select the Worm Gear Assy:1 and Connecting Rod:1 block instances.

Nested Flexible Sketch Blocks | 359

3 Click Create Block. 4 Enter Screw Rod Assy as the block name. 5 Click OK. A new block definition Screw Rod Assy is created. Expand the block definition to view the nested structure. 6 Expand the Screw Rod Assy:1 block instance in Sketch1. The Worm Gear Assy:2 and Connecting Rod:2 instances are dependents of the Screw Rod Assy block. NOTE When the Screw Rod Assy nested block is defined, the original instances Worm Gear Assy:1 and Connecting Rod:1 are deleted. New instances Worm Gear Assy:2 and Connecting Rod:2 are created as dependents in the nested block. 7 Drag and drop the Screw Rod Assy block definition (from the Blocks folder) into the graphics window. The Screw Rod Assy:2 instance is created.

360 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

8 Double-click either Screw Rod Assy instance in the Model browser. The block definition is open for in-context edit. All other geometry is shaded to gray.

Nested Flexible Sketch Blocks | 361

9 Double-click the Worm Gear Assy:2 block instance, either in the Model browser or in the graphics window. 10 Create a centerline down the axis of the Worm Gear Assy, as shown. Ensure that the centerline endpoints are constrained to the Worm Gear Assy geometry. This centerline will participate in a collinear constraint with the centerline of the Connecting Rod.

NOTE Both instances of the Worm Gear Assy update to show the centerline.

362 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

11 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. You are returned to the edit of the Screw Rod Assy block. NOTE Alternatively, you can double-click the Screw Rod Assy block instance node to finish the edit of the Worm Gear Assy block. This returns you to the edit of the Screw Rod Assy block. 12 Apply the collinear constraint between the Worm Gear Assy and Connecting Rod centerlines.

13 Right-click, and select Show All Constraints. The collinear constraint glyphs are shown for both Screw Rod Assy instances.

Nested Flexible Sketch Blocks | 363

14 Right-click, and select Hide All Constraints. 15 Click the Connecting Rod geometry in the graphics window and drag. The sketch block instances begin to demonstrate basic kinematics due to the collinear constraint.

364 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

16 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. NOTE Alternatively, you can double-click the Sketch1 browser node to finish editing the block and return to the sketch. Use sketch constraints between nested blocks to represent your assembly. 17 Select Screw Rod Assy:2, and use Rotate on the Sketch tab to rotate as shown.

Nested Flexible Sketch Blocks | 365

18 Apply the Coincident constraint shown.

to the block instances as

19 Click the corner geometry of either block instance in the graphics window and drag.

366 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

Since the block instances are constrained at the sketch level, you can move the block instances relative to one another. However, the geometry within the block instances shows no relative motion. To manipulate the block instance degrees of freedom outside of the block instances, you toggle the block instance to Flexible. 20 Right-click each Screw Rod Assy instance, and check Flexible. 21 Click different sections of the block instance geometry, and drag to see the effect. 22 Experiment with different constraints, both within the block instances and at the sketch level, and note how you can simulate different kinematics. You begin to see the power behind nested and flexible sketch blocks. 23 Exit the sketch and drag the geometry. With the block instances toggled to Flexible, the degrees of freedom remain exposed at the part level. 24 Save your part file and exit. The tutorial is complete. Previous (page 355) | Next (page 367)

Summary
In this tutorial, you: Created sketch blocks.

Edited sketch blocks. Created nested, flexible sketch blocks, and simulated 2D kinematics.

For further use of sketch blocks, visit the Top-down Workflow tutorial. This tutorial demonstrates the use of sketch blocks in the top-down design workflow. Remember to check Help for further details on sketch blocks.

Summary | 367

Previous (page 359)

368 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks

Parameters

About this tutorial

Create table-driven models.

Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Experienced Users 30 minutes Start a new Excel spreadsheet nozzle.ipt

369

Link a table to an existing part. Assign parameters to existing dimensions. Resize the part by changing one value.

Prerequisites Know how to set the and navigate the model space with the various view commands.

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 370)

Work with Tables

The table you create in this tutorial is a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet containing 11 parameters that control the size and shape of the part. Ten of the parameters are equations. The radius of the nozzle base is an absolute value. Changing the radius of the nozzle base updates all other parameters.

370 | Chapter 14 Parameters

NOTE You must have Microsoft Excel installed on your computer to complete this tutorial. Previous (page 369) | Next (page 371)

Create the External Table

1 Open Microsoft Excel. 2 Enter these values and equations in the first two columns: NOTE To enter an equation in a cell, start the entry with the = character.
A 1 2 3 4 base ht lip face B 10 =B1*2.7 =B1*0.6 =B1*2.4

Create the External Table | 371

5 6 7

tdepth tarc tfix

=B1 =B10.6 =B10.6

Previous (page 370) | Next (page 372)

Finish the Table

1 Add the following values to control your part features:
A 8 9 10 chamfer extrude1 extrude2 B =B1*0.2 =B1*1.2 =B1*0.6

372 | Chapter 14 Parameters

holedia

=B1*0.6

Previous (page 371) | Next (page 373)

Review Parameter Assignment Process

Before you link this spreadsheet to an existing part, review the steps you take to control the part using parameters: 1 Open an existing part file. 2 Link an external table. 3 Assign parameters to existing dimensions. 4 Modify the value of one parameter. 5 Update the part.

Review Parameter Assignment Process | 373

Previous (page 372) | Next (page 374)

Open a Part
1 Switch to the Autodesk Inventor window. (If you have not started a session yet, do so now.)

2 Click

Open.

3 Open nozzle.ipt.

374 | Chapter 14 Parameters

Previous (page 373) | Next (page 375)

Work with Parameters

Nozzle.ipt is just like any other part in that it is defined by parameters. Parameters are values assigned to elements you create. As you sketch and build features, Autodesk Inventor automatically assigns parameters to the values controlling the elements. 1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab Parameters panel

Parameters

to open the Parameters dialog box.

2 Review the list of model parameters already assigned to the part.

Work with Parameters | 375

Whenever you dimension an element or define a feature, Autodesk Inventor assigns a parameter name to that value. Each parameter in your model is prefixed by the letter d. You can edit any parameter, however, d is reserved for parameter names. To avoid conflicts, do not use this prefix when defining parameters in an external table.

376 | Chapter 14 Parameters

To edit a parameter name or equation, click in the cell you want to change. Use the same method to add comments.

Previous (page 374) | Next (page 377)

Link Your External Table

1 Click Link in the Parameters dialog box. 2 Select the nozzle.xls file you created. 3 Click Open. The program imports the external table into the Parameters dialog box.

Link Your External Table | 377

4 Review your parameter names and values. 5 Click Done when you are ready. Previous (page 375) | Next (page 379)

378 | Chapter 14 Parameters

Prepare to Assign Parameters

Now you are ready to assign the parameters to your part. First, lets review the steps: 1 Assign parameters to the dimensions controlling the sketch. 2 Assign parameters to the values controlling the part features. NOTE The numbers in the following image correspond to the rows in your spreadsheet.

Previous (page 377) | Next (page 379)

Modify Your Sketch Dimensions

First, modify the sketch dimensions: 1 Double-click Sketch1 in the browser to switch to Sketch mode.

Prepare to Assign Parameters | 379

2 Right-click in the graphics window, and then select Dimension Display Expression. 3 Double-click the 10-mm horizontal dimension at the base of the sketch.

4 Enter base in the Edit Dimension dialog box. 5 Replace the other dimensions with spreadsheet driven parameters as shown. NOTE Parameter names are case sensitive. Invalid parameter names are displayed in red text.

380 | Chapter 14 Parameters

6 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Exit panel Finish Sketch.

Previous (page 379) | Next (page 381)

Modify the Two Extrusions

Modify the values controlling the two extrusions. 1 In the browser, right-click Extrusion1, and then select Edit Feature.

Modify the Two Extrusions | 381

2 In the Extrude dialog box, change 12 mm to extrude1. 3 Click OK to accept your changes. 4 Repeat these steps for Extrusion2, replacing 6 mm with extrude2.

382 | Chapter 14 Parameters

Previous (page 379) | Next (page 383)

Modify the Chamfer Feature

Next, modify the value controlling the chamfer feature. 1 Right-click Chamfer1, and then select Edit Feature.

Modify the Chamfer Feature | 383

2 In the Chamfer dialog box, change 2 mm to chamfer. 3 Click OK to accept your changes. NOTE The size of the part has not changed yet because the parameters in your spreadsheet have the same values as the original parameters. Previous (page 381) | Next (page 384)

Modify the Hole Feature

Finally, modify the value controlling the hole feature. 1 Right-click Hole1, and then select Edit Feature.

384 | Chapter 14 Parameters

2 In the Diameter field of the Holes dialog box, change 6 mm to holedia. 3 Click OK to accept your changes. 4 Click Save. Previous (page 383) | Next (page 385)

Control Your Part with Parameters

Now that all the values that define the shape and size of the part have assigned parameters, you are ready to control the size of your part from the external table. 1 Return to the Microsoft Excel window. 2 Change the value of base to 20. 3 Save nozzle.xls. 4 Return to the Autodesk Inventor window.

Control Your Part with Parameters | 385

Previous (page 384) | Next (page 386)

Update Your Part

To view the new part version, update the part file. 1 Click Update. Autodesk Inventor recalculates the part using the values in the external table.

2 Save the part. Previous (page 385) | Next (page 386)

Summary
Using a simple symmetrical part, you learned how to: Create an external table.

Edit existing dimensions. Modify an external table. Control part versions.

386 | Chapter 14 Parameters

Using these techniques, you can create your own parametric, table-driven models.

Previous (page 386)

Summary | 387

388

iLogic - Part Modeling

About this tutorial

Add rules to models.

Category Time Required Experienced Users 30 minutes

389

Tutorial File Used

Manifold_Block_no_rules.ipt

Add a rule Write a rule Run a rule Edit a rule Use the Rule Browser to reorder rules Read data from an embedded spreadsheet Set feature and component activity

Prerequisites Familiarity with Autodesk Inventor, and its basic part modeling functionality and concepts.

Completion of the iLogic Basics tutorial. See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 391)

390 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

Introduction to the Sample Model

The model that you work with throughout this tutorial is a simple manifold block. The block contains a set of three available ports referenced as A, B, and C. Each port is on a different side of the block. A port consists of a center hole (of variable size), and a set of surrounding threaded bolt holes. The holes are used to mount union caps in a later tutorial. This manifold block can be either a tee style block, which has all three ports, or an elbow style block with only two ports. Also, the block can be either a standard block or a custom block. On a standard block, which can be ordered off the shelf, all ports are the same size. A custom block, which must be manufactured, can feature a different size for each port. Finally, the part contains an embedded Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, which is used to specify the values for various parameters as the port sizes are changed. You begin by adding additional parameters to the model to support the rules you write later. Previous (page 389) | Next (page 391)

Open a Part Document

1 Set your active project to iLogic 2011 Tutorials. This setting provides easier access to the necessary files, and supports the work in the next tutorial. 2 Open manifold_block_no_rules.ipt. You add model rules to this part throughout the tutorial. 3 Save this file as manifold_block.ipt. You now have the manifold_block.ipt file open.

Introduction to the Sample Model | 391

Previous (page 391) | Next (page 392)

Create Port Size Parameters

First, we need a set of parameters to control the size of three ports on our manifold block. Most of the parameters have been named in the parameter editor already. It is good practice to name your parameters for future reference when creating a parametric design. Parameters with meaningful names make the rules that drive or reference them easier to read and understand.

On the ribbon, click Manage tab Parameters panel Parameters. NOTE Parameter names in iLogic are case sensitive. Follow the case being used in the Parameters dialog box, and also when creating rules.

392 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

2 Create a new numeric parameter named port_a_size. Set the Unit value to in, and enter an initial Equation value of 0.50. Define it as a multi-value parameter with the following values:
0.5 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00

NOTE For more details on the exact steps needed to create a parameter, please revisit the iLogic Basics tutorial. Remember that you can cut and paste the values from the previous table to set the values for the multi-value list. 3 Make port_a_size a Key parameter. 4 Create two more parameters, named port_b_size and port_c_size, with the same settings and multi-value list. Set both as Key parameters. Previous (page 391) | Next (page 393)

Create Block and Component Type Parameters

Now, we must create two more parameters that control the type of block being modeled. One parameter determines whether the block is a tee or elbow design.

Create Block and Component Type Parameters | 393

The other parameter defines whether we are creating a standard or a custom block. 1 Create a text parameter named block, and define it as a multi-value parameter with the following values:
tee elbow

2 In the Equation field of this new parameter, set the current value to tee, and define it as a Key parameter. 3 Create a second text parameter named component_type, and define it a multi-value parameter with the following values:
standard custom

4 Set the current value to standard, and define it as a Key parameter. 5 Click Done to exit the Parameters dialog box. 6 Save your document, but do not close it. Previous (page 392) | Next (page 394)

Define a Model Rule to Control Port Visibility

In the iLogic Basics tutorial, you learned that you can use parameter names from a model as variables in a rule. Also, you can select from lists of available parameters, as well as features and other model entities, for inclusion in a rule. Now, we define a set of rules that drive the geometry of our model based on the values of the key parameters we defined previously. In this lesson, we construct each rule in segments. The entire text of all the rules can be found at the end of this tutorial.

394 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

The first rule makes model changes to the Port B features, based on whether the elbow or tee block is selected. To make this change, suppress or enable the Port B features based on the type of block.

1 Rule.

On the ribbon, click Manage tab iLogic panel Add

2 Name the rule block_shape_rule, and click OK to display the Edit Rule dialog box. 3 In the text area, create the first part of your new rule, which defines what happens if the block is a tee-style block.

Copy Code Block

If block = tee Then 4 Because all three ports are active in the tee-style block, add the steps to ensure that Port B is enabled. Activate two features in the part.

Copy Code Block

Feature.IsActive("Port_B") = True Feature.IsActive("Port_B_Threads") = True NOTE The Feature.IsActive function is available for selection in the Snippets area of the Edit Rule dialog box. Click the System tab, then expand the Features node. We have now defined the behavior of our model for a tee block. 5 To define the model behavior for an elbow block, begin with an ElseIf statement.

Define a Model Rule to Control Port Visibility | 395

Copy Code Block

ElseIf block = "elbow" Then 6 To suppress the Port B features when creating an elbow block, use the features we created for the tee block, but with opposite values.

Copy Code Block

Feature.IsActive("Port_B") = False Feature.IsActive("Port_B_Threads") = False A simple way to add these lines is to copy and paste the text for the tee block behavior. Then change True to False in the new lines. 7 Complete the If block of your rule with an End If statement. Thats it! All the instructions necessary to enable or disable the Port B features based on the type of block being used are included. 8 Click OK to save the completed rule. Previous (page 393) | Next (page 396)

Test the Block Shape Rule

To verify that this rule is really in control of our model: 1 Observe the current state of the model.

396 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

2 Open Parameters dialog box. 3 In the block row, change tee to elbow using the multi-value drop-down menu in the Equation cell. Port B has been suppressed. 4 Change the block parameter back to tee, and close the Parameters dialog box.

Test the Block Shape Rule | 397

Previous (page 394) | Next (page 398)

Manage Part Configurations

We now cover the last two topics listed in the beginning of this tutorial: Read data from an embedded spreadsheet.

Set feature and component activity.

iLogic provides built-in functions that read information from Excel spreadsheets. These functions are available in the Snippets area, on the System tab, by expanding the Excel Data Links node. In this lesson, we write a rule that uses values from an embedded Excel spreadsheet to set the values for parameters that control the port geometry, based on a specified size. Our rule looks up the port size in the spreadsheet to identify the row of values. Then it reads fields from that row to get the appropriate parameter values. A tee-style block includes three ports. Each port is listed in the Parameters dialog box. However, changing the port size in the Parameters dialog box does

398 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

not change the port size in our model. We must add rules to drive the different port sizes. Our first step is to add a rule that sets the size of the ports and the dimensions of the screw pattern around each port. The screw pattern is used in the assembly to hold a flange onto the block. 1 In the Autodesk Inventor model browser, expand the 3rd Party node in the tree. 2 Right-click on Embedding 1, and select Edit to access the embedded spreadsheet. 3 Add a rule named port_size_rule, and click OK to open the Edit Rule dialog box. The first thing our rule must do is locate the row in the spreadsheet that contains the values to use for Port A. We look up the value matching the port_a_size parameter in a column labeled port_size. 4 In the Snippets area of the dialog box, on the System tab, locate the function labeled FindRow (embedded) in the Excel Data Links node. Double-click the function to insert it into the text area.

Copy Code Block

i = GoExcel.FindRow(3rd Party:Embedding 1, Sheet1, columnName, <=, 0.2) 5 Once you inserted this function template into your rule, replace the first occurrence of columnName with port_size, the first occurrence of <= with =, and 0.2 with port_a_size.

Copy Code Block

i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1", "port_size", "=", port_a_size) This code indicates that we want to find the row in the embedded spreadsheet that has a port_size column that equals the value of the port_a_size parameter.

Manage Part Configurations | 399

6 Add a series of parameters based on the values of cells from this row in the spreadsheet. These parameters control the port diameter, drill depth, and the distance between the bolt holes. Use the function labeled CurrentRowValue in the Excel Data Links node of the Snippets area.

Copy Code Block

i = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("columnName") Edit your copies of the snippet as shown here.

Copy Code Block

port_a_y_dist_between_screw = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_between_screw") port_a_x_dist_between_screw = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_between_screw") port_a_port_dia = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia") Port_A_Drill_Depth = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_drill_depth") NOTE Remember that you can select items in the Model tab of the Edit Rule dialog box to display various sets of Model parameters. 7 To define the thread of the tapped holes, insert the feature labeled ThreadDesignation in the Features node of the Snippets area.

Copy Code Block

Feature.ThreadDesignation("featurename") = 3/8-16 UNC

400 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

Modify the text as shown here.

Copy Code Block

Feature.ThreadDesignation("Port_A_Threads") = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_dim") We have indicated that we should use the tap_dim cell to get the thread designation for the bolt holes. 8 Now that the instructions are complete for the Port A parameters, create the instructions for Port B and Port C. Copy the rule text you have created, and paste it twice. In the first copy you paste, change port_a references to port_b. In the second copy you paste, change port_a references to port_c. You should now have three blocks of code, each related to one of the three ports.

Manage Part Configurations | 401

Copy Code Block

i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1", "port_size", "=", port_a_size) port_a_y_dist_between_screw = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_between_screw") port_a_x_dist_between_screw = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_between_screw") port_a_port_dia = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia") Port_A_Drill_Depth = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_drill_depth") Feature.ThreadDesignation("Port_A_Threads") = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_dim")

402 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1", "port_size", "=", port_b_size) port_b_y_dist_between_screw = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_between_screw") port_b_x_dist_between_screw = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_between_screw") port_b_port_dia = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia") Port_B_Drill_Depth = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_drill_depth") Feature.ThreadDesignation("Port_B_Threads") = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_dim") i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1", "port_size", "=", port_c_size) port_c_y_dist_between_screw = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_between_screw") port_c_x_dist_between_screw = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_between_screw") port_c_port_dia = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia") Port_C_Drill_Depth = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_drill_depth") Feature.ThreadDesignation("Port_C_Threads") = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_dim") 9 Click OK in the iLogic rule editor to save your port_size_rule. Your model may or may not update depending upon how the iLogic port size parameters were initially set. Previous (page 396) | Next (page 403)

Test the Port Size Rule

To view how the new rule updates the model when parameter values are changed: 1 Open the Parameters dialog box. 2 Change port_a_size to 1.50 by selecting that value from the multi-value list. Notice how the model changes when the value equals 1.50.

Test the Port Size Rule | 403

Clearly, we have some more work to do to force other aspects of the model (its size) to update according to the selected port size. Previous (page 398) | Next (page 404)

Create Block Size Rule

Now that we can change the size of each port, we must determine which face has the largest port, so that the block can be sized appropriately. It requires another rule. 1 Add a new rule named block_size_rule. To determine the largest port, we examine the values of the three port size parameters, and retain the largest value. As with block_shape_rule, the behavior for tee-style blocks must be different than for elbow-style blocks. For tee-style blocks, all three ports are used, so we check the sizes for all them. For elbow-style blocks, we do not check Port B, which is suppressed. We use the MaxOfMany function to get the largest value from a set of input values.

404 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

2 Begin block_size_rule as shown, by typing it directly into the text area or by inserting from the available generic statements on the toolbar. To insert the MaxOfMany function, expand the Math node in the Snippets area, and double-click MaxOfMany.

Copy Code Block

If block = "tee" Then port = MaxOfMany(port_a_size,port_b_size,port_c_size) ElseIf block = "elbow" Then port = MaxOfMany(port_a_size,port_c_size) End If A new local variable named port holds the size of the largest available port. Now we have to tell the model what to do with this information. The model obtains its information from an embedded Excel spreadsheet, so we look at the spreadsheet to update the overall sizes of the model. 3 Press Enter twice to add some whitespace in the rule. 4 As with the rule you created previously, insert a copy of the FindRow (embedded) function. Modify it to get the values for other parameters from the embedded spreadsheet by locating the appropriate row of information.

Copy Code Block

i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1", "port_size", "=", port) We are using the port_size column for the lookup, and the value of the assigned variable as the value to look for.

Create Block Size Rule | 405

5 Set model parameters with information from the embedded Excel spreadsheet, using the found row for the largest port size.

Copy Code Block

block_depth = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_depth") port_c_depth_from_front = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_c_depth_from_front") block_width = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_width") port_a_hor_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("hor_offset") port_b_hor_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("hor_offset") port_c_hor_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue "hor_offset") We have now determined which port is the largest, and we are sizing the top of the block accordingly. Now, we determine the height of the block by examining the tee and elbow to determine which port size is bigger on the Port A / Port B face. 6 Create another statement that uses another local variable porta to hold onto this value. Because Port B is not used for elbow-style blocks, the statement includes different steps depending on this setting.

406 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

Copy Code Block

If block = "tee" Then porta = MaxOfMany(port_a_size, port_b_size) ElseIf block = "elbow" porta = port_a_size End If The MaxOfMany function, is not used for elbow-style blocks, since only one value must be considered. We can set the variable from that value. 7 Create another FindRow (embedded) statement to get the height values of the block from the Excel spreadsheet.

Copy Code Block

i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1", "port_size", "=", porta) 8 Use the CurrentRowValue function to set the height of the block.

Copy Code Block

port_a_vert_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset") port_b_vert_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset") 9 Finally, set the value for two additional parameters. The first parameter sets the block height. The second parameter sets the vertical offset of Port C. For this value, we add special logic to insert extra space beyond the vertical offset used for the other ports. This information is obtained from another spreadsheet cell. We only do it for elbow-style blocks.

Create Block Size Rule | 407

Copy Code Block

If block = "elbow" Then port_c_vert_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset") + (GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")/4) Else port_c_vert_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset") End If block_height = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_height") The block_size rule is complete. 10 Click OK in the Edit Rule dialog box. 11 Change any of the port sizes in the Parameters dialog box, and watch the model update. Previous (page 403) | Next (page 408)

Set the Component Type

Create a rule to ensure that all port sizes are the same. Then, you use this rule in the next section to demonstrate how rules can be reordered. 1 Create a rule named component_type_rule. 2 Set the sizes for Port B and Port C to be the same as Port A.

408 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

Copy Code Block

If component_type = "standard" Then port_b_size = port_a_size port_c_size = port_a_size End If 3 Click OK when you are done to save this rule. Previous (page 404) | Next (page 409)

Reorder Rules
Rules can be reordered after they are created. The order of rule execution sometimes affects the results of these rules. You can alter the order of execution from the Rule Browser.

On the ribbon, click Manage tab iLogic panel Rule Browser. The Rules dialog box displays.

2 Using the left mouse button, drag and drop the component_type rule that we created above the block_shape_rule.

3 If the Autodesk InventorUpdate icon is active, click it to update the model. Previous (page 408) | Next (page 410)

Reorder Rules | 409

Change Driving Rule Values

1 Open the Parameters dialog box. Note the Driving Rule value for the port_b_size and port_c_size parameters. These values indicate that a driving rule (component_type_rule) has been defined for these two parameters. When component_type equals standard, the rule sets these two port sizes equal to port_a_size, and the values cannot be changed. If you change component_type to custom, you can then choose independent values for port_b_size and port_c_size. 2 Change component type from standard to custom. 3 Change port_b_size to 3 inches and port_c_size to 0.75 inch. Notice that independent port sizes can be specified. 4 Now, change your component type back to standard. All ports are updated to match port_a_size. Previous (page 409) | Next (page 410)

Update iProperties
We now add one more rule. This rule updates some of the iProperties for the manifold block. 1 Add a new rule named part_number_rule. This rule set the Inventor Part Number iProperty value. For standard components, we can look up the Part Number in the embedded spreadsheet. Then, we use the value in the model_code cell to set the Part Number property for the part. You use the iProperties.Value function, which is available in the iProperties node of the Snippets area. 2 Using the iProperties.Value function, create the first part of the rule. This part locates the row in the embedded spreadsheet from which to read values. Locate the row using port_a_size.

410 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

Copy Code Block

If component_type = "standard" Then i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1", "port_size", "=", port_a_size) iProperties.Value("Project", "Part Number") = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("model_code") 3 For custom components, specify a fixed string for the part number. A fixed string eliminates the need to use any information from the spreadsheet.

Copy Code Block

Else iProperties.Value("Project", "Part Number") = "HomeMade" End If The rule is complete. 4 Click OK to close this rule. Previous (page 410) | Next (page 411)

Test the iProperties Rule

Verify that the new rule is working.

1 Click

, and then click iProperties.

2 On the iProperties dialog box, click the Project tab. Text is entered next to the Part Number. 3 Click Close to remove this dialog box.

Test the iProperties Rule | 411

4 Go to the Parameters dialog box, and change the value of component_type from standard to custom. 5 Click Done, and reopen the Inventor iProperties dialog box. The Part Number is now HomeMade. Save your work. We will be using this model in the next tutorial to build an assembly and add logic at the assembly level. Previous (page 410) | Next (page 412)

Summary
By completing this tutorial, you now understand some of the basic iLogic methods for turning a parametric single model into an intelligent super model! In this tutorial, you: Used the Inventor parameter interface.

Added a rule. Wrote a rule. Caused a rule to run. Edited a rule. Used the Rule Browser to manipulate rules. Read data from an embedded spreadsheet. Set feature and component activity. Set iProperty values from a rule.

In the next tutorial, you learn how to add rules at an assembly level to affect Autodesk Inventor parts and iParts. During the tutorial, you are provided with 3D parametric models to which rules are added. Previous (page 411) | Next (page 412)

Rule Text Reference

The following is a complete text reference of all the rules presented in this tutorial. These rules are also available in completed form in the manifold_block_complete.ipt file, which is included in the tutorials directory. Block_Shape_Rule

412 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

Copy Code Block

If block = "tee" Then Feature.IsActive("Port_B") = True Feature.IsActive("Port_B_Threads") = True ElseIf block = "elbow" Then Feature.IsActive("Port_B") = False Feature.IsActive("Port_B_Threads") = False End If Port_Size_Rule

Rule Text Reference | 413

Copy Code Block

414 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

Rule Text Reference | 415

416 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

Copy Code Block

If block = "tee" Then port = MaxOfMany(port_a_size,port_b_size,port_c_size) ElseIf block = "elbow" Then port = MaxOfMany(port_a_size,port_c_size) End If i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1", "port_size", "=", port) block_depth = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_depth") port_c_depth_from_front = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_c_depth_from_front") block_width = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_width") port_a_hor_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("hor_offset") port_b_hor_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("hor_offset") port_c_hor_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("hor_offset") If block = "tee" Then porta = MaxOfMany(port_a_size, port_b_size) ElseIf block = "elbow" porta = port_a_size End If i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1", "port_size", "=", porta) port_a_vert_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset") port_b_vert_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset") If block = "elbow" Then port_c_vert_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset") + (GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")/4) Else port_c_vert_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset") End If block_height = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_height") Component_Type_Rule

Rule Text Reference | 417

Copy Code Block

If component_type = "standard" Then port_b_size = port_a_size port_c_size = port_a_size End If Part_Number_Rule

Copy Code Block

If component_type = "standard" Then i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1", "port_size", "=", port_a_size) iProperties.Value("Project", "Part Number") = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("model_code") Else iProperties.Value("Project", "Part Number") = "HomeMade" End If Previous (page 412)

418 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling

iLogic - Assemblies

419

About this tutorial

Build an assembly using the functionality of iLogic.

Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Experienced Users 40 minutes Manifold_Block.ipt

420 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Write the rules for your assembly in ordinary speaking language. These simply written rules serve as a guide when you create the formal rules in your design using iLogic Rule language. After you have written the rules in plain language, place the components into the assembly. Constrain the components, and examine the remaining degrees of freedom. Add more constraints as necessary to constrain all parts fully.

In this tutorial, the assembly you build is a simple manifold block with flange fittings that are attached using socket head cap screws. Objectives Pass information from an assembly to its components

Drive iPart configurations Change component pattern dimensions Suppress/unsuppress components Suppress/unsuppress constraints Write data to an Excel spreadsheet Update iProperties

Prerequisites Knowledge of basic Autodesk Inventor assembly modeling techniques, such as constraint creation.

Completion of the Manifold Block Part tutorial. See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 422)

About this tutorial | 421

Start a New Assembly File

The block is the first part placed into the assembly. 1 Close any open Autodesk Inventor files, and make sure that iLogic 2012 Tutorials is set as the active project. 2 Create a new assembly using the Standard.iam template.

3 Place.

On the ribbon, click Assembly tab Component panel

4 In the Open dialog box, double-click manifold_block.ipt. It is the part file you created in the Manifold Block Part tutorial. A grounded occurrence of the component is placed in the assembly, and the part origin is aligned with the assembly origin.

5 To cancel placement of further copies of the component, right-click the graphics window and select Done. 6 Use Orbit to orient the manifold block as shown.

422 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

In addition to the block, this assembly includes three union caps and three sets of screws to attach the caps. 7 Select the Place command again, and double-click union_cap.ipt. A copy of the component becomes attached to the mouse pointer. and the Place Standard iPart dialog box is displayed. 8 Click the Table tab, and select iPart member Union-01 (Part Number U-050). 9 Click in the graphics window to place a copy of the union cap near the manifold block. Click two more times to add a total of three union caps, then click Dismiss to close the dialog box.

Start a New Assembly File | 423

Now you can add the screw components. 10 Select the Place command again, and double-click Screw.ipt. 11 In the Place Standard iPart dialog box, select iPart member Screw-01. Place four Screws in the graphics window, and then click Dismiss to close the dialog box.

424 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

12 Save your assembly as my_manifold_block.iam. You are ready to begin assembling the components and establishing their relationships. Previous (page 420) | Next (page 425)

Customize Components Before Assembly

Before assembling the components, we can make a few changes to identify them with this project.

Customize Components Before Assembly | 425

Change Assembly Component Appearance

First, we change the appearance of our union cap components to make them more visible. 1 click the first union cap component. 2 From the Quick Access toolbar, expand the Appearance drop-down menu, and select Blue.

3 Repeat the appearance selection for the other two union cap components.

Rename Assembly Components

Thus far, the components added to the assembly are listed in the model browser. The components are named the same as the file names they reference.

426 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

We must change the names of the components in our assembly to reflect their purpose. We also want to remove the iPart member identification. Renaming our components ensures that future name changes to iPart members do not cause our component names to become out of date in the rule. If the names are out of date, the rule can fail to execute properly. 1 Navigate to the Model browser. 2 For each component listed here, double-click slowly on the name and change it as indicated. Replace union_cap [Model Code = 050]:1 with port_a_union.

Replace union_cap [Model Code = 050]:2 with port_b_union. Replace union_cap [Model Code = 050]:3 with port_c_union. Replace Screw-01:1 with port_a_union_screw. Replace Screw-01:2 with port_b_union_screw. Replace Screw-01:3 with port_c_union_screw.

Previous (page 422) | Next (page 427)

Edit iLogic Parts from Within an Assembly

1 Double click manifold_block:1.

Open the Parameters dialog box, and verify that the following parameter values are set as indicated. Parameter
block component_type port_a_size

Value
Tee Standard 0.50

3 Save the assembly file.

Edit iLogic Parts from Within an Assembly | 427

Add Assembly Constraints

Assembly constraints restrict the movement of components relative to each other. Apply all constraints necessary to constrain each part fully and leave no degrees of freedom.

Create Mate constraint port_a_cap_center between Port A and the manifold block. Use these selections: The axis running through the center of Port A of the manifold block.

The axis through the center hole of port_a_union.

NOTE If the union cap is hidden within the block after creating the constraint, click and drag the union cap away from the block.

Create Mate constraint port_a_cap_hole using these selections: The axis running through the center of the Port A top left screw hole on the manifold block.

The axis along the center of the top left screw hole of port_a_union.

428 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Create Mate constraint port_a_cap_face using these selections: The Port A face of the manifold block. The back face of port_a_union.

Edit iLogic Parts from Within an Assembly | 429

Create Insert constraint port_a_cap_screw using these selections: The port_a_union_screw The top left screw hole in port_a_union

430 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

5 Follow the previous steps for Port B and Port C. Use similar names for the constraints.

Create Screw Patterns

Each port on the manifold block requires a pattern of four screws to attach the union cap to the block. Use the screw we inserted into the assembly as the patterned component. First, create the screw pattern for Port A.

On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Pattern.

2 click port_a_union_screw. 3 Click the Rectangular tab. 4 click the direction arrow in the Column area. 5 click the bottom horizontal edge of the Port A face. 6 Enter 1.50 for the horizontal distance.

Edit iLogic Parts from Within an Assembly | 431

7 click the direction arrow in the Row area. 8 click the left vertical side of the Port A face. 9 Enter .69 for the vertical distance.

10 Click OK. 11 Rename Component_Pattern_1 in the Model browser to be port_a_screw_pattern.

Assign Descriptive Names to Pattern Parameters

When you create the screw component pattern, new model parameters are also created. Rename the parameters for future use in this tutorial.

Open the Parameters dialog box.

2 click the name of the parameter containing 0.69 in the Equation cell.

432 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

3 Change the parameter name to port_a_y_dist_between_screws. 4 click the name of the parameter containing 1.50 in the Equation cell. 5 Change the parameter name to port_a_x_dist_between_screws. 6 Repeat the previous steps for port_b_union_screw and port_c_union_screw. Remember to rename the patterns when you are done. Your model should look as shown in these front and back views.

Edit iLogic Parts from Within an Assembly | 433

7 Save your assembly file.

434 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Previous (page 425) | Next (page 435)

Add Control Parameters for Assembly

Since we have created an assembly document, we must add some other user parameters.

Create Parameters to Control Port Sizes

Open the Parameters dialog box.

2 Create the numeric parameter port_a_size. 3 Set Unit to in. 4 Create a multi-value list with these values..
0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00

5 Select 0.50 from the new multi-value list. 6 Define port_a_size as a Key parameter. 7 Leave the dialog box open, and repeat the previous steps to create two additional parameters named port_b_size and port_c_size.

Add Control Parameters for Assembly | 435

Create Parameters to Control Component Type and Block Style

For component type: 1 Create the text parameter component_type. 2 Create a multi-value list with the values standard and custom. 3 Set the value to standard. 4 Define component_type as a Key parameter. For block style: 1 Create the text parameter block. 2 Create a multi-value list with the values tee and elbow. 3 Set the Multivalue list to tee. 4 Define block as a Key parameter.

Create Parameters to Control Component Part Numbers

Create the following additional text parameters: port_a_union_part_number

port_b_union_part_number port_c_union_part_number port_a_screw_part_number port_b_screw_part_number port_c_screw_part_number

For each parameter, set the Equation value to 1.

Save the File

When you have defined all the parameters, Save the assembly file. Previous (page 427) | Next (page 436)

Create Rules in the Assembly

In the next several lessons, you create a series of rules to manage the contents of the assembly.

436 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Pass Parameters from the Assembly to the Parts

This model includes a part named manifold_block:1, which has iLogic rules in it. We must pass the assembly level parameter to the part.

Create a rule named assembly_to_parts_rule. This rule sets parameters in the part based on the corresponding values of the control parameters in the assembly. Our Parameter function specifies the component name as well as the parameter name.

Copy Code Block

Parameter("manifold_block:1", Parameter("manifold_block:1", component_type Parameter("manifold_block:1", port_a_size Parameter("manifold_block:1", port_b_size Parameter("manifold_block:1", port_c_size "block") = block "component_type") = "port_a_size") = "port_b_size") = "port_c_size") =

2 Click OK when you have completed this rule.

Edit Part-level Rules in an Assembly

In the Manifold Block Part tutorial, we added a rule to the manifold block part that controls the tee and elbow styles. We must also add it at the assembly level. Rather than rewrite the existing rule, we copy the original. 1 Double-click manifold_block:1 from the Model browser. The other components become transparent.

Create Rules in the Assembly | 437

On the ribbon, click Manage tab iLogic panel Rule Browser.

3 Double-click component_type_rule. 4 Copy the rule text to the clipboard. 5 Click Cancel on the Edit Rule dialog box to close it. 6 Double click my_manifold_block.iam in the Model browser.

Add a new rule named component_type_rule.

8 Paste the copied rule text from component_type_rule into the rule text area of the Edit Rule dialog box.

Copy Code Block

If component_type = "standard" Then port_b_size = port_a_size port_c_size = port_a_size End If 9 Click OK to save this assembly-level rule.

Add port_a_rule
When we change the port size of Port A, we must perform several tasks: Change the port size.

Update the iPart number. If required, change the screw size, screw location, and screw kit part number.

We add a rule to do it: 1 Make sure your manifold block assembly is active.

438 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Create a rule named port_a_rule. The first part of this rule adjusts the screw pattern spacing, based on information stored iPart table of the union part.

3 Add a code block that looks up the row being used based on the port_a_size parameter. Then assigns values to two different assembly parameters from two other columns.

Copy Code Block

i = iPart.FindRow("port_a_union", "port_size", "=", port_a_size) port_a_y_dist_between_screws = iPart.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_betwn_screw") port_a_x_dist_between_screws = iPart.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_betwn_screw") NOTE The iPart-related statements used here can be found in the Snippets area under the iParts node of the System tab. The next part of the rule selects the appropriate iPart row inside the screw part based on the selected port size. 4 Use a series of If statements to set the appropriate iPart member according to the current value of the port_a_size parameter.

Create Rules in the Assembly | 439

Copy Code Block

If port_a_size = .50 Then iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", ElseIf port_a_size = 0.75 Then iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", ElseIf port_a_size = 1.00 Then iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", ElseIf port_a_size = 1.25 Then iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", ElseIf port_a_size = 1.50 Then iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", ElseIf port_a_size = 2.00 Then iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", ElseIf port_a_size = 2.50 Then "Screw-01") "Screw-02") "Screw-02") "Screw-03") "Screw-04") "Screw-04")

440 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-05") ElseIf port_a_size = 3.00 Then iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-06") End If 5 For the last part of this rule, add a statement that gets the part number for the flare flange and stores it in an assembly parameter, which is used in another rule later in this tutorial.

Copy Code Block

port_a_union_part_number = iProperties.Value("port_a_union", "Project", "Part Number") 6 Click OK to save the rule, and save the assembly file.

Add port_b_rule
Port B is different from Port A and Port C, because it does not exist in an elbow manifold block. If the manifold block is an elbow style block, we must suppress the union cap and the union screws used for this port. We must also suppress the mate constraints associated with the union cap. Because we are suppressing components, we set a level of detail before we write the rule. Rules affecting items related to the level of detail in an assembly require that a custom level of detail be defined and saved before writing the rules. If the custom level of detail is not defined, iLogic generates an error message. Set a Level of Detail 1 In the Model browser, expand the Representations node and then the Level of Detail node. 2 Right-click the Level of Detail node, and select New Level of Detail. A new level of detail is added. 3 Slowly double-click LevelofDetail1, then and rename it to iLogic. Write the Rule

Create Rules in the Assembly | 441

Now, we can write the rule.

Create a rule named port_b_rule.

2 For the first part of the rule, determine if we are making a tee-style block, and store that in a separate variable isTee. The isTee variable holds a value of True or False.

Copy Code Block

If block = "elbow" Then isTee = False ElseisTee = True End If We use this variable later to set other parameters. 3 Add lines to the rule to turn off the constraints that locate the union and union screw when the manifold block is an elbow style. Turn on the constraints when the manifold block is a tee style.

Copy Code Block

Constraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_center") = isTee Constraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_hole") = isTee Constraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_face") = isTee Constraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_screw") = isTee

442 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Note that we can use the isTee variable to turn these constraints on or off according to the value of the block parameter. NOTE The naming convention used for these constraints has made it easier to refer to them in this rule. Remember that you can also use the Model tree information in the Edit Rule dialog box to help complete the names of the constraints. 4 Add two lines that conditionally include the port_b_union part and corresponding screw pattern:

Copy Code Block

Component.IsActive("port_b_union") = isTee Component.IsActive("port_b_screw_pattern") = isTee These lines use the isTee variable. When the screw pattern is suppressed, the screw component is also suppressed. 5 For instances in which we are using Port B, add a section that sets the port size, screw pattern parameter values, and port_b_union part number.

Copy Code Block

if isTee Then i = iPart.FindRow("port_b_union", "port_size", "=", port_b_size) port_b_y_dist_between_screws = iPart.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_betwn_screw")

Create Rules in the Assembly | 443

port_b_x_dist_between_screws = iPart.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_betwn_screw") port_b_union_part_number = iProperties.Value("port_b_union", "Project", "Part Number") End If We enclosed this entire block in an If isTee statement, so that these lines are only processed for a tee-style manifold block. The statement If isTee Then is equivalent to If isTee = True Then, but it provides a more concise expression format. We first choose the appropriate row in the s iPart table of the union part, corresponding to the value of the port_b_size parameter, and then extract the values to use for the x and y pattern offsets. Then, we extract the Part Number from the union part, and store its value in another parameter for later reference. 6 For the last part of this rule, we choose the member within the s iPart table of the screw part to use for Port B. It is based on the value of the port_b_size parameter. Use a series of If/Then/Else statements to control it.

444 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Copy Code Block

If port_b_size = .50 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", elseif port_b_size = .75 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", elseif port_b_size = 1.00 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", elseif port_b_size = 1.25 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", elseif port_b_size = 1.50 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", elseif port_b_size = 2.00 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", elseif port_b_size = 2.50 then "Screw-01") "Screw-02") "Screw-02") "Screw-03") "Screw-04") "Screw-04")

Create Rules in the Assembly | 445

iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-05") elseif port_b_size = 3.00 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-06") End If 7 Click OK to close the dialog box and save the rule. 8 Save your assembly file.

Add port_c_rule
The rule for Port C is almost the same as for Port A, except that everything referencing Port A must reference Port C instead.

Open the Rule Browser.

2 Double click port_a_rule. 3 Use the mouse to highlight the entire rule. 4 Press Ctrl+C to copy the rule text. 5 Click OK on the Edit Rule dialog box to close it.

Add a new rule named port_c_rule.

7 In the Edit Rule dialog box, click in the rule text area, and press Ctrl+V to paste the rule. 8 Click the Search and Replace tab at the top of the dialog box. 9 Enter port_a in Find what. 10 Enter port_c in Replace with. 11 Place a check mark in Match Case. 12 Click Replace All in This Rule.

446 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Copy Code Block

i = iPart.FindRow("port_c_union", "port_size", "=", port_c_size) port_c_y_dist_between_screws = iPart.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_betwn_screw") port_c_x_dist_between_screws = iPart.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_betwn_screw")

Create Rules in the Assembly | 447

If port_c_size = .50 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-01") elseif port_c_size = .75 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-02") elseif port_c_size = 1.00 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-02") elseif port_c_size = 1.25 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-03") elseif port_c_size = 1.50 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-04") elseif port_c_size = 2.00 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw" "Screw-04") elseif port_c_size = 2.50 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-05") elseif port_c_size = 3.00 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-06") End If port_c_union_part_number = iProperties.Value("port_c_union", "Project", "Part Number") 13 Click OK to close the dialog box. 14 Save your assembly file. Previous (page 435) | Next (page 448)

Calculate Part Numbers

We must determine the part numbers to use for the union screws and elbows. To do this, we create additional rules in our assembly. The first part of this rule calculates a part number to use for the Port A screw, based on the value of the port_a_size parameter. In this rule, we use a new statement Select Case to execute one of a group of statements. The statements executed depend on the value of an expression.

Add a new rule named screw_part_number_rule.

448 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

2 Create the first section of the rule. This section computes a variable portion of the part number, based on the port_a_size parameter value. The value is held in a temporary variable named Screw_num1. Once the value is determined, the rule constructs the entire part number string. Use the Keywords drop-down menu on the toolbar above the text area to help you fill in this rule.

Copy Code Block

Select Case port_a_size Case .50

Calculate Part Numbers | 449

Screw_num1 Case .75 Screw_num1 Case 1.00 Screw_num1 Case 1.25 Screw_num1 Case 1.50 Screw_num1 Case 2.00 Screw_num1 Case 2.50 Screw_num1 Case 3.00 Screw_num1 End Select

= 050 = 075 = 100 = 125 = 150 = 200 = 250 = 300

port_a_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 & "-SCREW" In the rule we have created, if port_a_size = 0.50, the part number is created as UNBRAKO-050-SCREW We save this value in a parameter for later reference. 3 Copy and paste the rule text you created, and then replace port_a_size with port_b_size. Set the parameter to port_b_screw_part_number.

450 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Copy Code Block

Select Case port_b_size Case .50 Screw_num1 = 050 Case .75 Screw_num1 = 075 Case 1.00 Screw_num1 = 100 Case 1.25

Calculate Part Numbers | 451

Screw_num1 Case 1.50 Screw_num1 Case 2.00 Screw_num1 Case 2.50 Screw_num1 Case 3.00 Screw_num1 End Select

= 125 = 150 = 200 = 250 = 300

port_b_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 & "-SCREW" 4 Create another copy of the rule text, and then replace port_a_size with port_c_size. Set the parameter to port_c_screw_part_number.

452 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Copy Code Block

Select Case port_c_size Case .50 Screw_num1 = 050 Case .75 Screw_num1 = 075 Case 1.00 Screw_num1 = 100 Case 1.25

Calculate Part Numbers | 453

Screw_num1 Case 1.50 Screw_num1 Case 2.00 Screw_num1 Case 2.50 Screw_num1 Case 3.00 Screw_num1 End Select

= 125 = 150 = 200 = 250 = 300

port_c_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 & "-SCREW" 5 Click OK to save the rule and close the dialog box. 6 Save your assembly file. Previous (page 436) | Next (page 454)

Write Information to an Excel Spreadsheet

We have now set all the parameter values necessary to construct the model compute the part numbers. The last rule we write passes the part numbers and other parameter values associated with this file to an Excel spreadsheet. Some of these part numbers are in iParts, and this rule generated the screw part number. The update_excel_spreadsheet_rule utilizes a set of functions that are available from the Excel Data Links category, in the Snippets area of the Edit Rule dialog box.

Add a new rule named update_excel_spreadsheet_rule. This rule fills in the necessary cells depending upon the state of the model. In the spreadsheet, all the cells to which data is being passed have been named to correspond to the information being written.

2 Create the first portion of the rule, which opens the spreadsheet and writes the first three cell values.

454 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Copy Code Block

GoExcel.CellValue("part_number.xls", "Sheet1", "Block_Type") = component_type GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("Block_Style") = block GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("Block_Part_Number") = iProperties.Value("manifold_block:1", "Project", "Part Number") In this section, we reference the part_number.xls spreadsheet file included with this tutorial project. We then set the values for the cells Block_Type, Block_Style, and Block_Part_Number. The first two values are set from assembly parameters, and the last value is set from the blocks Part Number iProperty. 3 Create the next portion of the rule, which writes the values of the three port sizes to the spreadsheet.

Copy Code Block

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_size") = port_a_size If block = "tee" Then GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_size") = port_b_size Else GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_size") = "N/A"

Write Information to an Excel Spreadsheet | 455

End If GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_size") = port_c_size Note how we use a placeholder value of N/A for an elbow-style manifold. 4 Add another section to the rule which assigns cell values from parameters contained in the manifold block component.

Copy Code Block

456 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Copy Code Block

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_union_cap") port_a_union_part_number GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_screw_kit") port_a_screw_part_number If block = "tee" Then GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_union_cap") port_b_union_part_number GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_screw_kit") port_b_screw_part_number Else GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_union_cap") GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_screw_kit") End If GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_union_cap") port_c_union_part_number GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_screw_kit") port_c_screw_part_number = =

= =

= "N/A" = "N/A" = =

As with port_b_size in a previous section of the rule, note the conditional handling of the values related to Port B. 6 To end this rule, save the changes to the spreadsheet. Use the GoExcel.Save function, which is available from the Excel Data Links node in the Snippets area

Write Information to an Excel Spreadsheet | 457

Copy Code Block

GoExcel.Save 7 Click OK to save and close the rule. The spreadsheet updates as the rule executes upon closing. The rule automatically closes the spreadsheet after executing. 8 Open the part_number.xls spreadsheet with Excel, and verify that it is updated. Close the spreadsheet document before the rule executes again, because the rule cannot update the spreadsheet if it is already open from Excel. Previous (page 448) | Next (page 458)

Test Your Rules

Now that youve completed all the rules in your assembly, test them to verify that they are all working properly and producing the desired results. Test your rules by changing the current parameter values using the Parameters dialog box, and then examine the model.

Open the Parameters dialog box. to view only the Key

2 Select Key from the Filters drop-down list parameters defined earlier in this tutorial.

3 Change the block parameter value from tee to elbow. Then click in some other cell or press Tab to apply the change, and note how the model changes according to the rules.

458 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

4 Next, change port_a_size to some other value. Since component_type is set to standard, the other two port sizes also change, and the entire manifold size changes. 5 As these changes are made, the part_number.xls spreadsheet is also updated. View the spreadsheet in Excel, and validate that the cell values reflect the current state of the model. Congratulations! You have completed this tutorial. Previous (page 454) | Next (page 459)

Summary
In this final iLogic tutorial, you used iLogic to: Edit iLogic parts from within an assembly

Add parameters to control an assembly Create rules in an assembly Calculate part numbers Write information to an Excel Spreadsheet

Summary | 459

Previous (page 458) | Next (page 460)

Rule Text Reference

The following is a complete text reference of all the rules presented in this tutorial. These rules are also available in completed form in the manifold_block_complete.iam file, which is included in the tutorials directory.

Assembly_To_Parts_Rule

Copy Code Block

Parameter("manifold_block:1", Parameter("manifold_block:1", component_type Parameter("manifold_block:1", Parameter("manifold_block:1", Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block") = block "component_type") = "port_a_size") = port_a_size "port_b_size") = port_b_size "port_c_size") = port_c_size

Component_Type_Rule

Copy Code Block

If component_type = "standard" Then port_b_size = port_a_size

460 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

port_c_size = port_a_size End If

Port_A_Rule

Copy Code Block

i = iPart.FindRow("port_a_union", "port_size", "=", port_a_size)

Rule Text Reference | 461

port_a_y_dist_between_screws = iPart.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_betwn_screw") port_a_x_dist_between_screws = iPart.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_betwn_screw") If port_a_size = .50 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", elseif port_a_size = .75 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", elseif port_a_size = 1.00 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", elseif port_a_size = 1.25 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", elseif port_a_size = 1.50 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", elseif port_a_size = 2.00 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", elseif port_a_size = 2.50 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", elseif port_a_size = 3.00 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", End If

"Screw-01") "Screw-02") "Screw-02") "Screw-03") "Screw-04") "Screw-04") "Screw-05") "Screw-06")

port_a_union_part_number = iProperties.Value("port_a_union", "Project", "Part Number")

462 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Port_B_Rule

Rule Text Reference | 463

Copy Code Block

If block = "elbow" Then isTee = False Else isTee = True End If Constraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_center") = isTee Constraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_hole") = isTee Constraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_face") = isTee Constraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_screw") = isTee Component.IsActive("port_b_union") = isTee Component.IsActive("port_b_screw_pattern") = isTee If port_b_size = .50 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", elseif port_b_size = .75 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", elseif port_b_size = 1.00 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", elseif port_b_size = 1.25 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", elseif port_b_size = 1.50 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", elseif port_b_size = 2.00 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", elseif port_b_size = 2.50 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", elseif port_b_size = 3.00 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", end If

"Screw-01") "Screw-02") "Screw-02") "Screw-03") "Screw-04") "Screw-04") "Screw-05") "Screw-06")

464 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Port_C_Rule

Copy Code Block

i = iPart.FindRow("port_c_union", "port_size", "=", port_c_size) port_c_y_dist_between_screws = iPart.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_betwn_screw")

Rule Text Reference | 465

port_c_x_dist_between_screws = iPart.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_betwn_screw") If port_c_size = .50 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", elseif port_c_size = .75 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", elseif port_c_size = 1.00 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", elseif port_c_size = 1.25 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", elseif port_c_size = 1.50 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", elseif port_c_size = 2.00 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", elseif port_c_size = 2.50 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", elseif port_c_size = 3.00 then iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", End If

"Screw-01") "Screw-02") "Screw-02") "Screw-03") "Screw-04") "Screw-04") "Screw-05") "Screw-06")

port_c_union_part_number = iProperties.Value("port_c_union", "Project", "Part Number")

466 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Screw_Part_Number_Rule

Copy Code Block

Select Case port_a_size Case .50 Screw_num1 = 050 Case .75 Screw_num1 = 075 Case 1.00

Rule Text Reference | 467

Screw_num1 Case 1.25 Screw_num1 Case 1.50 Screw_num1 Case 2.00 Screw_num1 Case 2.50 Screw_num1 Case 3.00 Screw_num1 End Select

= 100 = 125 = 150 = 200 = 250 = 300

port_a_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 & "-SCREW"

468 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Copy Code Block

Select Case port_b_size Case .50 Screw_num1 = 050 Case .75 Screw_num1 = 075 Case 1.00 Screw_num1 = 100 Case 1.25

Rule Text Reference | 469

Screw_num1 Case 1.50 Screw_num1 Case 2.00 Screw_num1 Case 2.50 Screw_num1 Case 3.00 Screw_num1 End Select

= 125 = 150 = 200 = 250 = 300

port_b_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 & "-SCREW"

470 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Copy Code Block

Select Case port_c_size Case .50 Screw_num1 = 050 Case .75 Screw_num1 = 075 Case 1.00 Screw_num1 = 100 Case 1.25 Screw_num1 = 125 Case 1.50

Rule Text Reference | 471

Screw_num1 Case 2.00 Screw_num1 Case 2.50 Screw_num1 Case 3.00 Screw_num1 End Select

= 150 = 200 = 250 = 300

port_c_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 & "-SCREW"

472 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Update_Excel_Spreadsheet_Rule

Rule Text Reference | 473

Copy Code Block

GoExcel.CellValue("part_number.xls", "Sheet1", "Block_Type") = component_type GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("Block_Style") = block GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("Block_Part_Number") = iProperties.Value("manifold_block:1", "Project", "Part Number") GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_size") If block = "tee" Then GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_size") Else GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_size") End If GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_size") = port_a_size = port_b_size = "N/A" = port_c_size

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_depth") = Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_depth") GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_width") = Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_width") GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_height") = Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_height") GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_union_cap") port_a_union_part_number GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_screw_kit") port_a_screw_part_number If block = "tee" Then GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_union_cap") port_b_union_part_number GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_screw_kit") port_b_screw_part_number Else GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_union_cap") GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_screw_kit") End If GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_union_cap") port_c_union_part_number GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_screw_kit") port_c_screw_part_number GoExcel.Save = =

= =

= "N/A" = "N/A" = =

474 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies

Previous (page 459)

Rule Text Reference | 475

476

Derived Parts

About this tutorial

Create parts from derived geometry.

Category Time Required Experienced Users 20 minutes

477

Tutorial File Used

Start a new part file. der_001.ipt

The derived part is linked to the source file: any changes to the source file can be instantly applied to the derived part. The derived part can selectively include various part geometries and characteristics, such as bodies, sketches, work features, and parameters. Derived parts can use less memory.

Objectives Use a derived part as the base feature of a new part.

Add features to a derived part. Modify a base part and update the derived part. Break the link between a derived part and its base part.

Prerequisites Know how to set the , navigate model space with the various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding.

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 479)

478 | Chapter 17 Derived Parts

Create a Part File

1 Start a new part file.

Click the New command on the Quick Access Toolbar. Ensure that you click the icon, instead of the drop-down arrow next to the icon. In the New File dialog box, click the Metric tab, and then

double-click Standard (mm).ipt. 2 In the graphics window, right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu. You add the derived part to the empty part file. Previous (page 477) | Next (page 479)

Create a Derived Part

Select the source file and create the derived part:

1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab Insert panel Derive . 2 Double-click der_001.ipt in the Open dialog box. 3 In the Derived Part dialog box, expand the Sketches node. 4 Ensure that the icon appears next to Sketch3 to allow the program to include this sketch in the derived part. If necessary, click the icon to switch the include status. 5 Click OK on the Derived Part dialog box to create the derived part and close the dialog box. The external part is now the base feature of your new part. 6 Use the View Cube or Orbit to adjust the viewpoint to approximate the following image.

Create a Part File | 479

Previous (page 479) | Next (page 480)

Understand Derived Parts

The Model browser now contains the base feature node der_001.ipt. The application takes the name from the file name of the source file. The derived body and the included sketch appear nested under the base feature.

All model features in the source filethe three extrusions, the hole, the chamfer, and the consumed sketchesare derived into a single body. These features are not available for edit in the derived part. The unconsumed sketch you included is available and editable in the derived part.

480 | Chapter 17 Derived Parts

Previous (page 479) | Next (page 481)

Add Features to the Derived Part

One of the benefits of a derived part is that you can use the derived part to provide base geometry quickly. Then add new features to that base geometry. In effect, you use the source file geometry as a foundational starting point for your design work. At the same time, you preserve the design state of the source file. There is a one-way associative link between the source file and the derived part. Any changes made to the source file can be applied to the derived part. However, changes made to the derived part do not modify the source file. In this portion of the exercise, you add holes to the derived part.

1 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Modify panel Hole , or right-click and select Hole from the marking menu. The sketch points in the included sketch are selected by default for the hole locations.

Add Features to the Derived Part | 481

2 Change the hole diameter to 20 mm. 3 Select Through All in the Termination field. 4 Click OK.

5 Save the file. Use the file name derive_test. Previous (page 480) | Next (page 482)

Modify the Parent Part

Next, you modify the source file, and then apply those changes to the derived part. 1 In the Model browser, right-click der_001.ipt, and then select Open Base Component. This command opens the source file for the derived part.

482 | Chapter 17 Derived Parts

2 On the ribbon, click the Manage tab Parameters panel

Parameters. 3 For the parameter d2, change the equation from d1 * 5 to d1 * 7. 4 Click Done to close the Parameters dialog box. 5 Observe that the length of the part has increased.

Previous (page 481) | Next (page 484)

Modify the Parent Part | 483

Update the Derived Part

1 Switch to derive_test.ipt by clicking the derive_test.ipt tab at the bottom of the graphics window. Notice that an Update icon appears next to der_001.ipt in the Model browser. This icon indicates that the source file (the parent part) was modified, and that you can apply the changes to the derived part. The changes are not applied automatically. You decide whether to apply the changes. 2 Click Local Update on the Quick Access Toolbar to apply the changes to the derived part.

Previous (page 482) | Next (page 484)

Protect the Derived Part

If useful for your design workflow, you can ensure that changes to the source file are not accidentally applied to the derived part.

484 | Chapter 17 Derived Parts

To sever the link between the derived part and the base part permanently, right-click the derived part in the Model browser, and then select Break Link with Base Component. The program breaks the associative link. You cannot restore the link.

Protect the Derived Part | 485

To suppress the association to the source file, right-click the derived part, and then select Suppress Link With Base Component. To restore a suppressed link, right-click the derived part, and then select Unsuppress Link With Base Component.

Previous (page 484) | Next (page 486)

Restore and close the parent file

1 Switch to the der_001.ipt window. 2 Click the Parameters command. 3 Change the equation for d2 back to d1 * 5. 4 Click Done to close the Parameters dialog box. 5 The part resumes its original length. 6 Save and close the part file. 7 Also close derive_test.ipt. Previous (page 484) | Next (page 486)

Summary
In an empty part, you learned how to: Use an existing part as the base feature of a new derived part.

Add features to a derived part. Modify the parent part and update the derived part. Break the link between a derived part and its parent part.

You can explore design alternatives with derived parts and build up libraries of parts for use across your designs. Remember to check Help for further information.

486 | Chapter 17 Derived Parts

Previous (page 486)

Summary | 487

488

iFeatures

About this tutorial

Create and reuse iFeatures in part files.

Category Time Required Experienced Users 30 minutes

489

Tutorial File Used

TSlot-begin.ipt TSlot-table.ipt

Create an iFeature to utilize a table of parameters. Add an iFeature to a part. Save resources through reuse with iFeatures.

Prerequisites Complete the Parts 1 and Parts 2 tutorials.

Understand the material covered in the Getting Started PDF and the Help topic Getting Started. Ensure that Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit on the Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is not checked.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 491)

490 | Chapter 18 iFeatures

Create an iFeature
1 OpeniFeatures TSlot-begin.ipt.

2 Click the + to the left of Extrusion2 in the Model browser to access Sketch2. 3 Double-click Sketch2 (the sketch that created Extrusion2). Use the View Cube or View Face to look at the front of the part, so that the sketch appears as shown:

This sketch contains a fully constrained profile with six dimensions and two collinear constraints. One dimension and one collinear constraint position the T Slot geometry on the face of Extrusion1 and are of no

Create an iFeature | 491

further interest. Two of the dimensions use an equation to position the T Slot width one half of the distance from a vertical construction line. These two equations ensure that any values added will produce a symmetrical slot. 4 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Exit panel Finish Sketch. 5 Click Manage tab Author panel Extract iFeature. 6 In the Model browser, click Extrusion2. 7 In the Selected Features browser of the Extract iFeature dialog box, click over d2 [12 mm].

8 Now, click

Notice that the d2 parameter is now listed in the Size Parameters portion of the Extract iFeatures dialog box. 9 Repeat the previous steps for parameters d4 [19 mm], d6 [13 mm], and d7 [7 mm]. 10 Click Save in the Extract iFeatures dialog box. 11 In the Save As dialog box, double-click the Slots folder. 12 In the File name field, double-click the name iFeature1, and name your first iFeature tutorial_TSlot. 13 Click Save in the Save As dialog box. Previous (page 489) | Next (page 492)

Insert an iFeature
1 Open the supplied file TSlot-table.ipt, which contains a shop table top.

492 | Chapter 18 iFeatures

2 On the ribbon, click Manage tab Insert panel Insert

iFeature. 3 In the Insert iFeature dialog box, click the Browse button. 4 In the Open dialog box, double-click the Slots folder. 5 Click the tutorial_TSlot.ide iFeature file that you created. 6 Click Open. 7 In the graphics window, click the face shown:

8 In the Insert iFeature dialog box, click Next. 9 Although in this panel of the dialog box you can alter the parameters previously supplied, click Next again for this procedure. We will cover the creation of a family of related features later in this tutorial. 10 Select Activate Sketch Edit Immediately. 11 Click Finish. Previous (page 491) | Next (page 494)

Insert an iFeature | 493

Place an iFeature
12 On the ribbon, click View tab Navigate panel View Face, and select Sketch2 in the Model browser. 13 Adjust your view zoom to see the T Slot sketch and the left edge of the table. NOTE Sketch illustrations in this tutorial show the grid displayed. If you recently completed either the Parts 1 or Parts 2 tutorials, you will have undisplayed the sketch grid by changing the Application Options. This tutorial does not require the use of the sketch grid and can be completed with the grid displayed or undisplayed.

NOTE Your sketch may be positioned in a location that differs from the illustration. 14 Place a 40-mm dimension between the left vertical edge of the table and the vertical construction line in the center of your T Slot sketch. 15 Place a Collinear constraint between the top-most line in your T Slot sketch and the top edge of the table. Your sketch should now match the following illustration:

494 | Chapter 18 iFeatures

16 Click Finish Sketch on the ribbbon to exit the sketch and create the T Slot iFeature.

The red arrow indicates the location of the placed T Slot iFeature. Previous (page 492) | Next (page 496)

Place an iFeature | 495

Modify the iFeature File

In the next portion of the tutorial, you convert the iFeature that you just created to a table-driven iFeature. It will place T Slots of different sizes. You will edit the table definition to contain the various size parameters. You will also add a key to use to select a slot of a certain size during placement. 1 Open the file tutorial_TSlot.ide. iFeatures are stored in files with an *.IDE file extension. They contain geometry representing the features they will add (or subtract). The tutorial_TSlot file contains black surfaces representing the cut extrude. You do not make any edits to model features using the iFeature Author Table.

496 | Chapter 18 iFeatures

The ribbon tab containing the iFeature panel displays. 2 On the ribbon, click iFeature tab iFeature panel iFeature

Author Table. 3 Right-click the 1 in the cell to the left of the 12-mm parameter in the lower portion of the iFeature Author dialog box. Select Insert Row from the context menu.

4 Set the values of the new row to d2 = 14 mm, d4 = 22 mm, d6 = 16 mm, and d7 = 9 mm.

Modify the iFeature File | 497

5 Add two additional rows. Set the values for the first row to d2 = 18 mm, d4 = 29 mm, d6 = 19 mm, and d7 = 11 mm. Set the values for the second row to d2 = 22 mm, d4 = 35 mm, d6 = 25 mm, d7 = 14 mm. The parameter table portion of your dialog box should appear as shown.

6 Click the Other tab in the iFeature Author dialog box, and then click on the text Click here to add value. 7 In the Name column, click on New Item0 and change the text to Size. 8 In the Prompt column, click on Enter New Item0 and change the text to Select size. 9 Click the gray key-shaped icon to the left of Size. Notice that the icon changes to blue, and a blue key icon displays in the Size column heading which is now included in the parameter table portion of the dialog box. 10 Edit the Size key value for each of the rows in your parameter table as follows:
Value for row 1: Value for row 2: Value for row 3: Value for row 4: M10x1.5 M12x1.75 M16x2.0 M20x2.5

NOTE Metric T Nuts are designated by both the slot dimensions and the thread size of the tapped hole. The Size value entered previously is the thread designation for one T Slot size. Not all slot sizes are covered by the values in this tutorial. 11 Click OK to save the added rows and key column to your iFeature definition. 12 Save and close tutorial_TSlot.ide.

498 | Chapter 18 iFeatures

Previous (page 494) | Next (page 499)

Place iFeatures from a Family

In this final portion of the tutorial, you place iFeatures that are driven by the key values that you added to your iFeature definition in the previous steps. 1 In the file TSlot-table.ipt (that should still be open) follow the steps described in the beginning steps of the tutorial panel Insert an iFeature. 2 In the Value column, click M10x1.5 and notice that you can select any of the four sizes that you specified in your iFeature definition. 3 Select any size, and continue the placement as discussed in the final steps of the tutorial panel Insert an iFeature. Use a value other than 40 mm to place your new slots over a solid portion of the table top. 4 Repeat the previous cycle, and place T Slots using each of the other three defined sizes. NOTE By carefully naming key values of iFeatures defined in a table, you are able to simplify their future use. Remember that you may not be the only designer who will benefit from the efforts made to create a table-driven family of iFeatures! Next, you will quickly explore the association between an iFeature that has already been placed, and the IDE file which defines the iFeature. 5 Open the file tutorial_TSlot.ide again. 6 Following the steps you learned previously, change the d2 value of 12 mm in the M10x1.5 row to 2 mm. 7 Click OK to close the iFeature Author dialog box. 8 Save and close the tutorial_TSlot.ide. 9 Inspect the T Slots that have been placed in TSlot-table.ipt (that should still be open). NOTE No slots have changed size! Once you place an iFeature into a part model, the resulting feature is not associative to the original iFeature definition. Any changes made to the iFeature definition will not change any part models that were created using an earlier version of the iFeature definition. Congratulations! You have completed the iFeatures tutorial. Previous (page 496) | Next (page 500)

Place iFeatures from a Family | 499

Summary

iFeatures save both time and money! By capturing commonly used features or groups of features once you are able to minimize the effort required to reuse these features in other design situations. By accurately capturing these features one time, you can ensure they can be reused repeatedly and correctly. In this tutorial, you learned how to: Extract existing features and save them as an iFeature.

Place an iFeature precisely in an active design. Create a table to drive a family of iFeatures. Place iFeatures from a family using a key value. That once placed, iFeatures are no longer associated to the IDE file that defines the iFeature.

Previous (page 499)

500 | Chapter 18 iFeatures

Content Center User Libraries

About this tutorial

Create your own library of customized content from standard libraries.
Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Experienced Users 30 minutes Start a new assembly file. Brace.ipt

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. This tutorial is created for a single user environment with libraries stored in a Desktop Content location. If you are a member of a workgroup that shares libraries on a server, you must be a library administrator and have editor permissions to perform library editing tasks. Also, the method for creating user libraries on the server is different than presented in this tutorial. The examples in this tutorial use content based on several different standards. If your Content Center configuration does not contain the same library, read along without performing the steps, or use a similar part from a different library. For example, if the tutorial calls for a machine screw from the JIS standard and

501

your library contains only ANSI parts, substitute a similar screw from your ANSI library. Objectives Create user libraries to customize content from standard libraries.

Add standard parts to Content Center.

Prerequisites Know Autodesk Inventor assembly and part fundamentals.

Understand the Autodesk Inventor user interface and how it works. Know the fundamentals of Inventor Content Center. Microsoft Excel available on the computer (needed for creating an iPart). See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 502)

Configure Standard and User Libraries

A standard Content Center library and a user read/write library must be available to perform this exercise. Review your current Content Center configuration and create a user library.

1 Click

Manage Projects.

2 On the Projects dialog box, double-click the tutorial_files project in the projects list to set it the active project. 3 In the lower-right corner of the Projects dialog box, click Configure Content Center Libraries. The Configure Libraries dialog box displays a list of Content Center libraries in your library storage location. 4 Review the list to confirm that libraries are available in the project configuration.

502 | Chapter 19 Content Center User Libraries

NOTE To perform the tutorial steps, at least one standard Content Center library must be available for use. A standard library can be identified as available if the In Use option is selected and the status in the Access column is Read Only. TIP If no libraries are available, set up Content Center libraries first. See Help for more details or contact your CAD Administrator. 5 If you work in the Desktop Content environment, click the Create Library command on the Configure Libraries dialog box. NOTE If your Content Center libraries are stored on a server, verify that a user read/write library is available and you can use it for this exercise. Alternatively, you can create a library by using the server console and then add it to the library configuration in the project. See the Help for more details. 6 Enter Tutorial Library in the Display Name field. The File Name uses the same string automatically. 7 Click OK. The Tutorial Library is created in the Desktop Content folder. 8 A newly created library is automatically added to the Content Center configuration. Verify that the In Use box is selected for the Tutorial Library, and the library status is Read/Write. 9 Click OK to close the Configure Libraries dialog box. 10 Click Save in the Projects dialog box, and then click Done. Previous (page 501) | Next (page 503)

Enable Edit of a Part Family

Use the Copy To command to enable editing of a family from a read-only library. Copy To copies a single family, set of families, or a category. The copying process creates a complete category structure in the destination read/write library. After a Copy To family is created, the family is editable in the Merged View or in the view of the user library.

Enable Edit of a Part Family | 503

Locate a part family and copy it to the Tutorial Library: 1 On the ribbon, click Tools tab Content Center panel Editor.

2 On the Category View panel, expand the Shaft Parts Circlips category, and select the External category. 3 On the List View panel, locate the R-Ring family. 4 Right-click the R-Ring family, click Copy To, and then click Tutorial Library on the menu. The copying process starts. 5 After copying is finished, information in the dialog box is automatically refreshed. The R-Ring family is enabled, and an icon identifies that a read/write copy of the R-Ring family now exists in a user library. The original read-only family is still available in the standard library, but it is replaced with the read/write copy in the presented merged view of available libraries.

6 Right click the R-Ring family and select Family Properties. Open the Link tab and review the information about creation method and parent family. Then, close the Family Properties dialog box. Previous (page 502) | Next (page 504)

Edit the Family Table

1 In the List View panel, right-click the thumbnail image for the R-Ring family, and then select Family Table. 2 In the Family Table dialog box, select Property Columns Only from the filter drop-down menu. 3 Scroll to the far right side of the dialog box to display the Material column.

504 | Chapter 19 Content Center User Libraries

4 Click the Material cell in the first row and change Steel, Mild to Titanium by selecting Titanium from the drop-down list of available materials. 5 Click the Material cell in the second row and change Steel, Mild to Galvanized Steel. 6 Click Apply to save the changes in the library. Then click OK to close the message box. 7 Click OK to close the Family Table dialog box. Previous (page 503) | Next (page 505)

Verify the Changes

The Content Center Editor displays Merged View by default. In the Merged View, content from all libraries is merged in the List View panel. If a family from a standard library was copied to a user library and then edited, the edited copy of the family displays in the Merged View. 1 If needed, select Family Preview in the Content Center Editor dialog box to display the Family Preview panel. The Family Preview panel shows the family table of the selected family. Select the R-Ring family, if necessary. 2 Scroll to the far right side of the dialog box to display the Material column. Verify that the family table in the Merged View includes your edits. 3 Select Tutorial Library from the Library View list (located near the top of the dialog box). The view is filtered to show only content contained in the Tutorial Library. The Tutorial Library contains the R-Ring circlip family. On the Family Preview panel, verify that the family table includes your edits. 4 Select the ANSI Library from the Library View list. The view is filtered to show only content contained in the ANSI library. Verify that the family table of the R-Ring circlip family did not change in the ANSI standard library. 5 Select Merged View from the Library View list. Previous (page 504) | Next (page 506)

Verify the Changes | 505

Use Save Copy As to Create a Family

Use the Save Copy As command to create a copy of an existing family and save it as a new family in a read/write library. The family created by Save Copy As appears separate from the parent family in a merged view of the content. You decide if the newly created family maintains a link to the parent family or is an independent family without any link. A link between parent and copied families enables you to synchronize copied families with their parents. Families without link are treated the same as families published by using the Publishing Guide. 1 Open the Fasteners Nuts Other category. 2 On the List View panel, locate the JIS B 1169 - Metric family. 3 Right-click the JIS B 1169 - Metric family, and select Save Copy As from the menu. 4 In the Save Copy As dialog box: Select Tutorial Library as the location to which the copied family is to be saved.

Select Independent Family. Leave the Family Name, Family Description, and Family Folder Name unchanged.

5 Click the Review command to display the Review dialog box. The first row in the table on the Review dialog box displays expressions for File Name, Part Number, and key family table columns of the newly created family. The following rows display the first three rows of the family table. Click OK to close the Review dialog box. NOTE You can edit expressions in the Review dialog box to customize the family table for the family copy. 6 Click OK in the Save Copy As dialog box to start the copying process. After the process ends, the merged view displays the original JIS B 1169 Metric family and the Copy of JIS B 1169 - Metric family. The Copy of JIS B 1169 - Metric family is enabled for editing.

506 | Chapter 19 Content Center User Libraries

Previous (page 505) | Next (page 507)

Edit Family Properties

Family properties, for example the family name, description, mapping, and thumbnail image are displayed and edited in the Family Properties dialog box. 1 Right-click the Copy of JIS B 1169 - Metric family, and select Family Properties. 2 On the Link tab, notice that the creation method is Primary and information about a family parent or link is not available. It indicates the family is independent and treated as a user-published family. 3 On the General tab of the Family Properties dialog box: Replace the current Family Name with My JIS B 1169 Nut.

Replace the current Family Description with Copy of JIS B 1169 - Metric. Replace the current Family Folder Name with My Parts.

4 Click OK to close the Family Properties dialog box. Previous (page 506) | Next (page 507)

Verify Your Edits

Place a member of the family in an assembly, and review properties of the placed standard part. 1 Create an assembly file by using the standard mm assembly template. 2 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Place from Content Center. 3 On the List View panel of the Place from Content Center dialog box, double-click the My JIS B 1169 Nut family.

Edit Family Properties | 507

4 On the My JIS B 1169 Nut family dialog box, click OK to place the first family member. 5 One occurrence of the nut is placed in the assembly. Right-click in the graphics window, and click Done to finish the placement. 6 Review the name of your part in the assembly browser. 7 Right-click the My JIS B 1169 Nut part, and click iProperties. Then: On the General tab of the iProperties dialog box, in the Location field, notice that the part is saved in the My Parts folder.

On the Project tab of the iProperties dialog box, in the Description field, notice that your description string is used.

8 To compare properties of your part and the original part from the standard library, place a member of the JIS B 1169 - Metric family. Then, open the Properties for the JIS B 1169 - Metric part. Previous (page 507) | Next (page 508)

Prepare a Part to Publish to Content Center

In the following exercise, prepare and publish an iPart to a Content Center user library. The published iPart is saved as a part family to a selected category. NOTE Some of the applications (such as Design Accelerator, Frame Generator, Tube and Pipe) require a special authoring and publish procedure. Please refer to the application help and tutorial for details. Authoring is not discussed in the following exercise. 1 Open Brace.ipt,located in \Tutorial Files\Weldments. 2 Use Save As to create a copy named Brace_copy.ipt.

508 | Chapter 19 Content Center User Libraries

3 Before you publish, you will create an iPart factory based on this part. The rows in the factory correspond to the Content Center family members (size variations) in the published family. On the ribbon, click Manage tab Parameters panel Parameters and take note of d0 (part width), d1 (height), and d2 (length).

Prepare a Part to Publish to Content Center | 509

4 For clarity, rename the parameters. In the Parameter Name column, click d0 and enter a more descriptive name such as channel_width. 5 Rename d1 to channel_height and d2 to channel_length. 6 Click Done to accept the name changes and close the Parameters dialog box. 7 Click Manage tab Author panel Create iPart. 8 In the lower portion of the dialog box, right-click the existing row 1, and then select Insert Row from the context menu. 9 In the new row 2, change the channel_length value to 200 mm, and click OK. 10 Save the part. Previous (page 507) | Next (page 511)

510 | Chapter 19 Content Center User Libraries

Publish to Content Center

1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab Content Center panel Publish Part. 2 The first page of the Publish Guide displays the list of read/write libraries to which you can publish. Ensure that Tutorial Library is selected. 3 Select a language (as required), and click Next. The list of available categories displays. 4 Select Channels (located under Structural Shapes) from the Category list, and then click Next. The category parameters display. 5 Map the part parameters (length, width, and height) to corresponding category parameters that exist in the Structural Shapes Channel category. In the Base Length row, click the down arrow in the Please Select cell, and select the channel_length part parameter. This maps the part parameter channel_length to the required Content Center category parameter Base Length. 6 To map the channel height and width, scroll down the Category Parameters list. In the Shape Height row, click the down arrow in the Please Select cell and select the channel_height. In the Shape Width row, click the down arrow in the Please Select cell, and select channel_width. 7 Click Next. The Define Family Key Columns panel displays. 8 Set the channel_length to be a key column for the family. To do this, select channel_length in the Table Columns list, and click the right arrow to move the column to the Key Columns list. Click Next. 9 Set properties for the published part family. In the Family Name field, change the name to Sheet Metal Channel.

In the Family Description field, enter My Published Channel. In the Family Folder Name field, enter My Parts. You can leave the other properties blank in this example.

Click Next. 10 Review the default thumbnail image. You can use it in this example.

Publish to Content Center | 511

11 Click Publish to publish the part to Tutorial Library. 12 Click OK to dismiss the message box. 13 Close the file Brace_copy.ipt. Previous (page 508) | Next (page 512)

Verify the Published Part

1 Create an assembly file by using the standard mm assembly template. 2 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Place from Content Center. 3 In the Category View panel, expand the Structural Shapes category, and select the Channels category. Locate the Sheet Metal Channel family. 4 Double-click the Sheet Metal Channel family. 5 Select the 125-mm member in the channel_length field, and click Apply. An occurrence of the part is placed in the assembly.

512 | Chapter 19 Content Center User Libraries

6 Right-click in the graphics window and select Done to finish the placement of the first family member. The family dialog box displays again. 7 Select the 200-mm length member, and click OK. 8 Click in the graphics window to place the longer part.

9 Right-click, and select Done. Previous (page 511) | Next (page 514)

Verify the Published Part | 513

Summary

In this tutorial, you learned how to: Create a Desktop Content user library.

Edit the family table for a family from a standard Content Center library. Create a family in a user library by using Save Copy As. Edit family properties of a read/write family. Publish an iPart in a user library.

Remember to check Help for further detailed information. What Next? Add new rows to the family table of the Sheet Metal Channel to create new family members. Then place the new family members to the assembly. Read more about Content Center Editor or Publishing in the Help. Go through Content Center skill builders on the Autodesk Inventor Services & Support web page. Previous (page 512)

514 | Chapter 19 Content Center User Libraries

Top-down Workflow

About this tutorial

Create assemblies and components using top-down design.

Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Experienced Users 60 minutes Seat Adjust Layout.ipt

515

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. In this tutorial, you explore aspects of top-down design for a power car seat. You use a layout, sketch blocks, and Make Components. You also change the layout to demonstrate associativity. A layout is a 2D sketch within a part file. The 2D sketch uses sketch geometry to represent your design components and configurations. The layout is the root document of your design, and allows you to control your design associatively from the top down. Once your layout has matured, you use the Make Components and Make Part commands to derive selected sketch blocks into new part and assembly files. Associativity is maintained between your layout and the new files so that your 3D models are updated with changes to their respective sketch blocks. For Make Components, changes you make to the arrangement of components do not require updates to your 3D models. This powerful feature eliminates unnecessary revisions to your design documents. This tutorial opens an existing layout part with 2D sketch geometry. Objectives Place and constrain sketch block instances.

Derive sketch blocks to new part and assembly files (Make Components). Offset components from the layout plane. Change the layout to demonstrate associativity.

Prerequisites Know how to set the active project, navigate the model space with the various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding.

Knowledge of sketch blocks is beneficial. See the Sketch Blocks tutorial and Help topics. See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one.

516 | Chapter 20 Top-down Workflow

Next (page 517)

Get Started
In this tutorial, the intent is to demonstrate some of the functionality available to support your top-down design workflow. As such, the tutorial has you continue the layout of a motorized car seat near the end of the layout process. The part file already contains the sketch blocks needed so that you can quickly complete your layout and move on to the component creation phase. In a more typical design effort, you would have started by creating the layout part and sketch blocks already present in this file.

1 Click

Open.

2 Set the Project File to Tutorial_Files.ipj. 3 Open Seat Adjust Layout.ipt.

NOTE In this tutorial, you save the changes you make to the source tutorial files. If you need to replace the modified files with the original source files, re-install the source files from your installation software. Alternatively, back-up the source Tutorial Files directory to another location and access the back-up files as needed. Previous (page 515) | Next (page 517)

Place and Constrain a Sketch Block Instance

After you open the part file, note the presence of one sketch, Sketch1, in the model browser. Expand Sketch1 to view the sketch block instances. Pause the cursor over the different sketch block instances to view the associated

Get Started | 517

geometry. You must add a flexible instance of the Screw Rod Assy_Front block to complete the layout. 1 In the browser, double-click Sketch1 to open it for edit. 2 Expand Sketch1. 3 Expand the Blocks folder near the top of the browser. This folder contains all sketch block definitions. 4 Drag the Screw Rod Assy_Front block from the Blocks folder into the graphics window. It adds an instance of the block to your layout.

5 Right-click the Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 instance, and select Flexible. It exposes the sketch block degrees of freedom such that kinematics can be demonstrated. Screw Rod Assy_Rear:1 is already set to Flexible. 6 Place coincident constraints, in the order shown, to position Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 in your layout.

518 | Chapter 20 Top-down Workflow

Place and Constrain a Sketch Block Instance | 519

7 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Done to exit the Coincident Constraint command.

520 | Chapter 20 Top-down Workflow

8 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Show All Constraints to view the constraints between sketch block instances. 9 Right-click, and select Hide All Constraints. The sketch block instances are constrained in the layout. Select and drag different geometry. Note how the layout moves and demonstrates assembly kinematics. Use the Undo command to return the layout to the default position. 10 Exit the sketch and save your file. Previous (page 517) | Next (page 521)

Make Components
Once your layout and sketch blocks have matured, you derive the sketch block instances to part and assembly files. The shape of each component is associated to the corresponding sketch block. The combination of the layout constraint and layout part controls the position of each component within an assembly. 1 In the browser, ensure that Sketch1 is expanded. 2 On the ribbon, click Manage tab Layout panel Make Components. In the Make Components: Selection dialog box, you select the sketch block instances to derive, and choose whether to place the new components in a target assembly. 3 Select Screw Rod Assy_Front:1. In the dialog box, refer to the selection browser to ensure that Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 is selected. You should see a hierarchy that shows the Screw Rod Assy_Front block definition as the parent and Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 as the child.

4 Ensure that Insert components in target assembly is checked, and leave Target assembly name as the default. It creates an assembly (Seat Adjust Layout.iam), into which the new components are placed.

Make Components | 521

5 Click Browse next to the Template control. On the Open Template dialog box, click the Metric tab. Select the Standard (mm).iam template, and click OK. 6 Accept the defaults for the other dialog box settings, and click Next. The Make Components: Blocks dialog box displays. Since Screw Rod Assy_Front is a nested block, it derives to an assembly and the child blocks derive to parts. Note that block definitions, not instances, are shown in the Selected Blocks column. When you select block instances to derive, you create a component file from the block definition. This component file is then instanced into the target assembly to correspond to your selected block instances. 7 To create the component files in metric units, you select the appropriate metric template. Click Screw Rod Assy_Front under Selected Blocks to highlight the row. With the row highlighted, click Browse at the top of the Template column. On the Open Template dialog box, click the Metric tab, and select Standard (mm).iam. 8 Click OK to accept the metric template selection. 9 Change to the Standard (mm).ipt template for the Connecting Rod and Worm Gear Assy_Front blocks. NOTE Rather than changing the templates for each block in the Make Components dialog box, you can change the default templates. Under the Tools tab, Options panel, click Document Settings. Under the Modeling tab, click Options in the Make Component Dialog area. In this dialog box, choose the default part and assembly templates for the Make Components command. Since these options reside under Document Settings, they only apply to the current layout part file. 10 For the component position options, ensure that both options are checked. The Create equivalent assembly constraints option translates sketch constraints between blocks into assembly constraints between components. The Constrain to layout plane option controls location of the components along the Z axis of the layout part. You can toggle this setting off and on in your assembly file to achieve the appropriate position of the components relative to the layout plane. 11 Click OK to execute Make Components and close the dialog box. The target assembly Seat Adjust Layout.iam is created and opened in a window. The Screw Rod Assy_Front component is created and instanced in the target assembly as Screw Rod Assy_Front:1.

522 | Chapter 20 Top-down Workflow

12 The new files are not automatically saved after creation. Save the file Seat Adjust Layout.iam and associated components. NOTE If your layout sketch is in edit mode, you are prompted to confirm that you want to exit edit mode and continue to save your files. Click OK. 13 The layout part to which your components are constrained, Seat Adjust Layout:1, has visibility turned off. It avoids unnecessary geometry in the graphics window. Expand the layout part, and pause over Sketch1 to view the layout sketch from which you derived the new components.

14 Expand the layout constraint Layout:1. Pause the cursor over XY Flush:1. This constraint is active because the component position option for Make Components was set to Constrain to layout plane. It constrains Screw Rod Assy:1 to the layout plane. 15 Expand Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 and the associated Layout:1 constraint. 16 Right-click on Screw Rod Assy_Front:1, and select Layout Constraint. Turn off Constrain to Layout Plane. Under the Layout:1 constraint, XY Flush:1 changes to suppressed and Z Angle:1 to enabled. The component is no longer constrained to the layout plane and can be dragged along the Z axis. 17 Turn on Constrain to layout plane for Screw Rod Assy_Front:1. Observe how the constraints change once again to lock the component in its current position, offset from the layout plane.

Make Components | 523

NOTE You can change the offset value by selecting the Layout constraint browser entry and typing a new value in the browser edit field. You demonstrate this behavior in the next exercise. 18 Pause the cursor over various objects under Screw Rod Assy_Front:1. A layout part Screw Rod Assy_Front_Layout:1 and layout constraints were also created in the subassembly. For each assembly that is created, a layout part and layout constraints are required to position the assembly components as described by the layout. 19 Expand the subassembly parts Worm Gear Assy_Front:1 and Connecting Rod:1. Pause the cursor over the Flush:1 constraint. This constraint was created by the translation of the collinear sketch constraint into the equivalent assembly constraint.

20 Click one of the components in the graphics window and drag. The kinematics of the components were preserved by creation of the Flush:1 constraint. 21 Undo the position changes to return the components to their default positions. 22 Save your file. Previous (page 517) | Next (page 524)

Offset Components from the Layout Plane

You can derive additional components from your layout into the same target assembly and you can position components at different Z axis locations. 1 Go to Seat Adjust Layout.ipt. 2 Edit Sketch1. You will utilize Make Components from multiple blocks in the next steps. To use metric templates for each component, set the default templates on the Make Components Options dialog box.

524 | Chapter 20 Top-down Workflow

3 On the ribbon, click Tools tab Options panel Document Settings. 4 Under the Modeling tab, click Options in the Make Components Dialog area. In this dialog box, set the default part template to Standard (mm).ipt and the default assembly template to Standard (mm).iam. Use Browse to locate the metric templates. 5 Click OK to exit the Make Components Options dialog box. 6 Click OK to exit the Document Settings dialog box. 7 Click Sketch tab Layout panel Make Components. 8 In the model browser, select Link Plate:1, Link Plate:2; Seat Pan:1, and Front Pivot Weldment:1.

9 In the Make Components:Selection dialog box, ensure that the target assembly remains Seat Adjust Layout.iam, and click Next. 10 Click OK. The graphics window changes to Seat Adjust Layout.iam.

Note the addition of the new components in the browser. Pause the cursor over the new components. Link Plate:1 and Link Plate:2 appear to be the same geometry because of their XY position. In subsequent steps, you differentiate the two components with an offset along the Z axis. 11 The new files are not automatically saved after creation. Save Seat Adjust Layout.iam and associated components.

Offset Components from the Layout Plane | 525

NOTE If your layout sketch is in edit mode, you are prompted to confirm that you want to exit edit mode and continue to save your files. Click OK. 12 Click Seat Pan:1 and drag. Again, note that the seat kinematics are demonstrated. 13 Undo the position changes to return the components to their default locations. 14 Currently, all components are constrained to the layout plane. Assume that the layout plane is the mid-plane of the seat. You can turn off Constrain to layout plane, move the components along the Z axis, then turn on Constrain to layout plane. The flush constraints will be re-enabled so that the components can only move parallel to the layout plane. However, now the constraints have an offset value that corresponds to their separation distance from the layout plane. In the browser, expand Link Plate:1, and expand the Layout:2 constraint. 15 Right-click Link Plate:1, and select Layout Constraint. Turn off Constrain to layout plane. The XY Flush:2 constraint is suppressed and Z Angle:2 is enabled. 16 Rotate your sketch to view the geometry off-plane. 17 Click Link Plate:1, in the graphics window, and drag in the positive Z direction. It offsets the components from the layout plane.

526 | Chapter 20 Top-down Workflow

18 Turn Constrain to layout plane back on for Link Plate:1. XY Flush:2 is re-enabled and now shows an offset value. 19 Click XY Flush:2. 20 Enter a value of 120 mm in the entry box below the browser, and click Enter. The component is repositioned 120 mm from the layout plane, or mid-plane, of the seat. 21 Perform the operations required to offset Link Plate:2 from the layout plane by 116.5 mm in the negative Z direction.

22 The pivot plate components in the Front Pivot Weldment:1 subassembly also must be offset from the layout plane. To access the components and constraints, first activate the assembly for edit. In the browser, double-click Front Pivot Weldment:1. 23 Offset Pivot Plate:1 from the layout plane by 116.5 mm in the positive Z direction. This component is offset from Link Plate:1 by 3.5 mm to account for the link plate thickness. NOTE The pivot plates may appear to float freely in the Y axis direction when they should be constrained by assembly constraints. It is because the assembly constraints are between Front Pivot Weldment:1 and other components. When you finish the edit of the Front Pivot Weldment:1, the pivot plate positions update according to the associated constraints. 24 Offset Pivot Plate:3 from the layout plane by 113 mm in the negative Z direction.

Offset Components from the Layout Plane | 527

25 Offset Pivot Plate:2 from the layout plane by 84.25 mm in the positive Z direction. 26 Finish the edit of Front Pivot Weldment:1.

27 Offset Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 from the layout plane by 82.5 mm in the positive Z direction.

28 Save your files.

528 | Chapter 20 Top-down Workflow

Previous (page 521) | Next (page 529)

Add Features and Demonstrate Associativity

The component instances you have derived establish the base geometry for your 3D components. After you have derived your components, your next step is to add features and further develop the component models. Here, you get started with a basic workflow. 1 Double-click Link Plate:1 in the browser. 2 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Create panel Extrude. 3 Select the Link Plate:1 sketch geometry as shown.

4 Enter 3.5 mm for the extrude distance, and use the flip direction arrows to extrude in the negative Z direction. 5 Click OK. Link Plate:2 is also updated to reflect the added feature.

Add Features and Demonstrate Associativity | 529

6 Finish your edit of Link Plate:1. 7 Double-click Pivot Plate:1, and repeat the steps necessary to extrude the pivot plates to a thickness of 3.5 mm.

8 Finish your edit of Pivot Plate:1, and save your file. 9 As an exercise, add features to your other component instances to develop your assembly further.

530 | Chapter 20 Top-down Workflow

10 After you create your component instances using Make Components, they remain associated to your layout. Changes to the shape of block instances are reflected in the corresponding components. Activate Seat Adjust Layout.ipt. 11 Open Sketch1 for edit. 12 Double-click Link Plate:1 in the browser. It opens the Link Plate sketch block for in-context edits. 13 Change the dimension shown to 13 mm.

Add Features and Demonstrate Associativity | 531

14 Exit the block edit, and exit the sketch. 15 Activate Seat Adjust Layout.iam. 16 Click Update at the top of the window. Both Link Plate:1 and Link Plate:2 are updated to reflect the shape change in the Link Plate block definition.

532 | Chapter 20 Top-down Workflow

17 Practice with other changes to your layout to demonstrate the power of associativity. 18 Save your files. Previous (page 524) | Next (page 533)

Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to: Add a block instance and sketch constraints to your layout.

Use Make Components to derive sketch blocks to component files. Move components off the layout plane in your target assembly. Add features to new components. Demonstrate the benefits of associativity between your layout and components.

Use of a layout, sketch blocks, and Make Components is effective in the top-down design of your components. Other features in Autodesk Inventor, such as Make Part and multi-body parts, also assist in top-down design workflows. Check out these features in the New Features Workshop, tutorials, and Help. Previous (page 529)

Summary | 533

534

Substitute Level of Detail Representations

535

About this tutorial

536 | Chapter 21 Substitute Level of Detail Representations

Create substitute level of detail representations in an assembly.

Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Experienced Users 20 minutes WormGear.iam

Substitute an assembly with any part. This substitution can be a simplified part that you create manually or any other part file on disk.

For both methods, you substitute an assembly with a part. Both methods can provide significant memory savings. Prerequisites Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with the various view tools.

Refer to the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 538)

About this tutorial | 537

Open sample file

Set your active project to tutorial_files, and then open WormGear WormGear.iam.

Assume for this exercise that the only critical functional geometries in this assembly are the two shaft ends and the mounting holes on the gear box part. For clear visual reference, the general shape and appearance of the assembly are also important. Other internal parts are not needed with respect to how this assembly might relate to other components in a hosting assembly. Previous (page 536) | Next (page 538)

Workflow Overview
Before you begin, look at the creation steps for the two methods from a big picture point-of-view.

538 | Chapter 21 Substitute Level of Detail Representations

Derive in-place part method: 1 In the owning assembly, create a reduced-part level of detail representation. 2 In the owning assembly use the New Substitute Derive Assembly command to create a derived part, without leaving the owning assembly, based on the reduced-part representation. When the command finishes, the part derived from the assembly is the active representation. The substitute level of detail representation is identified in the browser with the icon.

Part-on-disk method: 1 Create or open a part to use as a substitute. 2 Designate the part as a substitute. 3 In the owning assembly, use the New Substitute Select Part File command to specify the substitute part for the representation.

Workflow Overview | 539

From an authoring point of view, the derive in-place part method is quicker most of the time. However, from a memory savings point of view, the simplified part provides more benefit since you have thorough and explicit control of geometric complexity. Previous (page 538) | Next (page 540)

Derived In-place Part Method

The following pages list the detailed steps for the derive in-place part method. To begin, you need a reduced-part level of detail representation in the owning assembly. The assembly already contains a reduced-part representation named All Internals Off. 1 Set the graphics display to Wireframe to see the changes to internal geometry. For the following image, other adjustments were made to refine the display characteristics using the Application Options dialog box. It is not necessary to match those adjustments.

540 | Chapter 21 Substitute Level of Detail Representations

2 Expand Representations Level of Detail, then double-click All Internals Off to make it the active level of detail representation.

Derived In-place Part Method | 541

3 Right-click the Level of Detail node, then select New Substitute Derive Assembly. Previous (page 538) | Next (page 542)

Create the Derived Part

Next, you create the derived part in-place. 1 In the New Derived Substitute Part dialog box, enter Derived Substitute in the New Component Name field. 2 Use the default part template. 3 Use the default file location, which is the project workspace. 4 Click OK to open the Derived Assembly dialog box. By default, the derived assembly uses the active level of detail representation to determine the included components and features. Select the Representations tab and notice that All Internals Off is specified in the Level of Detail menu. In your regular workflow, you could also make further adjustments in the Derived Assembly dialog box, as needed.

542 | Chapter 21 Substitute Level of Detail Representations

5 Click OK. The derived part is created, and the new substitute level of detail representation is automatically set as Active. Previous (page 540) | Next (page 543)

The Substitute Representation

1 Change the name of the substitute representation to Derived Substitute.

The assembly browser shows only the derived part while the substitute representation is active. In addition, the name of the subassembly with the active substitute level of detail representation is listed next to the owning assembly browser node. 2 Save and close the assembly. Previous (page 542) | Next (page 544)

The Substitute Representation | 543

Use the Substitute Representation

Use the new substitute level of detail representation in an assembly. 1 Create an assembly document. 2 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Place. 3 Select (but do not open yet) WormGear.iam. 4 Click Options. 5 Ensure that Derived Substitute is selected in the Level of Detail Representation menu. 6 Click OK. 7 Click Open, and place one occurrence of WormGear.iam in the assembly. The substitute level of detail representation is active in the WormGear subassembly. 8 Use the View Cube or Orbit to adjust the viewpoint to approximate the following image. Set the graphics to Wireframe Display.

9 Save the assembly using the default file name.

544 | Chapter 21 Substitute Level of Detail Representations

When you save, the program prompts you to save a user-named level of detail representation for the top-level assembly (the consuming assembly). 10 Use the default name for the representation. The consuming assembly is Assembly(#).iam. A consuming assembly is an assembly that contains a subassembly that owns an active substitute level of detail representation. The owning assembly is WormGear:1. The owning assembly is the assembly where the substitute level of detail representation is defined and active. Notice that the active level of detail representation is listed next to the browser node. Previous (page 543) | Next (page 545)

Compare Memory Usage

This sample assembly is small. If it was larger, you would notice a time savings placing the component with a substitute level of detail representation active, compared to a representation with all components active, or even a level of detail representation with some components suppressed. Notice the Capacity Meter lists only three documents open: the top-level assembly, the WormGear, and the Derived Substitute derived part. 1 Expand WormGear Representations Level of Detail, and double-click the All Internals Off representation. With this representation active, eight documents are open. 2 Double-click the Master representation. With this representation, 25 documents are open. Beyond the reduced document count, because the derived part has a smaller file size than the sum of its parts, you realize further memory savings. Previous (page 544) | Next (page 545)

Part-on-disk Method
In the following steps, you create a substitute level of detail representation using a supplied, manually created substitute part. The derived part you created earlier created a significant savings in relative memory consumption. The

Compare Memory Usage | 545

simplified substitute can consume less memory than the derived part, depending on the number of features of the part. 1 In the assembly document, right-click the WormGear subassembly in the browser, and then select Open. 2 Save the assembly. 3 Expand the Representations folder, right-click the Level of Detail node, and then select New Substitute Select Part File. 4 Select single_part.ipt. 5 Click Open. A message states the part will be designated as a substitute, and that all links to external references for the part will be disabled. 6 Click Yes.

The substitute level of detail representation is created and automatically set as the active level of detail representation. 7 Rename this representation Simple Part Substitute. 8 Save and close the WormGear.iam assembly. Previous (page 545) | Next (page 547)

546 | Chapter 21 Substitute Level of Detail Representations

Create the Substitute Representation

In the assembly you created, under the WormGear subassembly, double-click Simple Part Substitute to set it as the active substitute level of detail representation.

This simplified representation contains only geometry necessary to interface with assembly constraints, and enough geometry to visually approximate the actual assembly. This is the end of the workflow portion of the tutorial. Previous (page 545) | Next (page 547)

Guidelines for Creating a Substitute Part

Any part that you use for a substitute level of detail representation must be designated (tagged) as a substitute part. A part tagged as a substitute uses the icon at the top-level node in the part file. (The icon is also used to represent a substitute part in Vault.) In the preceding workflow, single_part.ipt

Create the Substitute Representation | 547

was automatically designated as a substitute when you selected and opened the part for the substitute level of detail representation. To mark a part as a substitute while you are in the part file, right-click the top-level part node, and select Substitute. As in the preceding workflow, a message states the part will be designated as a substitute. All links to external references for the part will be disabled. You can also specify that a substitute part is no longer a substitute, as long as the part is not currently used in an active substitute level of detail representation. Right-click the top-level part node, and remove the check mark next to Substitute. The program restores links to any external references. When you create a simplified substitute part, it is good practice to structure the part geometry such that the part origin and coordinates match the origin and coordinates of the assembly it substitutes. It ensures that the substitute part is oriented like the assembly when you create the substitute representation.

Previous (page 547) | Next (page 549)

548 | Chapter 21 Substitute Level of Detail Representations

Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to: Create a substitute level of detail representation based on a part derived from the owning assembly.

Create a substitute level of detail representation based on a manually created simplified part. Specify and activate a substitute level of detail representation as you place a subassembly into an assembly. Activate a substitute level of detail representation in an assembly.

This tutorial demonstrated the workflow steps to create and use substitute level of detail representations. There are various other behaviors and items of interest to note with this functionality. Consult Help for further detailed information.

Summary | 549

Previous (page 547)

550 | Chapter 21 Substitute Level of Detail Representations

Presentations

About this tutorial

551

Create exploded views in Autodesk Inventor drawings with presentation files.

Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Experienced Users 30 minutes Cylinder Clamp.iam Cylinder Clamp.idw

Manually explode the assembly. Place the exploded view on a drawing sheet.

Prerequisites Complete the Parts 2, Assemblies, and Drawings tutorials.

Understand the material covered in the Help topic Getting Started.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 552)

Get Started
1 Set your project to tutorial_files.

552 | Chapter 22 Presentations

2 Click

Open.

3 Select Cylinder Clamp Cylinder Clamp.iam in the Open dialog box, and click Open.

4 Click

New.

5 Select Standard(mm).ipn from the Metric tab, and click OK. An empty Presentation file is opened, and the Presentation tab displays in the ribbon. 6 On the ribbon, click Presentation tab Create panel Create

View menu.

, or right-click and select Create View from the marking

The Select Assembly dialog box displays with the previously opened Cylinder Clamp assembly selected. Notice in the Explosion Method area of the dialog box that Manual is selected by default. This method is probably the method you will use most often. An Automatic explode option can also be selected. The Automatic method requires that you supply a distance value. All components within the selected assembly will be exploded that distance using any previously defined assembly constraints.

Get Started | 553

This automatic explode technique is useful in a limited number of cases or as a beginning point for subsequent manual edits. This tutorial uses the Manual explode method. 7 Click OK in the Select Assembly dialog box. The cylinder clamp assembly is placed in the Presentation file. Manually exploding an assembly requires the application of Tweaks to components or groups of components. Creating Tweaks is covered following a brief discussion about color. Previous (page 551) | Next (page 554)

A Word about Color

Autodesk Inventor is delivered with an abundance of predefined materials. Each material definition consists of a physical asset which includes properties such as Density, Yield Strength, Tensile Strength, and so on. A material definition also includes an Appearance asset. Appearance assets come in a variety of types, each type having properties relative to the type. You can create new or duplicate existing appearances and modify these to meet your needs.

554 | Chapter 22 Presentations

Each part that you model with Inventor inherits a material from the template you use when you begin your design. During the design process, you can elect to assign specific appearances to a part and you can elect to override the appearance of the part within an assembly. These options can aid in the design process by highlighting areas of focus. All hydraulic components might have a blue appearance in one assembly representation while all components purchased from a specific vendor might have a green appearance in another. The appearances used during the design process may not represent the actual appearance of the completed design. For the purposes of presentations and renderings intended for customers or marketing, alternative appearances may be explored. The images used in this tutorial are based on an alternative appearance scheme for the Cylinder Clamp assembly.

The appearances have no impact on the results you will achieve in this tutorial. Previous (page 552) | Next (page 556)

A Word about Color | 555

Create Tweaks
Your view should appear oriented as shown in the following image. Use Orbit to adjust your view as required.

A tweak can be a straight move along a single direction axis, or it can be a combination of straight moves along the X, Y, and Z direction axes. Tweaks can optionally leave a visible Trail. 1 On the ribbon, click Presentation tab Create panel Tweak

Components , or right-click and select Tweak Components from the marking menu. The Tweak Component dialog box displays. To create a tweak, you must define a direction, select components to move, and provide a distance. When the Tweak Component dialog box is first displayed, the Direction button is active.

556 | Chapter 22 Presentations

2 In the graphics window, move your cursor over various components (without clicking) within the assembly and notice the direction axis triad. Move your cursor over the face of the Cylinder Base as shown.

Notice that the Z axis points outwards (away from the face). The Y axis points upwards. The X axis points in what would be the positive horizontal direction. 3 Click to select this direction orientation. Notice that the direction axis triad changes color after you select the face. Also, the Z axis button in the Transformations area of the Tweak Component dialog box is selected. NOTE The direction axes depend upon the selected geometry. By selecting an angled edge of (any) component, you can manually explode using the selected edge as the Z axis of the direction triad. Notice how the X, Y and Z axes differ in the illustration based on the selection of: 1) face, 2) edge or 3) edge.

Create Tweaks | 557

You will now move the purchased air cylinder upwards as your first tweak. 4 Click the Y button in the Transformations area of the Tweak Component dialog box. Notice that the Y axis of the direction triad changes color in the graphics window. By default, the Z axis is active, and you must move the cylinder upwards along the Y axis. Your first step is to change the transformation direction. 5 Select the Cylinder Body subassembly in the Model browser. To do so, first click the + next to the Explosion1 node located directly under the top Cylinder Clamp node.

6 Next, click the + to the left of the Cylinder Clamp.iam assembly node to see the components of the assembly. 7 In the Model browser, move your cursor over the component name Cylinder Body Sub_Assy. Notice the red rectangle that highlights the text. When the text highlights, click to select the subassembly. 8 Move your cursor over an empty space in the graphics window, then click and drag your cursor up (towards the top edge of the window).

558 | Chapter 22 Presentations

Notice that:

The selected subassembly moves along the selected Y direction axis while you are dragging. A graphical trail appears between the original position of the component and its current position. The transformation distance value in the Tweak Component dialog box also increments as you drag.

9 Stop dragging (release the mouse button), and move your cursor over the transformation value field in the Tweak Component dialog box. 10 Double-click on the field to edit the value. Type 100, and press the Enter key on your keyboard to move the subassembly precisely 100 mm along the Y axis from its original position. 11 Click Clear in the Tweak Component dialog box. The dialog box is then reset for a new tweak. You will next move the clamp in the X direction. Previous (page 554) | Next (page 560)

Create Tweaks | 559

Tweak Clamp.ipt
1 After completing the previous exercise, the Direction button is again active. Move your cursor over the face of the Cylinder Base previously selected, and click to select it.

2 Click the X button in the Transformations area of the Tweak Component dialog box. Notice that the X axis of the direction triad changes color in the graphics window. 3 In the graphics window, move your cursor over Clamp.ipt. (shown as solid in the illustration for identification purposes only. The other components will not change to translucent).

560 | Chapter 22 Presentations

4 When the part highlights, click and drag it towards the left side of the graphics window.

You will next move the retaining ring outwards along the axis of the pin. Previous (page 556) | Next (page 561)

Tweak the Retaining Ring

1 Click Clear in the Tweak Component dialog box. The Direction button is again active.

Tweak the Retaining Ring | 561

2 Move your cursor over the pin that was exposed when you moved the clamp. 3 When the pin highlights, click to define the direction axis.

4 In this case, you want to move the retaining ring along the Z axis (the default active transformation axis). Click both retaining rings to select, and then drag both to the left side of the view.

5 Click Close in the Tweak Component dialog box.

562 | Chapter 22 Presentations

Notice that the trail for the retaining ring that was farthest away does not perfectly overlap the longer trail. 6 Click the + next to the Model browser node for ANSI B 27.7M 3AMI-7:1. 7 Right-mouse click the Tweak entry in the Model browser, and select Visibility. The check mark is removed, the browser entry displays as unavailable, and the displayed trail in the graphics window is no longer visible.

8 Click Save. By default, the Presentation file created has the same name as the assembly that was placed initially. Presentation files have the IPN file type extension. Your file is named Cylinder Clamp.ipn. Next, you will place the exploded view that you just created onto a new sheet. You will create the sheet in the assembly drawing you edited in the Drawings tutorial. Previous (page 560) | Next (page 563)

Place an Exploded View on a Drawing

1 Click Open.

2 Select the Cylinder Clamp.idw drawing that was saved during the Drawings tutorial. 3 Right-mouse click on the Cylinder Clamp.idw node at the top of the Model browser, and click New Sheet on the pop-up context menu. 4 On the ribbon, click Place Views tab Create panel Base, or right-click and select Base View from the marking menu. The Drawing View dialog box displays. 5 By default, Cylinder Clamp.iam displays in the File name field. Click the down arrow at the right side of the field and select Cylinder Clamp.ipn from the drop-down list. 6 Next, click Current in the Orientation area of the Drawing View dialog box. 7 Click the drawing sheet to place the exploded view.

Place an Exploded View on a Drawing | 563

8 Right-click and select Done [Esc] to finish placing additional views.

9 Click

Save.

Previous (page 561) | Next (page 564)

Edit the Explosion

1 Activate Cylinder Clamp.ipn for edit. Since Cylinder Clamp.ipn is still open, there are several methods that can be used to return to the file for edit:

If individual windows are open within Autodesk Inventor, click the window border of the IPN file. Click the Cylinder Clamp.ipn tab along the lower edge of the application. Click the Open Documents up arrow along the lower edge of the application, and select Cylinder Clamp.ipn from the list of open documents.

You will now add a Tweak to your Presentation that contains some direction changes.

564 | Chapter 22 Presentations

2 On the ribbon, click Presentation tab Create panel Tweak Components, or right-click and select Tweak Components from the marking menu. 3 Click the face previously used to define direction.

4 Click the Lock Pin instance that appears closest to you in the view.

Edit the Explosion | 565

5 Drag the pin out (towards the left) some distance. 6 Release the mouse button to stop dragging and establish the first segment of the trail. 7 Click the Y button in the Transformations area of the Tweak Component dialog box. 8 Click over an empty area in your view, and drag the cursor down towards the bottom of the view some distance. 9 Release the mouse button to stop dragging and establish the second segment of the trail. 10 Click the X button in the Transformations area of the Tweak Component dialog box. 11 Click over an empty area in your view, and drag down towards the bottom right side of the view some distance. 12 Release the mouse button to stop dragging and establish the third segment of the trail. 13 Click Close in the Tweak Component dialog box. Your view should appear like the following image:

566 | Chapter 22 Presentations

14 Click

Save.

Previous (page 563) | Next (page 568)

Edit the Explosion | 567

Associative Drawing View

1 Return to the open drawing file using the steps discussed in the beginning of the previous exercise. Notice that the latest tweak is reflected in the exploded drawing view.

You will next apply a rotational tweak to a component in the Presentation file. 2 Return to the open Presentation file using the steps you have learned. Previous (page 564) | Next (page 568)

Rotational Tweaks
1 On the ribbon, click Presentation tab Create panel Tweak Components, or right-click and select Tweak Components from the marking menu. 2 Define your Direction axes by clicking the vertical edge of Clamp.ipt as shown:

568 | Chapter 22 Presentations

3 Select Rotate Axis in the Transformations area of the Tweak Component dialog box.

4 Click and drag in the graphics window to rotate the clamp. Alternatively, enter a precise angle value in the field to the right of Rotate Axis, and press Enter to rotate the clamp by the entered value.

Rotational Tweaks | 569

5 Click Close in the Tweak Component dialog box. 6 It is possible to delete individual tweaks. In the Model browser, click the + to the left of Clamp.ipt to display the two tweaks that have been applied to the clamp. 7 Right-mouse click the second tweak, and select Delete from the pop-up context menu. The rotational tweak that you just created is deleted from your Presentation, and Clamp.ipt returns to the position it occupied before the application of the tweak. 8 Save and close each of the three open files. Previous (page 568) | Next (page 571)

570 | Chapter 22 Presentations

Summary

Exploded views of assemblies are often required. Autodesk Inventor utilizes Presentation files to create exploded views that can be placed into Inventor drawings. Exploded views can be created automatically using a supplied value. However, they most often require subsequent manipulation. Creating exploded views manually is usually more efficient.

Components are exploded by applying tweaks. They can be a simple transformation along a single axis or a combination of moves in various directions. Tweaks can leave visible trails. They can be displayed or not displayed. Tweaks also provide rotate capabilities.

Summary | 571

Tweaks can be deleted which returns the component to the position occupied before the application of the tweak.

What Next? Exploded assembly views can be output as animations from the Presentation file. Explore the animation capabilities by clicking Animate on the Create panel of the Presentation tab. Animations created by this method cannot be rendered or manipulated with as much control as is possible using Inventor Studio. Explore the animation capabilities offered by Inventor Studio by completing the Studio - Animations tutorial. Previous (page 568)

572 | Chapter 22 Presentations

Plastic Parts and Features

About this tutorial

Create a plastic component to explore multi-bodies and plastic features.

Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Experienced Users 60 minutes PFTutorial.ipt Control_Button_Solid.ipt

573

PFTutorial_Revolve_Combine.ipt PFTutorial_Complete.ipt (finished version)

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. Create a plastic case for a hand-held music device using the basics of multi-body and plastic feature functionality in Inventor. Automate the creation and editing of common plastic part features. A multi-body part is a top-down workflow. You create and position multiple solid bodies within a single part document. This technique is especially useful in the design of plastic parts. A top-down workflow eliminates the need for complex file relationships and projected edges between parts. All editing takes place in a single file. At any time, you can generate unique part files for each body. The generated files are derived parts that are associative to the master design in the original part file. If you do not want to learn how to use the plastic features commands, use the file PFTutorial_Revolve_Combine.ipt as a start point. Begin the tutorial at the section titled Insert a toolbody using Derive. Before you begin, open and review the supplied plastic part. To simplify the process of body and feature creation, the tutorial part sketches, work planes, and surfaces are named to help you identify them.

574 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

You can complete the tutorial in segments if you save your work before you exit. Objectives Create new bodies using Split.

Create grills, rule fillets, rests, and lip features. Create snap fits and bosses. Create a body in place using feature commands. Insert a toolbody using Derive. Use Move Bodies to position a toolbody. Use Combine to perform a Boolean operation.

Prerequisites Intermediate level of understanding part modeling.

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information. Activate the Tutorials.ipj project file.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one.

About this tutorial | 575

Next (page 576)

Split the Solid

To begin: 1 Open Tutorial Files Plastic Parts and Features PFTutorial.ipt, and orient the view to match the following image.

2 In the browser, expand the folders for the solid and surface bodies. Note that there is only one solid body present and four surface bodies. One of the surface bodies is visible, and all the others are not visible.

576 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

3 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Modify panel Shell. Do not remove any faces. For Thickness, enter 1.5 mm. Click OK to create. The following cutaway image shows the results of the shell operation. The cut is not part of the model.

4 Click 3D Model tab Modify panel Split. In the dialog box, choose the Split Solid option. Select the surface named PartingSurface as the Split Tool. Click OK to finish.

Notice that the part icon in the browser changed to represent a multi-body part. The Solid Bodies folder contains two bodies. You can right-click each body and select Properties from the context menu to set visibility or appearance.

Split the Solid | 577

NOTE We recommend that you assign a unique appearance to each body in a multi-body part to keep them visually separate. Select each body in the Solid Bodies folder in the browser, and then right-click and select Properties from the context menu. You can also select a body and then choose an appearance override in the Quick Access toolbar dropdown to set the appearance. Before proceeding, expand the Surface Bodies folder. and turn off the visible surface. Save the file as PFTutorial_1. Previous (page 573) | Next (page 578)

Create the Grill

In the next section, we will create the plastic grill feature. 1 In the browser, turn on the Visibility of GrillSketch.

578 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

2 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Plastic Part panel Grill. 3 Activate the Boundary tab and then select the outer closed profile in the graphics window as shown in the following image. Select the target solid if the application did not select the body closest to the sketch.

Thickness = 0 mm Height = 2 mm

Create the Grill | 579

Outside Height = 0 mm

We will skip the Island tab. This sketch does not contain a closed boundary for an island. The following image shows an example of an island.

4 Activate the Rib tab and then select the lines.

580 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

Thickness = 2.5 mm Height = 1.3 mm Top Offset = 0.2 mm

5 Activate the Spar tab and then select the arcs.

Create the Grill | 581

Top Offset = 0.5 mm Thickness = 5 mm Bottom Offset = 0 mm

6 Click OK to create the grill. Previous (page 576) | Next (page 583)

582 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

Create a Rule Fillet

We now want to fillet all the vertical edges of the grill like the one indicated in the following image.

The Rule Fillet feature is designed to fillet an entire feature based on pre-determined rules. It means we can fillet the entire grill without having to pick individual edges.

Create a Rule Fillet | 583

In the following sequence, we will define the rules which allows the entire grill to be filleted in a few picks. 1 In the browser, turn off the Visibility of the bottom solid without the grill. Rotate the part with the grill feature to the inside face of the solid. TIP The context menu contains three commands to control body display: Visibility, Show All, and Hide Others. 2 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Plastic Part panel Rule Fillet. Use the Source drop-down to set the source to Face.

Select the inside curved face of the grill as shown in the following image. Set the Radius to 0.5 mm. Set the Rule to Incident Edges. Select the Y Axis in the Origin folder to specify the direction. Set the Tolerance to 1 deg.

584 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

3 Click OK. You created 128 fillets using rules and a couple of picks. NOTE The Rule Fillet can be used on any feature in a part file. It is not exclusively for use with plastic parts. Previous (page 578) | Next (page 586)

Create a Rule Fillet | 585

Create a Rest
We now want to build a flat area for some control buttons. 1 Orient the view to the outside of the part as shown in the following image. 2 Turn on the visibility of RestSketch in the browser. 3 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Plastic Part panel Rest. 4 On the Shape tab: Select the RestSketch as the profile. If it is the only visible sketch it is automatically selected.

If required, select the top solid as the Solid. For Thickness, enter 1.5 mm and specify Inside. In the drop-down, select Through All.

5 On the More tab: For Landing Options, select Distance and enter 0 mm.

For Landing Taper, enter 0 deg. For Clearance Taper, enter 0 deg.

6 Click OK to create the Rest feature.

586 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

Previous (page 583) | Next (page 587)

Create a Lip
We will now build a lip-groove combination to facilitate placing the mating parts in a physical assembly. Orient the view to the inside of the part like the following image. 1 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Plastic Part panel Lip. 2 Make sure the Lip button is selected in the dialog box. 3 On the Shape tab: Select the inside edge as the Path Edges.

Leave the Path Extents unchecked. Click the Pull Direction check box. Select the Y Axis in the Origin folder as the pulling direction.

Create a Lip | 587

4 On the Lip tab: For Outside Angle, enter 0 deg.

For Inside Angle, enter 0 deg. For Height, enter 1 mm. For Shoulder Width, enter 0 mm. For Width, enter 0.75 mm. For Clearance, enter 0.5 mm.

5 Click OK to create the lip.

588 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

6 In the Solid Bodies folder in the browser, use the context menu to turn off the Visibility of the top body. Turn on the visibility for the bottom body. Orient the view to the inside of the part like the following image.

Next, we will use the Lip command to create the mating groove. 7 Click the Lip command.

Create a Lip | 589

8 On the Shape tab: Make sure the Groove button is selected.

Select the inside edge as the Path Edges.

Leave the Path Extents unchecked.

Click the Pull Direction check box. Select the Y Axis in the Origin folder.

590 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

9 On the Groove tab: For Outside Angle, enter 0 deg.

For Inside Angle, enter 0 deg. For Height, enter 1 mm. For Shoulder Width, enter 0 mm. For Width, enter 0.75 mm. For Clearance, enter 0 mm.

Create a Lip | 591

10 Click OK to create the groove.

The mating lip and groove features are shown in the following cutaway view.

592 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

Previous (page 586) | Next (page 593)

Create a Body Using Split

We will now build a sliding cover for the battery compartment. If it is visible, turn off the visibility for the top body. 1 In the Surface Bodies folder, turn on the Visibility of Srf2. Note that enabling this surface also turned on the visibility of the stitched BatterySplitSurface in the browser. You can also enable the surface visibility by selecting BatterySplitSurface in the browser.

Create a Body Using Split | 593

2 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Modify panel Split. 3 Choose the Split Solid option in the dialog box. 4 Choose Srf2 as the Split Tool, and the bottom body as the Solid to split.

5 Click OK to finish. 6 A new body is created. Turn off the Visibility of the bottom body and Srf2 (BatterySplitSurface) before proceeding. Previous (page 587) | Next (page 595)

594 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

Create a Segmented Lip

Orient the view to match the following image. We will use the Lip command to create a lip-groove combination on one side of the battery cover limited by two planes. 1 Create two work planes parallel to the planar side faces of the battery cover offset -15 mm to the inside.

2 Click the Lip command. 3 On the Shape tab, make sure the Lip button is selected. Select the internal edges on the far side of the curve as the Path Edges.

Select the Guide Face option, and pick the planar face next to the selected edge. Leave the Pull Direction unchecked. Check the Path Extents box, and select the two planes. The preview shows the portions of the Lip that are selected (first and last). If the preview matches the following image, the selection is correct. If it does not match the preview, click the green and yellow dots to change the selection.

Create a Segmented Lip | 595

4 On the Lip tab: For Outside Angle, enter 0 deg.

For Inside Angle, enter 0 deg. For Height, enter 0.8 mm. For Shoulder Width, enter 0 mm. For Width, enter 0.75 mm. For Clearance, enter 0 mm.

5 Click OK to create the lip.

596 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

The work planes are not shown in the following image. Leave the visibility of the work planes on to create the mating lip feature on the bottom body.

6 Turn off the Visibility of the battery cover, and turn on the Visibility of the bottom body. We will now create the mating groove for the battery cover on the bottom body. 7 Click the Lip command. On the Shape tab, click Groove.

Select the inside edge as the Path Edges. Select the Guide Face, and pick the planar face next to the edge. Leave the Pull Direction box blank. Click the Path Extents check box and select the two limiting planes. The default selection of the two outer groove segments is correct.

Create a Segmented Lip | 597

8 On the Groove tab: For Outside Angle, enter 0 deg.

For Inside Angle, enter 0 deg. For Height, enter 0.8 mm. For Shoulder Width, enter 0 mm. For Width, enter 0.75 mm. For Clearance, enter 0 mm.

598 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

9 Click OK to create the groove feature. Turn off the Visibility of the work planes. The following image shows the lip and groove features in a cutaway view of the battery cover and the lower body.

Previous (page 593) | Next (page 600)

Create a Segmented Lip | 599

Create a Snap Fit

We will now build a retention mechanism on the battery cover with the Snap Fit feature. Turn off the Visibility for the lower body and turn on the Visibility for the battery cover. First, we will create the two positioning points for the snap feature. 1 Start a 2D sketch on the flat wall of the narrow face, as indicated in the following image. Make sure that the internal edge is projected so the sketch points are able to be coincident with the edge. 2 Place two sketch points on the internal projected edge, and use dimensions to locate them 7.5 mm from the sides. In the following image, the second dimension is linked to the first dimension. You can also place two independent dimensions (no fx on the dimension).

3 Finish the sketch. 4 Click the Snap Fit command. 5 Select the Cantilever Snap Fit Loop style. 6 On the Shape tab: Select the battery cover as the Solid. If it is the only visible solid, it is automatically selected.

Select From Sketch as the Placement type.

600 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

Select the two sketch points as the Centers. If they are the only sketch points displayed, they are automatically selected. Click the Flip direction arrow and the Catch direction manipulator arrows in the graphics area until the clips are oriented as shown in the following image.

7 On the Clip tab. For Clip length, enter 4 mm.

For Clip width, enter 5 mm. For Clip thickness at wall, enter 0.5 mm. For Clip thickness at top, enter 0.3 mm.

Create a Snap Fit | 601

8 On the Catch tab: For Catch width on both sides, enter 0.5 mm.

For Catch opening length, enter 2 mm. For Catch width at top, enter 0.5 mm.

602 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

9 Click OK to create clips.

A trap mechanism on the bottom solid can be modeled by creating a 2D sketch on the inside face of the bottom body and using the projected edges of the catch features to create an extrusion. Fillets are added to the extrusion in this image to facilitate cover insertion and removal. The steps to create the trap feature are not covered in this exercise.

Create a Snap Fit | 603

604 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

Previous (page 595) | Next (page 605)

Add a Rule Fillet to a Feature

We now want to fillet the edges at the intersection between the Snap Fit and the battery cover solid. A Rule Fillet can do the job. 1 Click the Rule Fillet command. For Source, select Feature.

Select the Snap Fit feature. For Radius, enter 0.2 mm. For Rule, select Against Part.

Add a Rule Fillet to a Feature | 605

We do not want the fillet around the top edges (red arrows). The edges are included because they share the curved face of the Snap Fit that coincides with the curved face of the battery body. They are called "merged faces." We can skip such merged faces (and all the edges they share) by doing the following: 2 Click More to expand the dialog box. 3 Check the Remove Merged Faces box to enable the option. 4 Click OK to create the rule fillet. Both clips are filleted since they both belong to the same feature. 5 Save the file.

606 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

Previous (page 600) | Next (page 607)

Create a Boss
This exercise consists of two procedures: creating screw mounting bosses on the top and bottom bodies, and then creating mating bosses for the thread portion of the fasteners.

Create a Boss | 607

First, we use work points to model the screw mounting bosses on the top and bottom bodies. 1 Turn on the Visibility of the bottom body and Work Points 1-4. The work points are located at the termination position of each boss.

2 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Plastic Part panel Boss. 3 Make sure that the Head button is selected. 4 On the Shape tab: In the Placement area, select On Point from the drop-down menu.

Select the four work points as the Centers. For Direction, select the Y Axis. Flip the direction if the arrows do not point towards the body. For the target Solid, select the bottom solid. For Fillet, enter 0.3 mm.

608 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

5 On the Head tab: For Wall Thickness, enter 1.5 mm.

For Shank Height, enter 1.5 mm. For Clamp Height, enter 0.5 mm. For Shank Diameter, enter 3 mm. For Clamp Diameter, enter 7 mm. For Head Diameter, enter 8 mm. For Draft Options, enter 2.5 deg in each field.

Create a Boss | 609

Select the Counterbore type.

6 Skip the Ribs tab. 7 Click OK to create the four bosses.

610 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

8 Rotate the body to see the recess for the screw head.

Create a Boss | 611

Next, we build the mating bosses for the thread portion of the fasteners. 1 Turn off the Visibility of the battery cover and the bottom solid, and turn on the Visibility of the top solid. 2 Click the Boss command.

612 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

3 Make sure that the Thread button is selected. 4 On the Shape tab: In the Placement area, select On Point from the drop-down menu.

Select the four work points as the Centers. For Direction, select the Y Axis. Flip the direction if the arrows do not point towards the body. For the target Solid, select the top. For Fillet, enter 0.3 mm.

5 On the Thread tab: Ensure that Hole is selected, and select Full Depth from the drop-down menu.

For Thread Diameter, enter 8 mm. For Thread Hole Diameter, enter 3 mm. For Inner Draft Angle, enter 1 deg. For Outer Draft Angle, enter 2 deg.

6 On the Ribs tab: Ensure that Stiffening Ribs is selected, and select 2 ul from the drop-down menu.

Fro Rib Thickness, enter 1.5 mm. For Rib Draft, enter 1.5 deg. For Shoulder Length, enter 6 mm.

Create a Boss | 613

For Top Offset, enter 2 mm. For Shoulder Radius, enter 1 mm. For Shoulder Flare Angle, enter 10 deg.

7 Expand Fillet Options on the Ribs tab: For Rib Radius, enter 0.2 mm.

For Blend Radius, enter 0.2 mm. For the Ribs Start Direction Angle, enter 0. For Direction, select the X Axis in the Origin folder.

614 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

8 Click OK to create the four bosses with stiffening ribs.

Create a Boss | 615

The following image shows a cutaway view of a boss.

9 If you didnt change the body appearances earlier in the exercise, right-click each body in the browser, and then select Properties from the context menu. Assign a unique body appearance in the Body Appearance drop-down menu. 10 Save the file. The plastic features portion of this tutorial is complete. Previous (page 605) | Next (page 617)

616 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

Add Holes to a Single Body

In the next section, we create new holes in a single body using the Hole command. 1 Turn off the Visibility of all solid bodies except the top cover. 2 Create two 10-mm holes with a depth of 2 mm on the ends of the rest feature. 3 Create one 20-mm hole with a depth of 2 mm at the center of the rest feature. Notice Autodesk Inventor selects the body being referenced as the default participant.

NOTE To add participants to the Hole operation, use the Solids selector and pick additional bodies. An example of this could be if you want multiple bodies to participate in a Through All operation. Previous (page 607) | Next (page 617)

Insert a Toolbody Using Derive

You can create solid bodies within a part file and use them as toolbodies in the Combine command for a cut, join, or intersect operation. You can also use another component placed in the part file using the Derive command.

Add Holes to a Single Body | 617

We will now use the Derive command to import another part file to use as a cutting tool later in the exercise. NOTE If you skipped the plastic features sections, you can open the file PFTutorial_Revolve_Combine.ipt and begin the tutorial here. 1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab Insert panel Derive. 2 In the file open dialog box, select the file Control_Button_Solid.ipt. 3 In the Derived Part dialog box, you can select any of the solid body options, but do not select the surface feature option. NOTE If the component you are inserting is an assembly, and you choose to maintain each solid as a solid body, the result is multiple bodies in the Solid Bodies folder. 4 Click OK to finish. 5 The new body is inserted in the part. Rotate the part to view the new body.

Previous (page 617) | Next (page 618)

Moving Bodies
In this section, we will use the Move Bodies command to position the toolbody accurately we imported.

618 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

The drop-down menu in the Move Bodies dialog box offers three methods for moving a body: Free drag (default) - Use to drag the selection in any direction or specify precise x,y,z values.

Move along ray - Axial move only. Use to drag or specify a precise value along an axis. Rotate about line - Use to drag the selection or specify a precise angle around a central axis. 1 View the part from the side to expose the toolbody. 2 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Modify panel Move Bodies. 3 Select the imported body as the body to move. 4 The body shows a 10 mm offset in the preview. Do not drag the preview.

5 Input the following values: For X Offset, enter 35 mm.

For Y Offset, enter 0 mm. For Z Offset, enter 0 mm.

6 Select Click to add, and input the following values: For X Offset, enter 0 mm.

For Y Offset, enter 24 mm. For Z Offset, enter 0 mm.

7 Click OK to move the body and exit the command.

Moving Bodies | 619

NOTE Move Body appears in the browser as a feature, and the move was calculated as a single feature. Using Click to add consumes the least amount of resources as opposed to doing multiple moves as individual features. You can edit, delete, or suppress individual body moves. Previous (page 617) | Next (page 620)

Use the Combine Command

The Combine command provides a means to perform Boolean operations within a part file. In this exercise, we will use the imported toolbody to cut out a portion of the upper body. 1 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Modify panel Combine. 2 Select the upper body as the Base. 3 Select the imported body as the Toolbody. Make sure that Keep Toolbody is unchecked. NOTE You can select more than one body to use as toolbodies. The number in parentheses indicates the total number of selected toolbodies. If Keep Toolbody is unchecked, the toolbody is consumed and cannot be used for further operations. If it is checked, the toolbody is available for further operations. 4 Select the Cut operation. 5 Click OK to cut the toolbody from the top cover and finish the command.

Previous (page 618) | Next (page 621)

620 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

Create a Body Using Revolve

In this exercise, we use the Revolve command to create a body in the part file. 1 In the browser, turn on the Visibility of the Revolve_NewBody sketch. 2 Start the Revolve command, and select the profile and axis if necessary.

3 Select New Solid as the modeling operation to perform. 4 Click OK to finish the command and create the solid. 5 Select the new body in the browser, and change the body appearance.

Previous (page 620) | Next (page 622)

Create a Body Using Revolve | 621

Export the Design as Individual Parts

A multi-body part is a single part file. While it is a great way to control a design, you cannot create a parts list for the bodies in a multi-body part. You can use the Make Part or the Make Components command to export bodies as part files. In this final segment, we will use the Make Components command to export all the bodies as derived parts into an assembly. 1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab Layout panel Make Components. 2 Select all four of the solid bodies for export. You can select the bodies in the graphics area or in the Solid Bodies folder in the browser. Make sure that all bodies to be exported are visible. NOTE Pay attention to which body highlights as you add selections. It helps you to assign the proper part names when you export them. 3 Assign the target assembly a unique name. Leave all the other selections at the default settings and select Next to continue. 4 Assign each body a new part name. 5 If you completed the tutorial in sequence:

The first body is the top cover The second body is the battery cover The third body is the bottom cover The fourth body is the revolved control button.

6 Click OK to create the assembly. The assembly opens in a new window. All the bodies are present in the browser as grounded part files.

622 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

The part file controls the master design. If changes are made to a body in the originating part file, the part will update in the assembly.

Previous (page 621) | Next (page 623)

Summary
In this tutorial, you: Used Split to create new bodies.

Summary | 623

Created plastic features using the Plastic Part commands. Used the Hole command to modify a single body. Inserted a toolbody using the Derive command. Used the Move Bodies command to position a body. Used the Combine command to perform a cut operation on a body. Created a body in place using the Revolve command. Used Make Components to export bodies into an assembly as individual part files.

Previous (page 622)

624 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features

Studio - Renderings

About this tutorial

Render models in Studio.
Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Experienced Users 30 minutes

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 626)

625

Get Started
Previous (page 625) | Next (page 626)

Activate Studio
On the ribbon, click Environments tab Begin panel Inventor

Studio. Previous (page 626) | Next (page 626)

Render
1 On the ribbon, click Render tab Render panel Render Image.

2 Ensure that Current View is selected on the Camera menu. NOTE Because the aspect ratio of your current window may not agree with the aspect ratio defined for your rendering, Autodesk Inventor draws a rectangle in the graphics window showing the area to be rendered. You can adjust your view before creating your rendering. 3 Ensure Table Top is selected on the Lighting Style menu. 4 Click Render. The program renders the model according to the chosen styles and the size of the model relative to the render area. When rendering finishes, close the Render Output window. Previous (page 626) | Next (page 627)

626 | Chapter 24 Studio - Renderings

Change Styles
1 In the Render Image dialog box, click Select Output Size and then select 640 x 480 from the Resolution menu. You can adjust the size and view of the model to fit within the render rectangle, as needed. 2 Select Desktop from the Lighting Style drop-down menu. 3 On the Output tab, select High Antialiasing, and click Render. The Render process takes some time. If you do not want to wait for the model to complete the rendering process, click Cancel Rendering.

You can specify different cameras, lighting, and scene styles for rendering from the Render dialog box. It is not necessary to activate them. 4 Close the Render Output and Render Image dialog boxes when finished. Previous (page 626) | Next (page 627)

Change Appearance
Next, you change the appearance of the arbor press frame. 1 Select the Arbor_Frame component in the graphics window or browser, and then select Aluminum (Cast) from the Appearance Override pulldown list. The list is located at the top of the Autodesk Inventor window in the Quick Access Toolbar and shows the current appearance selection. 2 Click Render Image. 3 Select 320 x 240 from the Resolution menu. 4 Select the Output tab, and then change the Antialiasing to Low Antialiasing. 5 Click Render. Previous (page 627) | Next (page 628)

Change Styles | 627

Save Image
1 Click Save Rendered Image. 2 Browse to an appropriate directory, and assign a file name. 3 Select a file type from the Save as type menu, and then click Save. The rendered image is now available for direct use in your documentation files, or you can edit the image further in a graphics editing software application. 4 Close the Render Output window. Previous (page 627) | Next (page 628)

Image Extents
Notice that the program renders the image within the space defined by the rectangle in the graphics window. In this example, the reflection is cut off at the bottom edge of the graphics window. Experiment with different resolutions and adjust the model view to allow space for reflection and shadow effects, as needed. For example: 1 Select the General tab in the Render Image dialog box. 2 Enter 300 in the Width field, and enter 600 in the Height field. 3 Ensure that Lock Aspect Ratio is not selected. 4 View your results. Previous (page 628) | Next (page 628)

Summary
Previous (page 628)

628 | Chapter 24 Studio - Renderings

Studio - Animations

About this tutorial

Animate an assembly in Inventor Studio.
Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Experienced Users 30 minutes

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one.

629

Activate Studio
1 On the ribbon, click Environments tab Begin panel Inventor

Studio

2 In the browser, right-click the node named Lighting (Table Top), and then remove the check mark next to Visibility. This change removes the lighting symbols from the graphics window. 3 Activate a scene style for the best rendering. Several scene styles are provided and you can create new ones.

Prepare Start at the Beginning

Click Go to Start on the animation timeline window to set the animation slider to the beginning of the timeline.

Watch Your Animation

1 Click Play Animation.

630 | Chapter 25 Studio - Animations

2 Click the following image to play an animation. 3 When the slider moves past 3 seconds, click Stop Animation.

Configure the Animation

Before you continue, change the overall length of the animation so you do not need to continue to press Stop. 1 To the right of the camera selection field in the Animation Timeline, click Animation Options.

2 On the upper-right side of the Animation Options dialog box, click Fit to Current Animation.

Configure the Animation | 631

3 Click OK to recalibrate the timeline. Notice that the scale on the animation timeline changes from the default 30 seconds to 3 seconds.

NOTE This value is the total time available for all animation actions. To increase (or decrease) the time, click Configure and specify the duration.

Animate Camera Viewpoint

1 In the browser, right-click the Cameras node, and then select Create Camera from View from the context menu. NOTE You can also right-click in the graphics window, and then select Create Camera from View. 2 The camera also appears in the graphics window. By default, the line-of-sight vector is normal to the screen. Orbit the model and zoom out to see the camera symbol and vector. The camera consists of three parts: the camera, the line-of-sight vector, and the target.

632 | Chapter 25 Studio - Animations

Animate Camera Viewpoint (continued)

1 Use the ViewCube or the Orbit command to adjust the viewpoint to approximate the following image. Previous (page 632) | Next (page 633)

Animate Camera Viewpoint (continued)

1 Click Add Camera Action on the animation timeline. 2 Click Go to Start, and then click Play. The program animates the movement of the ram, the fade, and the change in camera viewpoint simultaneously.

Summary

Set the active animation. Animate a camera position change. Add a new camera from the graphics window. Change the camera from the drop-down list. Change the animation length option to match the existing event duration. Expand and collapse the animation timeline. Hide graphic objects representing lights and cameras.

Animate Camera Viewpoint (continued) | 633

634

Studio - Positional Representations

About this tutorial

Create and animate positional representations in the assembly environment.
Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Experienced Users 40 minutes Arbor_Press.iam

Create positional representations in the assembly environment. Activate Inventor Studio. Animate the positional representations for an assembly.

635

Prerequisites Know assembly and part fundamentals in Autodesk Inventor.

Know how to set the active project and navigate model space with the various view tools. See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 636)

Open Sample File

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, navigate to the Arbor Press folder, and then open Arbor_Press.iam.

2 Click , and then select Save As. Use Arbor_Press_Rep_Anim.iam for the file name.

636 | Chapter 26 Studio - Positional Representations

Previous (page 635) | Next (page 637)

Create Three Positional Representations

1 Expand the Representations folder.

Create Three Positional Representations | 637

2 Right-click the Position folder, and select New to create a new positional representation. The program creates the positional representation Position 1 and sets it as the active positional representation. 3 Rename Position1 to Rest Position (0 deg). 4 Repeat the previous process to create two additional positional representations named Middle Position (-45 deg) and Closed Position (-160 deg). NOTE To rename a browser node, slowly double-click the node to enter editing mode, and then enter the name. Currently, these three positional representations are identical. In the following steps, you adjust them so that they contain different representations of the assembly. You then use Inventor Studio to animate between these saved positions. Previous (page 636) | Next (page 638)

Define the First Positional Representation

1 Double-click the Master positional representation to make it active. 2 Expand the PINION SHAFT:1 component node to see the constraints for this part. 3 Right-click the constraint Angle SHAFT TURN (180.00 deg) and clear the Suppress box to activate the constraint. 4 Next, double-click the Rest Position (0 deg) positional representation to make this representation active. 5 Right-click the Angle SHAFT TURN (180.00 deg) constraint and select Override. 6 Select the Suppression option. 7 Ensure that Enable appears in the menu. 8 Select the Value option. 9 Set the value to 0 deg.

638 | Chapter 26 Studio - Positional Representations

10 Click OK to apply the override and close the dialog box. Previous (page 637) | Next (page 640)

Define the First Positional Representation | 639

Define the Second Positional Representation

Next, you use the same process to define the other two representations. 1 Double-click the Middle Position (-45 deg) representation to make this representation active. 2 Right-click the Angle SHAFT TURN (180.00 deg) constraint, and select Override. 3 Select the Suppression option. 4 Ensure that Enable appears in the menu. 5 Select the Value option. 6 Set the value to -45 deg.

640 | Chapter 26 Studio - Positional Representations

7 Click OK. Previous (page 638) | Next (page 642)

Define the Second Positional Representation | 641

Define the Third Positional Representation

1 Double-click the Closed Position (-160 deg) representation to make this representation active. 2 Right-click the Angle SHAFT TURN (180.00 deg) constraint, and select Override. 3 Select the Suppression option. 4 Ensure that Enable appears in the menu. 5 Select the Value option. 6 Set the value to -160 deg. 7 Click OK. Previous (page 640) | Next (page 642)

Activate Studio
1 On the ribbon, click Environments tab Begin panel

Inventor Studio

Studio commands are located on the Render tab.

2 In the browser, right-click Lighting (Table Top), and then remove the check mark next to Visibility. It removes the lighting symbols from the graphics window. 3 Right-click the Animations node, and select New Animation. Expand the Animations node, and double-click Animation2 (the animation node you created). The program activates the new animation and opens the Studio timeline. Previous (page 642) | Next (page 643)

642 | Chapter 26 Studio - Positional Representations

Reduce the Timeline Length

Before you start, change the overall timeline of the animation to 7 seconds so you do not have to press Stop after the animation. 1 On the right side of the animation timeline, click Animation Options.

2 In the Length section of the dialog box, double-click in the Seconds field on the right and enter 7 as the new value. Click OK. The timeline adjusts to 7 seconds.

Previous (page 642) | Next (page 643)

Create the First Animation

1 Click Render tab Animate panel Pos Reps.

2 In the dialog box, ensure Master is selected in the Start field.

Reduce the Timeline Length | 643

3 Select the positional representation named Rest position (0 deg) from the list of representations under the End field. In the next steps, you set the length of this animation event before you close the dialog box. 4 In the Time section of the dialog box, click Specify .

5 Enter a value of 2 in the End field located on the right. 6 Click OK to create this animation and close the dialog box. Previous (page 643) | Next (page 644)

View the Keyframes

To view the keyframes, click the Expand/Collapse Action Editor command on the right of the animation timeline.

NOTE In the Animation Timeline editor, the blue keyframes (parent) are action segments that have child keyframes displayed in gray. You can adjust both the parent and child keyframes. Child keyframes always fall within the parent keyframes. NOTE To edit a segment with the Animate Positional Representation dialog box, right-click the segment in the timeline and select Edit. Alternatively, double-click the segment. Previous (page 643) | Next (page 645)

644 | Chapter 26 Studio - Positional Representations

Create the Second Animation

1 Click the Animate PR command again.

2 This time, select the positional representation named Rest position (0 deg) from the Start field. 3 Select Middle position (-45 deg) from the End field. 4 In the Time section, click the Specify command.

5 Enter a value of 2 in the Start field and a value of 4 in the End field. 6 Click OK to create this animation and close the dialog box.

Previous (page 644) | Next (page 645)

Create the Third Animation

Repeat these steps to create the third positional representation animation: 1 Click the Animate PR command again.

Create the Second Animation | 645

2 Select Middle position (-45 deg) from the Start field. 3 Select Closed position (-160 deg) for the End field. 4 In the Time section, click the Specify command.

5 Enter 4 in the Start field and 7 in the End field. 6 Click OK. Your timeline should match the following image.

Previous (page 645) | Next (page 646)

Play the Animation

1 In the Animation Timeline editor, click the Go to Start command.

2 Click Play to play the positional representation animations. 3 Click the following image to view an animation. Previous (page 645) | Next (page 647)

646 | Chapter 26 Studio - Positional Representations

Edit the Animation

Next, you change the length of the animation segments. 1 In the animation timeline, drag the beginning node for PRAnim3 to the 5.5 second position on the timeline. 2 Drag the end node for PRAnim2 to 5 seconds. 3 Drag the begin node for PRAnim2 to 3 seconds.

4 Click the following image to view an animation. TIP To move an animation segment, select and drag the segment.

Play the animation back to see the effect of the changes. Previous (page 646) | Next (page 647)

Summary
In this tutorial, you learned to: Create named positional representations within an assembly by overriding the value of a constraint.

Edit the Animation | 647

Create a sequence of related positional representations. Use Inventor Studio to animate between positional representations. Edit the start and end positions of animation events by dragging on the timeline.

Previous (page 647)

648 | Chapter 26 Studio - Positional Representations

Skeletal Modeling

About this tutorial

Build skeletal model frames.
Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Experienced Users 60 minutes SkeletonBase.ipt

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one.

649

Next (page 650)

Open the Sample Model

You use a supplied sample model, which is the completed skeleton part, to derive the required frame parts. Examine this part before you create the assembly. TIP Keep the skeleton model open as you build the assembly. In a complicated skeleton model, consider hiding sketches and other geometry to reduce the filtering required when deriving the skeleton model into the assembly components. 1 Set your active project to tutorial_files. 2 OpenSkeletonBase.ipt. The part contains sketches, work features, and construction surfaces that define the basic geometry of a support frame for a spherical container. Skeleton models are suitable for static models, such as frames and other fabricated assemblies. The initial jumble of geometry may look a bit confusing, so we will look at the individual sketches and other geometry in the part.

650 | Chapter 27 Skeletal Modeling

3 In the Model browser, drag the End of Part marker and drop it just below the STRAP SURFACE node. 4 On the ribbon, click View tab Navigate panel View Face, and then click CIRC STRAP SKETCH in the Model browser.

Open the Sample Model | 651

1 - Strap Surface Profile 2 - Strap Surface 3 - Strap Body Profile The spherical construction surface is the key feature in the part. The diameter of the sphere drives the other geometry in this skeleton, and consequently drives the size of parts derived from this skeleton. The shared strap sketch contains two related profiles:

A body profile that you will use to revolve a strap encircling the sphere. A surface profile used to create the strap surface feature. This feature is used as a termination surface for supports between the strap and the external frame surrounding the sphere. Further information is provided when the supports are created later in this tutorial.

NOTE The two sketch profiles are linked by parameter values. 5 Drag the End of Part marker below the Work Plane-BOTT of Frame node in the Model browser, and examine the location of the three work planes. The three work planes below STRAP SURFACE define the vertical extents of the exterior frame. The BOTT of Frame work plane is used as the termination face for the vertical legs of the frame. The sketch for the vertical leg is on the TOP of Frame work plane.

652 | Chapter 27 Skeletal Modeling

6 Drag the End of Part marker below the VERTICAL LEGS SKETCH node in the Model browser. Use the View Face command to reorient your view like the following image.

The sketch contains a profile for the square tubing leg. The 2240-mm dimension is related to the diameter of the sphere. The size and thickness of the tubing is controlled with user-defined parameters. The following image shows the size of the tubing controlled by the TubeSize user parameter. The user-defined parameters are exported, and thus can be referenced by any of the parts derived from the skeleton part.

Open the Sample Model | 653

7 Drag the End of Part marker to the bottom of the Model browser. Examine the remaining sketches. Note that all sketches are related through projected geometry, work feature definition, or parameters. The sphere diameter drives all the critical dimensions of the frame. Previous (page 649) | Next (page 654)

Create an Assembly
Now you build a new assembly based on the skeleton part. 1 Start an assembly based on the Standard(mm).iam template. 2 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Create. In the Create In-Place Component dialog box: Enter Strap as the name of the new component.

654 | Chapter 27 Skeletal Modeling

If your standard part template is inch-based, click the Browse Templates button to the right of the Template list. Click the Metric tab of the Open Template dialog box, and then select the Standard(mm).ipt template. Click OK to return to the Create In-Place Component dialog box. Click OK to create the Strap part in the assembly. Expand the Origin folder in the Model browser, and place the component on the XY Plane of the assembly origin.

3 Click Finish Sketch on the ribbon to exit the sketch environment. 4 Delete Sketch1 in the Strap part to tidy up the Model browser. 5 Click Manage tab Insert panel Derive. From the Tutorial Files folder, select the SkeletonBase.ipt file and open it. The Derived Part dialog box opens. 6 The Strap part requires only the CIRC STRAP SKETCH. Expand Sketches in the Derived Part dialog box. Select the CIRC STRAP SKETCH node, and click the Add button (+) at the top of the dialog box. Alternatively, you can click the Exclude icon status. on the node itself to switch its

You may receive a warning that the base component will be modified. It is fine. Click OK to allow the sketch to be exported. 7 If the Work Geometry icon is in a hybrid state (half yellow and half gray), click the icon to change it to an Exclude state .

NOTE Sketches, surfaces, and work geometry must be visible in the originating part to derive into the new part. You can turn off the visibility of items before using the Derived Component command. It reduces the number of items you must clear in the dialog box. 8 Ensure the icons next to Surfaces Bodies and Parameters are set to the Exclude state.

Create an Assembly | 655

9 Click OK and reposition the geometry in the graphics window. Click Return. The part should match the following image.

10 Click 3D Model tab Create panel Revolve. Select the closed profile of the strap. 11 Click Axis in the Revolve dialog box, and then select the line highlighted in the following image. 12 Click OK to create the Strap part.

656 | Chapter 27 Skeletal Modeling

TIP You can add features to the part as you can with any part created from scratch. The derived sketch controls the size and position of the base feature in this example. You can use Derived Component at any point in the modeling process, not just as the first feature in a part. For example, a second feature derived from the component might bring in a second sketch, It is then used to add or subtract geometry from the first feature based on the derived component. 13 Click Return on the Quick Access toolbar to return to the assembly level. 14 Save the assembly. Use Skeleton.iam for the file name. Previous (page 650) | Next (page 658)

Create an Assembly | 657

Create a Frame Leg

Next, create a leg from the skeleton part and then ground it in the assembly. 1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Create. 2 Enter Leg as the part name, and base the part on the Standard(mm).ipt template. 3 Click OK in the Create In-Place Component dialog box. 4 Expand the Origin folder under Skeleton.iam in the browser. Click the XY Plane node. It aligns the part origin to the assembly origin. NOTE This step is critical to aligning all parts based on the skeleton model. 5 Exit the sketch in the new part, and then delete Sketch1 to tidy up the Model browser. 6 Use the Derive command to derive the SkeletonBase.ipt part into the Leg part. 7 Exclude all sketches other than VERTICAL LEGS SKETCH. 8 Expand Work Geometry in the Derived Part dialog box, and exclude all work features other than Work Plane-BOTT of Frame. 9 Exclude Surface Bodies and Parameters from the derived component. 10 Click OK. 11 Click 3D Model tab Create panel Extrude. Extrude the tube profile highlighted in the following illustration. Click the Extents button flyout arrow in the Extrude mini-toolbar, and select To selected face/point. Then, click the derived work plane in the graphics window.

Click the green Ok button to complete the feature.

658 | Chapter 27 Skeletal Modeling

1 - Extrude to workplane 2 - Profile 12 Expand SkeletonBase.ipt in the Model browser. Right-click Work Plane - BOTT of Frame, and remove the checkmark next to Visibility. 13 Finally, return to the assembly environment. Right-click Leg in the Model browser and select Grounded from the pop-up context menu. 14 Save the assembly. Previous (page 654) | Next (page 659)

Create a Frame Subassembly

Next, you create the three tubes that form one side of the frame. Two of the tubes are identical, so creating them as separate parts might not be the best solution for a parts list or BOM. You use a subassembly in a slight variation of the preceding workflows. In this workflow: First, you create a subassembly in-place in the assembly. In the subassembly, you first create a frame layout from a derived sketch. This sketch is not used to create solid geometry.

Next, create the two different tube parts in the subassembly, using the same skeleton technique you used previously.

Create a Frame Subassembly | 659

Finally, place a second instance of one frame tube, and assemble it using assembly constraints. The second instance of the tube is constrained to the derived sketch in the layout part.

NOTE You incorporate the vertical leg in the subassembly later in this topic. 1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Create. In the Create In-Place Component dialog box: Enter Frame as the assembly name.

Base the assembly on the Standard(mm).iam template.

2 Click OK. 3 Click the assembly origin XY Plane in the Model browser to align the subassembly to the top-level assembly. The Frame subassembly is the active component in the assembly. 4 Click Assemble tab Component panel Create. In the Create In-Place Component dialog box: Enter FrameLayout as the part name.

Base the part on the Standard(mm).ipt template.

5 Click OK. 6 Align the part to the XY plane of the Frame subassembly origin. Because it is the first part in the subassembly, it is grounded and aligned to the subassembly origin. 7 Exit the sketch in the new part, and then delete Sketch1 to tidy up the Model browser. 8 Derive SkeletonBase.ipt into the new part. Exclude all geometry other than the FRAME SKETCH sketch. Your part should match the following image. NOTE Other geometry may be visible in your graphics window. You can navigate the Model browser and turn visibility off for other geometry to replicate the image as shown. However, this action is not necessary to continue the tutorial.

660 | Chapter 27 Skeletal Modeling

9 Click Return on the Quick Access toolbar to return to the subassembly environment. The FrameLayout part should be grounded. 10 Click Assemble tab Component panel Create. In the Create In-Place Component dialog box: Enter HorTube as the part name.

Base the part on the Standard(mm).ipt template.

11 Click OK. 12 Expand the Origin folder under Frame.iam in the Model browser. Click the XY Plane node. It aligns the part origin to the subassembly origin. 13 Exit the sketch in the new part, and then delete Sketch1 to tidy up the Model browser. 14 Derive SkeletonBase.ipt into the new part: Exclude all sketches other than the FRAME SKETCH sketch.

Exclude Work Geometry and Surface Bodies from the derived part.

Create a Frame Subassembly | 661

Include Parameters. You use one of the parameters from the skeleton part to control the extrusion distance of the base feature in the new part. NOTE Reference Parameters and External Parameters cannot be included.

15 Click OK. 16 Click 3D Model tab Create panel Extrude. Select the profile highlighted in the following illustration.

1 - Profile to select 17 In the Extrude mini-toolbar, click the arrow next to the value input box containing the 10 mm default extrusion distance. Select List Parameters from the pop-up context menu. Click TubeSize in the Parameters list. 18 Click the green Ok button to create the base feature. 19 Add a 5 mm fillet to the four long edges of the new part. 20 Click 3D Model tab Modify panel Shell. Select the two end faces of the extrusion. 21 Click the arrow next to the Thickness edit box in the Shell dialog box, and select List Parameters from the pop-up context menu.

662 | Chapter 27 Skeletal Modeling

22 Click TubeThickness in the Parameters list. 23 Click OK. Your part should match the one shown in the following image.

NOTE With some additional work geometry in the skeleton model, you can create the end profile for the horizontal tube, like the vertical leg tube. It eliminates the need to add additional features to the part, but the additional complexity of the skeleton model may outweigh that advantage. 24 Return to the Frame subassembly. Previous (page 658) | Next (page 663)

Create a Diagonal Tube

Following the same steps used to create the horizontal tube, create a diagonal tube in the frame subassembly. 1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Create. In the Create In-Place Component dialog box: Enter DiagTube as the part name.

Base the part on the Standard(mm).ipt template. Click OK.

Create a Diagonal Tube | 663

2 Expand the Origin folder of the Frame subassembly. Click the XY Plane in the Model browser to align the part to the subassembly origin. 3 Exit the initial sketch and then delete Sketch1 to tidy up the Model browser. 4 Derive the FRAME SKETCH sketch and User Parameters from SkeletonBase.ipt into the new part. 5 Extrude the profile highlighted in the following image by first linking the extrusion distance to the derived TubeSize parameter. 6 Add a 5 mm fillet to the long edges of the part. 7 Shell the part and link the shell thickness to the derived TubeThickness parameter.

1 - Profile 8 Return to the Frame subassembly level, and ground the DiagTube.ipt part. Previous (page 659) | Next (page 665)

664 | Chapter 27 Skeletal Modeling

Add a Second Horizontal Tube

To complete the frame subassembly, you add a second occurrence of the HorTube part. You then constrain this occurrence to the other frame members and the frame layout sketch. 1 With the Frame subassembly active, drag HorTube:1 from the Model browser and drop it in the graphics window. 2 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Position panel Constrain. Click the Flush solution in the Place Constraint dialog box. 3 Add a Flush constraint between the two faces highlighted in the following image.

Add a Second Horizontal Tube | 665

4 Add a second Flush constraint between the end faces of the two tubes as highlighted in the following image.

5 Click the Mate solution in the Place Constraint dialog box. 6 Click the face highlighted in the following image, and then click the visible sketch edge, which is also highlighted. The edge is geometry in the derived sketch in the FrameLayout part. 7 Apply the constraint, and then click Cancel to close the Place Constraint dialog box.

666 | Chapter 27 Skeletal Modeling

1 - Sketch Line 8 Turn off the Visibility of the FrameLayout part in the subassembly. 9 Save your work. Previous (page 663) | Next (page 667)

Derived Surface from Skeleton

Finally, you create a left-hand and right-hand support to connect the frame to the strap. The supports use a derived construction surface as the termination surface for an extrusion. 1 With the Frame subassembly active, create a component named SupportLeft in-place in the subassembly. Base the part on the Standard(mm).ipt template. Select the subassembly origin XY Plane as the initial sketch plane. Exit the initial sketch and delete Sketch1 to tidy up the browser. 2 Derive the SkeletonBase part into the new part: Exclude all sketches other than SUPPORTS SKETCH from the derived part.

Derived Surface from Skeleton | 667

Exclude Work Geometry and Parameters from the derived part. Expand Surface Bodies in the Derived Part dialog box. Exclude all surfaces other than Srf2 from the derived part.

3 Click OK to complete the feature. Your assembly should match the one in the following image.

You might be asking why the separate strap surface is required. Why not create a solid body of the strap in the skeleton, and then derive the solid body as a solid or surface body into the support part? Notice that the strap surface feature is a single 180-degree revolved surface that matches the outer surface of the strap. The support tube profile will be extruded to this surface. If the termination surface provides more than one solution, the maximum termination is always the result. See the following image for an example. You can choose a minimum or maximum solution for an extrusion termination.

668 | Chapter 27 Skeletal Modeling

1 - Extrude to 360 degree extrude strap 2 - Extrude to 180 degree extrude strap 4 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Create panel Extrude. Select the profile highlighted in the following image. 5 Click the Extents button flyout arrow in the Extrude mini-toolbar, and select To selected face/point.

Derived Surface from Skeleton | 669

6 Click the derived surface highlighted in the following image. 7 Click the More tab in the Extrude dialog box, and then select the Minimum Solution option. 8 Click OK to complete the feature and close the Extrude dialog box.

1 - Extrude 2 - Profile 9 Return to the Frame subassembly level, and then ground the SupportLeft part. 10 Repeat the previous steps to create a right-hand support named SupportRight. Derive the same sketch and surface into the new part, and then extrude the other tube profile in the sketch to the termination surface. The Frame subassembly should match the one in the following image. 11 Expand the derived SkeletonBase feature under the SupportLeft and SupportRight parts, and turn off the visibility of Srf2 to tidy up the Model browser.

670 | Chapter 27 Skeletal Modeling

Previous (page 665) | Next (page 671)

Complete the Frame Subassembly

The vertical leg belongs in the Frame subassembly. Because there are no assembly constraints, you can freely drag components between subassembly levels without fear of breaking the assembly structure. 1 Return to the top-level assembly (Skeleton.iam). 2 Drag Leg:1 in the Model browser, and drop it below FrameLayout.ipt:1. 3 Right-click the Frame subassembly in the Model browser and select Edit. 4 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Pattern. In the Model browser or graphics window, select all parts in the subassembly except FrameLayout.ipt.

Complete the Frame Subassembly | 671

5 In the Pattern Component dialog box: Click the Circular tab.

Click the Axis Direction button. Expand the Origin folder under Frame.iam and click Y Axis. Enter 4 in the Count edit box. Enter 90 in the Angle edit box. Click OK.

6 Return to the top-level assembly. Ground Frame.iam if you have not already done so. The assembly should match the one in the following image. 7 Save the assembly. NOTE Component appearances have been changed for clarity in the following image.

Previous (page 667) | Next (page 673)

672 | Chapter 27 Skeletal Modeling

Assembly Update
The skeleton part controls all changes to the assembly components. In this exercise, you change the sphere diameter in the skeleton part and examine the changes in the assembly. 1 OpenSkeletonBase.ipt, or activate its window if the file is already open. 2 On the ribbon, click Manage tab Parameters panel Parameters. Scroll down to the User Parameters area in the Parameters dialog box. 3 Enter 900 in the Equation cell of the SphereDiameter user parameter. 4 Click Done. 5 Return to the assembly file. 6 Click Local Update on the Quick Access toolbar. The assembly changes to reflect the smaller sphere diameter. Your assembly should match the one shown in the following image.

Previous (page 671) | Next (page 674)

Assembly Update | 673

Summary
Skeletal modeling is an efficient and versatile technique for building assemblies with Autodesk Inventor software. The application of this technique is limited only by your imagination. The lack of assembly constraints and absence of adaptive relationships can improve the performance and robustness of assembly updates. Setting up a skeleton or master model takes some planning, but the ability to control an assembly easily from a single source can be worth the effort. Previous (page 673)

674 | Chapter 27 Skeletal Modeling

iCopy: Creating

675

Use iCopy

Place iCopy results in a target assembly. Constrain the copies and determine which components to copy or reuse.
Category Time Required Experienced Users 15-30 minutes

676 | Chapter 28 iCopy: Creating

Tutorial Files Used

Frame-start.iam, Target.iam, Skeleton-frame.ipt, Plate1.ipt

Constrain iCopy content Constrain an iCopy pattern Copy/Reuse iCopy

Prerequisites Know how to navigate model space with the various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and selecting geometry.

Have a basic understanding of adaptivity and how it affects parts and assemblies. Understand the basics of skeleton modeling. Read the iCopy concept to understand the terms that are associated with iCopy commands.

The iCopy command automates the process of copying and positioning similar components in the main assembly. TheiCopy command creates one or multiple copies of an iCopy template and adds each copy to the target assembly. Each iCopy result can vary slightly from other iCopy results in the pattern depending on the adaptivity that was defined in the iCopy template. Creating an iCopy template is discussed in the Create iCopy Template tutorial. Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 678)

Use iCopy | 677

Open Target Assembly

The target assembly is host to the iCopy results and contains the geometry necessary to position the iCopy results. The target assembly geometry needs to correspond to the iCopy template. Thus, it is a good idea to understand what the iCopy template expects as inputs. This image shows the iCopy template and highlights the points that are used by the target assembly geometry.

678 | Chapter 28 iCopy: Creating

To place a single iCopy result, you need a work point that corresponds with each point defined in the iCopy template. To place multiple iCopy results, you need a work point for each point in the iCopy definition. You also need a rail to define the path for each work point, a work plane to define the position of the iCopy results, and a path for the pattern. 1 Set your active project to tutorial_files. Open Target.iam located in \Tutorial Files\iCopy.

Open Target Assembly | 679

2 The assembly contains a single part. The part contains sketch geometry and work points. You use the work points to position iCopy results. Previous (page 676) | Next (page 680)

iCopy
Use the iCopy command to position iCopy results. First, select the iCopy template to use. Then select geometry to position, size and pattern the iCopy results, and control the copy or reuse of components.

On the ribbon, click the Assemble tab Component panel iCopy command.

2 Select Frame-start.iam and click Open. This assembly has been authored using the iCopy Author command. The Constrain iCopy dialog box displays. Previous (page 678) | Next (page 680)

Constrain iCopy
In the Constrain iCopy dialog box, position the iCopy result in the target assembly. Select work points to position the geometry. You can modify values for any parameters included in the iCopy definition. 1 Select the Path pattern tab on the Constrain iCopy dialog box. 2 Select the work point at the end of the cyan (light blue) line for the Lower left point.

680 | Chapter 28 iCopy: Creating

3 Select the work point at the end of the green line for the Lower right point.

Constrain iCopy | 681

4 Select the work point at the end of the blue line for the Upper left point.

682 | Chapter 28 iCopy: Creating

5 Select the work point at the end of the yellow spline for the Upper right point.

Constrain iCopy | 683

6 In the FrameH (Frame Height) field, enter 125 mm. 7 In the FrameW (Frame Width) field, enter 125 mm. Press ENTER to accept the new value. The preview updates for the first instance of the iCopy pattern.

684 | Chapter 28 iCopy: Creating

Previous (page 680) | Next (page 685)

Constrain iCopy - Path Pattern

In the Constrain iCopy dialog box, pattern the iCopy results in the target assembly. Rails are automatically selected based on the work points used to position the iCopy. The rails control the positioning of work points for additional iCopy results. You select a path to determine the direction of the iCopy results pattern. A work plane is used to determine the position of the iCopy results. This work plane is selected automatically.

1 Select

Path in the Constrain iCopy dialog box.

2 Select the cyan (light blue) line to use as the path for the pattern.

Constrain iCopy - Path Pattern | 685

The Work Plane is selected automatically, based on the selected path. 3 Enter 8 in the Instance number field. 4 Enter 2500 mm in the Offset field.

686 | Chapter 28 iCopy: Creating

5 Click Next. Previous (page 680) | Next (page 688)

Constrain iCopy - Path Pattern | 687

Copy and Reuse iCopy Components

In the Copy / Reuse iCopy Components dialog box, copy or reuse components in the iCopy definition. Components that are reused are referenced by all iCopy results. Select Reuse for components that do not change between iCopy results. Select Copy for components that change between iCopy results. 1 Click Next. The plates reference the same part file for each iCopy result (reuse). All other components are copied for each iCopy result (copy). Previous (page 685) | Next (page 688)

iCopy: File Names

In the iCopy: File Names dialog box, modify file names and the location path for parts and assemblies that the iCopy command creates. You can modify names individually, or add a prefix or suffix to all file names automatically. 1 Check the Prefix box in the Naming Scheme area of the iCopy: File Names dialog box. 2 Enter My- in the Prefix field and click Apply in the Naming Scheme area of the dialog box. All file names update with the prefix. 3 Click OK in the iCopy: File Names dialog box to create the files. NOTE If your assembly does not appear as shown in the following image, click the Local Update button on the Manage tab to update the iCopy results.

688 | Chapter 28 iCopy: Creating

4 Review the relationship between the template points and target points and rail to see the effect these had on the results.Close the file. Do not save changes. The Target.iam assembly is used later for the authoring exercise. Previous (page 688) | Next (page 692)

iCopy: File Names | 689

Summary
Congratulations! You have completed this tutorial. In this exercise, you: Place iCopy results in a target assembly.

Constrain an iCopy result. Constrain an iCopy patterned result. Use Copy/Reuse to manage the placed components.

What Next? Now that you know what iCopy can do when placing results, follow the Create an iCopy Template tutorial and learn how to build the template for this powerful command. Previous (page 688)

690 | Chapter 28 iCopy: Creating

Use iCopy

29
Experienced Users 45-60 minutes Frame-start.iam, Target.iam, Skeleton-frame.ipt, Plate1.ipt

About this tutorial

Complete a skeleton assembly and author the assembly to use with iCopy.
Category Time Required Tutorial Files Used

Prepare an assembly for the iCopy Author Test the assembly Author an iCopy template

Prerequisites Know how to navigate model space with the various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and selecting geometry.

Have a basic understanding of adaptivity and how it affects parts and assemblies.

691

Understand the basics of skeleton modeling. Review the iCopy Help Concept and familiarize yourself with iCopy terms.

iCopy combines skeletal modeling and adaptivity to allow the subassembly to change shape to fit its position in the model. The iCopy Author command creates an iCopy template from an adaptive skeleton assembly. TheiCopy command creates one or multiple copies of the iCopy template and adds each copy to the target assembly. Each assembly (iCopy result) can vary slightly from other iCopy results in the pattern depending on the adaptivity that was used in the iCopy template. Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 692)

Open the Template Layout Part

Now you examine the files that compose the iCopy template, then author an iCopy template. The template layout part is the base part for the skeleton assembly that is the iCopy template. The template layout part contains the geometry that is derived into the skeleton components. 1 OpenSkeleton-frame.ipt.

692 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

2 This file contains several sketches, work geometry, and surface features. Sketch1 contains the layout geometry for the skeleton model.

Sketch2 through Sketch7 contain the profiles used to create the frame members. The work planes are used to position the sketches. Sketch8 is used to create ExtrusionSrf13 through ExtrusionSrf18.

Open the Template Layout Part | 693

ExtrusionSrf13 through ExtrusionSrf18 are used to terminate the extrusions for the frames.

3 Right-click Sketch1 and select Adaptive. 4 Save and close the file. Previous (page 688) | Next (page 694)

Create the iCopy Template Assembly

The iCopy template assembly contains the skeleton geometry that is used to create an iCopy definition. You create an assembly, place the Skeleton-frame.ipt component, and then constrain it. 1 Begin a new assembly based on the Standard (mm).iam template. 2 Use the Place Component command to place one instance of Skeleton-frame.ipt located in the \Tutorial Files\iCopy folder.

694 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

3 Right-click Skeleton-frame:1 in the Model browser and select Adaptive. 4 Save the assembly as Frame.iam in the \Tutorial Files\iCopy folder.. Previous (page 692) | Next (page 696)

Create the iCopy Template Assembly | 695

Constrain the Template Layout Part

For the iCopy results to update properly, the origin of the template layout part must be constrained to the origin of the assembly. The template layout part can remain grounded. 1 In the Model browser, expand the Origin folders for Skeleton-frame:1 and Frame.iam. 2 Start the Constrain command. In the Solution area of the dialog box, Click the Mate constraint, if not already active, and select the Flush option.

In the Origin folder of Skeleton-frame:1, select the XY Plane. In the Origin folder of Frame.iam, select the XY Plane. Click Apply.

3 Repeat to create flush constraints between XZ/XZ planes and YZ/YZ planes. 4 Close the Place Constraint dialog box. Previous (page 694) | Next (page 696)

iCopy Author - Layout tab

The iCopy Author prepares an assembly for the iCopy command. To use an assembly as an iCopy template, the assembly must contain a skeleton part that drives the other parts in the assembly. The skeleton part must contain an adaptive sketch. You select points in the sketch to use as the control points for placing the iCopy. The parameters in the skeleton part can be added to the iCopy template. These parameters give greater control over the size and shape of the assembly and its components.

On the ribbon, click the Manage tab Author panel iCopy Author command.

2 In the Model browser, select Skeleton-frame:1. After the layout part is selected, the Geometry, Parameter, and Document tabs become available. Previous (page 696) | Next (page 697)

696 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

iCopy Author - Geometry tab

On the Geometry tab, select and name the control points in the layout part. The control points are used to position the iCopy result when it is placed in an assembly. These points must be geometry points (endpoints of lines, center points of circles, but not sketch points). 1 Select the Geometry tab. 2 In the Geometry column, click Click to add. 3 Select the point in the lower-left corner of the frame.

4 In the Label field, enter Lower left. 5 In the Geometry column, click Click to add. 6 Select the point in the lower-right corner of the frame.

iCopy Author - Geometry tab | 697

7 In the Label field, enter Lower right. 8 In the Geometry column, click Click to add. 9 Select the point at the left end of the upper middle frame member.

698 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

10 In the Label field, enter Upper left. 11 In the Geometry column, click Click to add. 12 Select the point at the right end of the upper middle frame member.

iCopy Author - Geometry tab | 699

13 In the Label field, enter Upper right. Press ENTER to accept the input. NOTE To remove a work point from the list, highlight the Geometry and Label fields then press Delete. Previous (page 696) | Next (page 700)

iCopy Author - Parameter tab

On the Parameter tab, include parameters from the layout part in the iCopy template. You can modify the parameter values when placing the iCopy in the target assembly. 1 Select the Parameter tab. There are two parameters in the list on the right. These parameters are user parameters defined in Skeleton-frame.

700 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

2 Select the Label field for FrameH and enter Frame Height. 3 Select the Label field for FrameW and enter Frame Width. Press ENTER to accept the value. 4 Click OK. 5 Save the file. Click Yes to all if prompted. 6 CloseFrame.iam. Previous (page 697) | Next (page 701)

Test the iCopy Definition

When creating an iCopy definition, test the iCopy with just the skeleton. Test again after you create all the derived parts. Then finally test after placing any other components. You test the iCopy definition by using it with the iCopy command to verify it updates as expected. 1 OpenTarget.iam.

Test the iCopy Definition | 701

On the ribbon, click the Assemble tab Component panel iCopy command.

3 Select Frame.iam in the Select Source Assembly dialog box. Click Open. The Constrain iCopy dialog box displays. 4 Select the work point at the end of the cyan (light blue) line for the Lower left point.

702 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

5 Select the work point at the end of the green line for the Lower right point.

Test the iCopy Definition | 703

6 Select the work point at the end of the blue line for the Upper left point.

704 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

7 Select the work point at the end of the yellow spline for the Upper right point.

Test the iCopy Definition | 705

8 Select the Path pattern tab to specify path information. 9 Select the cyan (light blue) line to use as the path for the pattern (the Path button is selected automatically). The Work Plane is selected automatically based on the selected path.

706 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

10 Enter 8 in the Instance number field. 11 Enter 2500 mm in the Offset field.

Test the iCopy Definition | 707

12 Click Next to display the iCopy: File Names dialog box. The Copy / Reuse iCopy Components dialog box does not display because there are no components to reuse in the iCopy definition. 13 Click OK to complete the command. The iCopy results are created as shown. If the iCopy is not successful, return to the iCopy template and review the steps to create it.

708 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

14 Close the file. Do not save changes. This assembly is used for further testing. Previous (page 700) | Next (page 710)

Test the iCopy Definition | 709

Create a Frame Part

Now that the skeleton assembly has been successfully tested, you continue building the assembly. Next, create a frame part by deriving geometry from the Skeleton-frame part. 1 OpenFrame.iam. 2 Turn off the visibility of Skeleton-frame. It prevents you from accidentally selecting the surfaces in this file in later steps. 3 Click Create to create a component within the assembly. Enter Frame1 in the New Component Name field.

Click

and select Standard (mm).ipt from the Metric tab.

Verify that the New File Location is set to the \Tutorial Files\iCopy directory. Verify that Constrain sketch plane to selected face or plane is not selected. Click OK.

4 In the Model browser, expand the Origin folder under Frame.iam and select the XY Plane. 5 Exit the sketch and delete Sketch1. It is not needed for this component. 6 Click the Manage tab Insert panel Derive command. 7 In the Open dialog box, select Skeleton-frame.ipt and click Open. 8 Expand the Surface Bodies node. Set Srf1 and Srf6 to other surfaces to . and all other sketches and all

9 Expand the Sketches node. Set Sketch2 to to .

10 Expand the Work Geometry node. Set Work Plane5 to all other work planes to .

and

710 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

11 In the Derive dialog box, click OK. The surfaces and sketch from Skeleton-frame are added to the part. Using the Derive command to add these surfaces maintains a link between the two files. The visibility of Skeleton-frame.ipt is turned off for clarity in the following image.

12 Start the Extrude command. Sketch2 is selected automatically. It is the only closed profile in the part.

In the Extents drop-down menu, select Between. Select Srf1 and Srf6 as the Between planes. The order does not matter. Click OK.

Create a Frame Part | 711

13 Turn off the visibility of the surfaces from the derived part (Srf1 and Srf6). It prevents you from accidentally selecting them in later steps. 14 Return to the main assembly (Frame.iam). Previous (page 701) | Next (page 713)

712 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

Complete the Assembly

Repeat the previous procedure to create the rest of the assembly. The table contains a list of file names with the surfaces, sketches, and work planes to use with the Derive command. 1 Repeat the procedure to create the five frame parts according to the following table. Be sure to turn off the visibility of derived surfaces after creating the extrusion. File Name
Frame2 Frame3 Frame4 Frame5 Frame6

Surfaces
Srf1 and Srf2 Srf2 and Srf3 Srf3 and Srf4 Srf4 and Srf5 Srf5 and Srf6

Sketch
Sketch3 Sketch4 Sketch5 Sketch6 Sketch7

Work Geometry
Work Plane6 Work Plane1 Work Plane2 Work Plane3 Work Plane4

Complete the Assembly | 713

2 When all part files are complete, save Frame.iam and all dependents. Previous (page 710) | Next (page 714)

Constrain the Frame Part

For adaptivity and skeletal modeling to work together, the assembly must be constrained using a particular workflow. Constrain the origin planes of the

714 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

components to the origin planes of the iCopy template layout part. This procedure provides the most consistent results. 1 In the model window, click and drag any frame part. The part is not constrained and is free to move. 2 In the Model browser, expand the Origin folders for Skeleton-frame:1 and Frame1:1. 3 Start the Constrain command. In the Solution area of the dialog box, Click the Mate constraint, if not already active, and select the Flush option.

In the Origin folder of Skeleton-frame:1, select the XY Plane. In the Origin folder of Frame1:1, select the XY Plane. Click Apply.

4 Repeat to create constraints between XZ/XZ planes and YZ/YZ planes. 5 Repeat the process for the three origin planes of the remaining frames (Frame2 through Frame6).

Constrain the Frame Part | 715

6 Save and close the file. Previous (page 713) | Next (page 717)

716 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

Test the iCopy Definition

Test the iCopy definition again. The frames are the only parts that are derived from the skeleton part. There are other components that are independent of the skeleton part. These components are placed later. 1 OpenTarget.iam.

On the ribbon, click the Assemble tab Component panel iCopy command.

Test the iCopy Definition | 717

5 Select the work point at the end of the green line for the Lower right point.

6 Select the work point at the end of the blue line for the Upper left point.

718 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

7 Select the work point at the end of the yellow spline for the Upper right point.

Test the iCopy Definition | 719

8 In the Frame Height field, enter 125 mm. 9 In the Frame Width field, enter 125 mm.

720 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

10 Select the Path pattern tab to specify path information. 11 Select the cyan (light blue) line to use as the path for the pattern (the Path button is selected automatically).

Test the iCopy Definition | 721

12 The Work Plane is selected automatically based on the selected path.

722 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

13 Enter 8 in the Instance number field. 14 Enter 2500 mm in the Offset field. 15 Click Next to display the iCopy: File Names dialog box. The Copy / Reuse iCopy Components dialog box does not display because there are no components to reuse in the iCopy definition.

Test the iCopy Definition | 723

16 Click OK to complete the command. The file name prefix that you entered previously is maintained until you turn the setting off. 17 The iCopy results are created as shown. If the iCopy is not successful, return to the iCopy template and review the steps to create it. NOTE If your assembly does not appear as shown in the following image, click the Local Update button on the Manage tab to update the iCopy results.

724 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

18 Close the file. Do not save changes. This assembly is used for further testing. Previous (page 714) | Next (page 726)

Test the iCopy Definition | 725

Place the Support Plates

The last step in building the iCopy template is to place any components that are independent of the skeleton layout part. Support plates are placed and constrained in the assembly. 1 OpenFrame.iam. 2 Place four occurrences of Plate1.ipt. 3 Use one mate and two flush constraints to position each plate at the four lower corners of the frame as shown. Use the vertical frame parts with the mate constraint to position the plates. This procedure provides more consistent results because the horizontal frame changes when placing iCopy results.

726 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

4 Turn off the visibility of Skeleton-frame:1.

5 Save Frame.iam and all its dependents. Close the file. Previous (page 717) | Next (page 728)

Place the Support Plates | 727

Test the iCopy Definition

Now that all the parts are placed in the iCopy template, test a final time to verify that everything works as expected. 1 OpenTarget.iam.

On the ribbon, click the Assemble tab Component panel iCopy command.

728 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

5 Select the work point at the end of the green line for the Lower right point.

6 Select the work point at the end of the blue line for the Upper left point.

Test the iCopy Definition | 729

7 Select the work point at the end of the yellow spline for the Upper right point.

730 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

8 In the Frame Height field, enter 125 mm. 9 In the Frame Width field, and enter 125 mm. 10 Select the Path pattern tab to specify path information. 11 Select the cyan (light blue) line to use as the path for the pattern (the Path button is selected automatically).

Test the iCopy Definition | 731

12 The Work Plane is selected automatically based on the selected path. 13 Enter 8 in the Instance number field. 14 Enter 2500 mm in the Offset field.

732 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

15 Click Next to continue the command. The Copy / Reuse iCopy Components dialog box displays because there are components that can be reused in the iCopy definition. 16 Click Next in the Copy / Reuse iCopy Components dialog box. The plates reference the same part file for each iCopy result (reuse). All other components are copied for each iCopy result (copy). The iCopy: File Names dialog box is displayed.

Test the iCopy Definition | 733

17 Click OK to complete the command. The file name prefix that you entered previously is maintained until you turn the setting off. The frame parts are copied for each iCopy result. Each iCopy result uses the plate part. 18 The iCopy results are created as shown. If the iCopy is not successful, return to the iCopy template and review the steps to create it. NOTE If your assembly does not appear as shown in the following image, click the Local Update button on the Manage tab to update the iCopy results.

734 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

19 Save Target.iam and its dependents. Previous (page 726) | Next (page 736)

Test the iCopy Definition | 735

Summary

736 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

Summary | 737

Congratulations! You have completed this tutorial. In this exercise, you: Authored an iCopy template.

Created iCopy results in a target assembly.

What Next? Now that you know how to author and place iCopy components, you can create your own. The Skeletal Modeling tutorial helps you understand how to set up a skeleton assembly to use with the iCopy command. Previous (page 728)

738 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

Splines and Surfaces

About this tutorial

Perform advanced modeling with splines and surfaces.

Category Time Required Experienced Users 30 minutes

739

Tutorial Files Used

spline_1_start.ipt spline_1_complete.ipt

Loft with a rail. Create surfaces. Replace a face. Extend surface edges. Split the part into multiple bodies. Use the Emboss command.

Prerequisites Understand how to open, create and save part files in your active project.

Understand the fundamentals of solid modeling.

System Settings On the Application Options, Sketch tab enable the following settings: Edit dimension when created.

Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit. Autoproject part origin on sketch create.

The Grid lines display is not enabled in any of the sketch environment images in this tutorial.

740 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

NOTE You can specify the icon color scheme in Application Options. The appearance of the icons presented in this tutorial may differ if you are not using the color scheme noted in the following image.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 741)

Create Spline Cross Sections

In the first section of this exercise, we will create two spline cross sections and one spline rail to use in a Loft operation.

Start a 2D sketch on the face indicated.

Start the Spline command. Refer to the following image for placement. Place a fit point at the mid-point (green dot) of the vertical line on the left (1), another directly above the origin (2). Double-click to place the final point (3) at the mid-point of the vertical line on the right. This action creates the spline. You can also right-click and choose Create to finish the spline segment.

3 Right-click and select Done or press the Escape key to exit the command.

Create Spline Cross Sections | 741

NOTE Fit points at the end of a spline are square. Fit points along the curve are diamond shaped so you can identify the start and end of joined spline segments. When you create a spline, handles appear at each fit point in a passive state. Handles are shape manipulators. You can drag or dimension to a fit point without activating a handle. If the handles are not visible, select a spline in the sketch to display the active and passive handles. 4 Activate the handle on all fit points. To activate a handle use one of the following methods: Press and drag anywhere on the handle.

Right-click a fit point and choose Activate Handle in the context menu.

742 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

TIP Handle manipulation changes the shape of a spline. It is sometimes necessary to "undo" a spline handle manipulation. Depending on how many handles were manipulated, a normal Undo command might not produce the required results. When a spline is selected, there are two context menu commands available for reversing handle manipulations: Reset All Handles Reverses all handle edits and restores the spline to the natural solve state. Active handles remain active.

Reset Handle Reverses a handle edit on a selected fit point or handle, or the handle nearest the cursor. The reset uses the current spline shape. If other handles were modified, the reset may not return the handle to the original solve state. The handle remains active

Right-click the middle fit point and enable Curvature in the context menu.

TIP Enabling Curvature also activates the linear handle. Enabling the linear handle does not activate Curvature.

6 7

Place a horizontal constraint on all handles. Place a vertical constraint between the middle fit point (not the handle) and the part origin. Place a dimension on each handle with a value of 1. A linear handle dimension is unitless and indicates the distance the spline is tangent to the handle.

9 Place a radial dimension of 110-mm on the middle fit point curvature handle. A radial dimension is not a unitless dimension. 10 Place a 9-mm vertical dimension from the projected Origin point to the middle fit point. The following image shows the completed sketch.

Create Spline Cross Sections | 743

Finish the sketch. The 9-mm dimension persists; the handles and all handle dimensions are visible only when the spline is active.

12 Start the Save As command and save the file as Spline_Skills1.ipt. To create an exact duplicate of the spline on the other side of the part perform the following steps.

Orient the part to match the view in the following image and start a new sketch on the indicated face.

Start the Project Geometry command and project the spline to the new sketch.

744 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

Finish the sketch.

Previous (page 739) | Next (page 745)

Create a Spline Rail

In the next portion of the exercise, we create the rail or "guide curve" to use in the lofting operation. 1 Orient the part so the narrow end is facing you as shown in the following image.

Create a Spline Rail | 745

Start a new sketch on the narrow end of the part on the face indicated. Start the Spline command and sketch a spline from the midpoint of the projected vertical line to a point above the midpoint of the part. Place the final point at the midpoint of the opposite projected vertical line. Double-click the last point to create the spline.

4 Choose Done from the context menu or press the Escape key to finish the spline command. 5 Place a vertical constraint between the middle fit point and the midpoint of the projected line.

6 Place a 7-mm dimension from the midpoint of the top edge to the middle fit point. 7 Choose Done from the context menu or press the Escape key to finish the dimension command.

746 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

Right-click the middle fit point and choose Flat from the context menu. The mid-section of the spline now has zero curvature. Although not required for this exercise, a unitless dimension can be applied to the handle to extend the length of the flat segment.

Finish the sketch.

10 Save the file. Previous (page 741) | Next (page 747)

Create a Lofted Surface

In the next section, we create a lofted surface using the two parallel splines as cross sections, and the front spline as the drive rail.

Start the Loft command.

2 In the dialog box, choose Surface for the Output.

Create a Lofted Surface | 747

3 Select the two parallel splines to satisfy the cross sections. 4 Change the selection type to Rails using one of the following methods, and then select the spline you created as the drive rail:

Right-click and choose Select Rails in the context menu. Select Click to add in the dialog box in the Rails pane.

748 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

5 Click OK to create the surface. The new surface appears in the browser as a lofted feature and also in the Surface Bodies folder. NOTE A Surface is initially translucent and a single color for appearance. To change the appearance of a surface to opaque, select the surface (in the bodies folder or the browser). Use the context menu to cancel the Translucent selection. Select Properties in the context menu to assign a new surface appearance if required. Previous (page 745) | Next (page 749)

Change the Top of the Object Using Replace Face

In this section, you use Replace Face to change the top of the object to match the shape of the new surface. 1 On the 3D Model tab, Surfaces panel, choose the drop-down arrow to expose all available commands from the expanded panel. 2 Select Replace Face.

Change the Top of the Object Using Replace Face | 749

3 Select the top planar face to satisfy the Existing Faces selection. Change the selection to New Faces and select the lofted surface to satisfy the New Faces selection.

750 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

4 Click OK to replace the planar face with the lofted surface. 5 In the browser, select the lofted surface and turn off the visibility in the context menu.

Change the Top of the Object Using Replace Face | 751

The top of the part now conforms to the shape of the surface. 6 Start the Shell command.

7 Specify a 2-mm thickness. Do not remove any faces. Use the default Inside shell option. 8 Select OK to complete the operation. 9 Save the file. Previous (page 747) | Next (page 752)

Split the Part into Two Solid Bodies

The interior of the part is now hollow. In the next section of the exercise, we use a top-down workflow to split the part into multiple solid bodies. 1 On the Surface panel, select the Thicken/Offset command.

2 In the graphics window, select the top of the part to satisfy the selection. 3 In the dialog box, select Surface for the Output. Enter a distance value of 3-mm. Use the flip direction arrow to offset the surface towards the interior of the part.

752 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

4 Select OK to create the offset surface and finish the command. 5 Highlight the new surface in the browser to view.

Split the Part into Two Solid Bodies | 753

6 On the Surface panel, click the drop-down arrow to expose all available commands. 7 Select the Extend command in the drop-down.

8 Select the two outside edges of the offset surface to satisfy the Edges selection. Specify an offset value of 7.5 mm. Click OK to finish the command.

754 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

On the Modify panel, click the Split command.

10 In the dialog box, select the Split Solid option. 11 Select the offset surface as the Split Tool.

Split the Part into Two Solid Bodies | 755

12 Click OK to split the part into two solid bodies and finish the command. 13 In the browser, turn off the visibility of the offset surface. Because the extended edges are dependent on the offset surface, the originating surface controls the feature visibility. 14 Expand the Solid Bodies folder in the browser. There are now two solid bodies present in the file. You can control the visibility and color of each body individually.

756 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

15 Save the file. Previous (page 749) | Next (page 757)

Create Another Split Tool

In the next section, we create a spline profile and surface for another split tool. 1 Start a new sketch on the bottom of the part.

2 Orient the part view as shown in the following image with the wide end of the part on the right.

Create Another Split Tool | 757

3 Create a spline with five fit points as shown in the following image. Double-click the last point to create the spline. It is of no consequence if the handles on your spline do not match the image.

758 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

Place a vertical constraint between the following fit points: a 1 and 5 b 2 and 4

Place a horizontal constraint between fit point 3 and the projected origin point.

Create Another Split Tool | 759

6 Enable all linear handles on the spline using one of the following methods: a Right-click and select Activate Handle in the context menu. b Press and drag anywhere on a handle.

Right-click the middle fit point and enable Curvature.

8 Place a vertical constraint on the handle at the midpoint and the two endpoints.

760 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

9 Place a unitless dimension of 1 on each linear handle. 10 Place a 12-mm radial dimension on the curvature handle at the middle fit point. It is of no consequence if your spline differs slightly from the following image.

Create Another Split Tool | 761

11 Add an angular dimension of 34 degrees between the linear handles and the edges of the part as shown in the following image. 12 Dimension the fit points as shown in the following image.

762 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

Finish the sketch.

Start the Extrude command. Set the Output to Surface and select the spline to satisfy the Profile selection. Set the Distance to 40-mm. Reverse the direction of the extrusion so the profile intersects the existing bodies. Click OK to create the surface.

Create Another Split Tool | 763

15 Save the file. Previous (page 752) | Next (page 765)

764 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

Split the Part to Create a Third Solid Body

In the next section, we use the new surface to split the part and create a third body. 1 On the Modify panel, choose the Split command.

2 In the dialog box, select the Split Solid option. 3 Select the extruded surface as the Split Tool. 4 If only one body is visible in a multi-body part, Inventor selects the visible body as the solid to include. Because more than one solid body is visible, select the upper body to satisfy the Solid selection.

Split the Part to Create a Third Solid Body | 765

5 Click OK to create the body. Notice there are now three bodies in the Solid Bodies folder in the browser. 6 Expand the Solid Bodies folder in the browser.

7 Right-click each body in the folder and select Properties in the context menu. Change the Body Appearance Style for each body to a unique appearance 8 Save the file. Previous (page 757) | Next (page 766)

Isolate the Body

1 Expand the Solid Bodies folder and select the new body.

With the body highlighted, right-click and select Hide Others in the context menu. It isolates the body you want to work on.

766 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

Notice that the context menu also contains the Show All command to unhide all bodies. Previous (page 765) | Next (page 767)

Create an Offset Surface and Trim

In the next section, we create an offset surface to use as a trimming tool.

Create an Offset Surface and Trim | 767

On the 3D Model tab, Surface panel, start the Thicken/Offset command.

2 In the dialog box, set the Output to Surface and pick the extruded surface to satisfy the selection. Set the direction of the new surface to the interior of the body. Set the Distance to 2-mm. Click OK to create the surface.

768 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

3 Turn off the visibility of the extruded surface.

Create an Offset Surface and Trim | 769

Start the Split command.

5 Select the Trim Solid option; select the surface as the Split Tool. Make sure the side to remove is pointing away from the material. NOTE Rotate the model to verify the side to remove arrow is pointing away from the solid. You can also select the second Remove direction and not the one indicated in the following image. It is acceptable as long as the output is correct.

770 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

6 Choose OK to remove the material. 7 Turn off the visibility of the surface. 8 Turn on the visibility of all solid bodies. Notice the 2-mm gap between the bodies.

Create an Offset Surface and Trim | 771

9 Save the file. This completes the spline and surfacing portion of the tutorial. To complete the part you can continue the tutorial. Previous (page 766) | Next (page 772)

Create an Embossed Feature

In the next section, we create the embossed feature. 1 Turn on the visibility of the Emboss Sketch in the browser. 2 Turn off the visibility of the bottom solid and the large upper solid. NOTE Turn off the visibility of the non-participating solids to allow Inventor to choose the body to be operated on automatically.

Start the Emboss command.

4 Set the Depth to 3-mm. 5 Select the Emboss from Face option.

772 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

6 Click OK to create the embossed feature.

Start the Fillet command.

8 In the Fillet dialog box, enter 2-mm for the Radius value. 9 Select the drop-down and set the fillet type to Smooth (G2). Click the pencil icon to change to a selection mode.

Create an Embossed Feature | 773

10 Pick the upper and lower edges of the emboss feature, and then click OK to create the fillets.

774 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

11 Save the file.

Create a Vented Opening Using Grill

In the next section, we create a vented opening called a Grill. 1 In the Solid Bodies folder, make sure the visibility of the bottom solid and the embossed solid is off. Make the large top solid visible. NOTE If you turn off the visibility of bodies, Inventor does not include them in a feature operation. 2 Turn on the visibility of the Grill Sketch in the browser.

Create a Vented Opening Using Grill | 775

On the 3D Model tab, Plastic Part panel, click the Grill command.

4 On the grill sketch, select the large outer ellipse to satisfy the Profile selection in the Boundary tab. Accept the default settings for size.

776 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

5 Select the Island tab and then select the small center ellipse to satisfy the Profile selection. Accept the default of 0-mm.

Create a Vented Opening Using Grill | 777

6 Select the Rib tab and then select all the remaining line geometry to satisfy the rib selection. Accept the size defaults.

778 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

7 Click OK to create the grill.

Create a Vented Opening Using Grill | 779

8 Turn on the visibility of all bodies. 9 Save the file. Congratulations, you have completed the Spline and Surfaces tutorial.

Previous (page 772) | Next (page 781)

780 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces

Summary
In this tutorial you: Created and dimensioned splines.

Manipulated spline handles. Created lofted and extruded surfaces. Created multiple bodies in a part file. Used Replace Face to change a part contour. Extended surface edges. Used the Emboss command.

Summary | 781

782

Bolted Connections

About this tutorial

Design bolted connections.

Category Mechanical Design

783

Time Required Tutorial File Used

30 minutes Bolted_connection.iam (metric)

Develop your design in a standards-based, automated fashion that saves extensive assembly and part modeling time.

Prerequisites Install and connect to the Content Center.

Know how to set the active project, and navigate the model space with the various view tools. See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 784)

Start the Generator

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, and then open Bolted Connection Bolted_connection.iam.

2 Click

Save As.

3 For the file name, enter Bolted_connection_tutorial.iam.

784 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

4 On the ribbon, click Design tab Fasten panel Bolted

Connection

5 In the Bolted Connection Component Generator dialog box, select the Through All hole type.

6 Select Concentric from the drop-down menu in the Placement box. The Start Plane command enables.

Start the Generator | 785

Previous (page 783) | Next (page 786)

Place the Holes

1 Select the start plane.

The Circular references command is enabled. 2 Select the circular edge.

786 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

The Termination command is enabled. Previous (page 784) | Next (page 787)

Place the Holes (continued)

1 Orbit the assembly, and select the termination plane.

Place the Holes (continued) | 787

The holes preview.

788 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

2 Verify that 6.00 mm is selected in the Diameter menu. Previous (page 786) | Next (page 789)

Place the Holes (continued)

In the hole and fastener list box, notice that the program shows the hole thumbnails and descriptions. Two holes are shown, because that is the number required to pass through both components, as determined by the start and termination selections. If another component or part feature are included in the selection, three holes are required.

Place the Holes (continued) | 789

Previous (page 787) | Next (page 790)

Add the Fasteners

1 Above the hole thumbnails and descriptions, select the Click to add a fastener text. The available bolts display. 2 Select ISO from the Standard menu to filter the selection. 3 Select ISO 4016. The selected bolt previews in the graphics window. Notice also that the program selects a length long enough to pass through the chosen components automatically.

790 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

NOTE If your Content Center library does not contain the ISO standard, or this particular bolt, select All from the Standard menu, and then select a similar bolt. 4 Select the Click to add a fastener text, located directly under the bolt thumbnail, and then select ISO 7092.

Add the Fasteners | 791

The generator logically filters the available selections. For example, when you add fastener hardware between the bolt and the top hole, the program presents only washers for selection. 5 Select the Click to add a fastener text located below the lower hole thumbnail, and then select ISO 7092.

792 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

6 Click the Click to add a fastener text located below the lower washer thumbnail, and then select ISO 4032. The fastener stack is complete.

Add the Fasteners | 793

7 Click Apply. The File Naming dialog box opens where you can specify the Display name of the bolted connection and the File name settings. 8 Remove the checkmark next to Always prompt for filename option, and click OK.

794 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

Previous (page 789) | Next (page 795)

Use Existing Hole

Next, you add another bolted connection using an existing hole. 1 Select the Blind connection type option.

Use Existing Hole | 795

2 Select By hole from the drop-down menu in the Placement box. 3 Select the start plane.

The Existing Hole command is enabled. 4 Select the countersunk hole.

796 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

The Blind Start Plane command is enabled. 5 Select the start plane for the blind hole, which in this case is the top face of the spindle component.

Use Existing Hole | 797

The hole previews.

798 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

6 Select the Click to add a fastener text, and then select a countersink-type cap screw, for example, ISO 10642.

Use Existing Hole | 799

7 Click OK. Previous (page 790) | Next (page 800)

Edit Bolted Connection

1 In the browser, double-click the Spindle component to edit it. 2 Click the Parameters command located on the Manage tab, and then change the value for d4 to 20 mm. 3 Click Done in the Parameters dialog box. 4 On the Quick Access toolbar, click Return to return to the assembly. Notice that an update icon appears in the browser next to Bolted Connection:1. The bolt is not long enough to make the connection and requires an update.

800 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

5 In the browser, right-click Bolted Connection:1, and then select Edit using Design Accelerator. The bolted connection generator automatically previews the next available size contained in the Content Center. The preview lasts long enough to pass through the bolted components, the nut, and washers.

Edit Bolted Connection | 801

6 Click OK. 7 In the graphics window, right-click the cap screw contained in Bolted Connection:2, and then select Edit using Design Accelerator. Both the cap screw and the blind hole have grip handles. You can zoom in to see the grips.

802 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

8 Drag the upper grip handle to change the length of the cap screw. Notice that the cap screw preview snaps to the next available length contained in the available Content Center libraries. In this example, the next available length is 20 mm.

Edit Bolted Connection | 803

Notice also that the description text for the cap screw in the generator dialog box updates immediately as you resize the cap screw. Previous (page 795) | Next (page 805)

804 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

Modify Hole Depth

1 Next, drag the grip for the hole to increase the hole depth, approximating the depth shown in the illustration.

2 Click OK.

Modify Hole Depth | 805

In addition to modifying the hole depth with a grip free-drag, you can precisely define the hole depth. 3 In the browser, right-click Bolted Connection:2, and then select Edit using Design Accelerator. 4 Select the lower hole thumbnail, and then click the access button next to the hole thumbnail.

806 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

5 In the Modify Hole dialog box, enter 16 mm in the Hole Depth field and 14 mm in the Thread Depth field. 6 Click the check mark to close the dialog box, and click OK in the generator dialog box.

Modify Hole Depth | 807

Previous (page 800) | Next (page 809)

808 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

Change Bolted Connection Direction

Assume the direction for Bolted Connection:1 must be reversed. In other words, the nut must be next to the basic_plate component. 1 Right-click Bolted Connection:1, and then select Edit using Design Accelerator. 2 Click Start Plane, and then select the new start plane.

3 Click Circular references, and then select the circular edge.

Change Bolted Connection Direction | 809

4 Click Termination. 5 Select the termination plane.

810 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

6 Click OK.

Change Bolted Connection Direction | 811

Previous (page 805) | Next (page 812)

Change Configuration of Bolted Connection

Next, we change the configuration of a bolted connection. 1 Right-click Bolted Connection:1, and then select Edit using Design Accelerator. Before you continue, look at the relationship between the hardware stack in the dialog box and the direction of the connection in the graphics window. Notice that the direction indicator in the graphics window always corresponds to the insert direction of the screw.

812 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

Though you can change the connection direction on the model, the general top-to-bottom stack order of the hardware in the dialog box remains the same. The screw is always the top-most item.

Change Configuration of Bolted Connection | 813

2 Select the thumbnail for the nut, and then click Delete to remove the nut from the connection.

3 Use the same method to delete the two washers. 4 Select the thumbnail for the hole closest to the cap screw, and then click the menu button.

5 Select ISO-Socket Head Cap Screw ISO 4762.

814 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

6 Next, change the type of the screw. Select the thumbnail for the cap screw, and then select the menu button. 7 Select Socket Head Bolts from the Category filter menu. 8 Select ISO 4762.

9 Drag the grip for the cap screw to shorten the length to 20 mm.

Change Configuration of Bolted Connection | 815

10 Click OK.

816 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

Previous (page 809) | Next (page 818)

Change Configuration of Bolted Connection | 817

Summary

Using the Bolted Connection Generator, you have learned how to: Start a Bolted Connection.

Place holes. Add fasteners. Use an existing hole. Edit a bolted connection.

You can check the Help files for further information. Previous (page 812)

818 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections

Shafts

About this tutorial

Design shafts.
Category Time Required Mechanical Design 40 minutes

819

Tutorial File Used

Start a new assembly file (metric)

In this tutorial, you create and edit a shaft with the Shaft Component Generator and Design Accelerator. Objectives Design a shaft.

Check a shaft. Set loads and supports. Set file names. Insert a shaft. Redesign a shaft.

Prerequisites Install and connect to the Content Center.

Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with the various view tools. See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 820)

Overview
To create a shaft, you complete the following steps: Start the Shaft Component Generator.

Add and remove sections to the designed shaft. Set parameters of shaft sections. Add shaft features. Specify supports, force, and moment. Edit the shaft using Design Accelerator.

820 | Chapter 32 Shafts

NOTE In this tutorial, you will insert components from the Content Center. Make sure that you have Content Center installed before you start designing the shaft. Previous (page 819) | Next (page 821)

Create an Assembly File

To begin: 1 Set your active project to tutorial_files. Autodesk Inventor uses template files to determine default settings for part, assembly, and drawing files. As you become familiar with the program, you can define your own templates.

Click New on the Quick Access toolbar.

3 Double-click Standard (mm).iam in the Metric tab.

On the Quick Access toolbar, click Save, and save a copy of the file as shaft.iam.

Previous (page 820) | Next (page 821)

Start the Shaft Generator

1 On the ribbon, click on the Design tab before starting the Shaft Generator to become familiar with the Design Accelerator commands.

Create an Assembly File | 821

2 To start the generator, on the ribbon click Design tab Power

Transmission panel Shaft

The Shaft Component Generator opens on the Design tab, by default. 3 Click in the graphics window to place the shaft. The shaft is ready to be configured. Previous (page 821) | Next (page 822)

2D and 3D Dynamic Preview

While using the Shaft Generator to design a shaft, you can preview the shaft in both the dialog box and the graphics window. The previews are dynamic and adjust automatically to show your chosen profiles and their relative sizes and positions on the shaft.

1 To display the shaft preview on the Design tab, click Options. NOTE On the Design tab, the Options command is on the toolbar in the Sections region. On the Calculation tab, the Options command is on the toolbar in the Loads & Supports region. 2 In the 2D Preview region, select Always Show, and click OK. This creates a dynamic preview of the shaft on the Design tab.

The 2D preview includes only sections, and displays by default on the Calculation tab.

822 | Chapter 32 Shafts

The shaft also dynamically previews within the graphics window, according to the shaft features and values you specify in the dialog box. You can design a shaft by adding or deleting sections and features, or by adding loads and supports. When you add loads and supports using commands on the Calculation tab, the preview of loads and supports appears.

Previous (page 821) | Next (page 823)

Add Shaft Element

When you first start the Shaft Generator, the shaft contains some sections by default. You design the shaft by modifying, deleting, and adding shaft sections. You can select the shaft sections with the 2D preview in the dialog box, the graphics window, or with the tree control. 1 In the Sections area, select Sections from the drop-down list. 2 Select the tree control for the Cylinder 50 x 100 section.

Add Shaft Element | 823

NOTE You can select only one section at a time. Notice that this section highlights in the 2D preview and in the graphics window.

3 Click Insert Cylinder located in the toolbar. The program adds a plain shaft section to the right of the selected element.

The first Cylinder section becomes red in the tree control. The Shaft Generator recognizes that you have a fillet between two sections of the same width next to each other, which is not supported. The program changes the section back to the default color when you change the width of one of the shaft sections.

824 | Chapter 32 Shafts

Previous (page 822) | Next (page 825)

Specify Parameters
To change the size parameters for the shaft section, you can use one of the following editing methods. 1 In the Autodesk Inventor window, double-click the shaft section.

In the 2D Preview area of the Design tab, double-click the shaft section or right-click and select Sections Edit from the context menu. In the tree control of the Design tab, click section or feature. , or double-click the

For this tutorial, we will use the first method. 1 Double-click the shaft section in the Autodesk Inventor window. 2 In the Cylinder dialog box, leave the Main Diameter value of 50 mm unchanged, but change the Section Length field to 50 mm. 3 Click OK.

Previous (page 823) | Next (page 826)

Specify Parameters | 825

Specify Shaft Element Type

Now, add a retaining ring to the selected shaft section.

1 In the tree control, click the arrow next to to expand the list of available features for this shaft section, and select Add Retaining Ring. The program adds the default retaining ring to the selected section. 2 To edit the retaining ring, select it in the tree control, and click The Retaining Ring Groove dialog box opens. 3 From the first drop-down list in the Position group box, select Measure from first edge. 4 Use the second drop-down list to select a retaining ring from the Content Center. Select ISO 464. 5 In the Dimensions box, change the Distance field to 23 mm. 6 Click OK. .

Previous (page 825) | Next (page 826)

Change Dimensions of First Shaft Section

1 Select the first shaft section from the left. 2 To open the Cylinder dialog box, double-click the section in the 2D Preview area of the Design tab.

826 | Chapter 32 Shafts

3 In the Cylinder dialog box, change the Main Diameter to 40 mm and Section Length to 50 mm. 4 Click OK.

Previous (page 826) | Next (page 827)

Change Dimension of Third Shaft Section

1 In the Autodesk Inventor window, select the third shaft element from the left. 2 In this step, use 3D grips to edit section parameters. For this shaft section, two 3D grips are available. Use both of them to edit the dimensions. Double-click the length 3D grip as shown in the image.

Change Dimension of Third Shaft Section | 827

3 In the Edit dialog box, enter a new length value of 50 mm, and then click . The length of the section changes.

4 Double-click the diameter 3D grip as shown on the image.

828 | Chapter 32 Shafts

5 In the Edit dialog box, enter new length value of 65 mm, and then click . The diameter of the section changes.

Change Dimension of Third Shaft Section | 829

7 Now, add a through hole to the selected shaft section. In the tree control, the third shaft section is activated. Click the arrow next to to expand the list of available features for this shaft section, and select Add Through Hole. The default hole is added to the selected section. To edit the hole, select it in the tree control, and click the .

8 In the Through Hole dialog box, change the Hole Diameter value to 12 mm. Ensure that you change the value for the Hole Diameter parameter, not the Main Diameter parameter. 9 Click OK.

Previous (page 826) | Next (page 830)

Change Dimensions of Cone Section

1 In the Autodesk Inventor window, double-click the cone section. The Cone dialog box opens. 2 Change the First Diameter value to 80 mm. 3 Click OK.

830 | Chapter 32 Shafts

Previous (page 827) | Next (page 831)

Change Dimensions of the Next Section

In the next step, we use the 2D preview within the Design tab to edit section parameters. 1 In the 2D Preview area, select the cylinder as shown on the image.

2 Right-click to display the context menu, and click Sections Edit. The Cylinder dialog box opens. 3 Change the Section Length field to 40 mm, and click OK. 4 Now, add a locknut groove on the right edge of the section to the selected shaft section. In the tree control, the appropriate shaft section is activated.

Change Dimensions of the Next Section | 831

Click the arrow next to to expand list of available right-edge features, and select Lock Nut Groove from the list. The default locknut groove is added to the selected section, and the Locknut Groove dialog box opens. 5 Change the Thread Length to 13 mm, and click OK.

Previous (page 830) | Next (page 832)

Add and Edit the Last Shaft Section

To complete the shaft shape, add one more section.

1 Click Insert Cylinder located in the toolbar. A plain shaft section is added to the right of the selected section.

832 | Chapter 32 Shafts

2 In the tree control, click

to display the Cylinder dialog box.

3 Change the Main Diameter field to 40 mm, and click OK.

4 Add a retaining ring feature to the selected shaft section. Click the arrow next to to expand list of available features for this shaft section, and select Add Retaining Ring from the list. The program adds the default retaining ring to the selected section. 5 Click to display the Retaining Ring Groove dialog box to edit the parameters. 6 In the drop-down menu, select Measure from second edge to insert the retaining ring on the right side of the cylinder section.

Add and Edit the Last Shaft Section | 833

7 Use the second drop-down list to select DIN 471 from the Content Center. 8 Set the Distance to 2 mm, and click OK.

Previous (page 831) | Next (page 834)

Insert Cylindrical Bore

You can also insert cylindrical and conical bores. In this tutorial, you will insert a cylindrical bore. 1 Select Bore on the left from the drop-down menu in the Sections area. 2 Select 3 Click Insert Cylindrical Bore from the toolbar. to display the edit dialog box.

4 Change the Section Length field to 140 mm, and click OK.

834 | Chapter 32 Shafts

Previous (page 832) | Next (page 835)

Add Shaft to Templates Library

Now save the designed shaft to the Templates Library.

1 To display the Templates Library area, click the More Options command in the lower-right corner of the Design tab. 2 Click Add to add a newly designed shaft to the template library. 3 In the Template Description dialog box, specify the name of the template as shaft_tutorial. 4 Click OK. This new template is added to the Templates Library. NOTE To open the template, click Set. TIP

When you double-click a template, you can change the template description. You can use the drag method to reorder templates within the library.

Previous (page 834) | Next (page 836)

Add Shaft to Templates Library | 835

The Calculation Tab

Select the Calculation tab, which contains: A 2D Preview of the shaft, based on the configuration you chose on the Design tab.

Loads and Supports graphical indicators. A toolbar for entering loads and supports. Areas for setting shaft material and additional calculation properties.

NOTE The 2D preview is on by default. To hide the 2D Preview, select the Always Hide option within the 2D Preview box of the Options dialog box, and click OK. Previous (page 835) | Next (page 836)

Specify Supports
When you switch to the Calculation tab, notice how the 2D and 3D Previews change. Not only the graphical representations of loads and supports are displayed, but there are also green and blue position markers. For each section, the program shows three position markers: one at each end of a section, and one position marker in the middle of each section. A blue position marker means that load or support is positioned on such a position marker. NOTE Supports are represented by triangles. Loads are represented by arrows. 1 Select Supports from the drop-down menu in the Loads & Supports region. 2 Press and hold the Alt key. In the Autodesk Inventor window, drag the support to the second shaft section from the left as shown on the image.

836 | Chapter 32 Shafts

The nearest blue position marker indicates that the support is positioned towards it. NOTE The position marker can be half-blue and half-green if it is between two sections. 3 Double-click the support to display the Free Support dialog box, and change the Distance from middle of section field to 1.5 mm, which is the distance from the currently active position marker to the support. 4 Click OK. 5 In the Autodesk Inventor window, press and hold the Alt key, and then drag the second support indicator to the shaft section located on the right end of the shaft, as shown.

Specify Supports | 837

Previous (page 836) | Next (page 838)

Specify Loads and Perform Calculation

1 Select Loads from the drop-down menu in the Loads & Supports region. A radial force is inserted by default; however, we must change it to torque. 2 In the tree control, select Radial Force, and click the arrow next to the icon.

838 | Chapter 32 Shafts

3 Select Torque from the displayed list. The Torque dialog box opens. Enter 200 N m in the Torque field, and click OK. 4 In the toolbar, click Torque to add a second torque. In the Torque dialog box, ensure that -200 N m is entered in the Torque field, and click OK. NOTE The sum of all torques must equal 0. 5 You can also change positions of the torques. In the dialog box preview, drag the torque arrows to the shaft sections as shown in the image.

6 Click the Calculate command. Expand the Results area on the right side of the Calculation tab to see the calculated results of the loads, supports, and values. 7 Switch to the Graphs tab to view the diagrams of individual shaft loadings.

TIP Click the

Result icon to display the HTML report.

Previous (page 836) | Next (page 839)

File Name Settings

1 Before you finish the shaft, click the Design tab.

File Name Settings | 839

2 Click the File Naming of the dialog box.

command, located at the top-right corner

If the Always Prompt for Filename option is selected, when you place the completed shaft in the graphics window, the File Naming dialog box appears. You use this dialog box to specify the display name and File name for Design Accelerator components and features. For this exercise, do not select this option. Previous (page 838) | Next (page 840)

Insert the Shaft

Now, insert the completed shaft into the assembly. 1 Click OK in the Shaft Component Generator dialog box. 2 Click in the graphics window to place the shaft.

Previous (page 839) | Next (page 841)

840 | Chapter 32 Shafts

Edit the Shaft

You can edit the inserted shaft. 1 Select the shaft in the browser or graphics window, then right-click, and select Edit Using Design Accelerator.

2 Ensure that the Design tab is activated, and then select the cone section, as shown.

3 In the 2D Preview area, double-click the selected cone section to display the Cone box dialog box. 4 Change First Diameter to 100 mm and Section Length to 90 mm. Click OK to close the Cone dialog box. 5 Click OK in the Shaft Component Generator dialog box. The edit is applied to the shaft.

Edit the Shaft | 841

Previous (page 840) | Next (page 842)

Summary
Using the Shaft Component Generator, you learned how to: Start a Shaft Generator.

Configure a shaft. Specify loads and supports. Specify load values.

842 | Chapter 32 Shafts

Insert a shaft. Edit a shaft.

Previous (page 841)

Summary | 843

844

Spur Gears Connections

About this tutorial

845

Design spur gear connections.

Category Emphasis Tutorial File Used Mechanical Design 15 - 20 minutes SpurGear.iam (metric)

Set the method of design. Set file names. Insert the spur gears connection into the assembly.

Prerequisites Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with the various view tools.

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 846)

Open Sample File and Start Generator

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files. 2 Open Spur Gears SpurGear.iam.

846 | Chapter 33 Spur Gears Connections

3 On the ribbon, click Design tab Power Transmission panel

Spur Gear. Design Accelerator generators open in the last valid state a component was inserted into the Autodesk Inventor assembly. NOTE Hold the Ctrl key while clicking the Spur Gear command to load the Spur Gears Generator with the default installation data. Previous (page 845) | Next (page 847)

Spur Gears Dialog Box

When you start the Spur Gears Component Generator, it opens on the Design tab. You can enter specific parameters, define spur gears placement, and select methods of calculation. The Design tab is divided into several group boxes with options:

Spur Gears Dialog Box | 847

Common This area includes parameters common for both gears, such as module or helix angle. The Design Guide drop-down menu contains five possible options of design and calculation. Based on your selection of the design guide, the edit fields within the Design tab are enabled. Every method requires different input parameters.

Gear 1, Gear 2 This area includes parameters that can vary for Gear 1 and Gear 2 such as number of teeth or face width. Also, commands for placement specification of Gear 1 and Gear 2 are located here. Use the drop-down menu to select the type of gear to insert: component, feature, or no model.

848 | Chapter 33 Spur Gears Connections

More Options

When you click the More options command, located in the lower-right corner of the Design tab, the area with other options for spur gears design opens. For example, if you select Number of Teeth in the Input Type group box, it indicates that number of teeth is a known value.

Spur Gears Dialog Box | 849

Results Double-click the double line on the right, or click the chevron to display the Results pane with the list of calculated values. The values in gray indicate that results do not match the inserted values in the Design tab. Click Calculate to get results for current inputs.

850 | Chapter 33 Spur Gears Connections

Previous (page 846) | Next (page 851)

Select Gear Options

1 Within the Common area of the Design tab, select the Module option from the Design Guide drop-down menu. The selected option indicates what the design and calculation is based on. In this tutorial, we select the Module option.

Select Gear Options | 851

2 Click the More Options command located in the lower-right corner of the Design tab for additional options for spur gears. 3 On the Size Type group box, select Module. If you design spur gears in a metric assembly, the generator selects the Module option by default. If you design spur gears using English units, the generator selects the Diametral Pitch option. 4 In the Input Type area, select the Number of Teeth option. In this case, the number of teeth is an input parameter. 5 In this tutorial, you insert one feature and one component. Select Feature from the drop-down menu in the Gear 1 group box. The first gear is inserted as a feature of the shaft in the assembly.

6 Select Component from the drop-down menu in the Gear 2 group box. The second gear is inserted as a new part.

852 | Chapter 33 Spur Gears Connections

NOTE Alternatively, you can select the No Model option to insert a calculation without a component or feature. NOTE If you insert features, you cannot use Motion for your gears to rotate them. It is possible only if you insert two components. Previous (page 847) | Next (page 853)

Place the Gear

1 To specify the placement for Gear 1, click Cylindrical Face in the Gear 1 group box. 2 In the graphics window, select the cylindrical face as shown in the following image.

Place the Gear | 853

NOTE The diameter of section on the shaft must be equal or greater than outside diameter of the gear. 3 Click the Start plane command to specify the start plane within the assembly. 4 In the graphics window, select the start plane as shown in the following image.

854 | Chapter 33 Spur Gears Connections

A preview shows Gear 1 in the specified position.

Place the Gear | 855

Previous (page 851) | Next (page 856)

Place the Second Gear

Now, you can specify the position for the second gear. 1 In the Gear 2 group box, click Cylindrical Face. 2 In the graphics window, select the cylindrical face to place the second gear as shown in the following image.

856 | Chapter 33 Spur Gears Connections

3 Click the Start plane command to specify the start plane within the assembly. 4 In the graphics window, select the start plane as shown in the following image.

Place the Second Gear | 857

A preview shows Gear 2 in the specified position.

858 | Chapter 33 Spur Gears Connections

Previous (page 853) | Next (page 859)

Enter Parameters
Now, you can enter parameters into the Common, Gear 1, and Gear 2 group boxes. 1 Set Pressure Angle value to 20 degrees. 2 Set Helix Angle value to 12 degrees. 3 Enter the correct number of teeth. Your gear design is based on these known parameters. Enter 29 into the Number of Teeth edit field in the Gear 1 area. 4 Enter 57 into the Number of Teeth edit field in the Gear 2 area. 5 Set both Facewidth values in Gear 1 and Gear 2 to 30 mm. 6 Set Unit Correction in Gear 1 area box to 0. Previous (page 856) | Next (page 860)

Enter Parameters | 859

Perform the Calculation and Set File Names

1 To perform the calculation, click Calculate. The preview updates, and the message in the Summary of messages area reports that the calculation completed successfully. 2 To open the Summary of messages area located at the bottom of the Calculation and Design tabs, double-click the double line at the bottom of the tabs, or click the chevron at the bottom of the tabs. In the graphics window, the preview of the spur gears connection reflects all inserted values, such as numbers of teeth. 3 Click OK. The File Naming dialog box opens.

In the File Naming dialog box, you can specify the Display name and File name for Design Accelerator components and features. When the Always prompt for filename box is checked, the dialog box opens every time you insert the Design Accelerator component or feature. 4 Click OK to insert the spur gears connection into the assembly.

860 | Chapter 33 Spur Gears Connections

Previous (page 859) | Next (page 862)

Perform the Calculation and Set File Names | 861

Summary

Using the Spur Gears Generator, you learned how to: Start a Spur Gears connection.

Set calculation options. Place components. Perform the calculation. Set file names.

Check the Help for further information about generators. Previous (page 860)

862 | Chapter 33 Spur Gears Connections

V-Belts Connections

About this tutorial

Design V-belts connections.

Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Mechanical Design 15 minutes VBelts.iam

863

Design a belt. Set pulley properties. Set file names and display names. Insert V-belts connection.

Prerequisites Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with the various view tools.

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 864)

Start the Generator

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, and then open V-Belts VBelts.iam.

864 | Chapter 34 V-Belts Connections

2 Click Design tab Power Transmission panel V-Belts.

NOTE Hold the Ctrl key while clicking the V-Belts command to load the V-Belts Component Generator with the default installation data. Previous (page 863) | Next (page 865)

Select the Belt Plane

1 First, select a work plane or planar face as the midplane of the belt.

The Belt Mid Plane command activates. 2 Select the visible work plane as shown in the following image.

Select the Belt Plane | 865

When you select the work plane, the grips display. The number of displayed grips depends on the number of pulleys.

866 | Chapter 34 V-Belts Connections

NOTE The V-belts Generator opens with the last valid settings. Previous (page 864) | Next (page 867)

Select Belt Type

1 In the Belt section of the V-belts Generator, click the down arrow to display the available V-belts.

2 Select the A - ANSI/RMA IP-20 Classical Wrapped V-belt.

Select Belt Type | 867

NOTE In this Autodesk Inventor version, the V-belts Generator is not connected to the Content Center. Previous (page 865) | Next (page 868)

Select First Pulley Type

1 In the Pulleys region, click the down arrow of the first pulley. 2 Select Grooved Pulley A,AX - ANSI/RMA IP20.

NOTE When you start the V-belts Generator, there are always two pulleys displayed. To add other pulleys, click the Click to add pulley text.

Previous (page 867) | Next (page 868)

Set First Pulley Position

1 In the Pulleys region, select the first pulley. Click the arrow to display options for geometry placement of the first pulley.

2 Select the Fixed position by selected geometry option. The pulley preview activates.

868 | Chapter 34 V-Belts Connections

3 Select the cylindrical face of the shaft to position the first pulley automatically.

Set First Pulley Position | 869

Previous (page 868) | Next (page 870)

Select Second Pulley Type

1 In the Pulleys box, click the row with the second pulley. 2 Click the down arrow, and select Grooved Pulley A,AX ANSI/RMA IP20.

870 | Chapter 34 V-Belts Connections

Previous (page 868) | Next (page 871)

Set Second Pulley Position

1 In the Pulleys box, click the arrow to display options for geometry placement for the second pulley.

Select the Direction driven sliding position option.

3 Select the sliding work plane for the holder.

Previous (page 870) | Next (page 872)

Set Second Pulley Position | 871

Change Pulley Properties

1 Click the Edit command of the second pulley to open the Groove Pulley Properties dialog box.

2 Select Transmission Ratio from the Design Guide drop-down menu. 3 Enter 2 in the Ratio edit field in the Dimensions area, and click OK. Previous (page 871) | Next (page 872)

Specify the Second Pulley Final Position

1 In the assembly, drag the center grip and place the second pulley to the appropriate position.

872 | Chapter 34 V-Belts Connections

The sliding is available along the selected sliding work plane. The program determines the final pulley position according to available belt length.

2 To perform strength analysis, switch to the Calculation page of the V-belt generator. Previous (page 872) | Next (page 873)

File Name Settings

1 In the upper-right corner of the V-Belts Component Generator, click File Naming. The File Naming dialog box specifies the Display name of V-belt connection components and the Filename settings. 2 In the File Naming dialog box, select the Always prompt for filename box. By making this selection, you are prompted for the newly inserted Design Accelerator file name and display name of the component every time you create a component. 3 Click OK to insert the V-belts transmission to the assembly.

File Name Settings | 873

Previous (page 872) | Next (page 874)

Place Constraints
1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Position panel Constrain.

2 Constrain the second pulley axis to the shaft axis using the Mate constraint. The following image shows the correct selection of the constraint for the second pulley axis.

874 | Chapter 34 V-Belts Connections

3 Save the assembly. Previous (page 873) | Next (page 876)

Place Constraints | 875

Summary

In this tutorial, you learned how to: Design V-belts connection with two pulleys.

Design a belt. Set pulley properties. Set file names and display names. Insert a V-belts connection.

Remember to check Help for further information. Previous (page 874)

876 | Chapter 34 V-Belts Connections

Bearings

About this tutorial

Category Time Required

Mechanical Design 15 minutes

877

Tutorial File Used

bearing.iam (ANSI standard)

Set bearing parameters. Set criteria parameters for bearing selection. Insert a bearing.

Prerequisites Install and connect to the Content Center.

Know how to set the active project, and navigate the model space with the various view tools. See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 878)

Start the Generator

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, and then open Bearings bearing.iam.

878 | Chapter 35 Bearings

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab Power Transmission panel

Bearing. NOTE Hold the Ctrl key while clicking the Bearing command to load the Bearing Generator with the default installation data. Previous (page 877) | Next (page 879)

Select the Shaft Cylindrical Face and Start Plane

Specify the position of the first bearing.

1 Click Cylindrical Face assembly.

, and select the shaft face in the

Select the Shaft Cylindrical Face and Start Plane | 879

2 Click Start Plane. bearing will be mated.

Select the plane in the shaft where the

880 | Chapter 35 Bearings

3 Click the Orientation option bearing.

to change the orientation of the

The program automatically inserts the Bearing Inside Diameter (Shaft Diameter) value into the filter dimension edit fields on the right side of the Design tab. NOTE The beginning workflow can vary. You can first select the type of bearing from Content Center, and then specify ranges for outside bearing diameter, shaft diameter, and bearing width. Selecting the shaft cylindrical face is a logical first step, because the program then inserts the values for shaft diameter automatically into the Bearing Generator. Previous (page 878) | Next (page 882)

Select the Shaft Cylindrical Face and Start Plane | 881

Select Type of Bearing

Select the type of Bearing from Content Center. 1 To open Content Center, click the arrow next to the topmost edit field in the dialog box.

2 Click the icon to select Angular Contact Ball Bearings.

The bearing that matches the inserted criteria appears in the lower part of the Design tab. Tips

For bearing selection, Family is recommended. To narrow your selection, you can select Standard when you choose bearings from Content Center.

Previous (page 879) | Next (page 882)

Set Filter Parameters

882 | Chapter 35 Bearings

To narrow bearing selection, you can enter filter values for bearing dimensions. It is not necessary to do so in this tutorial, because previously you selected the cylindrical face in the assembly, and the appropriate Inside Bearing Diameter (Shaft Diameter) range values were inserted into the second row of filter edit fields. These filter edit fields appear on the right side of the Design tab. In this tutorial, we use the ANSI Standard, which usually offers one bearing for one Inside bearing diameter. In the lower part of the Design tab, only one bearing appears. To narrow the selection: 1 In the first row of filter dimensions edit fields, specify a range for bearing outside diameter. 2 In the third row of filter dimensions edit fields, specify a range for bearing width. NOTE You must enter both filter values. They can be identical. Previous (page 882) | Next (page 883)

Update the Bearing List

1 Change the type of bearing or the filter values, as described previously, to activate the Update command.

2 Click the Update command to update the list of bearings that match the filter criteria. Previous (page 882) | Next (page 883)

Select Bearing
When the bearing list is updated, a list of bearings that match the criteria appears in the lower part of the Design tab. In this tutorial, only the SKF ALS 15 bearing displays in the list; however, you must still select it. 1 Move your cursor over the row containing the bearing.

Update the Bearing List | 883

2 Click the row to select the bearing. When you select the bearing, it displays in the field above the list, and the OK command is enabled. Previous (page 883) | Next (page 884)

Perform the Calculation

1 Click the Calculation tab to perform a calculation and strength check. 2 Select the type of calculation. In this tutorial, select the Check calculation option. 3 Enter 100 lbforce for the Radial Load. 4 Set 3000 lbforce for Basic Dynamic Load Rating in the Bearing Properties group box. 5 Click Calculate to perform the calculation. Results appear on the right side of the Calculation tab. NOTE The values of the bearing selected in the Design tab are inserted into the edit fields automatically. Previous (page 883) | Next (page 884)

Insert First Bearing

After you have performed the calculation and strength check described in the previous lesson, you can insert the first bearing. 1 Click OK to display the File Naming dialog box. 2 Clear the Always prompt for filename check box to prevent prompting for a new Design Accelerator file name and component display name every time you create a component. 3 Click OK to insert the bearing into the Autodesk Inventor assembly.

884 | Chapter 35 Bearings

In the next several lessons, we insert a second bearing. Previous (page 884) | Next (page 885)

Start the Generator and Specify Bearing Filter Value

Set the filter to find the appropriate bearing according to the Inside bearing diameter dimension. 1 On the ribbon, click Design tab Power Transmission panel

Bearing. 2 In the right side of the Design tab, click the arrow second From field. 3 Select Measure from the menu. 4 In the assembly, click the shaft element to measure the dimension. next to the

Start the Generator and Specify Bearing Filter Value | 885

The program inserts the Inside bearing diameter value (2 in) into the From field. 5 To insert the end value, enter 2 in the To field.

Previous (page 884) | Next (page 887)

886 | Chapter 35 Bearings

Select Bearing Type

Select the type of Bearing from the Content Center. 1 To open Content Center, click the arrow next to the first edit field.

2 Click the icon to select the Angular Contact Ball Bearings category.

A list of the bearings matching the inserted criteria are displayed in the lower part of the Design tab. 3 Select the ALS 16 bearing. The name of the selected bearing displays in the field above the list. Previous (page 885) | Next (page 887)

Place and Insert Second Bearing

Now, we specify placement of the second bearing.

1 Click Cylindrical Face assembly.

, and select the shaft face in the

Select Bearing Type | 887

2 Ensure the Start Plane command is selected, and select the plane in the shaft where the bearing will be mated.

888 | Chapter 35 Bearings

3 Click the Orientation option bearing.

to change the orientation of the

4 Select the bearing from the list near the bottom of the dialog box. 5 Click OK to insert the second bearing into assembly. 6 Save the assembly.

Previous (page 887) | Next (page 890)

Place and Insert Second Bearing | 889

Summary

In this tutorial, you learned how to: Select bearings from the Content Center according to specific criteria.

Set bearing parameters. Insert bearings.

Previous (page 887)

890 | Chapter 35 Bearings

Disc Cams

About this tutorial

891

Design disc cams.

Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Mechanical Design 20 minutes Cam_Spring.iam

Position the disc cam within the assembly. Set disc cam properties. Add your own motion file. Set a file name and display name for a newly inserted Design Accelerator component. Insert the disc cam into the assembly.

Prerequisites Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with the various view tools.

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 893)

892 | Chapter 36 Disc Cams

Start the Generator

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, and then open Disc Cams and Compression Springs Cam_Spring.iam.

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab Power Transmission panel

Disc Cam

The Disc Cam Generator opens in the Design tab by default. NOTE To load the Disc Cam Component Generator with the default installation data, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking the Disc Cam command. Previous (page 891) | Next (page 894)

Start the Generator | 893

Specify Disc Cam Placement

To insert a model of the disc cam into the assembly: 1 Select Component from the drop-down menu in the Cam region of the dialog box. NOTE If you select the No Model option from the drop-down list, the program inserts only the calculation into the assembly. 2 Click Cylindrical Face, and then select the cylindrical face.

3 Click Start plane, and then select the start plane.

894 | Chapter 36 Disc Cams

Previous (page 893) | Next (page 895)

Specify Disc Cam Parameters

In the Cam region, enter the parameters for the cam: 1 In the Basic Radius field, enter 22 mm. 2 In the Cam Width field, enter 10 mm. 3 Click More Options in the lower right corner of the Design tab.

4 In the Follower Type region, select Swinging Arm. 5 In the Follower Shape region, select Cylinder. 6 In the Follower region (in the upper portion of the dialog box), enter 16 mm in the Roller Radius field. 7 In the Pivot Distance field, enter 60 mm. 8 In the Arm Length field, enter 60 mm. 9 In the Reaction Arm field, enter 60 mm.

Specify Disc Cam Parameters | 895

Previous (page 894) | Next (page 896)

Set Segment Values

1 In the Actual Segment region, select 1 from the drop-down menu. You can also select a segment by clicking the segment in the graph.

You can set segment length by dragging the segment end in the graph area.

2 From the Motion Function drop-down menu, select Double Harmonic - Part 1. 3 Set Motion End Position to 90 degrees. 4 Set Lift at End to 5 mm. 5 In the Actual Segment region, select 2 from the drop-down menu. 6 From the Motion Function drop-down menu, select Double Harmonic - Part 2. 7 Set Motion End Position to 180 degrees.

896 | Chapter 36 Disc Cams

Previous (page 895) | Next (page 897)

Adding Segments
Though you do not add or delete segments in this tutorial, this page describes how to do so. Click Add After in the Actual Segment area to add a new segment after the currently selected segment.

Click Add Before to add new segment before the currently selected segment. Click Delete to delete the currently selected segment. The Zoom command switches on or off the zoom to the cam element graphs only. The Save graph data to file command saves all graph data and data about cam profile and follower path to the tab-delimited text file.

Previous (page 896) | Next (page 898)

Adding Segments | 897

Create Your Own Motion File

The following page is not required to complete this tutorial. The Disc Cam Generator offers a list of motions available within the drop-down menu in the Actual Segment region. You can also define your own type of motion, as well as remove any user-defined motion from the menu. Create and define a motion. 1 Create a text file, and enter the following values for a Polynomial motion of the third degree. NOTE You must format the text file properly. Click the Help command on the Add Motion dialog box for more information.
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 0 0.028 0.104 0.216 0.352 0.5 0.648 0.784 0.896 0.972 1

2 Save the file.

898 | Chapter 36 Disc Cams

3 In the Actual Segment region of the cam generator, click Add new user motion. 4 Enter a motion name. 5 Browse to, and select, the .TXT file you created. 6 Click OK to add your motion to the list of motions. Each user motion appears with the icon.

TIP To delete a user-defined motion, select the motion and then click Delete.

Previous (page 897) | Next (page 899)

Perform the Calculation

You use the Calculation tab to set values to perform calculation and strength check. 1 Switch to the Calculation tab. 2 Select Cycle Time, and enter 1 s. 3 In the Follower Loads region, enter 20 N for the Force on Roller field. 4 For Accelerated Weight, enter 0.010 kg. 5 For Spring Rating, enter 2 N/mm. 6 Enter these values for the Cam Material and Follower Material fields. For the Allowable Pressure field, enter 200 MPa.

For the Modulus of Elasticity field, enter 206700 MPa. For the Poissons Ratio field, enter 0.3 ul.

7 Click Calculate to perform the calculation. The program shows the results on the right side of the Calculation tab. The inputs that fail the calculation are displayed in red (their value does not correspond with other inserted values or calculation criteria). Reports of the calculation are displayed in the Summary of Messages area. It displays when you click the chevron in the lower-right part of the Calculation tab.

Perform the Calculation | 899

TIP Click the HTML report. Click OK.

Results command in the right upper corner to open an

Previous (page 898) | Next (page 900)

File Name Settings

In the File Naming dialog box: 1 Specify the Display name of the disc cam and the File name settings. 2 Select the Always prompt for filename box to prompt for the newly inserted Design Accelerator file name and display name of the component every time you create a component. 3 Click OK to insert the disc cam into the assembly.

900 | Chapter 36 Disc Cams

Previous (page 899) | Next (page 901)

Place Constraints
1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Position panel Constrain

. 2 In the Assembly tab of the Place Constraint dialog box, select the Tangent type to constrain the cam.

Place Constraints | 901

3 Save the assembly. You use this assembly in the Compression Springs tutorial. Previous (page 900) | Next (page 902)

Summary
In this tutorial, you used the Design Accelerator Disc Cam generator to create and edit cams.

902 | Chapter 36 Disc Cams

You learned how to: Design a disc cam.

Position the disc cam within the assembly. Set disc cam properties. Add your own motion file. Set the file name and display name for a newly inserted Design Accelerator component. Insert a disc cam into the assembly.

Refer to the Help for further information. Previous (page 901)

Summary | 903

904

Compression Springs

About this tutorial

905

Design compression springs.

Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Mechanical Design 20 minutes Cam_Spring.iam

Position the compression spring within the assembly. Use the graphical preview. Set compression spring properties. Set file names and display names. Insert the compression spring into the assembly.

Prerequisites Complete the Disc Cams tutorial.

Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with the various view tools. See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 907)

906 | Chapter 37 Compression Springs

Start the Generator

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, and then open Disc Cams and Compression Springs Cam_Spring.iam.

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab Spring panel Compression

. The Compression Spring Generator opens in the Design tab by default, with the last valid settings.

Hold the CTRL key while clicking the Compression command to load the Compression Spring Component Generator with the default installation data.

Start the Generator | 907

We recommend that you create a disc cam using the disc cam tutorial before you design a compression spring, so that your assembly is complete.

Previous (page 905) | Next (page 908)

Specify Compression Spring Placement and Load

1 Click Axis in the Placement region, and then select the cylindrical face of the valve.

2 Select Start Plane. Orbit the assembly and select the start plane of the top retainer as shown on the image below.

908 | Chapter 37 Compression Springs

A graphical preview of the compression spring displays in the Autodesk Inventor assembly.

Specify Compression Spring Placement and Load | 909

A graphical preview of the selected geometry displays in Autodesk Inventor. In the graphical preview of the compression spring, four types of grips are available:

grips to specify the spring diameter grips to specify the wire diameter grip to move the spring along its axis grip to change the coils number

3 To edit a value, drag or double-click the appropriate grip. 4 On the Design tab, in the Placement region, select

Min. Load from the drop-down menu.

910 | Chapter 37 Compression Springs

NOTE When you click the spring reference image at the top of the Design tab, a schematic image with the basic spring dimensions opens.

Previous (page 907) | Next (page 912)

Specify Compression Spring Placement and Load | 911

Measure the Dimension

We can use the Measure command to measure the distance between two faces. The generator automatically designs a compression preview according to the measured distance. 1 Select the Calculation tab. In the Spring Strength Calculation region, select Compression Spring Design from the drop-down menu. 2 In the Assembly Dimensions region select H, L1--> L8. 3 Click the arrow next to the Min. Load Length field. 4 Select Measure. 5 In Autodesk Inventor assembly, select two faces on the spring retainers to measure the distance between them.

912 | Chapter 37 Compression Springs

6 Click Calculate to display the preview. Notice that measured distance of 30 mm appears in the Min. Load Length field.

Measure the Dimension | 913

Previous (page 908) | Next (page 914)

Perform the Calculation

In the Calculation tab, you can set the values for compression spring calculation. 1 In Calculation Options, select F, Assembly Dimensions -->d, L0, n, D from the Design Type drop-down menu. 2 Select No Correction from the Method of Stress Curvature Correction drop-down menu. 3 In the Loads region: Set Min. Load to 500 N.

Set Max. Load to 800 N. Set Working Load to 600 N.

4 Click Calculate to perform the calculation.

914 | Chapter 37 Compression Springs

The program shows results on the right side of the Calculation tab. The inputs that fail the calculation appear in red (their value does not correspond with other inserted values or calculation criteria). Reports of the calculation are displayed in the Summary of Messages area, which appears after you click the chevron in the lower-right part of the Calculation tab. 5 Click the Results command in the right upper corner to open the HTML report. 6 Click OK. Previous (page 912) | Next (page 915)

Insert the Compression Spring into the Assembly

In the File Naming dialog box: 1 Specify the Display name of compression spring and the File name settings. 2 Select the Always prompt for filename box to prompt for the newly inserted Design Accelerator component's file name and display name every time you create a component. 3 Click OK to insert the compression spring to the assembly. When you were designing the compression spring, the program prompted you to select the compression spring placement. The program places the compression spring in the selected position. 4 Save the assembly.

Insert the Compression Spring into the Assembly | 915

Previous (page 914) | Next (page 917)

916 | Chapter 37 Compression Springs

Summary

The skills you learned in this tutorial include: Design a compression spring.

Position the compression spring within the assembly. Use the graphical preview. Set compression spring properties. Set file names and display names. Insert a compression spring into the assembly.

Remember to check Help for further information. Previous (page 915)

Summary | 917

918

Weldments

About this tutorial

Build weldments.
Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Mechanical Design 50 minutes Welding.iam (metric)

919

Create cosmetic and 3D weld beads. Add machining features to a welded assembly. Rollback to any weldment state. Create weldment drawings.

Prerequisites Know how to set the active project, navigate model space with the various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding.

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 920)

Welding Steps Overview

When creating a weld in this tutorial, your steps include the following: 1 Set up your workspace. 2 Open an existing assembly. 3 Change to the weldment environment.

920 | Chapter 38 Weldments

4 Add groove and fillet cosmetic welds. 5 Add post-weld machining features. 6 Examine weld preparations and 3D fillet welds.

After the weldment is complete, you will: Turn off the display of weld symbols in the model.

Open a blank drawing. Create drawing views of the various weldment stages. Retrieve weld symbols from the model. Add a cosmetic weld annotation in the drawing.

Welding Steps Overview | 921

Previous (page 919) | Next (page 922)

Weldment Feature Groups

The three weld groups represent stages in the weldment process: Preparations - Metal removal, typically a chamfer, to prepare for a weld.

Welds - Fillet, groove, and cosmetic weld beads. Machining - Metal removal after welding, often through multiple assembly components.

Features added in the three groups act at the assembly-level only. They do not appear in the individual parts and subassemblies. The following image shows weld and machining features in a weldment assembly.

922 | Chapter 38 Weldments

The weldment features exist in the weldment assembly only and do not affect the part files. You activate the various weldment feature groups with the Weld tab or through the Model browser. To do this, you must first open a Weldment file. 1 Set the active project to tutorial_files. 2 Click New on the Quick Access toolbar. Ensure that you click the icon itself, and not the associated drop-down menu. 3 To ensure that you complete this tutorial using a metric template file, click the Metric tab displayed along the top of the selection area of the dialog box. 4 Double-click the template file Weldment (ANSI - mm).iam.

5 To activate the Preparation feature group, click Preparation on the Weld tab. Commands for creating weld preparations, such as chamfers and assembly-level cut extrusions, become active on the Weld tab. You can also activate one of the three weld groups through the Model browser. For example, if you double-click Welds in the browser, the commands for creating welds, such as Fillet, Groove, and Cosmetic, become active. Alternatively, you can right-click a group in the browser and select Edit from the context menu. 6 Close this file without saving. Previous (page 920) | Next (page 924)

Weldment Feature Groups | 923

Open an Assembly
Two different workflows can be used to create a weldment. You can: Use a weldment template to create an empty weldment into which you then place components and welds.

Open an existing assembly and convert it into a weldment.

In this exercise, you open an existing assembly and convert it into a weldment. 1 Click Open on the Quick Access toolbar, and then open Weldments Welding.iam.

2 Click Zoom All on the Navigation bar to fit the model in the window.

3 On the ribbon, click Environments tab Convert panel Convert to Weldment. A message appears alerting you that the weldment cannot be converted back to an assembly. 4 Click Yes. The Convert to Weldment dialog box displays. 5 Click the ANSI Standard option. 6 Select Welded Steel Mild from the Weld Bead Material drop-down list. 7 Click OK.

924 | Chapter 38 Weldments

The weld feature groups (Preparations, Welds, and Machining) appear in the Model browser. Previous (page 922) | Next (page 925)

Weld Types
You can create three types of weld features: fillet, groove, and cosmetic welds. Cosmetic weld features, the preferred type, are represented by graphical elements. You can represent a wide variety of weld beads as cosmetic welds, including fillet welds and various groove welds. Weld preparations are not required for cosmetic welds. The weld symbol contains the weld preparation required for the selected edges.

Cosmetic weld features do not affect mass properties, and the application does not consider them during interference analysis. You can also create 3D fillet welds. The weld is a true 3D feature in the assembly.

The program evaluates 3D fillet welds in assembly mass properties and interference analysis.

Weld Types | 925

TIP Limit the use of 3D fillet welds to specific cases that require functionality not available in cosmetic welds. Previous (page 924) | Next (page 926)

Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead

In this portion of the tutorial, you add two cosmetic weld beads to the assembly. To add a weld bead, you must first activate the Welds group. 1 In the Model browser, right-click Welds, and then select Edit from the pop-up context menu.

2 On the ribbon, click Weld tab Weld panel Cosmetic . 3 Select the five edges on the Brace part. Edge selections define the extents of the weld bead.

926 | Chapter 38 Weldments

NOTE You may need to use the Select Other command to select the two vertical edges. Previous (page 925) | Next (page 927)

Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead (continued)

1 Click the Create Welding Symbol check box to expand the dialog box, then click Weld Symbol as shown.

2 On the Weld Symbol palette, click Bevel Groove Weld.

Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead (continued) | 927

Previous (page 926) | Next (page 928)

Complete the Cosmetic Weld

1 Define the weld properties: NOTE Pause the cursor over a data entry field, and use the tooltips to identify the field name. Make certain that the Autodesk Inventor application window is active (and not this tutorial window), or tooltips will not appear under the cursor.

Enter 6 mm in the Depth field (use the following illustration for reference). Enter 6 mm in the Leg 2 field. Select the Flat symbol from the Contour drop-down menu. Select G (grind) from the Method drop-down menu (this menu is only visible after you specify a contour).

928 | Chapter 38 Weldments

2 Click OK. NOTE Pause the cursor over a data entry field, and use the tooltips to identify the field name. Make certain that the Autodesk Inventor application window is active (and not this tutorial window), or tooltips will not appear under the cursor. The program represents a cosmetic weld with a bright orange line. The weld symbol is attached to the cosmetic weld.

NOTE Your weld symbol may not appear exactly as shown in the previous illustration.

3 On the ribbon, click Weld tab Return panel Return. 4 Save the file. Previous (page 927) | Next (page 930)

Complete the Cosmetic Weld | 929

Weld Extents
You can control the length of single edge welds by specifying two parallel faces or work planes. 1 In the Model browser, right-click the START WELD work plane, and select Visibility. 2 Repeat for the END WELD work plane. 3 In the Model browser, right-click Welds, and then select Edit.

4 Click Weld tab Weld panel Cosmetic. 5 Click the edge highlighted as shown.

TIP If you select the wrong edge, press the Ctrl key and deselect the edge. Previous (page 928) | Next (page 930)

Complete the Weld Extent

1 In the Cosmetic Weld dialog box, select From-To from the Extents drop-down list. 2 Select the two visible work planes.

930 | Chapter 38 Weldments

TIP Click on the outer edge of a work plane to select it. 3 To specify the weld bead size, begin by clicking the Create Welding Symbol check box to expand the dialog box. 4 Enter 6 mm in the Leg 1 text box. 5 Click OK.

6 Click Return. 7 Turn off the visibility of the two work planes.

NOTE Your weld symbol may not be visible following creation, or it may not appear like the previous illustration. If it is not visible, orbit the model until you can see the symbol. You can click the symbol, and then drag the green grips to resize the symbol leader or move the symbol along the weld. Previous (page 930) | Next (page 931)

Create a 3D Fillet Weld

Next, we add a simple 3D fillet weld to one of the cylindrical reinforcement plates. 1 In the Model browser, double-click the Welds node.

2 On the ribbon, click Weld tab Weld panel Fillet.

Create a 3D Fillet Weld | 931

For a 3D weld, you select sets of faces on two different components. The program creates the weld at the common edges of the faces. 3 Click the channel face adjacent to one of the cylindrical plates.

Previous (page 930) | Next (page 932)

Complete the 3D Fillet Weld

To complete the weld, select the other face to locate the weld.

1 In the dialog box, click the Select Face(s) 2 button. 2 Click the cylindrical face on the adjacent plate.

932 | Chapter 38 Weldments

3 Enter 6 mm in both fields under the selector buttons. 4 Select the Create Welding Symbol check box. 5 Enter 6 mm in the Leg 1 field. 6 Click OK to create a 45 degree fillet with a leg length of 6 mm.

Complete the 3D Fillet Weld | 933

Previous (page 931) | Next (page 934)

Change Weld Symbol Visibility

In larger weldments, the graphics screen can become cluttered with weld symbols. You can control the visibility of weld symbols, or weld features, individually or as a group.

1 Right-click Welds in the Model browser, and then remove the checkmark from Symbol Visibility. The program hides the weld symbols in the graphics window. Alternatively, expand the Welds node and switch the visibility of individual weld symbols.

2 Click Return

to go back to the weldment assembly environment.

Previous (page 932) | Next (page 934)

Add a Machining Feature

Weldments often require machining after welding. The final weld feature group, Machining, provides a way to add assembly-level features that remove material from the welded assembly. To add a machining feature, on the ribbon, click Weld tab Process panel Machining.

934 | Chapter 38 Weldments

Previous (page 934) | Next (page 935)

Add a Hole
1 On the ribbon, click Weld tab Preparation and Machining

panel Hole. 2 In the Holes dialog box, select Concentric from the Placement drop-down menu. 3 Select the top face of one of the cylindrical reinforcement plates. 4 For the circular reference, select the circular edge of the cylindrical plate. 5 Highlight the 3-mm dimension in the Diameter field, and then enter 33 mm as the hole diameter. 6 Select Through All from the Termination drop-down menu. 7 Click OK. The hole feature cuts through the two hole plates and the channel.

NOTE You can add extrude cuts, chamfers, and hole features in both the Preparations and Machining weld groups. Previous (page 934) | Next (page 936)

Add a Hole | 935

Add an Extrude Cut

Add a second machining feature that cuts through one of the welds. 1 On the ribbon, click Weld tab Sketch panel 2D Sketch.

2 Click the top face of the brace highlighted in the following figure.

3 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Draw panel Project

Geometry. 4 Click the edge highlighted as shown.

Previous (page 935) | Next (page 937)

936 | Chapter 38 Weldments

Complete the Sketch

1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Draw panel Center Point

Circle. 2 Move the cursor over the midpoint of the projected line, and then click when the green midpoint symbol appears. 3 Move the cursor away from the center point, and then click again to define the radius of the circle. The exact size of the circle radius is not important. Use the circle in the following figure as a guide.

4 Right-click, and select Done [ESC] from the marking menu.

5 Click Sketch tab Exit panel Finish Sketch or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu. Previous (page 936) | Next (page 937)

Extrude the Sketch

1 On the ribbon, click Weld tab Preparation and Machining

panel Extrude. The program selects the circle profile. 2 Select All from the Extents drop-down list in the Extrude dialog box.

Complete the Sketch | 937

3 Ensure that Direction is selected as shown.

The program previews the cut, which should look like the image below.

4 Click OK. The cut affects the two components and the weld bead.

Previous (page 937) | Next (page 939)

938 | Chapter 38 Weldments

Feature Rollback
The three weldment groups represent time-dependent processes in the creation of a welded assembly. Features from a subsequent process cannot appear when an earlier group is active. For example, machining features do not appear when the Welds group is active. 1 Right-click Welds in the Model browser, and then select Edit from the pop-up context menu. The program rolls back the model to the welding state and removes the two machining features.

2 Click Return. In the weldment assembly environment, all weld group features are visible.

Previous (page 937) | Next (page 940)

Feature Rollback | 939

Create a Weldment Drawing

You can create drawing views of the weldment in the following states: Assembled with no assembly-level features.

Complete with weld preparations. As welded. With all post-weld machining.

To create a weldment drawing: 1 OpenWelding.idw. The drawing contains a blank A0 sheet with a border. 2 On the ribbon, click Place Views tab Create panel Base.

The Drawing View dialog box displays. If Welding.iam is the only model open, it is automatically selected as the source for the drawing. (If nothing is selected it is likely that you have not clicked Return as instructed on the previous panel). 3 If you have multiple models open, click the down arrow next to the File list, and then select Welding.iam from the list. 4 On the Model State tab, select Welds from the Weldment list. 5 On the Component tab, select All Components from the Representation View menu. 6 Select 1/2 from the Scale list. 7 Click Top in the Orientation list. Previous (page 939) | Next (page 940)

Place Drawing Views

To complete the base view: 1 Click the upper-left corner of the sheet as shown.

940 | Chapter 38 Weldments

2 On the ribbon, the Place Views tab Create panel Projected

command is automatically activated. 3 In the graphics window, move the cursor below the base view and click when a preview of an orthographic projection is shown.

Previous (page 940) | Next (page 941)

Complete Orthographic Views

You can continue to place projected views from the base view. 1 Move the cursor to the right of the base view. 2 Click when a preview of an orthographic projection is shown.

Complete Orthographic Views | 941

3 Right-click, and select Create.

Previous (page 940) | Next (page 942)

As-machined Drawing Views

Now create drawing views of the as-machined weldment. 1 On the ribbon, click Place Views tab Create panel Base

to display the Drawing View dialog box. 2 If you have multiple models open, click the down arrow next to the File list, and then select Welding.iam from the list.

942 | Chapter 38 Weldments

3 Select All Components from the View pane on the Component tab. 4 Ensure Machining is selected from the Weldment list on the Model State tab. 5 Select 1/2 from the Scale list. 6 Click Top in the Orientation list. 7 To complete the base view, click to the right of the existing views.

Previous (page 941) | Next (page 943)

Projected Drawing Views

Add two projected drawing views from the base view of the machined state. 1 On the ribbon, the Place Views tab Create panel Projected

command is automatically activated. 2 Add two projected views to match the image shown.

Projected Drawing Views | 943

The machining features appear in the drawing views based on the welded state of the assembly. Previous (page 942) | Next (page 944)

Retrieve Weld Symbols

You can retrieve weld symbols from the model in the drawing views. 1 Right-click the side view of the as-welded assembly. 2 Select Get Model Annotations Get Welding Symbols from the overflow menu. NOTE The overflow menu appears just below or just above the marking menu. Its location depends on where you right-click in the graphics window. Symbols for visible welds in the view are retrieved from the model and displayed. If a weld displays in pink, right-click the symbol, and then select Delete from the overflow menu.

944 | Chapter 38 Weldments

3 To reposition and reorient the symbol, you can click a weld symbol and then drag the green grips. Previous (page 943) | Next (page 945)

Add a Caterpillar
You can add cosmetic weld entities to drawing views in place of, or to improve the documentation of, cosmetic model welds. You can add weld caterpillars and weld end treatment geometry to any drawing view. 1 On the ribbon, click View tab Navigate panel Zoom

Window. 2 Zoom in on the front view of the as-welded assembly, as shown in the following figure.

Add a Caterpillar | 945

Previous (page 944) | Next (page 946)

Add a Caterpillar (continued)

1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab Symbols panel

Caterpillar. 2 Click the five line/arc segments highlighted as shown.

946 | Chapter 38 Weldments

3 Click the Partial command. A partial caterpillar displays on one side of the highlighted edge. 4 Move the cursor away from the view to position the caterpillar toward the outside of the weldment, and click to place the caterpillar. Click the following image to play an animation. Notice how the caterpillar switches sides as the cursor moves. 5 Click the Options tab. 6 Enter 6 mm in the Width edit box. 7 Enter 2 mm in the Spacing edit box. 8 Check Seam Visibility. 9 Click OK.

10 Save your work. Previous (page 945) | Next (page 948)

Add a Caterpillar (continued) | 947

Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to: Create a weldment from an assembly.

Add weld preparation features. Create cosmetic and 3D weld beads. Add machining features to a welded assembly. Rollback to any weldment state. Create weldment drawings.

Previous (page 946)

948 | Chapter 38 Weldments

Sheet Metal Parts

949

About this tutorial

950 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

Build sheet metal parts.

Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Mechanical Design 60 minutes Cylinder Clamp.iam metric_hole.ide 2mm_inplace_guard_start.idw

Add sheet metal-specific annotations to a drawing of the guard.

Prerequisites Complete the Parts 2 and Assemblies tutorials.

Understand the basics of sheet metal fabrication. Understand the material covered in the Help topic Getting Started. Ensure that Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit on the Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is not checked.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 952)

About this tutorial | 951

Get Started
In the first portion of this tutorial, you will create a simple sheet metal guard. You create the guard in the assembly using projected geometry and measurements of assembly components. This workflow ensures that the guard will be sized correctly. There are other ways to start a design. Before you begin the steps of the tutorial, lets review a typical workflow that produces a similar model:

1 A common first step is the creation of a closed profile sketch. 2 Using this closed profile sketch, a sheet metal Face feature is created as the base feature of the model.

952 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

3 Once a base Face feature exists, Flange features can be added. 4 Additional Flange features with automatic mitering can be added to existing Flange features. 5 Finally, a series of Hole features can complete the model. Using a Face feature as the base feature is very common in a stand-alone design workflow. However, the sheet metal part that you are creating will often need to fit inside or over existing parts in an assembly. In the next portion of the tutorial, you open an existing assembly and create a part like the one illustrated. You will use geometry selected in the assembly to determine the size and position of the features that you will create.

Get Started | 953

Previous (page 950) | Next (page 954)

Open the Assembly

1 Set your project to tutorial_files. 2 OpenCylinder Clamp Cylinder Clamp.iam. 3 Using the View Cube, Orbit, or View Face, adjust your view of the assembly so that it appears as follows:

The guard that you are going to create must fit over the base. By creating the sketch for a Contour Flange feature on the face of Cylinder Base.ipt, you can use the geometry of that part while defining your sketch profile geometry. 4 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Create, or right-click and select Create Component from the marking menu. 5 Enter my_2mm_guard in the New Component Name field in the Create In-Place Component dialog box.

954 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

6 Click the Browse Templates button to the right of the Template field, which contains Standard.ipt as the default selection, and select the Metric tab in the displayed Open Template dialog box. 7 Select the Sheet Metal (mm).ipt template, and click OK to enter the selection in the Create In-Place Component dialog box (replacing the default) and close the Open Template dialog box. 8 Click OK to close the Create In-Place Component dialog box. 9 In the graphics window, click to select the back face of Cylinder Base.ipt as shown:

Following the selection of the face shown, an empty sketch within the newly created sheet metal file displays. Next you create a simple open profile sketch to use to create a Contour Flange as the base feature of your guard. Previous (page 952) | Next (page 956)

Open the Assembly | 955

Prepare Your Sketch

NOTE All sketch illustrations in this tutorial show the grid displayed. If you have recently completed either the Parts 1 or Parts 2 tutorials, your sketch grid is undisplayed by changing the Application Options. This tutorial does not require the use of the sketch grid and can be completed with the grid displayed or undisplayed.

While creating a part within an assembly, you are able to see and reference the other parts in the assembly. By default, when you reference geometry in another part, you get an associative relationship to that part. If the original part changes, the geometry that you created also changes to honor the association. In this tutorial, you use an option to reference the geometry without creating the associative reference. In situations where you are certain

956 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

there will be no further design changes, not creating an associative relationship improves subsequent assembly recompute performance. 1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Format panel Construction to ensure that the line you project is construction geometry that will not be used for feature creation. 2 Next, click Sketch tab Draw panel Project Geometry, or right-click and select Project Geometry from the marking menu. 3 While holding down the Ctrl key on your keyboard, click the lower edge of Cylinder Base.ipt as shown:

NOTE Holding down the Ctrl key while projecting geometry breaks the associative link that would normally be obtained. Next, you create a simple, three-line sketch that represents the inside faces of the Contour Flange. It will create the basic shape of the guard. Previous (page 954) | Next (page 958)

Prepare Your Sketch | 957

Create the Open Profile

1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Format panel Construction to reset your geometry creation to normal geometry. 2 Next, click Sketch tab Draw panel Line, or right-click and select Line from the marking menu. 3 In the graphics window, move your cursor over the lower-left corner of Cylinder Base.ipt until you see the green circle. It indicates that you are over the endpoint of the construction line that you previously projected.

4 Click to place the first point of your line. 5 Paying attention to the vertical and horizontal constraint indications, place three line segments: vertical, then horizontal, and then vertical again. Beginning the new segment from the end point of the previous segment ensures that the lines form a single, continuous open profile. Your profile should appear as in the following image:

958 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

NOTE To determine the horizontal endpoint on the right end of segment 2, drag your cursor down to locate the right end point of the construction line that you projected earlier and then move your cursor upwards vertically maintaining that alignment. The lower endpoint of segment 3 should be coincident with the right endpoint of the projected construction line. These three lines represent the inside faces of the Contour Flange that creates the base feature of the sheet metal guard. 6 Click Sketch tab Constrain panel Dimension, or right-click and select Create Dimension from the marking menu. Now, place a vertical dimension of 95 mm to define the height of the guard. Both vertical line segments adjust due to the horizontal constraint that was created when segment 2 was placed.

Create the Open Profile | 959

7 Click Sketch tab Exit panel Finish Sketch, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch to exit the sketch environment. Next, you create the Contour Flange using the open profile sketch you just created. Previous (page 956) | Next (page 960)

Create a Contour Flange

Before you create the Contour Flange, check the Sheet Metal Defaults.

960 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

NOTE Complete the Sheet Metal Styles tutorial (when you have time) to understand the inter-relationships between the Materials, Sheet Metal Rules, and Sheet Metal Unfolding Rules. By correctly establishing a set of Sheet Metal Rules for your work, and ensuring that these rules are set as the default in your Sheet Metal.ipt template, you will be able to begin sheet metal design projects without editing the Sheet Metal Defaults each time you start a new part design. 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Setup panel Sheet Metal Defaults, or right-click and select Sheet Metal Defaults from the marking menu. 2 Take note of the following items: Name of the Sheet Metal Rule

State of the check box for Use Thickness from Rule Value in the Thickness field

If Use Thickness from Rule is checked, and the value in the Thickness field is something other than 2 mm, click the check box to remove the check. 3 The Thickness field is now enabled. Enter 2 mm to replace the value in this field. 4 Click OK to apply the 2-mm thickness to the current model file. NOTE These steps allowed you to override the material thickness declared by the active Sheet Metal Rule. In most cases, you begin your designs using a template that has an appropriate Sheet Metal Rule active. Or, you previously created Sheet Metal Rules for your work that you can select from the drop-down list of Rules available in the shared Styles and Standards library. Now, you can create the Contour Flange. 5 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Create panel Contour Flange. 6 In the graphics window, click over the three-line sketch that you previously completed. Note that the 2-mm thickness of the sheet metal Contour Flange is previewed, and that it is offset to the inside. 7 In the Contour Flange dialog box, click the Flip Side option. The 2-mm material thickness should now be offset to the outside of the profile, as shown in the following image:

Create a Contour Flange | 961

8 With the Contour Flange dialog box active, adjust your view (using either the View Cube or Orbit) to see the side of the model as follows:

962 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

Next, you change the flange creation direction and measure an existing edge to complete the creation of the Contour Flange. Previous (page 958) | Next (page 963)

Complete the Contour Flange

1 In the Contour Flange dialog box (in the Width Extents area), click Distance Flip. 2 Click > to the right side of the Distance field, and select Measure from

the menu. 3 With the Measure option active, click in the graphics window to measure the length of the edge shown. Use the measured value as the Distance value for the Contour Flange.

Complete the Contour Flange | 963

Following the click, the measured value of 120 mm displays in the Distance field and the Contour Flange previews as 120 mm long. 4 Click OK to create the displayed Contour Flange and close the dialog box.

964 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

The sheet metal Contour Flange is the base feature in the model file that you created working within the assembly context. The sheet metal part displays as solid while the other components within the assembly display as translucent. By working within the assembly context you were able to use existing critical dimensions without initially knowing their values. Next, you add a sheet metal Flange feature with automatic mitering around three edges along the back side of the guard. Previous (page 960) | Next (page 965)

Place a Flange Feature

Many sheet metal parts are created by bending a portion of the flat sheet. Use the Flange command to add flat material along an edge, portion of an edge or around all edges of a face. The flat material connects to the selected edge using a bend radius defined within your Sheet Metal Rule. The Flange

Place a Flange Feature | 965

command provides flexibility in the position and size of the flange relative to the selected edge and other features within the evolving model. 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Create panel Flange, or right-click and select Flange from the marking menu. 2 In the graphics window, click to select the three inside edges shown.

As you select the edges, the Flange feature previews. Note that Flanges created from co-planar edges automatically miter at corners that would otherwise interfere. You can access the Auto-miter option from the Corner tab of the Flange dialog box. NOTE For this Flange, be certain to select the three inside edges. By default, sheet metal Flange features are created using the Bend Position option labeled Inside of bend face extents. This produces a Flange face coincident with the selected edge. In this case, such a Flange would not allow clearance for the corners of Cylinder Base.ipt. Instead, you will change the

966 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

Bend Position to Bend from the adjacent face, which uses the selected edge as the beginning location of the bend for the Flange. 3 Click the Bend Position option labeled Bend from the adjacent face.

NOTE As you click this option, notice that the preview of the three Flange faces moves out from the selected edges. To see this change more clearly, display the model as Wireframe (View tab Appearance panel Wireframe from under the Visual Style drop-down menu), and view the model from the Top. Switch between Inside of bend face extents and Bend from the adjacent face (be certain to return to Bend from the adjacent face, then reset your display to Shaded and reset your view angle, before continuing). 4 For this Flange feature, use the default value of 90 degrees for the Flange Angle, as well as the default value of 25 mm for the Height Extents Distance. 5 Click OK to create the Flange and close the Flange dialog box.

Place a Flange Feature | 967

Next, you create a sketch containing center marks for punched holes. Previous (page 963) | Next (page 968)

Prepare to Sketch Punch Center Marks

1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Sketch panel Create 2D Sketch, or right-click and select 2D Sketch from the marking menu. Next, select the face of the guard shown in the following image:

968 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

NOTE If you have not already cleared the Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit application option as specified in the tutorial Prerequisites, this sketch and all subsequent sketches made in this tutorial will have unnecessary projected geometry. 2 If necessary, adjust your view normal to the sketch using the View Cube or the View Face command. Click View tab Appearance panel Shaded with Hidden Edges from the drop-down menu under Visual Style. Use this orientation and display to see edges of other components within the assembly. Your view should appear as follows:

Prepare to Sketch Punch Center Marks | 969

You will again create non-associative construction geometry, as you did when you began your sketch for the Contour Flange base feature. 3 Click Sketch tab Format panel Construction. 4 Click Sketch tab Draw panel Project Geometry, or right-click and select Project Geometry from the marking menu. 5 While holding down the Ctrl key on your keyboard, click the outside circular edge of Lock Pin:1 as shown:

This projected circle provides the location for a sketched Center Point. It locates a Punch feature (used to provide clearance for the pin), as well as the alignment for two additional Center Points that will be used to

970 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

locate punched mounting holes to attach the guard to Cylinder Base.ipt. Continue by adding two construction line segments. Previous (page 965) | Next (page 971)

Sketch Punch Centers

1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Draw panel Line, or right-click and select Line from the marking menu. 2 In the graphics window, move your cursor into the center of the construction circle previously projected. When the green dot appears, indicating that you have located the center of the projected circle, click to place the first point of a line segment:

3 Paying attention to the vertical and horizontal constraint indicators, place a vertical and a horizontal construction line segment by selecting two additional points. Your profile should appear as follows:

Sketch Punch Centers | 971

4 Click Sketch tab Constrain panel Dimension or right-click and select Create Dimension from the marking menu Then, place a horizontal length dimension of 85 mm that defines the distance between the guard mounting holes. 5 Continue by placing a vertical dimension of 8 mm between the bottom edge of the guard and the horizontal construction line:

6 Click Sketch tab Format panel Construction to reset your geometry creation to normal geometry. 7 Click Sketch tab Draw panel Point.

972 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

8 Place three sketch points at the ends of the two construction line segments. 9 Click Sketch tab Exit panel Finish Sketch, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch to exit the sketch environment. NOTE You can optionally continue to work with a hidden edge display. The remaining illustrations in this tutorial show a shaded display. To return to a shaded display, click View tab Appearance panel Shaded from the drop-down menu under Visual Style.

Now that you have sketched Center Points, you will next place two different-sized Punch features to provide clearance for the pin and holes for mounting screws. Previous (page 968) | Next (page 973)

Punch Holes
While there are several ways to create circular holes in your sheet metal part, using a round Punch feature provides you with annotation benefits when you detail the flat pattern of your design.

Punch Holes | 973

NOTE This tutorial uses an example Sheet Metal Punch iFeature that contains the two punch sizes required by this tutorial. The IDE file that contains this punch is located in the default project folder that is active when the tutorial_files project is active. To learn more about Sheet Metal Punch iFeatures, please review the Skill Builders posted to: http:\\www.autodesk.com\inventor-skillbuilder These sheet metal Skill Builders can be found by clicking on the Parts heading. 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Punch Tool. 2 The Punch Tool Directory dialog box opens. By default, it displays Punch Tools that are stored in the Punches folder, which is located in the Catalog folder under the default installation folder. Click Workspace in the navigation panel on the upper-left side of the Punch Tool Directory dialog box to switch to the Tutorial Files folder. 3 Select Cylinder Clamp metric_hole.ide, and click Open to display the Punch Tool dialog box. 4 The example file includes punches of two different sizes; however, the 2.5-mm diameter punch is previewed on the three center points in the displayed and unconsumed sketch. While the 2.5-mm diameter punch is needed on two of the center points, you must first clear the center point that will be used for the 12-mm punch. While holding the Shift key, move your cursor over the center point as shown, and click to clear the center point.

5 Click Finish in the Punch Tool dialog box to place the 2.5-mm diameter punch on the remaining two center points and close the dialog box. Next, you follow a similar set of steps to place the 12-mm diameter punch.

974 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

Previous (page 971) | Next (page 975)

Punch Holes (continued)

1 Click + to the left of the Folded Model node in the Model browser to view the expanded feature tree.

2 Click + to the left of the iFeature in the Model browser. 3 Right-click the sketch node located under the table node, and click Share Sketch on the context menu. The sketch that was consumed (and hidden) by the placement of the Sheet Metal Punch iFeature is redisplayed. This provides you with a visible sketch to use while placing the 12-mm diameter punch. Notice that a new sketch node is placed in the Model browser above the feature that originally consumed the sketch. 4 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Punch Tool. 5 Click Workspace in the navigation panel on the upper-left side of the Punch Tool Directory dialog box. 6 Select the metric_hole.ide file, and click Open. 7 Click the Punch tab in the Punch Tool dialog box. 8 Click the text string ADSK-METRIC-25 to display the list of selectable keys that exist for this Sheet Metal Punch. NOTE You must click directly on the text string ADSK-METRIC-25. Clicking the line with the text will not work. 9 Click on ADSK-METRIC-120 to change the selection. 10 Click Refresh in the Punch Tool dialog box to refresh the displayed preview of the Punch iFeature to be placed.

Punch Holes (continued) | 975

11 Click Finish to place the 12-mm diameter Punch iFeature and close the Punch Tool dialog box. 12 Right-click the shared sketch node in the Model browser (the node above the first iFeature node), and click Visibility to remove the check mark and hide the shared sketch geometry. Next, you mirror the punched holes. Previous (page 973) | Next (page 976)

Mirror the Punched Holes

To complete the folded model of your guard, mirror the three punched holes to the face on the opposite side. The Mirror functionality requires a plane to

976 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

mirror across, and due to the steps used to construct this part, you cannot simply use one of the origin planes. 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Work Features panel Plane and select Midplane between Two Parallel Planes from the drop-down menu. 2 In the graphics window, click the outside face shown in the following illustration:

3 Now, rotate the view and click the outside face on the opposite side. The new work plane is created midplane between the two outside faces.

Mirror the Punched Holes | 977

4 Click Sheet Metal tab Pattern panel Mirror. 5 Click in the Model browser to select the iFeature node of the first 2.5-mm Punch. 6 Click again in the Model browser to select the iFeature node of the second 12-mm Punch. 7 Click the Mirror Plane selection arrow in the Mirror dialog box to enable selection of the mirror plane. 8 In the graphics window, click the midplane work plane that you created in the middle of the guard. 9 Click OK to mirror the selected Punch iFeatures and close the Mirror dialog box. Notice that a Mirror node appears in the Model browser.

978 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

The mirrored features now appear on the opposite side of the guard.

Next, you create a flat pattern of your folded model. Previous (page 975) | Next (page 979)

Create the Flat Pattern

You have finished adding features to the folded model. Many of these features added bends using the default bending radius. Some of these features left gaps or corner reliefs using rules specified in the active Sheet Metal Rule. When the folded model is flattened, these features result in a flat sheet that can be detailed in preparation for manufacturing. Bend lines and bend extents are shown on the flat pattern and attributes of the punched iFeatures can be recovered during the creation of a drawing of the flat pattern. 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Flat Pattern panel Create Flat Pattern.

Create the Flat Pattern | 979

Because you are working within a sheet metal part that is active within an assembly, the sheet metal part file will be opened in isolation, and the flat pattern will be created.

2 Double-click the Folded Model icon at the top of the Model browser to return to the folded model. NOTE Alternatively, you can also click Flat Pattern tab Folded Part panel Go to Folded Part to return to the folded model state. 3 Click Save. 4 Close the copy of the my_2mm_guard file that was opened. 5 Double-click the Cylinder Clamp.iam node at the top of the browser to return to the assembly. 6 Click Save to save the assembly. 7 Close the assembly. Next, you add both a bend and punch table to a partially completed drawing of the guard. Previous (page 976) | Next (page 981)

980 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

Flat Pattern Drawing Annotation

1 Open the file 2mm_inplace_guard_start.idw, located in \Tutorial Files\Cylinder Clamp. NOTE This drawing contains several views of a completed example guard that is supplied with the example tutorial files. 2 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab Table panel General. The Table dialog box displays, and the view selection cursor is active in the graphics window. 3 Move your cursor over the view of the flat pattern until you see the dotted red view boundary highlight.

Flat Pattern Drawing Annotation | 981

4 Click to select the flat pattern view as the source view for the General table. NOTE The General table type provides column selections unique to the type of source view selected. In this case, the table provides bend information. 5 Click OK in the table dialog box to accept the default selections, close the dialog box, and place the table. 6 Move your cursor over the upper-left corner of the drawing border. When your cursor changes to indicate a point on constraint, click to place the table.

982 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

A table is created with columns for Bend ID, Bend Direction, Bend Angle, and Bend Radius using the values for each of the bends in the selected view. Also, notice that the Bend ID numbers have been added to the flat pattern view near the bend centerlines. The bend sequence identified is not likely to match the sequence your fabrication shop uses. Modifying the bend order sequence and adjusting the table is covered in the Sheet Metal Parts 2 tutorial. Next, you place a punch table on the drawing. Previous (page 979) | Next (page 983)

Place a Punch Table

1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab Table panel Hole View (use the down arrow to the right of Hole to display Hole View). 2 Move your cursor over the view of the flat pattern until you see the dotted red view boundary highlight, and click to select the view. 3 Move the datum target cursor along the lower edge of the flat pattern, until you reach the left-most corner and the point on constraint is indicated.

Place a Punch Table | 983

4 Click to select this point as the datum for dimensioning the punched holes. 5 Move the displayed outline of the table to align it with the lower-left corner of the drawing boarder. When the point on constraint is indicated, click to place the table.

6 Right-mouse click over the table, and select Edit Hole Table from the context menu to display the Edit Hole Table: View Type dialog box.

984 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

7 Click Column Chooser on the Formatting tab of the dialog box to display the Hole Table Column Chooser dialog box. 8 In this dialog box, select Description from the list of Selected Properties, and click Remove. 9 Select HOLE DIAMETER in the list of Available Properties, and click Add. 10 Select PUNCH ID in the list of Available Properties, and click Add. 11 Click OK to accept the new column arrangement and close the Hole Table Column Chooser dialog box. 12 Click OK in the Edit Hole Table: View Type dialog box to update the table using the new column arrangement and close the dialog box. 13 Save the drawing of the guard flat pattern. Previous (page 981) | Next (page 985)

Summary

Summary | 985

In this tutorial, you learned a basic workflow for creating a sheet metal part and placing sheet metal annotations on a flat pattern drawing. Some key points of this exercise include: Working within the context of an assembly, you were able to use assembly geometry to define key design aspects of your sheet metal part.

Sheet metal features are often created on one side or the other of a selection to take into account the material thickness or bend radius. Sheet metal Punch iFeatures simplify the creation of simple and complex cut (and formed) features on your model. Punch iFeatures carry attribution that can be recovered in a Punch table on your drawings. Bends created by features display a bend centerline and bend extents on the flat pattern. These bends can be easily identified in a Bend table on your drawing that contains important manufacturing attributes. The flat pattern of your folded model is easily created and provides an accurate representation of the flattened bend zones between adjacent features. The size of these flattened bend zones are determined by the Unfold Rule defined within the active Sheet Metal Rule used when you begin a new sheet metal model from a template.

What Next? - As a next step, continue to explore sheet metal functionality by completing the Sheet Metal Parts 2 tutorial. Previous (page 983)

986 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

Sheet Metal Parts 2

About this tutorial

Explore sheet metal functionality.

Category Mechanical Design

987

Time Required Tutorial File Used

60 minutes Start a new sheet metal part (metric) contour_roll-start.ipt sm_part2_model-completed.ipt (finished version)

Rip features Bend order sequence Cosmetic centerline features Contour Roll features Unfold features, with features added to the flattened model Added refold features

Prerequisites Complete the tutorial Sheet Metal Parts.

Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with the various view tools. See the Help topic Getting Started for further information. Ensure that Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit on the Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is not checked.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 989)

988 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Lofted Flange - Select Profile Sketches

The Lofted Flange feature provides a way to create transitional sections in your model. They may be the only (or primary) feature in a model or they may be part of a more complex design. The Lofted Flange feature requires the selection of two profile sketches. The profiles can be open or closed (or one of each) and can be on parallel or non-parallel sketch planes. The resulting feature can be optionally targeted at either a press brake or die-form manufacturing process. 1 To begin this exercise, begin a new sheet metal part using the Sheet Metal (mm).ipt template. 2 In the open sketch, create a 1400-mm circle centered on 0,0.

Lofted Flange - Select Profile Sketches | 989

3 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Exit panel Finish Sketch, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu. 4 Create a Work Plane offset (up) from the XY Origin Plane by 2000 mm. 5 On this new offset Work Plane, create a 2D sketch. 6 In the sketch create a 600 mm x 600-mm square. Apply 300-mm dimensions so that the square is centered on 0,0. 7 Place a point on the mid-point of one side of the square. NOTE This point is not required for the Lofted Flange; however, you will use it later to create a Rip feature to flatten the Lofted Flange.

990 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

8 Click Sketch tab Exit panel Finish Sketch, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu. 9 Hide the work plane that you created and the XY origin plane (if displayed). Hide the dimensions on both Sketch1 and Sketch2. Your model should appear as shown in the following image from the default Home View (F6).

Lofted Flange - Select Profile Sketches | 991

Next, you create the Lofted Flange. Previous (page 987) | Next (page 993)

992 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Lofted Flange - Create the Flange

1 Before you create the Lofted Flange, on the ribbon click Sheet Metal tab Setup panel Sheet Metal Defaults, or right-click and select Sheet Metal Defaults from the marking menu. 2 In the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box, clear the Use Thickness from Rule option. Enter a value of 4 mm in the Thickness value entry field. 3 Click OK to accept the new material thickness and close the dialog box. 4 Click Sheet Metal tab Create panel Lofted Flange. 5 In the graphics window, click to select the sketched square as Profile 1. 6 Click to select the sketched circle as Profile 2. A preview of the resulting Lofted Flange displays using the default settings. 7 Since Press Brake is the selected Output option, the preview shows a Lofted Flange that can be created using straight bends. This results in a faceted approximation of the circle. There are three methods that you can use to adjust the resulting facets. In this exercise, you increase the default value for the Chord Value. Highlight the value of 0.5 mm, and enter a new value of 4 mm. Notice that your preview adjusts to show fewer facets. NOTE If you have die-forming fabrication available, you can optionally select Die Form as the Output option. Doing so results in a smooth, conical transition from the circular profile to the square profile. 8 Another optional selection determines if the material thickness is on one side or the other of the sketched profile. To see this better, zoom in to the point that you created on the square profile sketch. By default, the material is offset to the outside of the selected profile. In this exercise, you want the dimensioned size of the profile to represent the outside of the resulting part. The material must be offset to the inside of the profile. Click the middle Flip Side.

Lofted Flange - Create the Flange | 993

Notice the material thickness now previews to the inside of the profile. 9 Click OK in the Lofted Flange dialog box to accept the edits you have made, create the Lofted Flange, and close the dialog box.

Because you selected two closed profiles to create this Lofted Flange, the model will not currently create a flat pattern. Next, you add a Rip feature to allow the model to flatten. Previous (page 989) | Next (page 994)

Rip
Like its physical counterpart, a folded sheet metal model that forms a continuous tube-like shape cannot be flattened. The Rip feature provides an easy way to create a cut in a face of the model that will allow the flat pattern to be produced.

994 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

To create a Rip feature, you select a face of the model and (optionally) either one or two points that lie on the selected face. If you select an outside face, any points selected must be on an edge of the outside face. Optionally, you might select an entire face to be removed. TIP In this exercise, the point used to locate the Rip feature was added to one of the Lofted Flange profile sketches. Another technique is to create a 2D sketch on a flat face of a Lofted Flange targeted for Press Brake output. Then place a point at a strategic vertex or edge midpoint. 1 In the Model browser, click the + to the left of Lofted Flange1. Right-click Sketch2, and select Visibility in the context menu to make Sketch2 visible. 2 Adjust your view of the model so that the edge of the sketched square which contains the point is visible on top.

3 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Rip. 4 Select the face to be ripped (which contains the sketch point along the edge).

Rip | 995

5 Select the point you previously created that defines the location of the single-point Rip.

996 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

With the point selected, the Rip feature previews.

Rip | 997

NOTE The Rip can cut a bend face adjacent to the selected face; however, a rip cannot cut across a bend face and through a second face. In this example, if the point was located anywhere other than the midpoint of the edge, the rip could not be created. 6 Click OK in the Rip dialog box to create the Rip feature and close the dialog box. 7 In the Model browser, right-mouse select Sketch2, and click Visibility in the pop-up context menu to switch off Sketch2 visibility. Previous (page 993) | Next (page 998)

Rip (continued)
The previous Rip feature exercise directed you to create a sketch point to serve as the rip point. While the creation of sketch points are required for certain rip workflows, there are many instances where sketch points are not necessary. Inventor also accepts work points, midpoints on edges, or endpoints on face vertices as valid rip point selections.

998 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Now, you will delete the rip feature and try creating it once again. But this time, you will use the midpoint on the top edge of the 600mm x 600mm square as the rip point. 1 First, make sure that the Sketch2 visibility is turned off as previously directed. 2 Next, right-click the Rip node in the Model browser and select Delete from the pop-up context menu. Your model should appear as shown.

3 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Rip. 4 As you did before, select the identical top face to rip.

Rip (continued) | 999

5 Next, move your cursor to the midpoint of the top edge. When the midpoint appears, click to select.

1000 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

6 With the midpoint selected, the Rip feature previews.

Rip (continued) | 1001

7 Click OK in the Rip dialog box to create the Rip feature and close the dialog box. Next, you will create a flat pattern of the ripped Lofted Flange. Previous (page 994) | Next (page 1003)

1002 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Flatten the Ripped Lofted Flange

Now that the Lofted Flange has had a Rip feature applied it is no longer a continuous closed shape. It is now possible to create a flat pattern suitable for manufacture. 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Flat Pattern panel Create Flat Pattern.

Flatten the Ripped Lofted Flange | 1003

The flat pattern displays the bend centerlines and the bend extent lines which indicate the bend zones required to flatten the lofted flange. NOTE You can easily add a Rip feature to a lofted flange created from two closed profiles and generate a valid flat pattern. Your manufacturing shop may prefer to fabricate this type of part as two pieces. Using this flat pattern, you next explore Bend Order Annotation. Previous (page 998) | Next (page 1005)

1004 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Bend Order Annotation

To accommodate efficient manufacturing, bends must often be created on the shop floor in a specific sequence. The manufacturing sequence has little in common with the design sequence. Using the flat pattern you currently have open, you can explore modifications to the bend order sequence. 1 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab Manage panel Bend Order Annotation.

Notice that a series of numbers appear within circles with a yellow background. As you proceed, focus on these numbered symbols in the upper portion of the flat pattern:

Bend Order Annotation | 1005

As you can see, these numbers do not currently have a logical sequence:

1006 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Next, you explore creating a directed sequence of bend overrides. NOTE Do not be concerned if the order of the numbered symbols on your flat pattern differ from those shown in the images. Previous (page 1003) | Next (page 1007)

Directed Reorder
1 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Directed Reorder from the pop-up context menu. The Directed Reorder method of applying bend sequence overrides requires that you select a beginning bend and an ending bend. The system applies a new bend order sequence between the selected bends.

Directed Reorder | 1007

2 Click the upper-most bend symbol (labeled A in the previous image) to select the starting position of the override sequence. 3 Click the lower-most bend symbol (labeled B) to select the ending position. Notice that the symbols all change from yellow circles to green squares.

1008 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Also notice that the numbering sequence has been changed. The bend you selected as the starting position is now numbered 1. The remaining bends are numbered in sequence to the bend that you selected as the ending position.

Directed Reorder | 1009

Next, you explore creating a sequential reorder of bend identification overrides. Previous (page 1005) | Next (page 1010)

Sequential Reorder
If you were happy with the sequence you obtained, you can right-click and select Done, then right-click again and select Finish Bend Order. Alternatively, pressing Esc twice is equivalent to selecting Done and Finish Bend Order from the pop-up context menu. Since this is an exercise, you will not keep the directed sequence that you created. 1 Right-click, and select Remove All Overrides from the pop-up context menu. Notice that the green squares revert to yellow circles and the numbering sequence returns to the initial sequence generated by Autodesk Inventor. 2 Right-click again, and select Sequential Reorder from the pop-up context menu.

1010 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Use sequential reordering to pick bends manually in the order that you need them to be manufactured. 3 Beginning again with the upper-most bend, click every other bend. As you click a bend, notice that the yellow circle again changes to a green square. The numbers change to correspond to the selected sequence. Click two or three more bends until you get the feel of this technique.

As explained previously, when you are happy with the reordered sequence, press Esc twice, or use Done followed by Finish Bend Order from the context menu. 4 Since this is an exercise, right-click again and select Remove All Overrides from the context menu followed, by Finish Bend Order to exit the command. NOTE In a third method of editing the bend order, you select a single, individual bend and change the bend order identification. Next, you explore converting lines sketched on your flat pattern into cosmetic centerlines. Previous (page 1007) | Next (page 1012)

Sequential Reorder | 1011

Cosmetic Centerlines - Create Sketched Lines

Cosmetic centerlines are straight lines sketched on a flat pattern that are converted to bend lines with bend extent lines. They represent bends that do not exist in your folded model, possibly stiffening creases or a bend line you want to place on a die-formed portion of your flat pattern. Cosmetic centerlines carry bend attributes that can be recovered in drawings. They can be sequenced using the Bend Order Annotation techniques explored in the previous exercise. 1 Click to select the face of the flat pattern.

1012 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

NOTE If you did not clear the Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit application option, as specified in the Prerequisites at the beginning of this tutorial, the sketch and all subsequent sketches made in this tutorial will have unneeded projected geometry. 2 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab Sketch panel Create 2D Sketch, or right-click and select New Sketch from the marking menu. 3 Click OK in the dialog box that displays the message Edits to the flat pattern are exclusively applied to the flat pattern and will not be reflected on the folded model. 4 Sketch two straight lines as shown:

Cosmetic Centerlines - Create Sketched Lines | 1013

NOTE In this example, the size and position are not critical so dimensions will not be applied. In your designs, you will likely want to apply dimensions to position these lines accurately. 5 Click Sketch tab Exit panel Finish Sketch, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu. Next, you convert the sketched lines to cosmetic centerlines.

1014 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Previous (page 1010) | Next (page 1015)

Cosmetic Centerlines - Convert Sketched Lines

1 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab Create panel Cosmetic Centerline, or right-click and select Cosmetic Centerline from the marking menu. The Cosmetic Centerlines dialog box displays, and bend direction information appears on the existing bends in the flat pattern. The Sketched Bend Lines selection cursor is active. 2 Select the two straight lines that you added to the sketch. Notice that the bend direction for these two lines differs from the bend direction of the other bends. This may or may not suit your purposes. To minimize material handling during the creation of this example part, you change the bend direction. 3 Click the Specifies Bend Up or Bend Down button in the Cosmetic Centerlines dialog box to change the bend direction attribute.

Notice that the displayed bend attributes of the sketched lines now match the displayed bend attributes of the other bend lines on the flat pattern. 4 Change the Bend Angle value to 3 degrees in the Cosmetic Centerlines dialog box. 5 Click OK in the Cosmetic Centerlines dialog box to create the cosmetic centerlines using the specified attributes and close the dialog box. Notice that the sketched lines now display using the Bend Centerline linetype. Using the techniques learned in the Bend Order Annotation exercise, click Flat Pattern tab Manage panel Bend Order Annotation, or right-click and select Bend Order from the marking menu. Notice that the cosmetic centerlines now participate in the bend order sequence.

Cosmetic Centerlines - Convert Sketched Lines | 1015

These cosmetic centerlines can now be included in bend tables and bend notes you create in your drawings. 6 Click the Esc key to exit Bend Order Annotation. 7 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab Folded Part panel Go to Folded Part, or right-click and select Go to Folded Part from the marking menu, to return to the folded model state. 8 You can Save your exercise file; however, the file is not used in further exercises. 9 Close the file that you have been using for these exercises. Next, you will add Contour Roll features to a supplied sheet metal part. Previous (page 1012) | Next (page 1017)

1016 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Contour Roll

Creating digital prototypes of roll formed sheet metal parts in Autodesk Inventor requires using a Contour Roll feature. The Contour Roll command creates a feature like a Contour Flange that uses a sketched profile as well as a sketched axis of revolution. The profile and axis geometry must exist within the same sketch. In this exercise, you open a file that contains a straight Contour Flange feature. You add two Contour Roll features and a final Contour Flange. You then create a flat pattern of the resulting folded model. 1 Set your project to tutorial_files. 2 Open Sheet Metal Parts 2 contour_roll-start.ipt.

Contour Roll | 1017

3 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Sketch panel Create 2D Sketch, or right-click and select New Sketch from the marking menu. 4 When prompted to select a plane or sketch, select the top face of the Contour Flange feature as shown:

1018 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

NOTE All sketch illustrations in this tutorial show the grid displayed. If you recently completed either the Parts 1 or Parts 2 tutorials, you have undisplayed the sketch grid by changing the Application Options. This tutorial does not require the use of the sketch grid and may be completed with the grid displayed or undisplayed. Next, you project edges into the sketch. Previous (page 1015) | Next (page 1019)

Project Contour Roll Profile Geometry

In this exercise, you project the edges of the existing Contour Flange and add a straight line as the axis of revolution. However, you can use any open profile consisting of lines, arcs, splines, and elliptical arcs to create a Contour Roll feature.

Project Contour Roll Profile Geometry | 1019

NOTE The Contour Roll feature will transform sharp sketch corners into bends in the finished part using the bend radius value. This behavior is like the Contour Flange feature and is not apparent in the following exercise. 1 If necessary, orient your sketch using the View Cube or View Face so that you are looking at the sketch plane. 2 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Draw panel Project Geometry, or right-click and select Project Geometry from the marking menu. 3 In the graphics window, click to select the lines and arcs that define the outside edge of the Contour Flange feature as shown:

NOTE Be sure to select individual lines and arcs rather than the face loop of the detail faces. 4 Click Sketch tab Draw panel Line, or right-click and select Line from the marking menu.

1020 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

5 Create a line to represent your axis of revolution as shown:

NOTE The length of this line is not important; however, the line should be parallel to the short, horizontal line segments that you projected into your sketch. You can either imply the parallel constraint as you draw the line or add a parallel constraint after the line has been drawn.

Project Contour Roll Profile Geometry | 1021

6 Click Sketch tab Constrain panel Dimension, or right-click and select General Dimension from the marking menu. Place a 100-mm dimension between the line you created and the short, horizontal line segment that you projected into your sketch. 7 Click Sketch tab Exit panel Finish Sketch, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu. 8 If necessary, right-click and select Home View from the overflow menu (or press F6) to reorient your view to an isometric view. Previous (page 1017) | Next (page 1022)

Create a Contour Roll

1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Create panel Contour Roll. The Contour Roll dialog box displays, you are prompted to select an open profile. 2 In the graphics window, click the edge geometry that you projected into your sketch. The selected geometry highlights, and the Axis selection button becomes active. 3 In the graphics window, click the straight line that you created parallel to the projected edge and then offset with a 100-mm dimension. A 90 degree Contour Roll section previews; however, what is previewed is not what you want for this exercise. 4 Clear the default Rolled Angle value of 90 deg degrees and enter 30 deg into the value field. Your preview should now appear as follows:

1022 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

5 Click OK to create the 30-degree Contour Roll segment and close the dialog box. Next, you repeat these steps with a few minor differences to create a similar Contour Roll that sweeps 30 degrees in the opposite direction. Previous (page 1019) | Next (page 1023)

Create a Second Contour Roll

1 Repeat the steps you used to create the Contour Roll feature, using the end face of the edge of the first Contour Roll as the new sketch plane:

Create a Second Contour Roll | 1023

2 As you did previously, project the outside edges of the sheet metal material, and then add a straight line segment. This straight line segment should be on the side of (and parallel to) the long horizontal projection and offset by 100 mm. For the previous contour roll, the axis of revolution was on the side of the two short horizontal segments. By putting the axis on the opposite side of the profile, the revolution will curve in the opposite direction when you create this contour roll.

1024 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

3 With your sketch completed, create the Contour Roll feature. Notice that the Rolled Angle value is 30 degrees, the last value you used in this command. It is the value you will use for this second contour roll. Your preview should appear as shown in the following image.

Create a Second Contour Roll | 1025

4 Click OK to create the second 30-degree contour roll segment and close the dialog box. As a final modeling step, you will use the same sketch and project edges technique to create a sketch to use for a second contour flange. Previous (page 1022) | Next (page 1026)

Add another Contour Flange

1 Repeat the steps you used to create the Contour Roll feature, using the end face of the edge of the second Contour Roll as the new sketch plane. 2 As you did previously, project the outside edges of the sheet metal material. You are now ready to create the Contour Flange feature.

1026 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

3 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Create panel Contour Flange. The Contour Flange dialog box displays. Select the profile you just projected. Expand the dialog box using More (>> in the lower right), and use the Width Extents type of Distance and a value of 200 mm. 4 Click OK to create the second 200-mm Contour Flange segment and close the dialog box. Your completed model should appear similar to the following image. Adjust your view of the model as needed.

Next, you create a flat pattern. Previous (page 1023) | Next (page 1028)

Add another Contour Flange | 1027

Flatten the Rolled Tube

Because the Contour Flanges and Contour Roll features have formed an open tube, you can create a flat pattern without adding any additional features. 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Flat Pattern panel Create Flat Pattern. The flat pattern is created. The Flat Pattern tab displays as the active ribbon tab.

1028 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

The flat pattern displays the bend centerlines and bend extents for the four 90-degree bends that form the square tube, It also displays as the two roll centerlines for the two 30-degree rolls created by the Contour Roll features. Bend centerlines, bend extents, roll centerlines, and roll extents are all exported to separate layers when a flat pattern is exported to DWG or DXF formats to facilitate flexibility in CNC manufacturing.

Flatten the Rolled Tube | 1029

In the final portion of this tutorial, you explore the use of the Unfold and Refold feature. You unroll and unfold the model that you created, adding some features and then refolding and rerolling the model. Previous (page 1026) | Next (page 1030)

Unfold and Refold Feature Pair

There are some features that are easier to create when the model is flat. Use the Unfold feature to unfold (or unroll) all or some of the bends (or rolls) within your model. With the model unfolded, you can then add features and use Refold features to return the model to the folded state. In this portion of the tutorial, you unroll the two Contour Roll features and unfold two of the four bends that form the square tube. You add a hole which you will pattern down the length of the part. To complete the exercise, you add two Refold features to refold and reroll the model. The completed model will appear as shown in the following image.

1 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab Folded Part panel Go to Folded Part, or right-click and select Go to Folded Part from the marking menu, to return to the folded model.

1030 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

NOTE Alternatively, you can also double-click the Folded Model node in the Model browser to return to the folded model state. 2 If necessary, right-click and select Home View from the pop-up context menu (or press F6) to change the view to an isometric orientation. 3 Click Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Unfold. The Unfold dialog box displays, and two stationary reference planes appear at either end of the Contour Roll features.

4 In this exercise, we first unroll the Contour Roll features. Click in the graphics window to select the lower stationary reference plane.

Unfold and Refold Feature Pair | 1031

Once you select a stationary reference, the rolls that can be unrolled relative to that reference are highlighted. Next, you continue with additional Unfold selection steps. Previous (page 1028) | Next (page 1032)

Continue Unfold Selection

1 Click to select the lower curved face as shown in the following image.

1032 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

As you select faces, the preview shows the model state that results by unrolling the selection.

Continue Unfold Selection | 1033

2 In this exercise, we straighten the tube completely. Click the upper curved face (not the preview graphic) to select the second rolled face.

1034 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Once the second rolled face is selected, the model again previews the unroll results.

Continue Unfold Selection | 1035

3 Click Apply in the Unfold dialog box to straighten the model as shown in the preview and to reset the dialog box for the next round of unfolds. Next, you unfold two of the 90 degree bends which form the square tube. Previous (page 1030) | Next (page 1036)

Partially Unfold the Tube

Use the Unfold feature to pick the bends that you want to flatten. It is not necessary to flatten the model completely. It is possible to add the linear hole pattern. For this exercise, with the model unrolled in its current state, you will first unfold an additional two 90-degree bends. 1 As with the unrolled model that you created, you first identify a stationary face. Click the face shown in the following image.

1036 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

As soon as you select the face shown, the bends that can be unfolded relative to that face highlight:

Partially Unfold the Tube | 1037

2 Click to select the bend which forms the 90-degree corner closest to you:

1038 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Once the bend is selected, the part previews in the unfolded state.

Partially Unfold the Tube | 1039

Next, you finish creating the Unfold feature. Previous (page 1032) | Next (page 1040)

Complete the Unfold Feature

1 Click to select the second 90-degree bend as shown in the following image.

1040 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Following the select, the unfolded bend is previewed:

Complete the Unfold Feature | 1041

2 Click OK in the Unfold dialog box to flatten the two bends as shown in the preview and to close the dialog box. Your model should now appear as shown in the following image.

1042 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Although these steps are not required to add the holes (that you will add next) they illustrate adding an Unfold feature to flatten straight bends. Notice that your feature browser now contains two Unfold features: one for the unfolding of the two contour rolls and one for the unfolding of the two straight bends. Next, you add a hole and pattern the hole so that it crosses the (now flat) faces of the Contour Roll features. Previous (page 1036) | Next (page 1044)

Complete the Unfold Feature | 1043

Add a Hole
1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Sketch panel Create 2D Sketch, or right-click and select 2D Sketch from the marking menu. Then select the face shown in the following image.

2 Reorient your view, if necessary, using the View Cube or View Face commands, so that you are looking directly at the sketch. 3 Click Sketch tab Draw panel Point. Drag over the projected origin point, and then up. You should see the dotted line which indicates that the point you will place is aligned with the origin point.

1044 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

4 Click to place the point. 5 Click Sketch tab Constrain panel Dimension, or right-click and select General Dimension from the marking menu. Now, place a 25-mm dimension between the point and the bottom edge of the unfolded part.

Add a Hole | 1045

6 Finish the sketch and exit the sketch environment. 7 Click Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Hole, and place a 5-mm diameter hole with a Through All termination on the sketched point. Next, you pattern the hole. Previous (page 1040) | Next (page 1046)

Pattern the Hole

1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Pattern panel Rectangular. 2 Select the hole as the feature to pattern. 3 Click the Direction 1 button and select a vertical edge and direction as shown:

1046 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

4 Enter a value of 20 for the total number of holes, and a value of 25 mm for the distance between each hole. 5 Click OK to create the pattern of holes that cross the two flattened roll faces and close the Rectangular Pattern dialog box. Next, you add two Refold features to return the flattened model to the folded and rolled state.

Pattern the Hole | 1047

Previous (page 1044) | Next (page 1048)

Add Two Refold Features

The Refold feature is the complement of the Unfold feature. You are not able to place a Refold feature unless there is an Unfold feature in the model. When there are more than one Unfold features in the model, you must refold them in reverse order. You must refold the most recently created Unfold feature first. Although there are several Refold workflows, in this exercise you use the most common workflow. You right-click to select the Unfold feature and select Refold Feature in the pop-up context menu. This method automatically selects the originally selected stationary face and which ever bends or rolls were originally selected to create the Unfold feature. Other Refold workflows provide more flexibility and allow partial refolding when that makes sense for your design situation. 1 Right-click the Unfold feature in the Model browser that is immediately above the Hole feature. Select Refold Feature in the pop-up context menu. Notice that the two 90-degree straight bends refold, and that a Refold feature is added to the list of features in the Model browser. 2 Right-click the first Unfold feature (between the Contour Flange feature and the second Unfold feature), and select Refold Feature. Notice that the two 30-degree Contour Roll features reroll and that a second Refold feature is added to the list of features in the Model browser. The completed model will appear as shown in the following image.

1048 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

This completes the exercises of this tutorial. Previous (page 1046) | Next (page 1050)

Add Two Refold Features | 1049

Summary

The features you explored in this tutorial represent powerful additions to your sheet metal modeling skills. Transitional shapes defined by selecting two profiles for a Lofted Flange feature are common in some sheet metal design situations.

The ability to define the output of a Lofted Flange targeted at either a Press Brake or Die Form manufacturing process provides flexibility in both design and manufacturing. The ease of adding a Rip feature to a Lofted Flange created from two closed profiles provides for ease of flat pattern creation during the design process. Bend Order Annotation on the sheet metal flat pattern allows documentation of the correct fabrication sequence. The ability to add cosmetic centerlines provides additional efficiencies by allowing the documentation of bends that have not been created in the folded model state.

1050 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2

Certain features are easier to create while the model is flat: Unfold and Refold features allow efficient creation of these features while showing them correctly in both the final folded model and the flat pattern.

What Next? As a next step, consider exploring the creation of Lofted Flange features with two open profiles. Or, create a variation of the folded and rolled square tube with cut features that cross over both the 90-degree square corner bend as well as the 30-degree rolled faces. You can also explore the capabilities of the Inventor Studio environment which was used to create several of the photorealistic images that were used in this tutorial. Previous (page 1048)

Summary | 1051

1052

Sheet Metal Styles

1053

About this tutorial

Control sheet metal characteristics.

Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Mechanical Design 25 minutes electrical box.ipt

1054 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

Bend relief shape and size Bend radius value Bend transition type 2-bend corner relief type and size 3-bend corner relief type and size

Various style types, or style categories, control sheet metal characteristics. The style types, when taken together, create a composite style that determines the characteristics of a sheet metal part. You can apply styles locally to the active part, or you can save new styles and style edits to the Style Library to share the styles. Objectives Create new styles.

Save the styles to the Style Library. Use Sheet Metal Defaults to apply styles to a sheet metal part. Edit the styles. Apply a library style change to a part.

Prerequisites Know how to set the active project, navigate model space with the various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding.

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 1056)

About this tutorial | 1055

Edit the Project and Open the Sample File

Later in the tutorial, you write style information to the Style Library. The library must be set to Read/Write. You use the Projects editor to make this setting.

1 Click

Manage Projects.

2 Double-click the tutorial_files project to make this project active. 3 In the lower panel of the Project editor dialog box, if Use Style Library is Read Only or No, right-click this setting and select Yes. This value sets the Style Library to Read/Write. 4 Click Save and then Done. 5 Openelectrical box.ipt, located in the Electrical Box folder.

1056 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

Previous (page 1054) | Next (page 1057)

Add a New Material

In this portion of the tutorial, you add a new material to the document. 1 On the Tools tab Material and Appearance panel Materials . The Material Browser displays. The Material Browser has two sections: Document Materials, upper section

Library Materials, lower section

2 The new material can be made from an existing one. In the library section, if not already selected, select Inventor Material Library. 3 In the library list, on the right, scroll to locate Steel - Mild. Double click the material in the list. The material is added to the document and opened in the Material Editor. 4 In the Material Editor, change the material name to Steel - Test. 5 Before continuing, in the Asset section, select the structural asset. Note the properties making up the material listed in the pane below. When making new materials you can modify some properties, others are determined by the material Type and Class to which the asset is assigned. In addition, the new material is not currently saved in the part file. If you close the part without saving, this new material is lost. Previous (page 1056) | Next (page 1057)

Change the Appearance

1 Ensure Steel - Test is selected in the Material browser. 2 In the Asset section of the Material Editor, select the Appearance asset. 3 To the right, click 4 In the Asset Browser, select the Appearance named Steel - Galvanized 5 Click . You can also use double-click to select and exchange an appearance in one step.

Add a New Material | 1057

6 Close the Material Editor. 7 Select the component and in the Material Browser, select the new material Steel - Test. The part has the new material and appearance. 8 Close the Material Browser. Previous (page 1057) | Next (page 1058)

Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Gauge and Material
Next, you define a new sheet metal rule style that includes a sheet metal gauge and material, along with bend and corner relief attributes. To define the gauge and material: 1 On the ribbon, click {Condition: product='inv'}{Condition: product='inv'}

Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor

1058 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

The browser on the left side of the Styles and Standards Editor lists three style types or style categories:

Lighting Sheet Metal Rule Sheet Metal Unfold

Unique styles are nested under each of these top-level nodes. Expand the Sheet Metal Rule style category in the browser. 2 Right-click the Default node, and select New Style from the pop-up context menu. Name the new style Sheet Metal Rule Style Test. Click OK to close the New Local Style dialog box. 3 Ensure that the new style is selected in the browser, and that the Sheet tab is selected. 4 Select Steel, Mild from the Material menu. 5 Specify a thickness of .105 in.

Previous (page 1057) | Next (page 1060)

Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Gauge and Material | 1059

Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Bend and Corner Relief
Now, define the bend and corner relief attributes: 1 Select the Bend tab. 2 Change the Bend Radius from Thickness to Thickness * 1.15.

3 Select the Corner tab. 4 Change the 2 Bend Intersection relief shape to Square. 5 Change the Relief Size to Thickness * 5.

1060 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

6 Right-click Sheet Metal Rule Style Test in the browser, and select Active from the pop-up context menu. If you receive an error message, click Accept. The error is not critical in this exercise. 7 Click Save in the Style and Standard Editor dialog box. If a message box displays, click Accept. The program applies the bend radius and corner relief style attributes to the part.

Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Bend and Corner Relief | 1061

8 Click Done. TIP In the tutorial, click Undo and Redo on the Quick Access toolbar to see the effects of the style changes. Be sure to redo all changes before continuing. 9 Save the part to prevent the new styles from being lost. The new styles are now preserved locally in this part. Previous (page 1058) | Next (page 1062)

Save Styles to Library

1 With the sample part open, on the ribbon select Manage tab Styles

and Standards panel Save next to the Styles Editor command.

. The command is located

2 In the Save to Library? column, set Sheet Metal Style Rule Test to Yes.

1062 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

3 Click OK. The program notifies you that the operation overwrites styles in the library. 4 Click Yes. Any style marked Yes is saved to the Styles Library. They can be shared from part to part, and shared with anyone who has access to the project. TIP You can also save styles to the style library in the Style and Standard Editor. Right-click a style in the browser, and select Save to Style Library. 5 Save and close the part. Previous (page 1060) | Next (page 1063)

Create Sample Part

In this portion of the tutorial, you create some simple sheet metal geometry and then apply styles to the part. 1 Click the New icon , located at the top of the application window. Ensure that you click the icon itself, not the drop-down menu next to the icon. 2 In the Create New File dialog box, click the English folder, and then

double-click the Sheet Metal (in).ipt template

3 Sketch a rectangle approximately 10 inches square. The exact size and shape is not important.

Create Sample Part | 1063

4 Click the Finish Sketch command on the ribbon, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu to exit the sketch.

5 Click Sheet Metal tab Create panel Face also right-click and select Face from the marking menu. 6 Accept the default dialog box settings, and then click OK. Next, you add two flanges.

. You can

7 Click the Flange command from the ribbon or the marking menu.

. 8 Select two adjacent edges.

1064 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

9 Click OK. The default template uses the default sheet metal styles. Next, you use Sheet Metal Defaults to apply the new styles to the part. TIP If you routinely use a certain style set, create a sheet metal part template that uses those styles by default. Previous (page 1062) | Next (page 1065)

Use Sheet Metal Defaults

You use Sheet Metal Defaults to apply different styles to the active sheet metal part. The changes are local to the part. 1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Setup panel Sheet

Metal Defaults , or right-click and select Sheet Metal Defaults from the marking menu. Because you saved the styles you created to the Style Library, they are available for application in this part. 2 From the Sheet Metal Rule drop-down menu, select Sheet Metal Rule Style Test.

Use Sheet Metal Defaults | 1065

3 Ensure the Use Thickness from Rule option is selected. The Thickness input field is disabled, and the thickness you specified for Sheet Metal Rule Style Test is shown in the field. 4 From the Material drop-down menu, select Steel - Test.

5 Click Apply. The program applies the styles to the part.

1066 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

6 For confirmation purposes, you can use the commands on the Tools tab, Measure panel to run a couple of checks. The sheet thickness is 0.105 in, as specified in Sheet Metal Rule Style Test.

The bend radius is 0.121 in, per the style specification of Thickness * 1.15 (0.105 * 1.15).

Use Sheet Metal Defaults | 1067

In addition, the corner is square, per the Sheet Metal Rule Test Style.

1068 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

Previous (page 1063) | Next (page 1069)

Sheet Metal Defaults and Editing Styles

With Sheet Metal Defaults, you can quickly apply different styles to the part in a wholesale manner. You can also directly access the Styles and Standards Editor through the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box to make edits to the styles themselves. 1 If you closed the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box to use the Measure panel commands, select the Sheet Metal Defaults command again

from the ribbon or the marking menu

2 Click the Edit button next to the Sheet Metal Rule menu.

Sheet Metal Defaults and Editing Styles | 1069

3 Select the Corner tab, and then change the Relief Size value to Thickness * 4. 4 Click Save. The program applies the style change to the part.

Previous (page 1065) | Next (page 1071)

1070 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

Update Styles
On the previous page, the edit you made to the Rule Style Test style was only applied locally (the active part). To make the edit available globally, save that style to the Style Library. 1 In the Style and Standard Editor, right-click Sheet Metal Rule Style Test (under the Sheet Metal Rule node in the browser) and select Save to Style Library in the pop-up context menu. 2 Click Done to close the editor. 3 The edited and globally saved style is not picked up automatically by parts that share the style. Update that style in any other part that uses the style. 4 Close the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box. 5 Openelectrical box.ipt. TIP Select the file from the Recent Documents section of the Application menu. 6 Click Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Update

. 7 In the Update Styles dialog box, set the Update? column for Sheet Metal Rule Style Test to Yes. 8 Click OK. A message appears stating that the library style definition will overwrite local style edits. 9 Click Yes. If a message box displays, click Accept. The edit that you made to Sheet Metal Rule Style Test (the change in corner relief size) is applied to this part. 10 Closeelectrical box.ipt. Previous (page 1069) | Next (page 1071)

Sheet Metal Defaults and the Flat Pattern

Finally, you can also use Sheet Metal Defaults when the flat pattern is active.

Update Styles | 1071

The sample part you created should still be open. 1 Click Sheet Metal tab Flat Pattern panel Create Flat

Pattern

2 Next, click Sheet Metal Defaults

3 From the Sheet Metal Rule drop-down menu, select Default. 4 From the Unfold Rule drop-down menu, select Steel 16 Ga_KFactor. 5 Click OK. The changes are applied to the part.

Previous (page 1071) | Next (page 1073)

1072 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

Summary

In this tutorial, you: Created new styles.

Saved the styles to the Style Library. Used Sheet Metal Defaults to apply styles to a sheet metal part. Edited the styles. Applied a library style change to a part.

Summary | 1073

Remember to check Help for further details. Previous (page 1071)

1074 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles

Frame Generator

About this tutorial

Build structural frames.

Category Time Required Mechanical Design 55 minutes

1075

Tutorial Files Used

Start a new assembly file frame_generator.ipt frame_generator_hybrid.ipt

Trim excess material. Create miter joints. Create notched cuts. Make edits to the assembly.

Prerequisites Know how to set the active project, navigate model space with the various view tools, and work with components in the assembly environment.

Understand the Help topic Getting Started.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 1077)

1076 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

Get Started
Frame Generator uses frame members contained in the Content Center. To begin, set your active project, and then verify that Content Center is installed and configured.

1 Click

Manage Projects.

2 In the Projects dialog box, double-click the tutorial_files project in the projects list to set it as the active project. 3 In the lower-right corner of the Projects dialog box, click Configure Content Center Libraries. 4 In the Configure Libraries dialog box, verify that the Din and ISO Content Center libraries are available. 5 Close all dialog boxes. NOTE The Content Center libraries must be configured and available to perform the tutorial steps. If no libraries are available, install and configure the Content Center libraries before starting the tutorial. See the Help for more details, or contact your CAD Administrator. Previous (page 1075) | Next (page 1077)

Skeletal Model
This tutorial uses a skeletal model to position and create frame members. Create an assembly and place the skeletal model. 1 Create a new, blank assembly file using the Standard (mm).iam template. 2 Place one occurrence of frame_generator.ipt located in the Frame Generator folder into the assembly.

Get Started | 1077

This part consists of one 2D and one 3D sketch that together define the sample skeletal model. You use this part model to define the placement and extent of frame components in the assembly. 3 Save the assembly using Skeletal.iam for the name. Previous (page 1077) | Next (page 1079)

1078 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

Insert Profile
The Frame Generator commands are located in the Frame panel of the Design tab. We start by inserting frame members on the four upright lines. 1 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Insert Frame

. 2 Select ISO from the Standard menu. 3 Select ISO 657/14 - 2000 (Rectangular) from the Family menu. 4 Select 250x150x10 from the Size menu. 5 Select the upright sketch line as shown in the image. Ensure that you select somewhere on the upper half of the line. The position of the frame member is partially dependent on which half of a given line you select.

Insert Profile | 1079

6 The tube previews as shown in the image. Select the other three upright lines.

1080 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

NOTE To remove a line from the selection, press and hold Ctrl and then select the line again, or select the profile preview. Previous (page 1077) | Next (page 1081)

Profile Orientation
By default, the tube profiles are centered on the selected sketch lines.

The orientation indicator corresponds to the selected sketch line.

Profile Orientation | 1081

1 Click the middle radio button to the right of the profile preview image. The profile preview in the graphics window shifts position relative the sketch line to match the position of the orientation indicator.

1082 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

2 Click the center radio button to return to the default orientation. The previews update accordingly. The Offset fields control the distance by which the profile is offset from the selected sketch line. 3 Enter 300 mm in the Horizontal Offset field (labeled with the

Horizontal Offset icon).

Profile Orientation | 1083

The Mirror Frame Member command controls the profile orientation relative to the selected geometry, in this case a sketch line. 4 Click Mirror Frame Member, and notice the offset direction swaps in the graphics window.

1084 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

5 Return the profiles to the original orientation: click Mirror Frame Member again, and enter 0 in the Horizontal Offset field.

Profile Orientation | 1085

Previous (page 1079) | Next (page 1086)

Create Profile
We must make one last adjustment to the orientation before creating the frame members. 1 Click the arrow next to the Angle field, and then select 90.00 deg from the menu.

2 Click Apply. 3 Click OK in the Create New Frame dialog box.

1086 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

The Frame Member Naming dialog box displays. This dialog box is used to change member display names, member file names, and locations. 4 Click OK without making changes. Whenever this dialog box appears in the tutorial, click OK without making changes in the dialog box. NOTE If you press Cancel during the frame member naming, the frame members are created using the default names. The profiles are created, and you can continue to make other profile selections.

Previous (page 1081) | Next (page 1087)

Place the Upper C-channel

Now we insert a c-channel on the upper horizontal lines. 1 Select ISO 657/11 - 1980(E) from the Family menu. 2 Select CH 250 x 34 from the Size menu. 3 Select the sketch line as shown in the image.

Place the Upper C-channel | 1087

The preview shows the profile is upside down (relative to the design intent for this model).

1088 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

4 Select 270.00 deg from the Angle menu.

Place the Upper C-channel | 1089

Previous (page 1086) | Next (page 1090)

Orient the Upper C-channel

The orientation of the c-channel must be changed to meet the design intent. 1 Click the radio button to move the orientation indicators, as shown, so that the top of the c-channel is flush with the ends of the tubes.

1090 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

2 Click Apply. Previous (page 1087) | Next (page 1091)

Place the Lower C-channels

We now place c-channel members along the bottom lines, so that the bottom of the c-channel is flush with the ends of the rectangular tubing. 1 Select the four lower lines as shown in the image.

Place the Lower C-channels | 1091

2 Click the radio button to move the orientation indicator, as shown.

1092 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

3 Click Apply. Previous (page 1090) | Next (page 1094)

Place the Lower C-channels | 1093

Place the Horizontal tube

Place a tube across the remaining horizontal line. 1 Select the remaining horizontal line.

1094 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

2 Select ISO 657/14 - 2000 (Rectangular) from the Family menu. 3 Select 250x150x10 from the Size menu.

Place the Horizontal tube | 1095

4 Select 90.00 deg from the Angle menu. 5 Click the radio button to move the orientation indicator.

6 Click Apply. Previous (page 1091) | Next (page 1097)

1096 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

Place the Angle Braces

Only one more selection set and we are finished with component placement. We place the angle braces using the sketch lines. 1 Select ISO 657/14 - 2000 (Square) from the Family menu. 2 Select 80x80x6.3 from the Size menu. 3 Ensure that the orientation indicator is on the center radio button, the horizontal and vertical offsets are set to 0.00 mm, and the angle is 90.00 deg. 4 Select the two angular lines.

Place the Angle Braces | 1097

5 Click Apply. 6 Click Cancel to close the Insert dialog box.. Previous (page 1094) | Next (page 1098)

Lengthen Profile
The c-channel on top of the taller vertical members must extend to the outside edges of the tubes (plus an additional 15 mm on each end to allow for a fillet weld). 1 Zoom in on the model, as shown (upper portion of one of the tall vertical members).

1098 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel

Lengthen/Shorten

3 In the Lengthen - Shorten Frame Member dialog box, click Both Ends.

4 Select the c-channel. We know the rectangular tube is 150 mm wide and that the c-channel currently extends to the center of the tubes. Therefore, the extension distance is (150/2) + (15) = 90. 5 Enter 90 mm in the Extension field. 6 Click Apply. The program adds 90 mm to both ends of the c-channel.

7 Click Cancel.

Lengthen Profile | 1099

Previous (page 1097) | Next (page 1100)

Notch Profile
Next, we fit the tube within the c-channel using the Notch command.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Notch 2 Select the tube, as shown.

The first selection is the component to cut. The second selection is the cutting tool.

The other member selection command activates automatically. 3 Select the c-channel to use as the cutting tool. 4 Click Apply.

1100 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

5 Repeat these steps for the notch cut on the other vertical member at the opposite end of the c-channel. 6 Click Cancel. 7 To see the notches clearly, turn off the visibility of the c-channel. In the Model browser, right-click the c-channel, and then remove the check mark next to Visibility.

8 Turn on the Visibility of the c-channel when finished. Previous (page 1098) | Next (page 1102)

Notch Profile | 1101

Create Miter Joints

Now, create miter joints between the shorter vertical tubes and the horizontal tube.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Miter 2 Select the first and second tube as shown.

3 Orient the model view as shown in the following image to see how the miter options affect the miter joint.

1102 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

NOTE The visibility of the tube in the background has been turned off for clarity.

Previous (page 1100) | Next (page 1103)

Change Miter Joint Options

We now try different miter options and use the one that best fits our design. 1 To create a clearance for a groove weld and see the two miter types, enter 5 mm in the Miter Cut Extension field. Miter Cut at both sides is selected by default. As the name implies, this option adds or removes material on both components equally.

Change Miter Joint Options | 1103

2 Click Apply.

The total offset distance between the mitered faces is 5 mm. 3 To continue experimenting with the miter options, select Miter Cut at one side.

4 Select the lower tube, and then select the upper tube.

1104 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

5 Click Apply. The joint is offset 5 mm, but only the lower tube is offset from the joint midplane.

6 This time, select the upper tube first, and then the lower tube. 7 Click Apply. The first component selected is the component offset from the joint midplane.

Change Miter Joint Options | 1105

8 Create another miter joint at the other tube junction. 9 Click Cancel when finished. Previous (page 1102) | Next (page 1106)

Remove End Treatments

For this exercise, assume that the miter joints you created previously are incorrect and must be recreated. 1 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Remove End

Treatments panel.

. This command is located in the expanded Frame

1106 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

2 Select the horizontal tube, and then click Apply. The program removes the miter joints and restores the tubes to their original, unmodified state.

3 Click Cancel.

4 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Miter and then re-create the miter. NOTE The miter offset type is not important for this example.

Remove End Treatments | 1107

Previous (page 1103) | Next (page 1108)

Re-create Miter Joint

Re-create the second miter.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Miter and create the miter shown.

1108 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

2 Click Cancel when finished. Previous (page 1106) | Next (page 1109)

Trim Profile
Next, we remove the excess material from the lower c-channels. 1 Orient the model view as shown. NOTE The visibility of the tube in the background has been turned off for clarity.

Trim Profile | 1109

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Trim to Frame

. 3 First, select the trimming component, which is the tube.

1110 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

4 Select the component to trim, which is the c-channel.

Trim Profile | 1111

5 Click Apply.

1112 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

6 Use the same method to trim the other c-channel. You can repeat these steps to trim the c-channels at the other three junctions, but it is not required for this exercise. 7 Close the Trim to Frame dialog box when finished. Previous (page 1108) | Next (page 1114)

Trim Profile | 1113

Cut Profile
Now, remove the excess material from the angle braces using existing faces as the cutting plane. 1 Orient the model view as shown.

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Trim/Extend

. 3 First, select the component to cut, which is the square tube.

1114 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

4 Click the Face command, and then select the cutting face.

5 Click Apply. If desired, you can set the view to Wireframe display, and orbit the model to more clearly see the cut results. Return to Shaded display when finished.

Cut Profile | 1115

In the remaining steps, we cut the other side of the tube using the same method. 6 Select the tube, click the Face command, and then select the face, as shown.

1116 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

7 Click Apply.

8 Click Cancel to close the dialog box. Previous (page 1109) | Next (page 1117)

Profile Information
Use the Frame Member Info command to view characteristics of a frame component. 1 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Frame Member

Info

. This command is located in the expanded Frame panel.

2 Select a frame member.

Profile Information | 1117

The dialog box populates with the information on the selected component. The Select command remains active, and you can select a different component to return information on that component. 3 Click Done when finished. Previous (page 1114) | Next (page 1118)

Change Profile
Use the Change command to make various edits to a selected component. The Change command uses the same dialog box as the Insert Frame Members command and allows modification of any of the properties in the dialog box.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Change . 2 Select the longer square tube. 3 Select 90x90x6.3 from the Size menu. Leave all other settings at the default values. NOTE You can use the Multi-Select Profiles option located at the lower right of the dialog box to select and modify multiple components in one execution. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Yes in the Frame Generator message box. 6 Click OK in the Frame Member Naming dialog box. The cuts on the tube are preserved. Previous (page 1117) | Next (page 1118)

Load Calculation
You can use the Beam/Column Calculator to determine how loads affect the design.

1118 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Beam/Column

Calculator

to access the command.

The Beam/Column Calculator command is not used in this tutorial. Previous (page 1118) | Next (page 1119)

Refresh
You can publish your own frame shapes to Content Center or modify existing Content Center families and templates. Use the Refresh command to update existing frames after the Content Center has been modified.

On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Refresh access the command. The Refresh command is not used in this tutorial. Previous (page 1118) | Next (page 1119)

Modify the Skeleton

The frame components are associative to the skeletal sketches. We modify the sketches in frame_generator.ipt to see how this change affects the frame members. 1 Edit frame_generator:1.

Refresh | 1119

2 On the ribbon, click Manage tab Parameters panel

Parameters 4 Click Done.

3 Change the value for base_L to 3000 mm. 5 Return to the assembly. The frame components, including the various joints and cuts, update to match the change.

1120 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

6 Close the assembly. Previous (page 1119) | Next (page 1121)

Hybrid Skeleton
In this exercise, we start a new assembly and place a component that contains a solid and unconsumed sketches. This component is used as the skeleton for our frame. We use Frame Generator to add frame members around the solid and sketches. 1 Create a new, blank assembly file using the Standard (mm).iam template. 2 Place frame_generator_hybrid.ipt into the assembly.

Hybrid Skeleton | 1121

This skeletal model consists of a solid feature and unconsumed sketches. 3 Change the display from Shaded to Wireframe. Previous (page 1119) | Next (page 1122)

Insert Profile - Insert Frame Members

We now insert frame members around the existing geometry. First, select the profile to use for the frame members. 1 Save the assembly. Use frame-hybrid.iam for the file name. 2 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Insert Frame

. 3 Select DIN from the Standard menu.

1122 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

4 Select DIN 59 370 S Angle Steel from the Family menu. 5 Select S 40 x 5 from the Size menu. 6 Select Steel from the Material menu. Previous (page 1121) | Next (page 1123)

Insert Profile - Select Geometry

Now we select the geometry to position the lower and upper frame members. For the lower frame members: 1 Select the four lower edges. Ensure that the first selection matches the image, as indicated by the cursor.

2 Set the orientation indicator as shown.

Insert Profile - Select Geometry | 1123

3 Select 0.00 deg in the Angle field. The design intent is that the inside surfaces of the L-channels are flush with the solid. Since the channels are 5 mm thick, they must be offset 5 mm. 4 Enter -5 mm in the Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset fields.

1124 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

5 Click Apply. The Create New Frame dialog box appears. 6 Click OK. For the upper frame members. 1 Select the four upper edges. Ensure that you select the left end of the first line, as shown.

2 Click Apply. 3 Change the graphics display to the Shaded visual style.

Insert Profile - Select Geometry | 1125

1126 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

Previous (page 1122) | Next (page 1127)

Insert Profile - Position First Vertical Member

Next, we position the first vertical member. 1 Select the vertical edge.

2 Select 270.00 deg from the Angle menu. 3 Orient the model view as shown.

Insert Profile - Position First Vertical Member | 1127

The inside surfaces of the channel must be flush with the outer surfaces of the existing channels. 4 Enter -10 mm in the Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset fields.

1128 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

5 Click Apply. NOTE Since the orientation of the channels for each vertical edges is different, we place the channels one at a time. Previous (page 1123) | Next (page 1129)

Insert Profile - Position Remaining Vertical Members

Repeat these steps for the remaining vertical edges: 1 Select an edge. 2 Use the Angle field to adjust the orientation of the frame member, as needed. 3 Click Apply. 4 Click Cancel when all vertical members have been inserted.

Insert Profile - Position Remaining Vertical Members | 1129

Previous (page 1127) | Next (page 1130)

Lengthen Profile
In our design, the vertical members must be flush with the upper and lower channels. We must lengthen the vertical members to meet this criteria. 1 Orient the model view, as shown.

1130 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel

Lengthen/Shorten

3 Select the vertical channel. Make the selection near the top of the channel. NOTE When you lengthen one end of a component, the end closest to your cursor when you select the component is the end that is lengthened. 4 Ensure the One End command is selected.

Currently, the end of the vertical channel is flush with the inner surfaces of the upper channels. The width of the channels is 40 mm. Therefore, the extension distance is 35 mm. 5 Enter 35 mm in the Extension field. 6 Click Apply.

Lengthen Profile | 1131

7 Repeat this process for the other end of the vertical channel, this time using 5 mm for the lengthen distance. 8 Repeat this process for the upper ends of the remaining three channels. It is not necessary to adjust the lower ends of the remaining channels. 9 Close the dialog box when finished. Previous (page 1129) | Next (page 1132)

Create Miter Joint

Next, we create a miter joint. Since the channels have a radius on the inner corner, we offset the miter to provide relief for the radius. 1 Orient the model view, as shown. This view is the top of the model.

1132 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Miter 3 Select the two channels.

Create Miter Joint | 1133

4 Ensure Miter Cut at both sides the Miter Cut Extension field. 5 Click Apply.

is selected. Enter 2 mm in

1134 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

6 You can repeat this process for the remaining seven junctions, but it is not required for this tutorial. 7 Close the dialog box when finished. Previous (page 1130) | Next (page 1135)

Insert Profile - Place Other Members

Now, we use the sketches to place the other members of the frame. 1 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Insert Frame

. 2 Select DIN EN 10219-2 (Circular Hollow Section - Cold Formed) from the Family menu. 3 Select 26.9x3 from the Size menu. 4 Enter -3 mm in the Vertical Offset field.

Insert Profile - Place Other Members | 1135

5 Enter 0 in the Horizontal Offset field. 6 Select 90.00 deg from the Angle menu. 7 Set the orientation indicator, as shown in the following image.

8 Select the five sketch segments as shown. NOTE Depending on where you select on the first element, you may need to adjust the orientation and angle to match the preview in the image.

1136 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

9 Click Apply.

Insert Profile - Place Other Members | 1137

Previous (page 1132) | Next (page 1138)

Insert Profile - Add Support Members

Now we insert the support members. 1 Select the line as shown.

1138 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

2 Select 270.00 deg from the Angle menu. 3 Click Apply. 4 Select the remaining line. 5 Set the orientation indicator as shown.

Insert Profile - Add Support Members | 1139

6 Click OK.

Previous (page 1135) | Next (page 1141)

1140 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

Cut Profile - Trim Tubing

Next, we trim the round tubing. 1 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Trim/Extend

. 2 Select the four tubes, as shown.

3 In the Trim - Extend To Face dialog box, click the Face command, and then select the face as shown.

Cut Profile - Trim Tubing | 1141

4 Click OK. The tubes are trimmed to the selected face. Previous (page 1138) | Next (page 1142)

Lengthen Profile
First, we must lengthen the support tubes so we can notch them to meet the other tubes. 1 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel

Lengthen/Shorten 2 Select the tube as shown.

1142 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

3 Enter 6 mm in the Extension field. 4 Click OK.

Lengthen Profile | 1143

Previous (page 1141) | Next (page 1145)

1144 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

Notch Profile
Now that the support tubes extend past the other tubes, we can notch the supports to fit the mating tubes.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Notch . 2 Select the component to notch, which is the lower tube.

Notch Profile | 1145

3 Click the notching profile, which is the upper tube.

4 Click OK. The lower tube is notched to fit the upper tube.

1146 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

Previous (page 1142) | Next (page 1147)

Insert Profile - Point To Point

Next, we add angular braces. 1 Orient the model view as shown.

Insert Profile - Point To Point | 1147

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Insert Frame

. 3 Select DIN 59 370 S Angle Steel from the Family menu. 4 Select S 35 x 5 from the Size menu. 5 Select the Insert Members Between Points option.

6 Select the start point. This point is the corner vertex on the skeletal model.

1148 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

7 Select the end point.

Insert Profile - Point To Point | 1149

8 Set the orientation indicator, as shown.

Enter -5 mm in the Vertical Offset field.

1150 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

9 Enter 0.00 mm in the Horizontal Offset field. 10 Enter 0.00 deg in the Angle field. 11 Click Apply.

12 Use this procedure to add another brace on the other side. Change the value for the angle to 180.00 deg, and click the Mirror Frame Member command. 13 Click Cancel when finished. Previous (page 1145) | Next (page 1152)

Insert Profile - Point To Point | 1151

Cut Profile - Trim Supports

Finally, we trim the supports to meet the vertical frame members. 1 Turn off the Visibility of frame_generator_hybrid:1, and then orient the model view as shown.

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Trim/Extend

. 3 Select the angular braces. 4 Click the Face command, and then select the cutting face.

1152 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

5 Click Apply. 6 Select the angular braces again. 7 Click the Face command. 8 Select the cutting face.

Cut Profile - Trim Supports | 1153

9 Click Apply.

1154 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

10 If you like, you can repeat this procedure for the other end of the braces. Previous (page 1147) | Next (page 1155)

Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to: Select and position frame components.

Trim excess material. Create miter joints. Create notched cuts.

Summary | 1155

Remove end treatments from a profile. Replace components. Work with both wire frame and hybrid skeletons.

Remember to check the Help files for further information.

1156 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator

Previous (page 1152)

Summary | 1157

1158

DWG Data 1

1159

About this tutorial

1160 | Chapter 43 DWG Data 1

Part 1 - Create parts from DWG files.

Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Data Exchange 10 minutes eBox2.dwg

Open a New Part File

Next, import the DWG data into an Autodesk Inventor part file. You need a part file open in 2D Sketch mode. Open a new Part document: 1 Click the New icon , located at the top of the application window. Ensure that you click the icon itself, not the drop-down menu next to the icon. 2 In the New File dialog box, click the English tab, and then double-click

the Standard (in).ipt template

Open a New Part File | 1161

The part opens in Sketch mode, where the 2D Sketch commands are available and the sketch grid displays, if turned on.

Import DWG Data

1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Insert panel ACAD . NOTE If a dialog box appears prompting you to choose a translator, select Translator: DWG and click the OK button. 2 Select eBox2.dwg, and then click Open. The Layers and Objects Import Options dialog box opens. 3 In the Selective Import field, remove the check marks next to each layer, except the p and p dim layers. 4 Ensure All is selected in the Selection field. 5 Click the Next button to display the Import Destination Options dialog box. Activate the Constrain End Points and Apply geometric constraints check boxes at the lower-left of the dialog box. 6 Click Finish to close the dialog box. The program imports geometry and dimensions on the specified layers into the sketch.

7 Click Finish Sketch on the ribbon, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu, to exit the sketch environment.

1162 | Chapter 43 DWG Data 1

Previous (page 1161) | Next (page 1163)

Extrude Sketch Geometry

1 Press E on the keyboard, or right-click and select Extrude from the marking menu, to invoke the Extrude command. 2 Click inside the 4.25" x 4.25" square to satisfy the profile selection. This is the only portion of the sketch to be extruded.

Extrude Sketch Geometry | 1163

3 Drag the gold distance manipulator until the value 0.075 appears in the value input box. Alternatively, you can enter .075 directly in the box.

1164 | Chapter 43 DWG Data 1

4 Click the green Ok button to create the extrusion and exit the command.

Previous (page 1162) | Next (page 1165)

Orient the Part

1 On the navigation toolbar in the graphics window, click Zoom . 2 In the graphics window, click and drag the zoom indicator down the screen to zoom in on the extrusion.

Orient the Part | 1165

NOTE If your system zooms out when you drag down, it is likely that this option was selected during installation. You can easily change the zoom direction of the drag and mouse wheel (at any time): on the Display tab of the Application Options dialog box select the Reverse direction option. If you have been using AutoCAD for some time you may be more comfortable using the AutoCAD zoom direction preferences. 3 Click the following image to play the animation. 4 On the navigation toolbar, click Free Orbit .

5 In the graphics window, click and drag inside the orbit indicator to orbit the part. 6 Right-click, and then select Done [Esc]. The exact position of the part is not important. 7 Press F6 to orient the part in the default home view. Previous (page 1163) | Next (page 1166)

Change the Part Appearance

To change the part color: 1 Select a new appearance from Appearance drop-down menu. The menu is located on the Quick Access Toolbar at the top of the Autodesk Inventor window. 2 Select Blue (Sky) from the list of available part appearances. In the default Home (isometric) view, the part appearance looks dark. You can optionally orbit the part again using the technique just described to see how model position in relation to the lighting affects the appearance.

1166 | Chapter 43 DWG Data 1

Previous (page 1165) | Next (page 1167)

Save the Part

1 Click Save , located on the Quick Access Toolbar. 2 Name the file panel, and then click Save.

3 Click

Close to close the file.

Previous (page 1166) | Next (page 1168)

Save the Part | 1167

Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to: Use existing DWG geometry to define a sketch profile.

Use the sketch geometry to create an extruded part feature. Orient the part using Zoom and Free Orbit. Change part appearance. Save the part. Close the part file.

Use the skills you learned in this tutorial to create a more complex part in the next tutorial, DWG Data 2. Use the table of contents to the left to start the DWG Data 2 tutorial. Previous (page 1167) Click here to return to the tutorials home page

1168 | Chapter 43 DWG Data 1

DWG Data 2

1169

About this tutorial

Part 2 - Create parts from DWG files.

Category Time Required Data Exchange 15 minutes

1170 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

Tutorial File Used

eBox2.dwg

See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 1171)

Open Part and Access DWG

1 Open a new part file:

Click the New icon , located at the top of the application window. Ensure that you click the icon itself, not the drop-down menu next to the icon. In the Create New File dialog box, click the English folder, and then

double-click the Standard (in).ipt template

. .

2 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Insert panel ACAD

Open Part and Access DWG | 1171

NOTE If a dialog box appears prompting you to choose a translator, select Translator: DWG and click the OK button. Previous (page 1170) | Next (page 1172)

Import DWG
1 Select eBox2.dwg, and then click Open. The Layers and Objects Import Options dialog box opens. 2 In the Selective Import field, remove the check marks next to the p and p dim layers, and then check the c and c dim layers. 3 Ensure All is selected in the Selection field. 4 Click the Next button to display the Import Destination Options dialog box. If not already enabled, activate the Constrain End Points and Apply geometric constraints check boxes at the lower-left of the dialog box. 5 Click the Finish button to close the dialog box. The program imports the geometry and dimensions on the specified layers into the sketch.

1172 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

6 Click Finish Sketch on the ribbon, or right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu, to exit the sketch environment. NOTE Finishing a sketch automatically switches the display to the Home (isometric) view. Restore the front view of the sketch by clicking Front on the View Cube at the upper-right of the display screen.

Previous (page 1171) | Next (page 1173)

Extrude Sketch Geometry

1 Press E on the keyboard to invoke the Extrude command, or right-click and select Extrude from the marking menu. The "front" view of the inserted DWG file contains geometry which represents the outside of the cover and the thickness of the material that makes the cover sides. To create this part, you select both of the regions displayed in the front view inside of the 6.30" x 6.30" rectangle. Notice that you must click inside both sketch loops. Click to play the animation which shows the selections needed. 2 In the value input box in the in-canvas display, or the Extents field of the Extrude dialog box, highlight the 1 in value.

3 Select the .560 dimension value (the full depth of the cover) in the "top" view of the inserted geometry.

Extrude Sketch Geometry | 1173

4 The program replaces the default extrude distance of 1 inch by the existing dimension, as represented by the parameter name d5.

5 Click the green Ok button to create the base feature that will become the electrical panel cover and exit the command. 6 Press F6 to position the part in the Home view.

1174 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

Previous (page 1172) | Next (page 1176)

Extrude Sketch Geometry | 1175

Create a Round
Next, you create the rounded edge on the outside of the cover. You reference existing dimensions to determine the radius for the round, just as you did to create the base extrusion. 1 In the Model browser, click the expand/collapse symbol next to Extrusion1.

2 Right-click Sketch1 to display a menu of commands that apply to the current selection, and then select Visibility. 3 Select Zoom All from the Navigation toolbar. Zoom All is also located on the Navigate panel of the View tab. The imported sketch is visible and ready for reference in the graphics window.

1176 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

4 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Modify panel Fillet

. You can also right-click and select Fillet from the marking menu. 5 Select the edge loop on the front of the cover (the edge opposite the face with the sketch).

Create a Round | 1177

The round previews in the graphics window.

6 Highlight the default Radius value in the value input box in the in-canvas display, or in the Fillet dialog box. Select the .110 dimension value found on the lower left corner of the front view of the sketch geometry.

1178 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

7 Click the green Ok button to create the round and exit the command.

Create a Round | 1179

Previous (page 1173) | Next (page 1181)

1180 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

Create a Shell
1 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Modify panel Shell . 2 Use Orbit to approximate the view shown in the following image. The exact orientation is not important.

Create a Shell | 1181

3 Use the Shell command to hollow out the model while maintaining a specified wall thickness. You can remove faces of the model that will be open after completing the command. 4 Select the face with the sketch.

1182 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

5 Using the dimension-referencing technique you learned previously, highlight the default value in the Thickness field of the Shell dialog box, and select the dimension value .060 located in the top view of the sketch geometry to set the material thickness.

Create a Shell | 1183

6 Click OK to create the shell and exit the command.

1184 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

Notice that because you created the round before the shell, the program creates the inner fillet automatically as part of the shell operation.

Create a Shell | 1185

7 In the Model browser, right-click the Sketch1 browser node and remove the check mark next to Visibility to turn off the display of the sketch. 8 Save the part, using cover_panel for the file name. 9 Close the part. Previous (page 1176) | Next (page 1186)

Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to: Import layer-specific DWG data into an Autodesk Inventor sketch. Then create an Autodesk Inventor solid model of the ACAD drawing views using the actual DWG geometry and dimensional values.

Add round and shell features to an extrusion. Use and refer to the imported DWG data to determine feature dimensions. Use the Autodesk InventorOrbit command to make the selection of geometry easier during feature modeling. Use Autodesk Inventor marking and context menus to access commands that apply to the current selection. Use the Visibility option on browser objects to ease your design process.

1186 | Chapter 44 DWG Data 2

Previous (page 1181)

Summary | 1187

1188

DWG Data 3

About this tutorial

1189

Part 3 - Create parts from DWG files.

Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Data Exchange 15 minutes Start a new assembly document

Create the box portion of the electrical panel within the context of the assembly. Use specific layers of the supplied 2D DWG file to define the Inventor solid part geometry. At the assembly level, insert the panel and cover parts you created earlier. Use assembly constraints to position the parts relative to one another. This tutorial draws on the skills you learned in parts 1 and 2 of this tutorial set. Objectives Create part models in the context of an assembly.

Use layers of a DWG file to define your part geometry. Insert parts into an assembly. Position parts relative to one another with assembly constraints.

Prerequisites Complete Parts 1 and 2 of this tutorial set.

Know how to set the active project and navigate model space with the various view tools. See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.

Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one.

1190 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

Next (page 1191)

Create New Assembly File

1 Ensure that your active project is tutorial_files. 2 Click the New icon located at the top of the application window. Ensure that you click the icon itself, not the drop-down menu next to the icon 3 In the New File dialog box, click the English tab, and then double-click

the Standard (in).iam template. You now have a new, empty assembly. Previous (page 1189) | Next (page 1192)

Create New Assembly File | 1191

Create In-place Component

1 To begin creating the electrical box in the empty assembly, right-click anywhere in the graphics window, and then select Create Component from the marking menu. The Create In-Place Component dialog box opens. 2 In the New Component Name field, type box.

3 Next to the Templates menu, click Browse Templates , then select the English tab, and double-click the Standard (in).ipt template. 4 Click OK in the Create In-Place Component dialog box. NOTE Although this tutorial (and the previous two tutorials) required you to select the English tab, you usually select a new template from the templates displayed on the Default tab when creating new files. 5 Before Autodesk Inventor can create the empty part file where you create your electrical box, you must select a plane in the assembly. The plane is coincident to the sketch plane of the part. Often, a planar part face exists in the assembly on which you want to create your part. However, in this tutorial the assembly is empty, and you select an origin plane. Notice that the cursor changes and the program prompts you to Select sketch plane for base feature. 6 To select an origin plane (that is not currently visible), click the expand/collapse symbol next to the assembly Origin folder to expand the folder. TIP The origin folder for the assembly is located at the top of the browser, just under the Representations folder.

7 Select the XY Plane. This selection aligns the new part origin with the assembly origin in your empty assembly file. Once you select the origin plane, the program creates and names the part document. The assembly browser updates to show the new part and

1192 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

that you are working within the sketch of the newly created box part file. The sketch commands are active and you can begin to define the geometry for the first extrusion. 8 If necessary, click the Front face of the View Cube to set the sketch plane parallel to the screen.

Previous (page 1191) | Next (page 1193)

Insert DWG Data

1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Insert panel ACAD .

Insert DWG Data | 1193

NOTE If a dialog box appears prompting you to choose a translator, select Translator: DWG and click the OK button. 2 Select eBox2.dwg, and then click Open. The Layers and Objects Import Options dialog box opens. 3 In the Selective Import field, remove the check marks next to the c and c dim layers, and then check the b and b dim layers. 4 Ensure that All is selected in the Selection field. 5 Click Finish. The program imports the geometry and dimensions on the specified layers into the sketch.

NOTE The colors of your sketch lines could be different from the image. Differences in color are not important for this tutorial. Previous (page 1192) | Next (page 1194)

Extrude Geometry
1 Press E on the keyboard to activate the Extrude dialog box.

1194 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

Like the previous tutorial, you must select each of the regions inside the 6 x 6 rectangle. In this case, there are three. 2 To make the selection of the first region easier, click Zoom Window

located on the navigation bar in the graphics window. Then drag a zoom window around the area to magnify. Click the following image to play an animation that shows using Zoom Window and making the proper selections.

3 After you make the selections, click Zoom All within the graphics window.

to fit all geometry

As with the previous tutorials, you use an existing sketch dimension as the distance of the extrusion being created. 4 In the Extents field of the Extrude dialog box, or from the value input box in the in-canvas display, highlight the 1 in value, and then select the 4.00 dimension from the top view displayed in the sketch window.

5 Click Ok to create a solid extrusion 4 inches deep. 6 If necessary, press F6 to position the part in the default home view as shown.

Extrude Geometry | 1195

Previous (page 1193) | Next (page 1196)

Create Rounds
Next, you create rounds on the two edge loops of the front and back faces. As before, you refer to dimensions contained in the imported sketch to determine the size of the rounds. 1 In the browser, expand the part feature named Extrusion1. 2 Right-click Sketch1, and then select Visibility.

3 Click the Zoom All

1196 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

4 Click the Fillet command on the ribbon select Fillet from the marking menu.

, or right-click and

5 Select the front edge loop of the cover (the edge opposite the face with the sketch).

Create Rounds | 1197

The round previews in the graphics window.

6 Highlight the Radius value in the Fillet dialog box, or in the value input box in the in-canvas display, and select the 0.110 radius value that was defined by the designer who originally created the DWG drawing.

1198 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

7 Click Ok to create the round.

Previous (page 1194) | Next (page 1199)

Create Shell
Like the cover part, this part must be hollowed out, or shelled. However, unlike the cover part, you do not remove any faces from the part during the shell operation. 1 Click the Shell command. 2 Highlight the default value in the Thickness field. 3 Select the 0.060 wall thickness value in the right-side view of the sketch, which is still displayed in the graphics window.

Create Shell | 1199

4 Click OK to create the shell. Because the shell removed only interior material, there is no apparent change to the part.

1200 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

5 Save the part. Previous (page 1196) | Next (page 1201)

Create Cut Extrusion

Next, you use the imported sketch to remove material from the part. 1 Use the View Cube to change your view so that the sketch is visible.

Create Cut Extrusion | 1201

2 Click the Extrude command , and then click inside the inner loop of the sketch. The preview indicates the current extrude distance.

1202 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

3 In the Extents field of the Extrude dialog box, select To Next from the drop-down menu. If you are using the mini-toolbar, select To next face/body from the drop-down menu. 4 In the Extrude dialog box, or from the mini-toolbar, click Cut.

Create Cut Extrusion | 1203

Within the selected region of the box part, you should see a direction indicator pointing to the inside of the box. The indicator shows the direction of the cut extrusion. Though dim, the direction indicator is visible in the highlighted portion of the image.

5 To see the indicator more clearly, click the Flip Direction button in the dialog box, or from the mini-toolbar.

1204 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

6 Click the other Flip Direction button. Ensure the indicator points to the inside of the box.

Create Cut Extrusion | 1205

7 Click OK to create the cut. Because you selected To Next from the Extents menu, or To next face/body from the mini-toolbar, the cut terminates on the next face it encounters. In this case, it is the back face of the box.

1206 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

8 In the browser, right-click Sketch1 (nested under Extrusion1), and then remove the check mark next to Visibility.

Create Cut Extrusion | 1207

9 Save the part. Previous (page 1199) | Next (page 1208)

Assembly Environment
1 In the Return section of the tab, click Return . This action returns you to the top-level assembly environment from the part environment. Assembly commands replace the part commands. It is within this assembly environment that you add and constrain the panel and cover parts that you created earlier.

1208 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

2 Before you continue, save the assembly. Use eBox for the file name, and then click Save. If prompted to save eBox.iam and its dependents, click OK. Previous (page 1201) | Next (page 1209)

Show Origin Planes

The panel and cover that you created in the first two tutorials will be placed relative to faces on the box you created. They will also be place relative to the assembly origin planes (which are not currently displayed). 1 Hold down the Ctrl key, and click the YZ and XZ origin plane browser nodes so that they are both selected. The planes highlight in the graphics window. Click the following image to play an animation that illustrate how the planes will highlight. 2 With both planes selected, right-click one of the planes in the browser, and then select Visibility. The planes are now visible in the graphics window.

Show Origin Planes | 1209

You use these planes to attach, or constrain, the panel and cover parts to the box part. NOTE Your origin planes could be a different color. Previous (page 1208) | Next (page 1210)

Add Parts
Next, you add the panel and cover parts you created in the first two tutorials to the assembly. 1 In a blank area of the graphics window, right-click, and then select Place Component from the marking menu. NOTE Do not right-click over the box which would invoke the context menu for a selected component.

1210 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

The Place Component dialog box displays. You are viewing the contents of the Tutorial Files folder. 2 Find and select the panel part you created in the first tutorial, and then click Open. 3 The panel is attached to your cursor. Click anywhere in the blank space around the existing box part to place one occurrence of the panel. Do not attempt to place the panel within the box.

After you click, notice that another occurrence of the panel is attached to the cursor and ready for placement. 4 Since you only need one occurrence of the panel, press Esc to end the Place operation. 5 Use the previous steps to find and place one occurrence of the cover part you created in the second tutorial.

Add Parts | 1211

Previous (page 1209) | Next (page 1212)

Unconstrained Parts
You placed the panel and cover parts; however, they are not in their final positions. You use assembly constraints to locate the parts with respect to one another. Typically, you need three constraints to position a part. Currently, the panel and cover parts are unconstrained and are free to move in 3D space. Click and drag the cover part. Notice that the part moves with your cursor, and the part remains at whatever location you release the mouse. Click in the following image to play an animation that shows dragging the cover part within the assembly. Previous (page 1210) | Next (page 1213)

1212 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

Grounded Parts
Now, attempt to drag the box part. This part does not move, and your cursor changes to the push-pin, grounded symbol. Autodesk Inventor always grounds the first part placed into an assembly to provide a fixed, foundational part to which you can constrain other parts. You can specify that any part is grounded or not grounded. You can also specify that the first part placed is not grounded. But the best practice is to select a strategic, foundational part for the first part placed, and then leave it grounded. Previous (page 1212) | Next (page 1213)

Constrain the Panel Part - Display Planes

As you become proficient with solid modeling, you learn that having your part geometry oriented relative to your file origin provides certain benefits during assembly. The supplied 2D DWG drawing was created so that the geometry is symmetrical about the sketch origin point when inserted into the Autodesk Inventor sketch The origin point is the X-Y 0, 0 coordinate. You take advantage of the origin planes of each part as you position the parts using assembly constraints. Display these planes now. 1 In the browser, expand the Panel part, and then expand the Origin folder nested under the Panel part. 2 Use the technique used earlier to Ctrl-click the YZ Plane and XZ Plane. Right-click the browser node for one of the planes, and select Visibility to display the planes in the graphics window. Click in the following image to play an animation that shows the results of displaying the panel origin planes. TIP As you proceed, your view angle of the assembly should approximate that of the previous image. Orbit the part as needed. 3 Right-click anywhere in the blank space of the graphics window. Ensure that you do not click on one of the parts. Then, select Constraint from the assembly marking menu. The Place Constraint dialog box activates. Previous (page 1213) | Next (page 1214)

Grounded Parts | 1213

Constrain the Panel Part - First Constraint

The Place Constraint command provides several different constraint types. The Mate constraint is selected by default when the command is activated and is suitable for all the constraints needed in this tutorial.

Any constraint type requires that you select geometry on two parts. In the next step, you place a mate constraint between the top face of the panel part and the inside back face of the box part. 1 Click in the following image to watch the animation, and then select the face of the panel, as shown. The selected face highlights and the direction indicator shows the constraint vector. 2 Click the following image to watch the next animation and then select the inside back face of the box part as shown. By default, Place Constraint previews the constraint automatically. It is only a preview and the constraint is not yet complete. 3 In the Offset field of the Place Constraint dialog box, change the default value to 1 in to move the panel 1 inch away from the inside back face. 4 To finalize the constraint, click Apply. The mate constraint is created and the panel is offset one inch from the back of the box. The Place Constraint command remains active and ready for the next constraint set. Previous (page 1213) | Next (page 1214)

Constrain the Panel Part - Second Constraint

The Mate constraint type is also needed for the next selection set; however, you use the Flush solution type to modify the constraint. The Flush solution points the constraint vectors of each selection in the same direction, rather than in opposition. 1 In the Solution field of the Place Constraint dialog box, click Flush.

1214 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

2 In the graphics window, select the YZ plane of the panel (click the following image to watch an animation of this selection). 3 Select the YZ plane of the assembly (click the following image to watch an animation of this selection). 4 Click Apply to create the constraint. NOTE In the constraint that you created, no physical geometry existed for either selection. It is important to consider the part and assembly origin geometry when creating your part models and when constraining them in assemblies. Parts should be created symmetrical about the origin when it makes sense. Otherwise a principal face should be coincident with one of the origin planes. Use care when selecting the first part placed into an assembly and its position relative to the assembly origin. Previous (page 1214) | Next (page 1215)

Constrain the Panel Part- Third Constraint

The panel needs one more constraint to finalize its position. In this next selection set, you select the XZ plane of the assembly and the XZ plane of the panel. 1 In the browser, select the XZ Plane, nested under the assembly origin folder. The plane highlights in the graphics window (click the following image to watch an animation of this selection). 2 In the browser, select the XZ Plane, nested under the origin folder for the panel part (click the following image to watch an animation of this selection). NOTE Since work features, such as workplanes, are abstract geometry and you are not selecting a specific face, you can select them in the browser. Note the direction vectors on each plane. If the direction vectors are pointing in the same direction, you can place a Flush constraint. However, in this case, the direction vectors are pointing towards each other so you must change the solution type to Mate before you apply the constraint.

Constrain the Panel Part- Third Constraint | 1215

3 Select Mate in the Solution field of the Place Constraint dialog box.

Click the following illustration to see how the constraint previews. 4 Click OK to create the constraint and close the dialog box. The panel is now fully positioned. Previous (page 1214) | Next (page 1216)

Constrain the Cover Part - Place Constraint

Finally, you constrain the cover part to the box. This process is nearly identical to the steps you took to constrain the panel part. 1 In the browser, expand the origin folder nested under the cover part. 2 Ctrl-click YZ Plane and XZ Plane, right-click the text for one of the planes, and then select Visibility.

1216 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

3 Press C on the keyboard to activate the Place Constraint dialog box. NOTE Using the keyboard is often a more comfortable method of invoking commands for users who are transitioning from AutoCAD. 4 Select the face of the box, as shown.

Constrain the Cover Part - Place Constraint | 1217

5 Select the inside face of the cover. Click the following illustration to see how the constraint previews. 6 Click Apply to create the constraint. The inside face of the cover is mated to the outside face of the box.

1218 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

Previous (page 1215) | Next (page 1219)

Constrain the Cover Part - Finish Placement

Next, you finish placement of the cover. 1 In the browser, select the YZ plane nested under the origin folder for the assembly. The plane highlights in the graphics window.

Constrain the Cover Part - Finish Placement | 1219

2 In the browser, select the YZ plane for the cover. 3 Click Apply.

1220 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

Previous (page 1216) | Next (page 1221)

Final Constraint - Mate or Flush?

Sometimes, when using origin planes to position a part, you know that your final constraint will need to be either a mate or a flush. It is important to observe the selection vector previews to determine if you want your arrows pointing towards each other (mate) or pointing in the same direction (flush). 1 In the browser, select the XZ plane in the origin folder for the assembly. Then, select the XZ plane in the origin folder for the cover. TIP When the expected preview of the constraint does not happen try reversing the constraint solution.

Final Constraint - Mate or Flush? | 1221

2 Click Flush in the Solution field of the Place Constraint dialog box. The constraint now previews (click the following illustration to see the preview). 3 Click OK to create the constraint and close the dialog box. The cover is fully positioned. Previous (page 1219) | Next (page 1222)

View the Assembly

1 To return the work planes to an invisible state, on the ribbon select View tab Visibility panel Object Visibility, and select All Workfeatures from the drop-down menu.

2 Save the assembly. When prompted to save ebox.iam and its dependents, click OK.

1222 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

3 Click the View Face command , located on the navigation toolbar, and then select the front face of the cover. It makes that face parallel with the screen. 4 Click View tab Appearance panel Visual Style, and select

Wireframe from the drop-down menu

NOTE Autodesk Inventor defaults to the Shaded display visual style. Wireframe, Wireframe with Hidden Edges and others are optional visual styles. 5 If you like, you can now compare this front view of the Autodesk Inventor assembly to the front view in the 2D drawing in the original DWG file. The geometry in the two files should be identical.

View the Assembly | 1223

Previous (page 1221) | Next (page 1224)

Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to: Build upon the skills you learned in the previous tutorials in this set by importing, using, and referring to DWG geometry in part sketches and part features.

Create a part within the context of an assembly. Insert parts into an assembly. Position parts in the assembly using assembly constraints. Use origin geometry to constrain parts in an assembly. Display and undisplay origin geometry to aid in the clarity of your assembly. Change the display of your assembly from shaded to wireframe display for optional visual inspection of part positions.

The next logical step in the workflow suggested by this set of tutorials would be to document your design with an Autodesk Inventor drawing. You can use the table of contents to the left to start the Drawings tutorial and learn how to prepare final drawings. These tutorials focused on using existing DWG geometry to build a set of three simple parts and to put them together in an assembly. To increase your general familiarity and comfort with Autodesk Inventor, you may find it useful to work through some, or all, of the other tutorials. To access the tutorials from the ribbon, select Get Started > Learn about Inventor > Tutorials.

1224 | Chapter 45 DWG Data 3

Previous (page 1222)

Summary | 1225

1226

Alias to Inventor

About this tutorial

Translate an Alias file to an Inventor part file and explore the association.
Category Time Required Tutorial File Used Data Exchange 20 minutes Keyboard.wire (original) Keyboard.ipt Keyboard.wire (revised)

1227

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets as instructed. In this tutorial, you open an Autodesk Alias wire file and translate it as an Inventor part (.ipt) file in Autodesk Inventor. You also reassociate an edited Alias wire file to create an updated Inventor part file. Envision an engineering environment in which a standard keyboard design was created as a surface model by an industrial designer using Alias. The Alias geometry is translated into Autodesk Inventor and becomes an Inventor part file (.ipt). Additional design enhancements are made to the keyboard part file using Autodesk Inventor modeling commands. Meanwhile, the industrial designer continues to modify the Alias design into a more organic, ergonomic shape. Because there is direct associativity between Alias and Autodesk Inventor, the part file is easily updated to reflect the new ergonomic design when the modifications to the Alias surface model are complete. Objectives Derive and exclude surfaces.

Import individual surfaces. Update surface associations. Open an Autodesk Alias wire file and translate it directly in Autodesk Inventor as an Inventor part (.ipt) file. Re-associate an edited Alias wire file to create an updated Inventor part file.

Prerequisites Have a basic understanding of the Derived Part functionality.

Know how to set the active project and navigate model space with the various viewing tools.

NOTE You do not need Alias to complete this tutorial. Navigation Tips Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return to the previous one. Next (page 1229)

1228 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor

Translate the Alias Wire File

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files. 2 Use the Open command to select Alias Files (*.wire) from the Files of type drop-down list. 3 Navigate to C:\Program Files\Audodesk\Inventor 2011\Tutorial Files\Keyboard\Original, and select Keyboard.wire from the file list. 4 Click Options to display the Alias Import Options dialog box. Make sure that the Associative Import radio button is active. 5 Click OK. 6 Next, click Open to open the Alias wire file. You may experience a slight delay as the wire file is translated directly into Autodesk Inventor and the Derived Alias dialog box displays.

Translate the Alias Wire File | 1229

Observe that four node names appear in the dialog box: Body, Keys, Logo, and Tools. The layer icon appears just to the left of the four node names because they represent the layer names of the surfaces which were in Alias.

1230 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor

The top three commands in the Status area at the top of the dialog box remain inactive until you select one of the nodes from the list. Use these commands to select the layer as a composite surface or all surfaces individually. You can also exclude some (or all) surfaces. Use the + command at the far left to derive all the surfaces as a composite surface. It is the default condition. A composite surface appears in yellow and can be stitched into a solid. Most of the Autodesk Inventor modeling commands, like Shell or Split, can then be performed on the stitched solid. Use the middle command \ to exclude selected surfaces from the yellow composite surface. Excluded surfaces appear translucent. Use the command at the far right to import objects as individual surfaces. Individual surfaces appear in blue. 7 Expand the Logo node to display the eight surfaces that comprise the letters of the Autodesk logo. Click the + command to the left of the logo name. Observe that the icon changes to \ indicating that all eight surfaces are excluded from the composite surface. The logo does not appear in the keyboard model.

Translate the Alias Wire File | 1231

8 Click OK to close the dialog box. The translated Alias file now appears in the graphics window as an Autodesk Inventor part file comprised entirely of surface features.

1232 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor

Take a moment now to examine the Model browser. The Keyboard.wire node represents the associative import of the Alias wire file. Expanding the Keyboard.wire node reveals the three composite surface features (Keys, Tools, and Body) that were translated into Autodesk Inventor. The composite names match the native Alias layer names.

Translate the Alias Wire File | 1233

NOTE Observe that the Logo surfaces do not appear under the Keyboard.wire node because they were excluded previously in this procedure. 9 Close the file without saving it. Previous (page 1227) | Next (page 1234)

Update the Inventor Part

1 Use the Open command to select Autodesk Inventor Files (*.iam, *.idw, *.dwg, *.ipt, *.ipn) from the Files of type drop-down list. 2 Go up one folder level to C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor 2011\Tutorial Files\Keyboard, and select Keyboard.ipt from the file list. Click Open to open the part file. 3 The completed keyboard part file appears in the graphics window. Rotate the part to view the features.

1234 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor

The Model browser lists the operations that were performed on the part file after it was translated into Autodesk Inventor. Observe that the out-of-date icon appears in front of the Keyboard.wire node in the browser.

Update the Inventor Part | 1235

This icon indicates that the original Alias wire file was edited since it was initially translated into Autodesk Inventor. Now the Autodesk Inventor part file is no longer in sync.

4 Click Update on the Quick Access toolbar to load the newer version of the Alias file. After a short delay as the wire file loads, the Update Part Document dialog box displays several error messages. Several features that existed in the original Alias wire file are now missing from the revised Alias wire file. 5 Click Accept to close the Update Part Document dialog box.

1236 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor

The Keyboard.wire node appears in a red font in the Model browser indicating that the Alias wire file and the Autodesk Inventor part file are no longer associated correctly.

6 Right-click the Keyboard.wire node in the Model browser, and select Update Associations from the pop-up context menu. There is a delay while the data is translated. When complete, the Update Associations dialog box appears. NOTE Two translucent views now appear in the graphics window. The view on the left contains the information that is in the wire file. The view on the right shows the updated information in Autodesk Inventor.

Update the Inventor Part | 1237

The Tools layer name appears in the drop-down list at the top of the Update Associations dialog box.

The dialog box has two lists and a color legend that appears below the two lists. Do not be alarmed if the colors in the color legend differ slightly from the colors that appear on your screen. It is because the color legend is based on the Autodesk Inventor color scheme in use.

1238 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor

The list at the left displays the surface names from Alias. The corresponding Autodesk Inventor surface names appear on the right. From left to right, the four status buttons at the bottom are labeled Matched, Orphaned, Updated, and Deleted. Observe from the Keyboard Part File list on the right that surfaces Cavity_3_Bottom and Cavity_3_Sides are orphaned. The two surfaces no longer exist in the Autodesk Inventor part file after the original Alias wire file was edited. Orphaned surface names always appear at the top of the list on the right. These surfaces must be deleted. NOTE There are several ways that you can delete these two surfaces. You can select them individually, or you can hold the Ctrl key and pick them both. Once the surfaces are selected, click the X at the top right of the dialog box to delete. Alternatively, you can right-click and select Delete from the context menu when the surface names are highlighted. 7 Delete Cavity_3_Bottom and Cavity_3_Sides from the Part File list on the right. The deleted surface names now appear in a different color in the list. You can observe the identical color change in the graphics window. 8 Next, select the Body layer from the layer name drop-down list at the top of the dialog box.

Update the Inventor Part | 1239

Observe that four surfaces from the Alias Body layer are orphaned. In this instance, the surfaces still exist in the two models but they have changed significantly and must be matched. 9 To match the orphaned surfaces, select Body_Fillet_A from the Body Import File list on the left. Then, select Body_Fillet_A from the Body Part File list on the right. Now click the Match command = located just to the right of the layer drop-down list. NOTE You can also match the two surfaces by right-clicking and selecting Match from the context menu when the surface names are highlighted. The two surface names in the file lists change color and also appear in this same color in the graphics window. 10 Repeat the matching process with Body_Fillet_B and the other two surfaces. Make sure to select = (the Match command) after each pair of surface names are selected from the lists. 11 After all four surfaces are matched, click OK to exit the Update Associations dialog box. There is a slight delay as the associations between the surfaces are updated. When complete, the Autodesk Inventor part file appears in the graphics window reflecting the changes that were made in the edited Alias wire file.

1240 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor

The Update Associations dialog box also appears stating that Stitch Surface4 cannot be built. This error message appears because the two surfaces that were used to create Stitch Surface4 (Cavity_3_Bottom and Cavity_3_Sides) were deleted. 12 Click Accept to close the Update Associations dialog box. 13 Expand the Sculpt1 node in the Model browser and observe the icon next to Stitch Surface4.

Update the Inventor Part | 1241

14 Although not necessary, you can right-click over this node and select Delete from the pop-up context menu if you want to remove it from the Model browser. To remove the icon next to the Sculpt1 node, right-click over Sculpt1 and select Edit Feature from the pop-up context menu. When the Sculpt dialog box appears, click OK to close the dialog box and rebuild the Sculpt feature. 15 As an optional step, move the End of Part marker above Move Body3 in the Model browser to view the revised keyboard in an unexploded representation.

16 Do not save Keyboard.ipt. Previous (page 1229) | Next (page 1242)

Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to open and translate an Alias wire file directly into Autodesk Inventor. Procedures to update the part file after changes are made to the Alias file were also provided to illustrate the associativity between Alias wire files and Autodesk Inventor part files. Some key points of this exercise include: Deriving and excluding surfaces

Deleting orphaned surfaces Matching one surface to another

1242 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor

Deleting a stitched surface Rebuilding a sculpted feature

Previous (page 1234)

Summary | 1243

1244

Index
A
animations tutorials

N
630, 636 navigating SteeringWheels ViewCube 20 20

B
bearings tutorials 878 bolted connections tutorials 784

P
parameters tutorials 370 Positional representations tutorials 636 projects tutorials 2

C
compression springs tutorials 906 constraints tutorials 36 Content Center tutorials 332, 502

S
shafts tutorials 820 sheet metal tutorials 951 Skeletal Modeling (top-down design) 650 sketch constraints tutorials 36 sketches constraints 36 spur gears tutorials 846 SteeringWheels 20 substitutions Level of Detail representations

D
disc cams tutorials 892

F
Frame Generator tutorials 1076

I
Inventor Studio tutorials 630, 636

537

T
Top-Down Design 650 tutorials animation 630 bearings 878

L
Level of Detail representations tutorials 537

1245 | Index

bolted connections 784 compression springs 906 Content Center 332, 502 disc cams 892 Frame Generator 1076 Inventor Studio 630 Level of Detail representations 537 parameters 370 positional representations 636 projects 2 shafts 820 sheet metal parts 951

skeletal modeling 650 sketch constraints 36 spur gears 846 SteeringWheels and ViewCube V-belts 864

V
V-belts tutorials 864 ViewCube 20

1246 | Index

STA Captain - S Log Solo RPG (TNG Cover) v1.41
100% (21)
STA Captain - S Log Solo RPG (TNG Cover) v1.41
336 pages
How To Root Any BLU Mobile Device Using Magisk (No TWRP Required)
67% (3)
How To Root Any BLU Mobile Device Using Magisk (No TWRP Required)
14 pages
Dodge Ram 1500 2009 Workshop Service Repair Manual PDF Download
0% (5)
Dodge Ram 1500 2009 Workshop Service Repair Manual PDF Download
2 pages
Car Keys Manual Programming Book
90% (10)
Car Keys Manual Programming Book
12 pages
Advanced Practice Nursing Essentials For Role Development 4e PDF
100% (6)
Advanced Practice Nursing Essentials For Role Development 4e PDF
531 pages
Harbor Freight Cen-Tech CAN OBD II Code Reader EOBD Scanner 98614
75% (8)
Harbor Freight Cen-Tech CAN OBD II Code Reader EOBD Scanner 98614
73 pages
Inventor 2022 Ilogic
No ratings yet
Inventor 2022 Ilogic
26 pages
Harley-Davidson Manuals OEM Numbers PDF
50% (6)
Harley-Davidson Manuals OEM Numbers PDF
30 pages
Hvac Exam Sample
100% (2)
Hvac Exam Sample
44 pages
Autodesk Inventor 2020: A Power Guide for Beginners and Intermediate Users
From Everand
Autodesk Inventor 2020: A Power Guide for Beginners and Intermediate Users
Sandeep Dogra
No ratings yet
20 Effective ChatGPT Prompts
100% (6)
20 Effective ChatGPT Prompts
10 pages
OceanofPDF - Com How To Draw Cool Stuff Shading Textures - Catherine V Holmes
100% (5)
OceanofPDF - Com How To Draw Cool Stuff Shading Textures - Catherine V Holmes
294 pages
SolidWorks Essentials Ver. 2011
75% (4)
SolidWorks Essentials Ver. 2011
507 pages
Peterbilt Model 389 Operators Manual
100% (1)
Peterbilt Model 389 Operators Manual
146 pages
The Anarchist's Tool Chest
100% (2)
The Anarchist's Tool Chest
493 pages
SolidWorks 2022 Black Book
From Everand
SolidWorks 2022 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
No ratings yet
Autodesk Inventor Fea Analysis Tutorial
100% (3)
Autodesk Inventor Fea Analysis Tutorial
24 pages
Basics of Autodesk Inventor Nastran 2021
From Everand
Basics of Autodesk Inventor Nastran 2021
Gaurav Verma
5/5 (1)
Ase Study Guide - Parts Specialist (P2)
No ratings yet
Ase Study Guide - Parts Specialist (P2)
23 pages
DPA Part 107 Cheat Sheet
100% (6)
DPA Part 107 Cheat Sheet
35 pages
Autodesk Inventor Practice Part Drawings
93% (29)
Autodesk Inventor Practice Part Drawings
25 pages
Solidworks Simulation Training Chapter 3
86% (14)
Solidworks Simulation Training Chapter 3
146 pages
Autodesk Inventor 2021 Black Book
From Everand
Autodesk Inventor 2021 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
5/5 (2)
Autodesk Inventor 2022 Black Book
From Everand
Autodesk Inventor 2022 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
No ratings yet
SolidWorks 2021 Step-By-Step Guide: 4, #4
From Everand
SolidWorks 2021 Step-By-Step Guide: 4, #4
Amit Bhatt
No ratings yet
SolidWorks Surfacing and Complex Shape Modeling Bible
From Everand
SolidWorks Surfacing and Complex Shape Modeling Bible
Matt Lombard
No ratings yet
Bella Sloan Secret Credit Union List
100% (4)
Bella Sloan Secret Credit Union List
5 pages
Hodgson J - Attack 1
100% (5)
Hodgson J - Attack 1
128 pages
Roman Daniel Viorel
No ratings yet
Roman Daniel Viorel
3 pages
Configuring Creo Parametric
100% (1)
Configuring Creo Parametric
21 pages
Mastering Solidworks Parspajouhaan
91% (11)
Mastering Solidworks Parspajouhaan
552 pages
SolidWorks 2012 Drawings
No ratings yet
SolidWorks 2012 Drawings
224 pages
PowerMill PDF
No ratings yet
PowerMill PDF
1,176 pages
Ilogic TOC
0% (1)
Ilogic TOC
6 pages
Autodesk Inventor 2019 Basics Tutorial
From Everand
Autodesk Inventor 2019 Basics Tutorial
Tutorial Books
4.5/5 (3)
SolidWorks Flow Simulation 2020 Black Book
From Everand
SolidWorks Flow Simulation 2020 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
5/5 (2)
SolidWorks Simulation 2022 Black Book
From Everand
SolidWorks Simulation 2022 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
No ratings yet
SolidWorks Workbook 2022
From Everand
SolidWorks Workbook 2022
Gaurav Verma
No ratings yet
Setting Up Your Shots
100% (22)
Setting Up Your Shots
33 pages
Bridge Cheat Sheet
100% (1)
Bridge Cheat Sheet
3 pages
TM Unifi BIZ - BI - Service Guide - v3.1 PDF
No ratings yet
TM Unifi BIZ - BI - Service Guide - v3.1 PDF
30 pages
WW 2.1 - Compare and Contrast (Literary Genres)
62% (13)
WW 2.1 - Compare and Contrast (Literary Genres)
3 pages
Autodesk Inventor Intermediate Level - English
No ratings yet
Autodesk Inventor Intermediate Level - English
211 pages
Autodesk Inventor - Skill Builder - 3D Grips
No ratings yet
Autodesk Inventor - Skill Builder - 3D Grips
12 pages
Stress Analysis INVENTOR
71% (7)
Stress Analysis INVENTOR
266 pages
Inventor
60% (5)
Inventor
103 pages
Autodesk Inventor Programming in C++
100% (1)
Autodesk Inventor Programming in C++
273 pages
VBA INVENTOR Vba Inventor
No ratings yet
VBA INVENTOR Vba Inventor
36 pages
API Solidworks
100% (1)
API Solidworks
23 pages
Autodesk Tube An Pipe Aplications 1
No ratings yet
Autodesk Tube An Pipe Aplications 1
7 pages
SolidWorks For Sheet Metal
100% (2)
SolidWorks For Sheet Metal
15 pages
Inventor 2016 iLogic-EVAL PDF
No ratings yet
Inventor 2016 iLogic-EVAL PDF
28 pages
Autodesk Inventor, Shortcut Key Guide
100% (2)
Autodesk Inventor, Shortcut Key Guide
14 pages
Drawing Automation Hand Out
No ratings yet
Drawing Automation Hand Out
52 pages
NX Expressions: Create An Expression
0% (1)
NX Expressions: Create An Expression
27 pages
SolidWorks Simulation Student Guide 2010 ENG (PDF Library)
No ratings yet
SolidWorks Simulation Student Guide 2010 ENG (PDF Library)
44 pages
Inventor Exam Preparation Guide
0% (1)
Inventor Exam Preparation Guide
10 pages
Autodesk Inventor Exercises - Learn by Practicing Design 100 Real-World 3D Models by Practicing (Sandeep Dogra) (Z-Library)
No ratings yet
Autodesk Inventor Exercises - Learn by Practicing Design 100 Real-World 3D Models by Practicing (Sandeep Dogra) (Z-Library)
136 pages
Autodesk Inventor 2016 for Designers
From Everand
Autodesk Inventor 2016 for Designers
Prof. Sham Tickoo
5/5 (4)
Solidworks Similation
100% (1)
Solidworks Similation
447 pages
Customizing SolidWorks For Greater Productivity
100% (4)
Customizing SolidWorks For Greater Productivity
166 pages
Inventor API Intro Iproperties
No ratings yet
Inventor API Intro Iproperties
18 pages
Technology Database Tutorial
100% (1)
Technology Database Tutorial
97 pages
Solidworks Notes
100% (2)
Solidworks Notes
98 pages
Engineering Design in Autodesk Inventоr Guide to Working in Autodesk Inventor Nodrm
No ratings yet
Engineering Design in Autodesk Inventоr Guide to Working in Autodesk Inventor Nodrm
119 pages
Become An FEA Expert, SolidWorks Simulation
No ratings yet
Become An FEA Expert, SolidWorks Simulation
33 pages
Autodesk Nastran In-CAD PDF
0% (1)
Autodesk Nastran In-CAD PDF
43 pages
SolidWorks Flow Simulation 2012
50% (2)
SolidWorks Flow Simulation 2012
90 pages
PDM PDMWorks Draft
100% (1)
PDM PDMWorks Draft
320 pages
SOLIDWORKS
100% (3)
SOLIDWORKS
341 pages
Autodesk Inventor Ilogic Basic Tutorial
100% (2)
Autodesk Inventor Ilogic Basic Tutorial
33 pages
Autodesk Inventor | Step by Step
From Everand
Autodesk Inventor | Step by Step
M.Eng. Johannes Wild
No ratings yet
Solid Edge 2019 Basics and Beyond
From Everand
Solid Edge 2019 Basics and Beyond
Online Instructor
5/5 (1)
SOLIDWORKS 2017 Learn by doing - Part 3
From Everand
SOLIDWORKS 2017 Learn by doing - Part 3
Tutorial Books
No ratings yet
Solidworks 2018 Learn by Doing - Part 3: DimXpert and Rendering
From Everand
Solidworks 2018 Learn by Doing - Part 3: DimXpert and Rendering
Tutorial Books
No ratings yet
Autodesk Inventor 2019 For Beginners - Part 1 (Part Modeling)
From Everand
Autodesk Inventor 2019 For Beginners - Part 1 (Part Modeling)
Tutorial Books
No ratings yet
SolidWorks Simulation 2020 Black Book
From Everand
SolidWorks Simulation 2020 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
5/5 (3)
SOLIDWORKS Simulation 2018: A Tutorial Approach
From Everand
SOLIDWORKS Simulation 2018: A Tutorial Approach
Prof. Sham Tickoo
No ratings yet
SolidWorks 2018 Black Book
From Everand
SolidWorks 2018 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
5/5 (1)
SolidWorks CAM 2024 Black Book
From Everand
SolidWorks CAM 2024 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
5/5 (1)
SOLIDWORKS 2017 Learn by doing - Part 1
From Everand
SOLIDWORKS 2017 Learn by doing - Part 1
Tutorial Books
5/5 (2)
Practical Projects For Self-Sufficiency - DIY Projects To Get Your Self-Reliant Lifestyle Started PDF
88% (16)
Practical Projects For Self-Sufficiency - DIY Projects To Get Your Self-Reliant Lifestyle Started PDF
163 pages
Kartbuilding Blog: Archive For The 'Chassis Design' Category
No ratings yet
Kartbuilding Blog: Archive For The 'Chassis Design' Category
9 pages
Caterpillar Cat D6T TRACK-TYPE TRACTOR (Prefix ZEB) Service Repair Manual Instant Download
0% (1)
Caterpillar Cat D6T TRACK-TYPE TRACTOR (Prefix ZEB) Service Repair Manual Instant Download
37 pages
4x4 Tech Knowledge
100% (1)
4x4 Tech Knowledge
369 pages
2001-2003 4L60-E Transmission Overhaul
75% (8)
2001-2003 4L60-E Transmission Overhaul
104 pages
Quantum Energy Generator (QEG) - REVISED Manual Edition (March 2015)
100% (6)
Quantum Energy Generator (QEG) - REVISED Manual Edition (March 2015)
75 pages
Software Engineering from the NATO Science Committee in 1968
100% (1)
Software Engineering from the NATO Science Committee in 1968
136 pages
Ecm Installation and Relearn
No ratings yet
Ecm Installation and Relearn
4 pages
Learn Balloon Twisting From Scratch
100% (2)
Learn Balloon Twisting From Scratch
79 pages
QSB4.5 CM2350 B106-Rev2
100% (1)
QSB4.5 CM2350 B106-Rev2
181 pages
Performance Catalog 010616 Re
100% (1)
Performance Catalog 010616 Re
17 pages
Variable Valve Timing and Lifting Technologies in Different Automobiles Companies
No ratings yet
Variable Valve Timing and Lifting Technologies in Different Automobiles Companies
5 pages
Safety - Crane-Safety-Workshop-Iimp
No ratings yet
Safety - Crane-Safety-Workshop-Iimp
212 pages
17 Top10 NEC Changes
100% (1)
17 Top10 NEC Changes
58 pages
Airindia ticket.ETicket (1)
No ratings yet
Airindia ticket.ETicket (1)
2 pages
Sheet Music Available (P67)
0% (2)
Sheet Music Available (P67)
4 pages
SOPHIE+--+GENDER,+SEXUALITY,+AND+THE+BODY
No ratings yet
SOPHIE+--+GENDER,+SEXUALITY,+AND+THE+BODY
67 pages
Kitchen Equipment Use and Care
100% (1)
Kitchen Equipment Use and Care
25 pages
Panasonic NN-S251WM Microwave
No ratings yet
Panasonic NN-S251WM Microwave
30 pages
Tear Sheet Armchair Complete Item Sofa
No ratings yet
Tear Sheet Armchair Complete Item Sofa
2 pages
Untitled
No ratings yet
Untitled
3 pages
Qa Op01
No ratings yet
Qa Op01
5 pages
The Bear 2x02
No ratings yet
The Bear 2x02
34 pages
The Orthodox Old Testament Greek-Based Name Conventional English Name Law
No ratings yet
The Orthodox Old Testament Greek-Based Name Conventional English Name Law
5 pages
FY Bpth Summer 2023 (1)
No ratings yet
FY Bpth Summer 2023 (1)
11 pages
2022 Jeep Grand Cherokee WL Catalog
No ratings yet
2022 Jeep Grand Cherokee WL Catalog
58 pages
Đáp Án Unit 10 - Intermediate
No ratings yet
Đáp Án Unit 10 - Intermediate
17 pages
Neoclassic and Romantic
No ratings yet
Neoclassic and Romantic
6 pages
Feelings Bingo PDF
100% (1)
Feelings Bingo PDF
7 pages
A-Void-Dance
No ratings yet
A-Void-Dance
315 pages
Computer
No ratings yet
Computer
4 pages
Chronicle Books - Fall 2022 Catalogue
No ratings yet
Chronicle Books - Fall 2022 Catalogue
179 pages
KeywordsCloud Discover Keywords For Free
No ratings yet
KeywordsCloud Discover Keywords For Free
7 pages
2010 Toronto Star High School Basketball All-Stars
No ratings yet
2010 Toronto Star High School Basketball All-Stars
1 page
Italy
No ratings yet
Italy
2 pages
P6 EPPM With OPC
No ratings yet
P6 EPPM With OPC
3 pages
The Indian Premier League
No ratings yet
The Indian Premier League
12 pages
Animal Restaurant
No ratings yet
Animal Restaurant
5 pages
Flyers Speaking Test
No ratings yet
Flyers Speaking Test
4 pages